CEYLON ELECTRICITY BOARD SRI LANKA CLEAN ENERGY AND ACCESS IMPROVEMENT PROJECT

(ADB Loan No. 2518-SRI)

PART 1: SYSTEM CONTROL CENTRE MODERNISATION PROJECT
PACKAGE A – CONSTRUCTION OF NATIONAL SYSTEM CONTROL CENTRE AND INSTALLATION OF SCADA AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

Procurement of Plant
Design, Supply and Install
Single-Stage, Two-Envelope Bidding Procedure BIDDING DOCUMENT for
Establishment of: National System Control Centre and SCADA System

VOLUME 5 of 8
Part II- REQUIREMENTS
Section 6-Employer’s Requirements Part B-Technical Specification

Issued on: February 2011 Invitation for Bids No: CEB/AGM/TR/2010/IFB/010 ICB No.: CEB/AGM/TR/2010/ICB/010 Employer: Ceylon Electricity Board Country: Sri Lanka © Transmission Design Branch, CEB

Transmission Division Ceylon Electricity Board, P.O. Box 540, Colombo 2 Sri Lanka February 2011 Document-Revision 1

Contents - Summary Description
VOLUME 1 of 8 PART I BIDDING PROCEDURES
Section 1 - Instructions to Bidders (ITB) ------------------------------------------------ 1-1
This section specifies the course of actions to be taken by Bidders in the preparation and submission of their Bids following a Single-Stage, Two-envelop bidding procedure. Information is also provided on the submission, opening, and evaluation of bids and on the award of contract.

Section 2 - Bid Data Sheet (BDS) --------------------------------------------------------- 2-1
This section consists of provisions that are specific to each procurement and supplement the information or requirements included in Section 1 - Instructions to Bidders.

Section 3 - Evaluation and Qualification Criteria (EQC) -------------------------- 3-1
This section contains all the criteria that the Employer shall use to evaluate bids and qualify Bidders. In accordance with section 1-E (ITB 28-41), no other factors, methods or criteria shall be used. The Bidder shall provide all the information requested in the forms included in Section 4 (Bidding Forms).

VOLUME 2 OF 8 PART I BIDDING PROCEDURES
Section 4 - Bidding Forms (BDF) -------------------------------------------------------- 4A-1
Part A-Price Bid This Section contains the forms which are to be completed by the Bidder and submitted as part of his Bid.

VOLUME 3 OF 8 PART I BIDDING PROCEDURES
Section 4 - Bidding Forms (BDF) -------------------------------------------------------- 4B-1
Part B-Technical Bid This Section contains the forms which are to be completed by the Bidder and submitted as part of his Bid.

Section 5 - Eligible Countries (ELC) ----------------------------------------------------- 5-1
This section contains the list of eligible countries.

VOLUME 4 OF 8 PART II REQUIREMENTS
Section 6 - Employer’s Requirements (ERQ) ---------------------------------------- 6A-1
Part A-Scope of Works

VOLUME 5 OF 8 PART II REQUIREMENTS
Section 6 - Employer’s Requirements (ERQ) --------------------------------------- 6B-1
Part B-Technical Specification

VOLUME 6 OF 8 PART II REQUIREMENTS
Section 6 - Employer’s Requirements (ERQ) --------------------------------------- 6C-1
Part C-Drawings

VOLUME 7 OF 8 PART II REQUIREMENTS
Section 6 - Employer’s Requirements (ERQ) --------------------------------------- 6D-1
Part D-Supplementary Information,

Section 6 - Employer’s Requirements (ERQ) --------------------------------------- 6E-1
Part E-Bank Guarantees, Certificates and Change Orders

VOLUME 8 OF 8 PART III CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND CONTRACT FORMS
Section 7 - General Conditions of Contract (GCC) ---------------------------------- 7-1
This Section contains the general clauses to be applied in all contracts. These Conditions are subject to the variations and additions set out in Section 8 (Special Conditions of Contract).

Section 8 - Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) ----------------------------------- 8-1
This Section supplements the General Conditions of Contract (GCC). Whenever there is a conflict, the provisions herein shall prevail over those in the GCC. The clause number of the SCC is the corresponding clause number of the GCC.

Section 9 - Contract Forms (COF) --------------------------------------------------------- 9-1
This Section contains the Letter of Acceptance, the Contract Agreement and Appendices to the Contract Agreement which, once completed, will form part of the Contract.

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications

PART B – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS – SCADA/EMS, TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM, OUTSTATIONS, POWER SUPPLY AND NSCC BUILDING

CONTENTS CHAPTER No. 1. TITLE PAGE No.

INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................... 24 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 SCADA/EMS MASTER STATION .................................................................................. 24 TELECOMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE ........................................................... 25 OUTSTATIONS AND SUBSTATION ADAPTATION WORKS ....................................... 26 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM ........................................................ 30 NSCC BUILDING ............................................................................................................ 31 CONTRACTUAL AND PHYSICAL BOUNDARIES OF SUPPLY ................................... 31 1.6.1 SCADA/EMS System ...................................................................................... 31 1.6.2 Telecommunication System ............................................................................ 32 1.6.3 Outstation and Substation Adaptation Works ................................................. 32 1.6.4 Colombo City Distribution Control Centre ....................................................... 33 1.6.5 Uninterruptible Power Supply System ............................................................. 33 1.6.6 NSCC Building................................................................................................. 33 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR MANUFACTURES OF PRODUCTS ...................... 34

1.7 2.

NSCC SCADA/EMS ................................................................................................................. 35 2.1 2.2 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 35 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 35 2.2.1 General ............................................................................................................ 35 2.2.2 System Architecture ........................................................................................ 35 2.2.3 Initial and Ultimate Sizing ................................................................................ 36 2.2.4 Reliability and Availability ................................................................................ 36 2.2.5 Risks ................................................................................................................ 36 SCADA APPLICATIONS ................................................................................................ 37 2.3.1 Communication................................................................................................ 37 2.3.1.1 Data Acquisition........................................................................................ 37 2.3.1.2 ICCP Data Links ....................................................................................... 37 2.3.2 Data Processing .............................................................................................. 37 2.3.2.1 Measured Values...................................................................................... 38 2.3.2.2 Status Indications - Digital Points ............................................................. 39 2.3.2.3 Derived Data ............................................................................................. 40 2.3.2.4 Meter Values ............................................................................................ 41 2.3.2.5 Tap Position .............................................................................................. 41 2.3.2.6 Data Quality Attributes ............................................................................. 41 2.3.2.7 Controls .................................................................................................... 42 2.3.3 Alarm and Event Processing ........................................................................... 43 2.3.3.1 Definition ................................................................................................... 43 2.3.3.2 Event Handling ......................................................................................... 43 2.3.3.3 Alarm Management .................................................................................. 44 2.3.3.4 Printing of Alarm & Event Lists ................................................................. 46 2.3.3.5 Sequence of Events Processing .............................................................. 46 2.3.3.6 Disturbance Monitoring ............................................................................ 46

2.3

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 1 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications

2.3.4 Graphic User Interface (GUI) .......................................................................... 46 2.3.4.1 General ..................................................................................................... 46 2.3.4.2 Access Control ......................................................................................... 46 2.3.4.3 Displays .................................................................................................... 47 2.3.4.4 Supervisory Control .................................................................................. 49 2.3.4.5 Sequence Control ..................................................................................... 51 2.3.4.6 Set Point Control ...................................................................................... 51 2.3.4.7 Manual Dressing....................................................................................... 51 2.3.4.8 Trending ................................................................................................... 52 2.3.4.9 Diagram Tagging ...................................................................................... 52 2.3.4.10 Printing ..................................................................................................... 53 2.4 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM .............................................................................. 54 2.4.1 General Introduction ........................................................................................ 54 2.4.2 Transmission/Generation Network .................................................................. 54 2.4.3 EMS Database ................................................................................................ 55 2.4.4 Real-Time Network Analysis ........................................................................... 55 2.4.4.1 General Requirements ............................................................................. 55 2.4.4.2 Network Topology..................................................................................... 56 2.4.4.3 State Estimation ....................................................................................... 57 2.4.4.4 External Network Modelling and State Calculation .................................. 58 2.4.4.5 Security Assessment ................................................................................ 58 2.4.4.6 Bus Load Forecast ................................................................................... 59 2.4.4.7 Loss Penalty Factors ................................................................................ 59 2.4.4.8 Optimal Power Flow ................................................................................. 59 2.4.4.9 Save cases ............................................................................................... 60 2.4.5 Real-Time Short Circuit Calculation ................................................................ 60 2.4.6 Study Mode Network Analysis ......................................................................... 60 2.4.7 Generating Plant Scheduling ........................................................................... 61 2.4.7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 61 2.4.7.2 Plant Scheduling Input Data ..................................................................... 62 2.4.7.3 Plant Scheduling Outputs ......................................................................... 63 2.4.7.4 Generation Scheduling Operating Modes ................................................ 63 2.4.7.5 Reserve and Plant Monitoring .................................................................. 63 2.4.8 Demand Forecasting ....................................................................................... 64 2.4.8.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 64 2.4.8.2 Long-Term Demand Forecasts ................................................................ 64 2.4.8.3 Short-Term Demand Prediction Facility ................................................... 64 2.4.9 Economic Load Dispatching ............................................................................ 65 2.4.9.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 65 2.4.9.2 Computer Aided On-Line Load Dispatching ............................................. 65 2.4.9.3 Study Mode Load Dispatching ................................................................. 66 2.4.10 Reactive Power Scheduling ............................................................................ 66 2.4.10.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 66 2.4.10.2 Reactive Scheduler Input Data ................................................................. 66 2.4.10.3 Reactive Power Calculation ..................................................................... 67 2.4.10.4 Reactive Scheduler Outputs ..................................................................... 67 2.4.11 Automatic Control of Generating Plant ............................................................ 67 2.4.11.1 General Requirements ............................................................................. 67 2.4.11.2 Automatic Generation Control .................................................................. 67 2.4.12 SCADA/EMS System Interfaces with Power Stations ..................................... 68 2.4.12.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 68 2.4.12.2 Active and Reactive Power Dispatch Schedules ..................................... 68 2.4.12.3 Active and Reactive Power Set-Point Displays ........................................ 68 2.4.12.4 Active and Reactive Power Set-Point Control .......................................... 69 2.4.12.5 Embedded Generation Data ..................................................................... 69 OTHER APPLICATIONS ................................................................................................ 69 2.5.1 Switching Schedules ....................................................................................... 69 2.5.2 Job Management ............................................................................................. 69 2.5.3 Fault Detection, Location and Load Restoration (Option) ............................... 70 2.5.4 Expert System Assistance (Option) ................................................................. 70

2.5

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 2 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications

2.5.5 2.5.6 2.6 2.7

Under Frequency Load Shedding ................................................................... 70 Load Shedding Schedules .............................................................................. 70

HISTORICAL DATA ........................................................................................................ 70 REPORT GENERATION ................................................................................................ 71 2.7.1 Routine Reports............................................................................................... 71 2.7.2 Energy Reports ................................................................................................ 71 DATABASE MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................... 72 2.8.1 General ............................................................................................................ 72 2.8.2 Data Entry........................................................................................................ 73 2.8.3 Data Manipulation Function ............................................................................. 73 2.8.4 Graphic Display Construction .......................................................................... 73 2.8.4.1 Configuration Responsibilities .................................................................. 74 2.8.5 Changes to Configuration Data ....................................................................... 75 2.8.6 Change Control ............................................................................................... 75 DATA EXCHANGE FACILITIES ..................................................................................... 75

2.8

2.9

2.10 OPERATOR TRAINING SIMULATOR ........................................................................... 75 2.10.1 Objectives ........................................................................................................ 75 2.10.2 Simulation Functions ....................................................................................... 76 2.10.3 Relay modelling ............................................................................................... 77 2.11 MASTER STATION HARDWARE .................................................................................. 78 2.11.1 Operating Systems .......................................................................................... 78 2.11.2 Antivirus Software............................................................................................ 78 2.11.3 Servers ............................................................................................................ 78 2.11.4 Data Acquisition Servers ................................................................................. 78 2.11.5 Operator Workstations .................................................................................... 79 2.11.6 Local Area Network (LAN) ............................................................................... 79 2.11.6.1 Ethernet switches ..................................................................................... 79 2.11.6.2 Routers ..................................................................................................... 79 2.11.6.3 LAN Management..................................................................................... 80 2.11.7 Printers ............................................................................................................ 80 2.11.7.1 General ..................................................................................................... 80 2.11.7.2 Laser Printers ........................................................................................... 80 2.11.7.3 Colour Printers .......................................................................................... 80 2.11.8 Video Wall ....................................................................................................... 80 2.11.8.1 Display Units ............................................................................................. 81 2.11.8.2 Controllers ................................................................................................ 81 2.11.8.3 Video Wall Construction ........................................................................... 81 2.11.8.4 Software ................................................................................................... 81 2.11.8.5 Management............................................................................................. 82 2.11.9 System Time.................................................................................................... 82 2.11.10 System Displays .............................................................................................. 82 2.12 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................ 82 2.12.1 Normal Activity Conditions .............................................................................. 82 2.12.2 High Activity Conditions ................................................................................... 83 2.12.3 Computer Start Up........................................................................................... 83 2.12.4 Transfer of Operation ...................................................................................... 83 2.12.5 System Response Times ................................................................................ 83 2.13 CONTROL CENTRE FURNITURE................................................................................. 84 2.13.1 Operator Desks ............................................................................................... 84 2.13.2 Operator Chairs ............................................................................................... 85 2.13.3 Equipment Stands ........................................................................................... 85 2.13.4 Office Furniture ................................................................................................ 85

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 3 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications

3.

TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM .......................................................................................... 86 3.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 86 3.1.1 Specification and Design Criteria .................................................................... 86 3.1.2 Reference Documents and Standards ............................................................ 86 3.1.3 Site and Environmental Conditions ................................................................. 87 3.1.4 Existing Control and Telecommunication Facilities ......................................... 87 3.1.5 Implementation Programme ............................................................................ 88 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS.................................................. 88 3.2.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 88 3.2.2 Design and Operational Philosophy ................................................................ 89 3.2.3 Expansion and Upgrade Capability ................................................................. 90 3.2.4 Telecommunication Network ........................................................................... 90 3.2.4.1 Configuration and Topology ..................................................................... 90 3.2.4.2 Network Design ........................................................................................ 91 3.2.4.3 Network Protection ................................................................................... 91 3.2.4.4 Fibre Optic Links....................................................................................... 92 3.2.4.5 Upgrading of Existing PLC Links .............................................................. 97 3.2.4.6 Communication Facilities ......................................................................... 97 3.2.4.7 ICCP links between NSCC and Colombo City DCC ................................ 99 3.2.4.8 Communication Requirements at Power Stations / Substations .............. 99 3.2.5 Telecommunication Management System .................................................... 100 3.2.5.1 TMS Control Centre Equipment ............................................................. 101 3.2.5.2 Time Synchronisation ............................................................................. 101 3.2.6 Teleprotection Signalling Equipment ............................................................. 101 3.2.7 Telephone Network ....................................................................................... 102 3.2.7.1 Telephone Exchange Equipment ........................................................... 102 3.2.7.2 Voice Recording Equipment ................................................................... 102 3.2.8 Power Supply Requirements ......................................................................... 103 3.2.8.1 At NSCC ................................................................................................. 103 3.2.8.2 At Existing Substations and Power Stations .......................................... 103 3.2.8.3 At Employer‘s HQ Building ..................................................................... 103 3.2.9 Equipment Locations ..................................................................................... 103 3.2.10 Transition from Old to the New Telecommunication System ........................ 104 3.2.11 Interfaces with Other Systems/Equipment .................................................... 104 3.2.12 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ............................................................ 104 FIBRE OPTIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ............................................................... 106 3.3.1 General Requirements .................................................................................. 106 3.3.1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 106 3.3.2 Loss Budget Calculations .............................................................................. 106 3.3.3 Safety ............................................................................................................ 107 3.3.4 Functional Requirements .............................................................................. 107 3.3.4.1 General ................................................................................................... 107 3.3.4.2 System Capacity and Performance ........................................................ 107 3.3.4.3 Service Channels ................................................................................... 108 3.3.5 SDH Equipment ............................................................................................. 108 3.3.5.1 General ................................................................................................... 108 3.3.5.2 Optical Line Interface ............................................................................. 109 3.3.5.3 Electrical Line Interface .......................................................................... 109 3.3.5.4 Tributary Module..................................................................................... 110 3.3.5.5 Switching Unit ......................................................................................... 110 3.3.5.6 Control and Alarm Functions .................................................................. 110 3.3.5.7 Engineer Order Wire............................................................................... 111 3.3.5.8 Service Data Interface ............................................................................ 111 3.3.5.9 Power Supply Unit .................................................................................. 111 3.3.5.10 Centralized Function............................................................................... 111 3.3.6 Primary Access Multiplexing Equipment ....................................................... 111 3.3.6.1 General ................................................................................................... 111 3.3.6.2 Multiplexer .............................................................................................. 111 3.3.6.3 Alarm Indications .................................................................................... 112

3.2

3.3

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 4 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

..................1 Introduction ...... 125 3...5..4 TELECOMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ...........................................................................8............ 129 3..2 Central Computer System ......6.................7. 119 3.................................................... 128 3..1 Introduction ..............................................3 System Performance .........7....... 119 3............................2...........................................................................4..2 Functional requirements .....................6.....................................Section 6 ..........................1 General .................5.............................................................................................6....................................................10 Optical Fibre Distribution Frames / Patch Panels ............................................................... 124 3.............................5.........................6...8 Optical Regenerative Repeaters ....................... 119 3......................2......................................3.......3.............. 126 3....4..3.............2...... 124 3.......4.......................4.................................5..................2 Design Characteristics ....4 Automatic Gain Control .....4.........................................1.................................................................................4........... 124 3......................................................2 Functional Requirements .................................... 126 3...................4 User Interfaces ..2.......1 General ......... 116 3. 126 3... 122 3............3..............5..............4 Interfaces .......................................1 Introduction ....................... 117 3.........6............................3..........................5 Service Telephone.......5...........2................................. 116 3...................1 General Requirements ...........2........... 129 3.......................................3............................................................2 System Architecture and Design Concept ................ 121 3...................... 130 3.............1 General ..3....7..Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 3......................................................... 130 3................................. 114 3..........................2..........................................4. 130 3.............................4..............10 Power Supplies Requirements ...............................5 Interface with Other Systems/Equipment .......3....6 Test Facilities .... 130 3..2 Alarm indications ............................... 129 TELEPHONE SYSTEM ....................................................5 Alarms indications .......2 Carrier Frequency Allocation ......................................................................5................................... 115 3........................................................................2....... 129 3......................... 129 3.............................5... 128 3............................................... 124 3.... 117 3...................................................................4 Management Functions .....................................3............. 115 3..........................................5 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope 3..........2............ 116 3....................................................................1 General ... 126 3......................................................................................................3..............................4....................................... 130 3...............7...5....3........................5.....2 Safety 124 3............. 123 DIGITAL POWER LINE CARRIER SYSTEM ...........................................................2..................2.........................................3 Digital PLC Equipment .......7 Cross Connection Equipment .................... 132 Page 6B.3.....................3....3........................................9 Alarms .......5...................6.................7 User Interfaces ..................6.............. 114 3.........3............3.....1 General ...................................... 114 3.............. 112 3..2 Functional Requirements .......... 128 3................................4................................................2 Functional Requirements .......................4...................8 Monitoring ..........3.3...........................5...................................6................................. 117 3........5.............................................................3 Telecommunication Management System ................5.....4...............5...........4 Analogue and Digital Interfaces ..........6.................. 123 3...................................2.................................................3..........................5 3................7 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant .2...............3......................................3 Network Management Facilities ...................................... 130 3..........3.................... 123 3.............................2................1 General .............................. 124 3..................................... 125 3...5............4....................................................2 Chairs 123 3...... 114 3...6 3.....1 General ......... 126 3.............2........... 128 3.............. 124 3........................1 Introduction .........1 Control Desk ...................................3 Carrier Oscillators ..................................................4...............2 System Performance ...6 Power Supplies Requirements .....................................2 System Capacity..4......4 System Functions ..4 Telecommunication Management Centre Furniture ..................4................................................. 116 3..7................................... 125 3..............7..4.................................................................................... 126 TELEPROTECTION SIGNALLING EQUIPMENT ........ 131 3....................8.. 124 3................................. 124 3........................9 Power Supplies Requirements ............4.....7.................................3 Software ..2............2............1.....3 System Performance .................................................3 Stands ........5.....

........ 137 3........... 145 4..............7....6........................................................................... 146 4...........................5...............7......................................................................5.........................6 External Communications Interfaces............................. 144 4. 133 3.......... 132 3....... 150 4..1 Configuration Tools ....5 Response time....... 133 3....... 139 4.................................... 137 3................................................................... 133 3.7............3............ 149 4...1 Master Stations .....7..2 Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED) ...............................................3..........................................3.....4 Output .....................1 General ...........................................................................................................7...............................................................................................6 Digital Outputs ....7................3 Configuration and Maintenance ............................. 132 3..7 Analogue Outputs ............. 150 4.................................... 135 3...........5...............3 SPC Telephone Exchange Equipment ....................3............................3....... 145 4.....................................................................3................................11 Voice Recording Equipment ...3............................... 150 4.......................... 144 4... 137 3..........................................................................7.......................3..8.3..........7 Software .............................................7................................................4 4...2 Overloads ....................5 Command Outputs ................2 Database Management System ................ 147 4.......................7...............................3................................ 148 4..............................................................7.........9 Hardware .................1 Initial Equipping of Outstations ................................3 INTRODUCTION .................3... 150 4...................................5 Telephone Numbering Plan ..3...................................................... 139 OUTSTATIONS .... 146 4...............................3.......7............................9 Telephone Handsets ................3............3 Burden ...............................8 Configuration and Maintenance ..3..........................5...........................7 Power supplies ........ 149 4..........................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 3................................ 147 4..................6 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ......................................... 146 4........................5 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.........6 Power supply ...............................1 4.........3.............................................................................................................................5.. 145 4......................................................................................1 General ..................3...................................7................................. 136 3...............3.......... 139 DESIGN OBJECTIVES ..............3......3..................5...........................1 General ............................................................................. 147 4................................................. 150 4............. 134 3.... 136 3....7.........................4 Extension Facilities ..................3......... 137 3.3................................................................3..................5........................................ 135 3................................................2 Time Synchronisation .2 4......................4 Pulse Counting ................6....5.......... 149 SCADA INTERFACE PANEL ....................................3 Analogue Inputs......................................................8 Maintenance .........................8......................3................. 148 4................................................................................................................ 148 4.............3..........................................5 Hardware Requirements ........10 Main Distribution Frame ...........5 Switching Capacity ..................Section 6 ..5........................ 148 4............7......3 Maintenance and Diagnostics Facilities ....3 Functional requirements ....7............................................... OUTSTATION AND SUBSTATION ADAPTATION WORKS .................6 Telephone Signalling ..........5.......................3....................................................................................................................1 General .........6...................3...................................................................... 148 4....................3............7.......................... 147 4...............................7....................3 System Facilities.................3.................................................................... 146 4........3.................3......... 138 4... 134 3..................................................2 Switching Facilities .......................................4 Synchronisation ............................... 148 4......................3.................................................................................... 149 POWER SYSTEM MEASUREMENT TRANSDUCERS ......3............... 139 4......3................3...................... 136 3.................................................. 147 4...... 144 4...............2 Digital Inputs ...................3.........................................5.................... 136 3..5......2 Expansion and Upgrade Capability ............................6 Transmission Performance .......5....... 139 4.....................................7...............4 Control Security ....................................................................8 Telephone System Management Console ..........................8..... 147 4.........................3 Communication Protocols ..7 Status Reporting and Call Detail Recording Facilities ..........

...................................................2............................................ 158 DIESEL GENERATOR ........3................ 162 5...............................................1 Alarms Annunciator ........ 153 5...3.................................3..................................20.....1 General ............................................................8 Fuel boost Pump ....2................................................................3.......................................................................................................23 Rotor ........................21 Generator ............................2.......................................................3...............3................................2............ 162 5.....4 Fuel ..................................................1........... 164 5.......... 156 5.................2...........................7 Fuel transfer Pump ........... POWER SUPPLIES .........4 Static by-pass switch ........2..................3 Type of Diesel Engine and Operating Conditions ............................ 152 5.............................1 General Requirements ....... 151 4.......................2...........................................................4 Engine/Generator Instrumentation ..........................................2 Converter components .............. 152 5.............................6...................................................................................................................................5 Bulk Fuel Storage ................ 160 5.......................... 153 5.......2..............3.......17 Safety Guards ........................................................... 161 5....1 Normal ..... 162 5..............3......... 157 5........................................ 152 5............................................................................... 161 5...............3................... 158 5.................................3............................................. 157 5................................2...................................................................5.........................2.............2.......................................................................................................3...................18 Silencers .............................................2...............15 Starting System ...................... 153 5....................3 Battery cells and containers .....................2.....................................................2....................................................................................7 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ..........20......................3...............................1 General ..............2 UPS Configuration ...........11 Set Mountings ................................................................................................................. 160 5......................1 Rectifier ...........2 Emergency Shut-down Relay .....2......................................................Section 6 ..... 160 5..................................................5....................... 163 5...Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 4............. 153 5...3 Inverter .................................7 5........................ 163 5.................................................. 153 5........................................................2........ 161 5......................................................................6........ 155 5......... 151 SAS GATEWAYS ..2.............. 153 5............3 Overload ...........3....3.......................................3........................... 159 5..............2 Control interposing relays .................3...........................2...........20 Engine/Generator Control Panel ................................... 161 5.............................................................................. 164 5........................................................................... 150 4......3.......3 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.............................. 156 5... 163 5.......................... 160 5...................................20.............1 Enclosures ....... 160 5.................................................................................. 156 5.. 151 4............................3......3............................4 Controls and Instrumentation ....2 GENERAL ............................................................12 Crankshaft ........................................3........................2 Main Supply Failure ...................................................2..........................1 5.................................5........................ 160 5......2 Design Requirements ................................13 Governor ......................3.....2...................................... 157 5...............2..............................................................2........................2 Battery and DC Circuit .............3 Engine/Generator Controls .........3..................................................................5 Noise limits .......... 152 5...........................10 Engine Lubrication .....................................................14 Engine Protection ......5....................................................2........19 Air Filters ........20..9 Fuel Oil Piping ..............................3 Performance ..................... 152 5.............................3................................................................ 164 5.......................2 Modes of Operation ..............1 Functional Requirements ............... 162 5.........................................................................3...............................................3.16 Cooling System ...........................................3.................................................................................. 162 5........ 153 5........................4 Distribution Board ...................................3............................. 158 5.....................................6 RELAYS .4 Static Bypass ................................... 165 5.......... 160 5..1......................................................... 158 5......................................... 161 5..3.......................... 152 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES .......................................................................6.....6 Daily Service Tank.................... 157 5.....3................... 155 5...................22 Stator .........3 Status indication repeat relays ................................3.......2...3........ 150 4............5 Construction Requirements .....................................................3.................

...........25 Ventilation .......Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 5.... 171 6...............1 Drawings ..................................................2.....................................................2.....................................4 Construction .............................5........14............6 6..... 165 5............................ 167 5...............................................................................14................................................3..................................................4............... 166 5..............................................14...................... 170 5..31.....3 6.....................................14. 172 EQUIPMENT ROOM ........3..................................................7 6......................................................... 169 5.............4..... 175 6.................. 171 ACCOMMODATION REQUIREMENTS ...............................................................5 48V DC Distribution Board ............................1 General Requirements .................................... 175 6..................................... 166 5............ 176 6.................................................................. 171 CONTROL ROOM .........................................................................................................................8 6...........................................................3 Alarm Indications ........ 174 DOCUMENTATION LIBRARY...4 6....31 Documentation ............................ 168 5.......................... 166 5........32 Inspection and Testing ............................................................... 176 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B...5 INTRODUCTION ...............................13 DOMESTIC QUARTERS ...........................3........3.......3.............................................................7 DC Supplies ............................................................3....................14...........................................................................4...27 Pulley Block ..............................................12 MEETING ROOM ............2 Instruction Manuals .......................... 175 6... 170 6....26 Voltage Regulation .................................................................................................................. 172 OFFICES FOR CONTROL CENTRE STAFF .2 6........................................................14.........3 Control and Instrumentation .....................................................Section 6 .......................................................................................... 173 STORAGE AND WORKSHOP FACILITIES ................ 173 6...................................3.........................................28 Alternative Generators ................1 General ....................... 165 5...................24 Exciters ......31...... 166 5.............................10 VISITORS' VIEWING AREA .......11 CONFERENCE ROOM .3............................................................ 166 5........................................................2 Battery and Charger Equipment ...........................1 General .. 167 5..4............................................................................................................................. 174 6...........................6 UPS Battery Room ..2............................................ 174 6................................ CONTROL CENTRE BUILDING REQUIREMENTS ..... 168 5...1..............................................1 Functional Requirements .......... 175 6....... 167 5.....................................................................4...................................................1................9 6.... 175 6.... 176 6....................................... 175 6............ 165 5..........1 6............ 167 5............... 174 TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK MANAGEMENT ROOM .... 166 5..................4..4................................................3.............3..............30 Tools and Spare Parts ............................................................................2.........................................................29 Parallel Running .................................... 168 5............................................. 176 6...........4 48 V DC POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS ......2......5 LV Distribution Panels ..................14.......3..........................1..........................4 Uninterruptible Power Supplies .......3 Diesel Generator Room/Enclosure........2 Battery Chargers ...............................................................................................................2 Control Centre LV In-feeds ................. 166 5........................................................................................................................14 POWER SUPPLIES ............. 166 5............................. 174 DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM AND TRAINING SIMULATOR ROOM .......................... 167 5......................................8 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant .......................................................2 System Capacity and Performance .....................4......4...............................................1 Batteries ........ 175 6..4.............................................

........................................ 184 8....8 Conduct of the Tests ..............................1 7....................1......16 FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM ..........................................................................3................................................................4 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.....3.4 Testing Stages ......................... 179 7..........14 Software Failure Reports .....4 Specific Test Requirements ..................................................1......... 178 7........................................ 189 8....................2............. 183 8........ 184 8.........1..................2 Communication System Availability .1........................... 178 7........................................... 183 8..............................9 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .................................................. 182 8.........4......................3 Test Equipment and Facilities ........1......... 179 VERIFICATION .. 177 6.....................................................3 8...... 177 7...............4..........19 LIGHTING ...... 186 8............................................3 Outstation Availability ..................2 8.....................................................................................................................................1................................................................................................2..................................5 Notice & Witnessing of Tests ........................................................................................................ 178 AVAILABILITY REQUIREMENTS ........................... 176 6...........................4..........2 System FAT .10 Fault Categories .............................3......1 Master Stations ................3 General FAT Requirements ..................................................4 Telecommunication ..... 181 8........................................................... 186 8...................................................................21 MAINTAINABILITY ..................................................20 MATERIALS ................... 182 8.................4........................... 183 8....................3..........................................................2 Responsibilities .....................................1..........4............4.........3................................................................1 Subsystem FAT ............................ 181 8............................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 6.................. 194 8.............................7 Contractor's Prior Tests ...... 184 8........1....................................................1 SCADA/EMS Availability ........................................................................... 181 8.........1 General SAT Requirements ...3.......................... 176 6................ RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY ..................1............11 Repeat Tests .................... 184 8................................................................... 189 8..........................................................................................................1.............. 176 6.....................................1........................................................................................ 185 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS .......................................... INSPECTION AND TESTING PHILOSOPHY ......... 190 8..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1..........2 Outstations .3 Energy Management Software .............4 8.............3..........................................3..................... 181 8..........1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................1.................................Section 6 ................1................................................................................................. 179 7....13 Hardware Failure Reports ................... 189 8...... 193 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTING.............5 Power Supplies .......................................................................................................6 Test Procedures and Result Sheets...........................................................12 Fault Log ......... 186 8. 183 8........................ 186 8.... 176 6............................1 Approach to Testing ................... 184 TYPE TESTS ..3....... 178 7..........18 HVAC ...............................................................................................................................3 7........................................15 ACCESS CONTROL................... 193 8.........................................2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.......................... 177 6..................................................................17 LAN ....................................9 Failures ............................................. 179 AVAILABILITY CALCULATIONS............................................... 183 8..............2.................................................................................... 190 8............................................

................................ 201 9...........................................2 Partial & Operational Acceptance ................10 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD ......5......................................................................1 9........................................................................... 196 8..8 9.................................4....................................5................................................................. 202 9................................................................ TRAINING .................................3..........................SCADA ............7 Readiness to Commence Tests on Completion ............................. 201 9.... 197 8.......................4............................................... 200 9.............. 195 8......Telecommunications ..................... 201 9....... 195 8.....Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 8......................................................................................................... 198 NON-CONFORMANCE ..................................9 9....................................................................3 Charges for the Maintenance Agreement ........................................................... 199 9....................................................1 Scope of Agreements ............1 Telephone Support ...............3 Quality Control ... 195 8..........5.......................5 Site Acceptance Tests ......4 New Software Releases .......2 Site Installation Tests ...............2 Period of the Maintenance Agreement .3 Digital multimeter ................................9.......................... 200 9............................1 GENERAL ................................... 204 9...3 Site Update Period ..3 Fault Rectification ......5........................................4..........Section 6 ..........................1 SDH/PDH tester ...................................4...... 204 9.........................................4....... 202 PRODUCT CHANGES AND ENHANCEMENTS ................................5......... SPARES AND MAINTENANCE .............2 Point To Point Testing ..9....... 204 9...........3 9..........................................................................................1 General ................................4........5..............................4 Access .....5............... 197 8.................................................................4.............................10...........................................................5.................4.............5 TESTS ON COMPLETION ................. 204 9.4............................................................................. 203 9.................................2 Remote Access Support ..............4...................... 199 MAINTENANCE PHILOSOPHY ..... 199 DESIGN TO FACILITATE MAINTENANCE ....... 202 CONSUMABLES ............. 205 10................................................... 202 COMMISSIONING PERIODS ..... 201 9........10................................................................2 Datacom tester .......................................................................9.5........................................................................................... 198 8. 199 MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT ..................................... 201 9.............2 Attendance ..............................................................5 Replacement Parts .................4 Maintenance Services ............ 202 TOOLS AND TEST APPARATUS ...........................................4 System Site Acceptance Tests .... 206 10................................4.....10.................................................................... 196 8.10 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .......................5.......................................................................................1 SCADA/EMS Database ................ 201 9.....................................5 Maintenance laptop computer ........................................................ 204 9......................10..........................5 GENERAL ......1 System Acceptance ..4 9..................... 206 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B...6 9.................................................... 203 9................................................6 Acceptance Tests .....6 9........................ 200 9...................9..................10...7 9................................................3.......................................................................................................................................................................4 Signal generator .............. 197 8....................................... 202 9..................................2 9.................................................................EMS ......................... 199 SPARE PARTS ............. 204 9.. 203 9........................................................9................................................................... 195 8.........................................4......................5......................................................................... 198 8............5 Termination of the Agreement ........................................

..................3 SCADA/EMS SYSTEM COURSES .. 221 11............... 214 11.... 212 11........................................................... 221 11........................................................................... 216 11...........................................................................................................4 Hardware Manual ...................2 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH THE BID ...........................3...............................6......4 TELECOMMUNICATION COURSES ...............................5.............................5 DOCUMENTATION FOR ACCEPTANCE TESTS ...............................................................................6...........................................3...8 Communication Documentation .......4 Programme of Work ............................3................................7 Programmer's Manual .....5 System Administration Courses ....1 System Manual ................................................. 210 10..................................................................................4......................................................5 Monthly Progress Report ... 207 10...4 Design Control Document ............ 220 11.........................................2 Specific Requirements for Communication Documentation ......2 CONTENT ..................................... 216 11.....8 ‗AS BUILT‘ DOCUMENTATION .. 207 10.... 218 11.........................6 Equipment Manual.................................................3................................................................................3.......................... 221 11..................3......3 System Engineer's Manual .........1 Test Plan and Schedule ..................................................... 214 11..............................3 Schedule of Contractor's Documents and Drawings ................ 208 10...... 220 11.................................................. 223 11...4.... 209 10................................................... 223 12........................3...........................................5.6............................. 220 11...................................................................6 COURSE ATTENDEES .........................................................1 General ................4... 224 SITE SURVEYS ................................ DOCUMENTATION ...................11 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ............................................................................ DRAWINGS ....................2 Operators' Manual .....................................................................................................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 10........3 Software Design Documentation .............. 217 11...............................................2 Test Procedures ..................................3..........1 Overview Course ................4 EMS Applications Courses .5....4............................ 221 11... 218 11.....6................3 Test Reports ......................2 Specific Requirements for NSCC Building ............................................................. 221 11......... 225 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.......3............................................... 222 11..............5 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE COURSES ....................................................................... 219 11..............................4......................................4.........................1 Course Duration ........... 220 11............ 221 11...............................................................................2 Applications Software ......................................................3 DOCUMENTATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING THE CONTRACT ... 221 11......1 Standard Operating Software .................................................................... 13...................Section 6 .........................................6..............................3..............................................................3............................. 207 10.................................................................3 Database and Display Maintenance Courses .......................... 209 10.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ..... 210 10............................1 GENERAL .2 System Operation Courses ...............................6.5 Maintenance Manual ..1 Functional Design Specification .......................................6.......... 218 11....................................................... 213 11.......... 219 11....6........................ 220 11............................................................................. 209 10......4 DESIGN DOCUMENTATION ........ 222 11.. 213 11.................. 222 11............................... 219 11.............................7 DOCUMENT SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL .. 213 11...........................................6............................... 208 10......................................................................................................................................................................3.................................................................

..............................................5 EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED ......................1 GENERAL .................................... 236 16.................... 227 14...... ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ........................3 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS AND SIGNAL LISTS FOR OUTSTATIONS ...............1 INDOOR INSTALLATIONS ..............6 LVAC SWITCHFUSE BOARDS .................................................................................................................. 237 16.....................................................................................................................................1 GENERAL ............................................................ 228 14............. 234 14................................... 227 14...... 238 17................................................................... 237 16.............. 225 13...........................................9 INSPECTION AND TESTING..................................10 ANCILLARY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ... 225 13...............Section 6 ....................7 DC BATTERIES AND CHARGERS..................2 PRELIMINARY SURVEYS ......1 GENERAL ........................................................4 SUSCEPTIBILITY TO CONDUCTED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY ...................... 225 13......................................... 236 15...................... 237 17.............7 EMC STANDARDS ........................2 SUSCEPTIBILITY TO RADIATED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY ...................................................................................................................................3 PRODUCTION OF RADIATED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY ............................5 PRODUCTION OF CONDUCTED ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE ......5 AUXILIARY POWER AND CONTROL CABLES ........ 226 14....12 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant ............................................................... 238 17......................................................................................4 SCADA/EMS AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT .......3 PROTECTION.............................. 227 14................................................... 236 15..................................... 225 13....................................................................... 237 16.. 233 14.....................................1 GENERAL REQUIREMEMNTS.. 237 16........................ 234 15..2 GENERAL STANDARDS ........................ 237 16..................................................................................... REFERENCE DOCUMENTS AND STANDARDS ............2 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS ................................. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY............ 238 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B....................................... 234 14......4 EXISTING PLC SYSTEM ........... 237 16.......................................................... 234 14.................................. 237 16.............Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 13...................................................6 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ......................................................... 227 14..................................................................................................................................... METERING AND CONTROL .................... QUALITY ASSURANCE AND MANAGEMENT .............. 234 14...............2 ACCESS FOR THE EMPLOYER'S REPRESENTATIVE .......................................................8 EARTHING SYSTEMS ........................

....................11 CORRECTIVE ACTION ..................7...........2 SYSTEM OF UNITS .................9..... 239 17................. 248 18.......13 ACCOMMODATION AND ASSISTANCE ........................2 Indicating Instruments ........................................................................... 248 18............................................................3......8..........1 General ......................................................................................6 RELIABILITY........ 245 18.....8.........8............5 Degrees of Protection .........3 Indicating Lamps ......................................................................... 246 18.............................13 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ...........1 Keys and Push Buttons ...... 239 17.... RACKS AND CONTROL PANELS ............8 PLANNING ..........................3 Marshalling Cubicles Including SCADA Interface Panels ...............................8............1 Terminal Blocks ............................................................................................. 240 17..................................7........................1 Fuses and Links .. 245 18............ 242 18.9 CONTROL AND INDICATING DEVICES ........4.......4 QUALITY PLAN ...........1 Alternating Current (ac) ........10 TESTING ....................................... 246 18.............................................................................. 248 18................3 DESIGN....................................................................... 244 18...................................................12 CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT ...........................5 EQUIPMENT LIFE ....... 245 18..................................................................... 245 18..................... CABINETS.................7.................................... 242 18...................................................... 241 18........................ 239 17.............................................................................................................. 247 18.............2 Direct Current (dc) .. 244 18.................................. 248 18.................................... 245 18................6 QUALITY RECORDS.......................................................2 Connectors ........1 GENERAL ..........................................................3....................7........4 Equipment.... 243 18.............5 AUDITS ............................................................. 247 18.................................................................................................9....................................... 248 18................8.......................7.................. 242 18..............3 Power Supply Units (PSUs) .......................................................................8...........................................................................8.............................................7............................................................................................ Components and Terminal Identification ...............................................................................4................................................................................................ 238 17............................ 243 18. 238 17................................ 243 18..............................................................................4 Plug-in Cards .......................................................................Section 6 .................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 17..................... 244 18...................... DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION .........8.......... 247 18............................................... 240 17... 245 18..........7 ORGANIZATION...........................................................................................................................................4 Protection ....................6 Painting and Finishing .................2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers .........................................................2 Cubicle Wiring ........ STANDARDIZATION AND INTERCHANGEABILITY ........................................................................3 SUB-CONTRACTORS ................................................................................................... 239 17............... 242 18........................9.....................................................................9 REVIEWS ..............4 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP .................... 239 17.............8 CUBICLES...................... 249 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B................................9...................... 240 17.. 248 18.............................7 POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS .............................

................................. 260 19................11............ 257 19...............1 New Software ..............................................................3 Online Performance Measurement ................ 251 18.....................5......................................... 253 19..........2 THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE ................................................................ 255 19......................1 General ............3. 253 19.4 Right To Modify ..............................1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS......................................................................5...............................................................................6 OPERATING SYSTEMS ........................... 253 19.... 260 20.1 Diagnostics and Fault Monitoring ....................... 259 19...................................................... 253 19................................................................................................6....................... 256 19..........................5 Software Configuration and Maintenance Facilities ................ 254 19..................3 CODE AND DATA STANDARDS ................ 254 19........... Verification and Testing ................................................................ 254 19.............5.....4........5................................................4..................................... 250 18..............................................2 Cable Types ..... 251 18.. 256 19...........7 PATENT AND COPYRIGHT .............1 Patent Rights ...................................................................................................... 254 19..............................................................................................................1 General ................................................................Section 6 ........11 EARTHING .........2 Software Life Cycle....5 Change and Issue Control ...................................3 Backup Copies of Software ................ 254 19..............................................3 Configuration Data.............2 Existing Software .............3 System Development Methodology...........................6............... 253 19......................3 System Utilities ................10............................3 Cable Screens and Armouring ..Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 18.......14 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ...............................5 SCADA/EMS SOFTWARE ................... 249 18.................................................................5 Functional Design Specification .......6...............4.........6.6.... 249 18........................................................................7..................................... 257 19...........6.........................................................................1 General .4 Software Validation......... 253 19........................6. 255 19......5..............1 Programming Languages ....................................10 SECONDARY WIRING AND CABLES ............11.......................................................................... 254 19...........4.................7...................................... 261 20.................................................................................2 Error Detection and Reporting .......................................3.................................10............ 256 19..................... 261 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.................................. 252 19.....2 Database Structure............ 254 19.5.................4 Text Editor .............................................6... 255 19............ 251 19..................................................... 257 19........4 Documentation ............ 255 19.................. 252 19........................ Termination and Identification .........................................6 Detailed Design .................11....................................................... 260 19............................................1 General ............................................................................................ 253 19.........................................................4.........................8 LICENCES ......................................................... 256 19........................................ 252 19...................... CIVIL WORKS ................................................ 249 18.............................3.........................4 Telemetry Communications Statistics ...................................4 APPLICATION OF QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................. 253 19.......................6...........5.................................................................................2 Security ............................3 Program and Data Security .....2 Safety Earthing ...................................3 Cable Laying............................................. 251 18....5 Software Maintenance ...5........6..........................................................................1 GENERAL .......................................5...........................................5...........2 Claims in Respect of Patent Rights .................................................................................................5.10............................ 253 19.. 259 19...............................................................................................................7..................................................... 260 19..7................................................................................. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS . 254 19..............

.......................... 263 20........................................4............ 269 20...........................................2....16 Curing .................................... 274 20...............................................................................................3...................................... 288 20......6...... 287 20...........6.6..........................................................2..............6 Surface chipping ....6........6.................6....3 Earth retaining structures ............2......................................................1 Cutting and removing trees & shrubs ......................6 Admixtures ........4..6...23 Grout under Base Plates ..................................................2................................................. 287 20......4.......11 Transportation ................................... 280 20..........................................4.................2 Concrete Beds and Casings ..2... 289 20..............4.............2.....................3 Sanitary Fittings .....................6...........2 Water Pipes ........6..........6....2...1.................................3..................2........... ............ 263 20.......................................................................2............1 Concrete Work........2......................................................... 263 20..................................4.......5.........1 Water supply system .............1 Cutting and filling earth ............................. 263 20...................................................6.................................................................................... 287 20. 288 20................................. 262 20.....2.......................... 279 20.............15 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ...4 WATER SUPPLY & DRAINAGE SYSTEM . 271 20. 265 20......3 Site Clearance .................. 266 20...4...............2..................... Foundations & Piling Work .........4 Waste Water Sewerage System ..........2...... 280 20......2 Explosives ................................ 263 20...18 Formwork ...2.................................4....2.....19 Reinforcement .................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 20.........................2...5 Water ..5............................................4 Sewerage Treatment Plant ................6.6....................... 269 20............3 Cable Pits ..........................7 Plant ...........................................................15 Joining New Concrete Work to Existing .................... 268 20.......................... 263 20...... 266 20..5 Land escaping & tree planting .....6 Concrete Work..........2 Manholes ......................2.............2 Materials................1 Copper ............................................ 288 20..................................2....................... 288 20................4............13 Construction Joints ..................................... 271 20.........2...12 Compaction ......................................................4.... 271 20..............................................................................................2 Materials .................................................................2............. 266 20.................2....6............... 288 20...1 Lightning Protection for Buildings .............................. 280 20..........................4 Aggregates ................................................2 Soil Investigations.........................................5........2...................6...............6.....14 Construction Bays ...........3..... 281 20...............22 Grouting of structural steel works and plant ........2............... 266 20.....................4 Site formation and up keeping..................................................................................... 266 20......................................3 LIGHTNING PROTECTION ..4.................................... 288 20.....4......................................................21 Prevention of Corrosion below Ground .............................. 274 20.....2................................................... 277 20..4.......... 267 20...............4.......................2................................4.2.4................. 280 20................................... 272 20.............4.....2 PRELIMINARY WORKS .....................2.....6.................2...........................................................................................................................................2........................... 291 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B....1 Drain Pipes ......... 273 20.6.....2..............................................................6.................. dismantling steel structures .... 274 20...................................................................................................... 266 20...................9 Mixing .................. 263 20...... Building works and Services Standards and Codes of Practice 261 20...........................3.2.............24 Foundations and Piling Work ...... 262 20.... 289 20................ 287 20.........2.............................................2...10 Workability ....2.....................................Section 6 ........................... 267 20.... 266 20....................................................2...... 271 20.......4.................8 Concrete Strength Requirements ...2......2.4 Anti Termite soil treatment ................................17 Additional Requirements in Hot Weather .......6.................. 271 20................2.......................... 273 20.......................................................................................20 Foundation Bolts............................................6..............2....2................................1 Site Survey .....................2.3...........2..................6...3 Demolishing & removing of existing masonry/concrete structures ............................5 Cable Trenches & Ducts .........................3 Septic Tank & soakage pit ...................... 266 20........................................ 289 20........5 Surface water drainage system .......1 Civil Engineering.................3................1 Control and power cable trenches & ducts ............... 274 20........................3 Test Certificates and Samples ................................................................................6.............2 Removing existing equipment.................................2.........6..........................................4................................ 272 20......................

...................................................................... 295 20....................................5 Roadsides ........................................................................... 292 20.......................... 299 20........... Brick work and Plaster ..2.8.........................10 Aluminium Windows and Doors ...1 Indoor cable trenches .........................................................14.................................................................................1 Screeded Beds ....................5 CONSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE OF ROADS .....5 Pin Tumbler Cylinders .................................................1 Generally ......General ................................................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 20......................................8.........17 Damp Proof Course (DPC) ......................2 Sub-Base ...........................2...................8..... 301 20.............................................................6.....6..5 Lime ...8................8.......................2 General ...........19 Roof and ceiling .........................................................................................Section 6 .............14 Timber ..8..........................4............................................................. 293 b) Gates ......................................................14...........................18.............................5....................................................................7 MISCELLANEOUS WORK ........................................1 20........................... 294 20.......................1 General ..................2....................8....... 298 20.............................. 303 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B............8...................................8................................ 300 20........ 292 20......................... 296 20.....2 Checker Plate .......................................8...1 General ........................18 Floor Finishes ...........................................................5............................1 Zinc Aluminium Coated Profiled Steel Sheet Roofing ......................................................................................... 291 20..................................................................................................................8.. 298 20......2 Road carriage way................................8...................8............................................................................................................ 299 20............. 297 20...............................8... 296 20...........................................................................1 Structures for approach roads................................2 Access road and structures .. 292 20..........2 Raised Modular Floors ........................ 293 20.....16 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant .....................................14..........1.5..................... 292 20........ 299 20....................... 292 20....2 Workmanship......................8................1 Preservative ..16............. 303 20..........1............................................................................ 295 20... 294 20......................................................................6 Door Closures .............2 Workmanship........................ 296 20............................. 296 20.........................11 Aluminium Patent Glazing ........................................ 296 20..................................................................................14............14...............9.................. 292 20.. 303 20.............................14............................8.......8....................2.......3.8........ 299 20................. 297 20.................................5.......... 299 20.......8..................19.....................................................................................8..8...............................................................9.......8......2...............................9 Doors and Windows ............... 301 20...........5.....17.......................5......12 Other Materials ...........8...8...................5.....................................................2 Gypsum board Ceiling .................................................................8 CONSTRUCTION OF BUILDINGS ..........4............................8....................13 Fire Resisting Steel Doors ............................................. 303 20. 291 20... ........................8.......3 Timber Doors and windows ... 297 20..........................................8..............1 Damp-Proof Membrane .............................................................................3 Prime Coat ........... 297 20..........5............... 293 20................................................................................4 Brick work .......3.. 299 20.............2 Galvanized Barbed wire fence & Gate .....1 Preparation of Formation ................ 297 20.........................9 FINISHES AND FITTINGS ....5................... 293 20....................................................... 298 20..............4 Bituminous Surface .............. 298 20......8..........................8 Locking System ..............16...... 292 20.6 FENCE AND GATE ...1 Wall and ceiling finishes ....15 Glazing ......................................................5...........................14.................... 298 20.......................................................... 303 20............................................................. 295 20................................................................................. 295 20...................................................8.......8.....3 Super structure (Structural frame & walls) .....................2 Fire criteria ............................................... 292 20...............................................7 Door Fittings ............................ 297 20....................8...............................................9........................7 Building in Frames .................................. 292 20.....................................18.......3 Approach road ................8 Cement...............................1 Chain link fence and Gate ....... 291 20................16 Trenches .... 297 20.. 298 20....................8.............. 291 Gradient ..5...19......................................................................8....5........................8............................................................... 299 20........................14......................................................6 Lintels .............. 294 20....4 Builder‘s Ironmongery ....................................

................ 315 20...................5..............9.........................................9.................4 Execution ............... 323 21..6........... 314 20...............6..............................................3 Materials ............9..................................................17 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .................. 318 20................................10.....3..........9...................... 312 20..........................................4 Certificate Warranty ....................................11 LABELLING ..................... 321 20.........................................................................................................2 Temporary Works .......................6........................................................................................ 306 20........6..........9................. 308 20........................ 312 20...3........... 308 20............ 318 20............................10........1 Contractors responsibilities .. 319 20.............................. 312 20.....................................................6................................................5 Bitumastic Painted Surfaces and Coated Pipes ...........10.4.....................................................10............................ 305 20.......9............................................................ 306 20.... 307 20.....................5 Material Manufacture ..........................1...10 OTHER STRUCTURES .....................................................................................3............10......3 House for Diesel Generator ...9..................................................13 PVC Coating Thickness: ..................................................... 323 21............... 319 20................................. 323 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B............ 309 20...... 309 20..................... 308 20.......10..........................1 General ...........10.................5 Guard House ............1 Painting on Metal Surfaces ............. 313 20........ 306 20..........3 Materials ...............1 AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATING SERVICES............... 323 21.1 Site office ......5 Waterproofing of Concrete Roofs ...................6......... 312 20.............9...Section 6 .........9..... 306 20.... 316 20............................2.....................................................................................................................................................................9....................... 307 20....................................................9...........4 Hand railing .............10.........4 Waterproofing of water retaining Structures ..............................3 Materials ...............9 Workmanship...........................4..9...9............................9.......10.........................17 Certification ................................14 PVC Adhesion Test.......9.................................2 Description of Work .......9..........................6.... 318 20.............................................. 314 20.................................................... 306 20.9..........................9..................................................6................................... 307 20.................................... 307 20....1.............................................................5 Certificate Warranty ....... 308 20............................................6 Mechanical Properties ................................ 307 20........2 Referenced Documents .........1 General ......4 Execution ..................................................................1.............................................. 315 20..........................3 Design and liaison of work ..........6............................................................11 Number of Tests .............10......9.......1........3 Terminology ..........4 Classification .......................4.......................10...................6 Internal Finishes ..................................................7 Physical Properties .......................................... 322 21.......................2..10... 319 20................................................ ..1...................6...................................1 General ...............4 Iron and Steel works (Except Structural Steelworks) .2...3........................10..5..............3 Woodwork ..... 306 20.6.......8 Dimensions and Tolerances ..........................9.....2 Paints and Other Materials ......................................................6...................5................................10......................10.............................................................................................10.....5............................................................... 304 20..............................................1 General ..............................2 Description of work ............4....................................2................................................9....3 Waterproofing of Concrete Slabs & Masonry Walls in Toilet Areas ....................................10............10................. 306 20........................................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 20....4....................................9....10..10.................................10.....5 Certificate Warranty ......................................................................2 Project requirement .............. 305 20..............................................9..........................2 Description of work ... 304 20............10... 306 20.10......... 319 20. 313 20............................................................................................................2............... 307 20................16 Inspection ........6...3 Materials ..9................................................. BUILDING SERVICES..........................6 Gabion Wall ........2 Painting .................9.................................6................................12 Test Methods ........................................................................ 308 20...................... 321 20... 323 21......................4 Car parking ...............9........................ 319 20.....6............3......................................................6....................2...6 Copper Surfaces...............10 Sampling ................. 305 20................................9..................................................................................... 308 20.................... 312 20.......................................... 312 20.....................6............... 313 20.............15 Weld Shear Strength of Fabric: .

..........3...5......18 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ...............1 AC Distribution boards ..........2..........................................................5 Bifurcated fans ........2.......... 333 21................................4..............3..................... 325 21......... 329 21.........................3............15 Clocks ...2............2 Internal design conditions .............. 326 21.......1................1..............................................................3 Contactors .......... 330 21......................................................................... 338 21.....2........1.......................3.............1 Portable wall mounted extinguishers ................................ 324 21............................................... 325 21..........................3.....3.. 331 21.6 Axial flow fans ...... 329 21..............1 Coding System ............ 330 21.............................................................3........................ 332 21..1..1..............................................11...... 328 21..........................................................2 Mobile trolley extinguishers ................1.. 331 21...............3.................................3........................................................................1 External design conditions ....................................3...............................4 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM ..............2.............3.......2......7 Socket Outlets and Fused Spur Outlets .............6.............................................................................................16 Maintenance ......................................12 Signs .10 Cabling ..........1............................................................................................................5 Supplying and installation of service ......... 329 21...........................................4 Fire Detection and Fire Alarm System .................... 338 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.................1 General ......................................3 LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER SUPPLY WORK ..............11....3.............. 338 21.......................2..................... 328 21................3.................................4.....................................................12 Earthing and Bonding ........................................4 Supplying and installation of services ........................................................................ 325 21........................ 329 21.....................1 Lamps 335 21.................... 328 21....................... 330 21...................................4...... 326 21.2 Contractors Responsibilities ..............................4...................................3............. 334 21...........................................................................................................3......4 Vibration ....................................1....... 326 21..3..............1............8 Maintenance ........................... 323 21.........3................. 337 21.... 327 21.... 324 21.......................1 Fire Alarms ........................2.......11 Exterior Installation .......................... 338 21......................................................................................... 332 21....................2 Cables ............11 Fire Protection Equipment ................................. 330 21..1......................3.......................................................................................................... 329 21............. 323 21....... 324 21.............................................5 Fire Alarm Panel .....7 Electrical Connections .........................5...............................................................................1................4 Design and liaison of work .......................................................................1........3 Fire Protection Coating for Cables ......................................................5........3...5 Control Equipment .. 334 21......... 323 21......................................2 FIRE PROTECTION AND DETECTION FACILITIES ...............................3................................2 Bulk Heads for Cables and Pipes .............. 335 21........................................ 324 21.......8 Audible Alarms ...6 Design Calculations .............4...9 Poles ..4............2 Schedule of Design Requirements ..................................3 Thermal Insulation ...........1................ 334 21....................3.......1 Manufacturers ........................................................1..3........................................ 325 21..............4 Mechanical Ventilation ....6 Manual Fire Alarm Stations .....................................................................13 Emergency Lighting ....3 Project Requirement .10 Interior Installations ............3....................................................................2..........................................................................................3..........3.............................. 327 21...................................................... 335 21........4 Switches and Push buttons ..........3......................................... 330 21..................................................4........................................................................7 Ceiling fans .........................................................................2............2.............................................8 Conduit and Fittings................................................ 324 21...............6 Electrical Control ...........1............................................................ 330 21.......2......3 Internal Sound Levels ...............................................7 Automatic Fire Detectors ......... 336 21........................................................Section 6 ...................3...................................................................................................................4...............................................6 Lighting Fittings .. 326 21................ 335 21....................... 325 21. 336 21......................1................2...........5 Standards ..................... 337 21......2 Split System Air Conditioning Units .................................................4......Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 21...............................14 Schedule of Lighting Fittings and Sockets Outlets ............5. 324 21..... 324 21...1.3.................. 331 21.......... 327 21.........................................................3....................................................................2.......................1...........1 General ..... 335 21....... 326 21....9 Visible Alarms .........................4........................

....................1 General .................................................4........................ 341 21..6.........2 21..................................................................................................4 21............1 TRANSPORT .... 340 21.................3 Guarantee and Maintenance ...................................... 342 21.4....................7 21..............................................................................6 Entertainment Rack ............................ 340 21.................. 344 21.................................. 339 Refuge Alarms ..............5..........6.......................1 Capacity ................................................... 340 21................. 339 Assistance Alarms ................................................................................4.............................................5 LIFT .............................................................................................5........................... 350 22....... 346 21................................................................. 341 21............................ 342 21................................5 Man Machine Interface Unit (MMI) ..................................2 Erection ....................................................3 Distributed Amplifier Unit (DAU) ...............6............................ OTHER SERVICES ..3 21...................................................... 339 Panic Alarms ....................................2 EMPLOYER‘S REPRESENTATIVE‘S OFFICE ....................................................... 340 Window Actuator Control Panel ......................................................4 Linked Audio Processor ...1 Main Project Office for Employer‘s Representatives ..................4..............................................6.........................................................................................2............................................................. 340 Induction Loop Systems ..... 345 21.......................................................5 21...................................... 340 Intruder Alarm System ............4..............5 Car Control ...2 System Description...........................6 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND VOICE ALARM SYSTEM ..................................... 341 21.........................................................5............6....... 350 22...... 350 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B......................................Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 21..............................................5............................... 350 22......................6....................4 Drawings ...4.Section 6 .. 348 22.........................................................5.8 CCTV System ....................................................... 347 21...........6 21................ 341 21.......4............................7 Pendant Full Range Speakers ..........................19 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope ................................................ 342 21............6..................

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AC or ac ACE AGC ASCII AVR B BER b CAPC CCTV CEPT CFDS CPU CRC CRT CT DC or dc DDE DLP DPI DPLC DVI EAPROM EBU EEPROM E/F EFI ELV EMC Alternating Current Area Control Error Automatic Generation Control American Standard Code for Interchange of Information Automatic Voltage Regulator Bytes (kB. MB. GB) Bit Error Rate Bits (kb. Mb.20 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 . Gb) Cabinet Appointed Procurement Committee Closed Circuit Television Conférence Européen de Poste et Télécommunication Communication Functional Design Specification Central Processor Unit Cyclic Redundancy Check Cathode Ray Tube Current Transformer Direct Current Dynamic Data Exchange Digital Light Processing Dots Per Inch Digital Power Line Carrier Digital Video Interface Electrically Alterable Programmable Read Only Memory European Broadcasting Union Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Earth Fault Earth Fault Indicator Extra Low Voltage Electro Magnetic Compatibility Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications EMI EMS ESD FAT FDS FEP GPS GSM GUI HMI HD HFDS HIS HRC HVAC IAT ICCP ID IED IEC IEEE IET JBUS I/O ISO ITU LAN LCD LED LV MBUS Electro Magnetic Interference Energy Management System Electrostatic Discharge Factory Acceptance Tests Functional Design Specification Front End Processor Global Positioning System Global System for Mobile (communication) Graphic User Interface Human Machine Interface High Definition Functional Hardware Design Specification Historic Information System High Rupturing Capacity Heating.21 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Ventilation And Air Conditioning Internal Acceptance Tests Inter Control Centre Protocol Identification Intelligent Electronic Device International Electrotechnical Commission Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Institute of Engineering and Technology Variation on MODBUS Input/Output International Standardisation Organisation International Telecommunication Union Local Area Network Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Low Voltage Meter Bus Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications MCB MDB MDI MTBF MTTR MV NERC NCC O/C ODBC OPGW PCB PDH PLC PMC PMR PSU PTW PVC Q QA QAR QC QMS RAL RAM RFI RTU SAT SCADA SDH Miniature Circuit Breakers Main Distribution Panel Maximum Demand Indicator Mean Time Between Failures Mean Time To Repair Medium Voltage National Electric Regulatory Committee National Control Centre Over Current Open Data Base Connectivity OPtical Ground Wire Printed Circuit Board Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Power Line Carrier Protection Monitoring Computer Post Mortem Revision Power Supply Unit Permit To Work Poli Vinyl Chloride Reactive Power Quality Assurance Quality Assurance Representative Quality Control Quality Management System Reichs-Ausschuss für Lieferbedingungen (German Colour Standards) Random Access Memory Radio Frequency Interference Remote Terminal Unit Site Acceptance Tests Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 .22 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications SDM SFDS SIP SOE SQL SQP STT SXGA+ TASE.2 TCP/IP U/G UI UPS UTC VGA VDU VRLA VT WAN XLPE 4GL Software Development Methodology Software Functional Design Specification SCADA Interface Panel Sequence Of Events Structured Query Language Software Quality Plan Sanction To Test Super Extended Graphics Adapter + Telecontrol Application Service Element 2 Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol Under Ground User Interface Uninterruptible Power Supplies Universal Time Coordinate Video Graphics Adaptor Visual Display Unit Valve Regulated Lead Acid Voltage Transformer Wide Area Network Cross Linked PolyEthylene Forth Generation Language Other abbreviations used in this document generally conform with the System International (SI . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 .metric system) but are not listed here. The SI units and recommendations are defined in ISO 1000.23 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

Section 6 . 2. training.24 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Work requiring access to sites and plant requiring Permits to Work (PTW) or access permission shall be coordinated with the Employer. The installation of all equipment and interfacing to existing equipment shall be organised and executed such that the least disruption is caused to existing plant and equipment. Additionally the Bidder is required to complete a set of Technical Schedules that state the standards. Outstation Data Acquisition Servers (Fault tolerant duplicated system) Duplicated ICCP link Interfaces to other DCCs Duplicated Operational LAN Printers. spare parts. special tools and test equipment. completing plant interface works in substations and power plants throughout the country. The Bidder shall also complete the detailed Price Schedules that will determine the quantities of equipment that will be required to meet the full requirements of the project. SCADA. and establishing a country wide telecommunications network linking each substation and power plant to the control centre. 1 Remote) Operator Training Simulator hardware (Including Trainee and Trainer Workstations) Rear projection video wall displays to be located in the NSCC control room. 3. The works for the new SCADA systems include but shall not be limited to the design. and inspection and testing.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 1. The works required to achieve these objectives shall include establishing the NSCC in a building also to be provided under this Contract. In particular the existing System Control facilities must remain in operation until such time as they are replaced by the new facilities after they have been tested and accepted. The following Chapters specify the overall scope of work for each of the foregoing sections of work and must be read in conjunction with the General and Particular Technical Specifications that form part of this Bid Document. 4. Bidders may propose alternate design solutions so long as these match or exceed the specified functionality and performance. Master Clock System Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. installation and setting to work of following principal subsystems/facilities and services: A SCADA Master Station Hardware and System Software a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) SCADA Hardware (Fault tolerant redundant Master Station Computer System with servers for. The five main elements of the outline design comprise 1.1 SCADA/EMS MASTER STATION The Contractor shall supply a new SCADA/EMS master station and supporting equipment and services for the new Control Centre being established in Sri Jayewardenepura in the outskirts of Colombo. SCADA/EMS Master Station – specified in Chapter 2 Telecommunications Infrastructure – specified in Chapter 3 Outstation and Substation Works Adaptation Works – specified in Chapter 4 Uninterruptible Power Supply System specified in Chapter 5 NSCC Building – specified in Chapter 6 In addition there are further requirements relating to the delivery of the works including requirements covering general engineering standards and environmental conditions. drawings and documentation. Historical Information) Operating Systems and Antivirus software for all servers and workstations Workstations (3 Operator. 1. This functionality and performance specification defines an outline design and user requirements in terms of five major elements that will deliver the contract objectives. manufacture. characteristics and types of equipment that the Contractor guarantees to supply. 1 NSCC Manager. INTRODUCTION The principle objectives of this contract are to provide the Employer with a National System Control Centre (NSCC) for managing the electricity transmission/generation system in Sri Lanka. Applications. 5. 1 Maintenance.

25 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Installing and interfacing. cable routes. high bandwidth. as well as supporting the growing telecommunication services required for the expansion of the power network to be built during the planned expansion projects. 1.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications B SCADA/EMS Master Station Applications k) l) SCADA Software Data Archiving and Report Generation Software m) Network Analysis Applications n) o) p) q) C Energy Management Applications Remote Access (ICCP) Software Operator training simulator software Database and Display Configuration. The design shall accommodate the changing network configuration anticipated during the course of the Contract and the Contractor should expect to reconfigure the SDH network a number of times during the course of the Contract. the existing telecommunication facilities are to be upgraded and expanded. The Contractor shall plan the implementation work such that all monitoring facilities currently available in the existing SCC continue to function until the new facilities are put into service. b) Design and implementation of a resilient.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE In order to accommodate the additional telecommunication facilities required for the new NSCC SCADA system. Alternatively integration of the new SDH network components into the existing TMS provided by ABB. Control Centre and any intermediary locations. data and speech. generating stations. all multiplexing and supporting equipment to provide a fully integrated telecommunication network for the transmission of SCADA telemetry. The optical fibres are available from OPGW on the 220kV and 132 kV overhead lines and it is expected that SDH nodes will mainly be located in the 220kV and 132 kV stations. To achieve this may include the provision of dual porting at outstations or via a data connection between the existing master station and the new one. protection signalling. There shall also be summary indication and alarm outputs to the SCADA system. location of equipments. c) d) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Implementation of a new telecommunication management system to monitor and supervise the SDH network as well as alarm monitoring of other telecommunication equipment. condition and operability of existing equipment associated with the works and availability of power supplies. The works shall include but are not limited to: a) A full survey of all proposed sites for communications equipment shall be undertaken by the Contractor to obtain the necessary data to carry out the detailed design for the work required in substations.Section 6 . This works shall establish interface points. digital telecommunication fibre optic network backbone based on SDH technology. Population and Testing Services and other contractual requirements r) s) t) u) v) w) x) Training Inspection and tests Documentation Specialised tools and test equipment Spares Consumables Post Warranty Maintenance Support The existing System Control Centre (SCC) uses an ABB Micro SCADA system which is at present able to communicate with the existing RTUs and Substation Automation System Gateways.

the Contractor shall integrate existing RTUs.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications e) The Contractor shall plan the work so that the initial SDH network configuration is in place ahead of the requirement to establish links between the remote sites and the NSCC. Special tools and test equipment. Stations equipped with ABB INDACTIC 33 outstations (there are 18 of these) shall be equipped with replacement RTUs and the existing RTUs removed from the site and delivered to the Employer‘s Stores in Colombo. Post warranty maintenance support. etc. 132 kV substations and all generation stations shall be undertaken by the Contractor to obtain the necessary data to carry out the detailed design for the substation works. Where the survey establishes that the existing cabling. transducers and cabling required for the full monitoring and control requirements at these sites will be carried out by the Employer. The Contractor may at his option adapt the devices to use the IEC 60870 – 5 . Consequently the scope of work shall include the modifications necessary to invoke the additional signals required for the new NSCC. Monitoring signals at present used by the existing SCC are wired to Marshalling Cubicles adjacent to the RTUs along with the required interposing relays and mA transducers.Section 6 . 132kV generating and transmission substations including the 33kV sections of those stations. Consumables. The scope of work at these locations will be to establish the communication links with these outstations via their respective Gateways and to integrate the signals into the new SCADA/EMS database. interposing relays.3 OUTSTATIONS AND SUBSTATION ADAPTATION WORKS The Contractor shall supply and install new Remote Terminal Units (RTUs) to enable control and monitoring of the (400kV in the future). location of equipment. The installation of the additional RTU modules. At present these Outstations communicate with the existing SCADA Master Station but the data subset is not as comprehensive as that required for the new NSCC.. Training. Where additional signals are required the additional interfacing devices and cables shall be provided under this Contract. The manufacturer and model of each is indicated in the Table 1.101 protocol. cable routes. There are 9 outstations that are equipped with ABB RTU 560 devices. The scope of work at these locations will be to establish the communication links to the new NSCC with the respective outstations and to integrate the signals into the new SCADA/EMS database. This works shall establish interface points. b) There are 27 Outstations Substation Automation Systems with which communication with the new NSCC will be via a Gateway. They all communicate with the existing Master Station using the IEC 60870 – 5 . The works shall include adaptation works at some substations to provide monitoring and control facilities not yet available. relays Page 6B. For example they do not include controls.101 protocol. Inspection and tests.26 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope c) d) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant . f) g) h) i) j) k) l) m) n) o) 1.104 protocol. New digital power line carrier (DPLC) links for 132 kV substations and their integration with other communications systems and equipment. Spares. 220kV. Additionally. Implementation of new digital teleprotection signalling equipment for electrical protection. Documentation. into the new system. They all communicate with the existing Master Station using the IEC 60870 – 5 . PMC(Protection Monitoring Computer) Interface and Substation Automation Systems with Gateways . Telephone exchanges for the new telephone network. The works shall include but not be limited to: a) A full survey of all 220kV.

For Stations that will be implemented under other projects by 2012 the Contractor shall establish the communication links between the new outstation and the new NSCC. In the locations where Marshalling Cubicles are already installed the Contractor shall be responsible for the implementation of any additional signals that are required. They shall be connected to the new NSCC Master Station via the communication links established under this Contract. e) In stations with no existing outstation equipment (there are 17 of these) a new RTU shall be provided and a new Marshalling Cubicle (or SCADA Interface Panel) except in cases where there is an existing Marshalling Cubicle. There are 7 IPP stations the data for which will be available at marshalling points within the substation to which the generation is injected. Where appropriate these RTUs may be of a distributed design. In locations where no secure 48Vdc or 110Vdc supply exists or the existing equipment is unsuitable because of condition. Where no signals or Marshalling are provided the Contractor shall provide all the cabling. SDH. The existing RTUs and SASs utilise the 1EC 60870–5-101 protocol. age or capacity the Contractor shall provide secure 48Vdc Charger and Battery system to support the SCADA and Communication facilities being implemented as well as those that may exist (e. The communication protocol shall be IEC 60870 – 5 . These signals shall be connected to the new RTU in the respective location with the exception of Heladhanavi whose data will be accommodated at the Puttlam SAS. it shall only be necessary to connect the new Outstation device and carry out the point to point testing to put these Outstations into service f) g) h) i) j) k) There are 4 generating stations that shall be equipped for operating with AGC on a total of 10 generators Set Point displays are to be provided at defined stations to facilitate the despatch of MW and MVAr values. Where +/-5mA transducers are used these shall be changed for 4-20mA type.Section 6 .101 or 104. Alternatively a link between the existing and new SCADA Master Stations shall be provided.27 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . l) m) Training n) o) p) q) r) Inspection and tests Documentation Post Warranty Support Specialised tools and equipment Spares The details of RTUs and SASs that are already installed in transmission substations and generation stations are contained in Table 1.g. For those stations to be implemented between 2012 and 2016 (SP11-SP20) the Contractor shall ensure that all necessary equipment. Duplicated communication ports may be provided to permit communication with the existing Control Centre and the new NSCC such that parallel running is possible during the transition of control from the present SCADA master to the new NSCC SCADA master station. interfaces and capacity is available at the Master Station and within the Telecommunication System to support these new stations. PLC). Following provision of a new SDH node at the substation and identification of the new substation in the SCADA/EMS database.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications and transducers are not in good condition or are otherwise unsuitable the replacement shall be part of this Contract. Details of the operating settings for the protocol at the respective outstation will be made available to the Contractor early in the Contract. interposing relays and transducers that are required. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

Outstation List No.IPP Data Points 468 538 553 612 975 91 126 476 543 340 398 530 533 353 737 457 470 488 474 404 403 511 446 157 593 442 262 581 451 393 290 96 370 296 266 176 15299 260 260 520 232 384 90 Data at SIP in Matara GSS Data at SIP in Kelaniya GSS Data at SIP in Kelanitissa GIS DCC Colombo Project DCC Colombo Project Requirement for SCADA facilities at the Outstations New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU One of each type supplied under this contract Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 .28 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Table 1. N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 N25 N26 N27 N28 N29 N30 N31 N32 N33 N34 N35 NSCC Station Name Ampara GSS Anuradhapura New GSS Anuradhapura Old GSS Balangoda GSS Biyagama GSS Bowatenna PS Canyon PS Embilipitiya GSS Habarana GSS Hambantota GSS Kelanitissa PS (Export) 33kV Kelaniya GSS Kiribathkumbura GSS Kosgama GSS Kothmale PS Kotudoga – 132kV GSS Kurunegala GSS Laxapana PS (Old) Matara GSS Nuwara Eliya GSS Panadura GSS Pannipitiya GSS 132 kV Polpitiya PS GSS Randenigala PS Rantambe PS Ratmalana GSS Samanalawewa PS Sapugaskanda GSS Sapugaskanda PS Seethawaka GSS Trincomalee GSS Ukuwela Valachcheni GSS Veyangoda 132 kV Victoria PS NSCC Building Total Data Points (New RTUs) IC1 IC2 S1 S2 S3 Fort (Substation F) Kolupittiya (Substation E) Total Data Points (DCC) ACE Power Matara .IPP Barge Power Colombo .IPP Asia Power PS (KHD) .

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications No.IPP Lakdhanavi PS . S4 S5 S6 S7 560-1 560-2 560-3 560-4 560-5 560-6 560-7 560-8 560-9 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25 Station Name Chunnakam PS .IPP Heladhanavi PS .IPP Embilipitiya ACE Power PS .IPP Total Data Points (IPP) Athurugiriya GSS Chilaw (Madampe) GSS KCCP / AES PS Kelanitissa 220kV GIS Kerawalapitiya PS Kotugoda 33kV GSS Puttalam GSS Ratnapura GSS Thulhiriya GSS Total Data Points (RTU 560) Colombo Substation C Dehiwala GSS Havelock Town (Sub A) Horana Kelanatissa 132kV GSS Maradana GSS (Sub I) Sri Jayawardhanapura GSS Vavuniya GSS Kolonnawa GIS Pannipitiya 220/33kV GSS Puttalam PS(Coal Power) Veyangoda 220kV GSS Ambalangoda GSS Aniyakanda GSS Bolawatta GSS Deniyaya GSS Katunayaka GSS Kerawalapitiya GSS Kotugoda 220kV GSS Pannala GSS Laxapana PS (New) Wimalasurendra PS Wimalasurendra GSS Ukuwela GSS Badulla GSS Data Points 232 337 336 118 1729 533 387 122 429 249 338 514 320 425 3317 202 332 498 416 329 463 302 361 1024 586 147 455 330 318 363 271 414 377 385 376 356 103 292 595 468 Requirement for SCADA facilities at the Outstations Data at SIP Chunnakam GSS Data at SIP in Embilipitiya GSS Data at SIP in Puttlam GSS Data at SIP in Sapugaskanda GSS Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 .29 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .TH1 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB SCS 500 Gateway Interface to ABB PCU 400 Gateway Interface to ABB PCU 400 Gateway Interface to PSX 600-SAC Interface to PSX 600-SAC Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to ALSPA HMI Gateway Interface to ALSPA HMI Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 .

A diesel generator capable of supply the complete NSCC building demand including the UPS when charging its batteries Automatic change over panel and distribution boards configured to provide segregation of duplicated or alternative supplies and allow maintenance without disruption to essential supplies A duplicated 48V charger/battery system for the supply to telecommunication equipment and RTUs with a standby capacity of 10 hours.2016 Under station project 2012 .2016 Under station project 2012 . 1. c.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications No.. Computer SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16 SP17 SP18 SP19 Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project 2012 .Section 6 . Dual Uninterruptible Power Supply with batteries capable of providing 3 hours of standby capacity b. The system shall comprise but not be limited to: a.2016 Under station project 2012 . Computer Interface to VATech Stat. diesel generator. UPS. intruder detection etc.2016 Under station project 2012 . HVAC. They will be used to gather data associated with the building services and ancillary equipment that is important for the functioning of the control centre such as Equipment Room.2016 Under station project 2012 .30 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .2016 Under station project 2012 . temperature and humidity. V1 V2 Station Name Kukule PS Matugama GSS Total Data Points (SAS Gateway) Chunnakam GSS Galle New GSS Kilinochchi GSS Maho GSS Mahiyangana GSS Naula GSS Pallekele GSS Polonnaruwa GSS Vavunativu GSS Upper Kotmale PS Beliatte GSS Colombo B Colombo K Kadawatha GSS Kappalthurai GSS Kegalle GSS Monaragala GSS Piliyandala Weligama GSS Total Data Points (Under Station Projects) Grand Total Data Points 263 548 10574 339 639 362 300 369 248 319 209 300 184 300 300 300 300 300 300 244 300 300 6213 37652 Requirement for SCADA facilities at the Outstations Interface to VATech Stat. d.4 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM An Uninterruptible Power Supply System is to be installed at the new NSCC building to provide secure electrical supplies to the Control Centre complex.2016 Under station project 2012 .2016 Under station project 2012 .2016 Under station project 2012 . They will also be used to test spares and replacement modules.2016 The Scope of Work shall include the provision of 1 of each type of RTU supplied under the Contract to be installed in the NSCC building. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

drainage Complete fitting out Installation. The Contractor shall be responsible for all safety precautions and the methods.1 SCADA/EMS System The complete System including the Master Station Equipment. any auxiliary or miscellaneous items or connections are required to complete the working system. testing and Commissioning of all building services Landscaping of site around building and reinstatement of surrounding boundary. The Contractor shall provide temporary bracing and shoring required for installation of all components of the Contract. h. c. foundations. Conceptual Design b. Processing and obtaining all national and local construction permits and/or clearances Satisfying all planning and building regulation requirements Detailed Design Provision of all necessary equipment. Control Room furniture and fittings. coordination of floor slabs to slope to floor drains shown on other drawings and support and bracing of mechanical and electrical related structures as well as all minor structures and any other work to complete the building(s). ground works. materials. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The Contractor‘s Structural Engineer of Record shall be responsible for the design of the complete structural system for the building.6 CONTRACTUAL AND PHYSICAL BOUNDARIES OF SUPPLY The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation and putting into service of all equipment within his scope of supply and interfacing to existing facilities or equipment supplied under separate contracts. techniques and sequences of procedures required to perform the work. and supervision to execute the works Construction including piling. d. The limits of supply for the respective Sections of Work are as follows: 1. It is a requirement of this Contract that the Contractor actively coordinates all interface requirements with other Contractors and with the Employer. The complete structural system for the building shall include but not be limited to.5 NSCC BUILDING A new building shall be provided at the designated location in Sri Jayewardenepura on the outskirts of Colombo. floor and roof diaphragms. f. The Contractor is required to carry out the design and construction of the new building.31 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The design shall be appropriately prestigious that reflects the importance of the System Control Function. The boundary of connections or interfaces to existing equipment or equipment supplied by others shall be: Power Supply System: UPS Distribution Boards provided within the UPS part of Works Communication System: Interconnection between the Master Station communication servers/interface and the Communication System(s) including all cabling and participation in testing and commissioning.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 1. 1. lateral load stability. The Contractor shall verify the location of all existing utilities and structures affecting the work. i. e. g. The Contractor shall be responsible in conjunction with those other Contractors or the Employer for the resolution of any technical issues that may be required to successfully complete the works. The Contractor shall coordinate all trades and verify dimensions and interfaces in the field.Section 6 . framing and connection of any architectural features. walls. supplies. superstructure. labour. The results of the Soil Investigation and Land Survey will be provided with the Tender Documents to the Contractor who shall be responsible for the complete works including but not limited to: a. roof framing.6.

Where suitable power supplies exist the interface point shall be the dc distribution boards.6. mounting frames cable racks.Section 6 . 1. Stations equipped with ABB RTU 560 Outstations . connections and participation in testing and commissioning. Protection etc. cabling. Protection signals via OF:Input point on SDH or PDH channel cards NSCC Building: As for the SCADA Master Station Miscellaneous: The Contractor shall provide or carry out any minor civil works. required to complete the installation.2 Telecommunication System The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation and putting into service the complete Telecommunication system including the SDH backbone network. mounting frames cable racks. DPLC/PLC links: Existing line coupling equipment and connections to terminal equipment. OPGW:Optical terminal box provided by others at each outstation and location and the NSCC building. This would be from the Marshalling Cubicle to either the substation control rooms or the respective bays.SDH or PLC communication channel inputs and the communication ports of the RTU devices define the hardware interface boundaries Stations equipped with INDATIC 33 RTUs – The existing marshalling cubicles shall define the contractual boundary for the implementation of the new RTUs. Outstations: Outstation communication ports. access for equipment is feasible and that the Control and Equipment Room designs have been correctly implemented. The Contractor shall ensure that the Master Station equipment can be located where required. teleprotection signalling equipment. The boundary of connections or interfaces to existing equipment or equipment supplied by others shall be: Power Supplies: Primary Distribution Boards provided at the Control Centre building and Distribution Boards in Substations and other required locations that are provided by the Employer. telephone system.6. 1. ventilation devices etc. cabling. and associated interfaces or connections required to complete the working system.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications OPGW: NSCC Building: - Miscellaneous: - Optical terminal box provided by others at each outstation and location and the NSCC building. all cable routes that are required are defined and implemented.32 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . the telecommunication network management system.3 Outstation and Substation Adaptation Works The boundary of connections or interfaces to existing equipment or equipment supplied by others shall be: Stations equipped with Gateway devices – SDH or PLC communication channel inputs and the communication ports of the SAS devices define the hardware interface boundaries. required to complete the installation. connections to channel equipment from Outstations. The contractor shall provide or carry out any minor civil works. Substation equipment: Interfaces to Distance Fault Recorders and frequency measurement devices. PLC links. Communication Systems: Interconnection between the Master Station communication servers/interface and the Communication System(s) including all cabling. where additional signals are required (and this may include controls) or where replacement materials are required the boundary shall be at the points of connection of the required materials. the environmental conditions are as required for the Master Station equipment. connectors. connectors. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. ventilation devices etc. Where replacement or new dc supplies are required the 415Vac distribution boards shall be the interface point. However.

construction and fitting out of the NSCC building. travel.4 Colombo City Distribution Control Centre The Works involved with the Distribution Control Centre will require the following considerations: 1 Installation of necessary telecommunication equipment for the implementation of an ICCP links between the DCC and the new NSCC. design. 2 Coordination with the supplier of the DCC system to set up the required exchange of data. storage and other related activities have occurred. In the case of the electricity services two independent and segregated routes shall be provided by the Contractor that are protected from mechanical damage. protected and segregated routes up to the boundary of the construction site for the communications cables to enter the building. earthwork. administration. In addition to the coordination required with the other sections of work under this Contract the Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of access and routes for services.Section 6 . architectural. The Contractor shall provide all required management. Similarly. accessories and other materials required to complete the installation and setting to work shall be included in the scope of work. The Contractor shall include all work required including reinstatement of disturbed areas within and surrounding the site of construction including areas where the Contractor‘s work force. mechanical. cable trays.6. electrical. However. telephone. Where suitable power supplies exist the interface point shall be the dc distribution boards. ducting.6.6. Connection for IPP stations – The marshalling point in the respective GSS shall be the defined boundary.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Stations that are not equipped with Outstations – In cases where no marshalling cubicles are provided the Contractor shall provide all wiring. The service cables shall be provided by the Employer who will terminate them on Distribution Boards provided by the Contractor. building services and all other associated works and services to complete the design. 1.6 NSCC Building The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete architectural. The Contractor shall also provide suitable termination points for these services. Where replacement or new dc supplies are required the 415Vac distribution boards shall be the interface point. In the cases where there are existing marshalling cubicles these shall define the contractual boundary for the implementation of the new RTUs. water and drainage services to be connected. Diesel Generator and associated control panels and distribution boards and their termination in the primary intake. structural. civil and building services works associated the provision of the NSCC building. equipment. 1. civil. cubicles. connectors. interfaces that are required to implement the full monitoring and control requirements detailed in the station signal lists. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.5 Uninterruptible Power Supply System The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of the complete UPS. The Contractor shall coordinate with the parties responsible within the Employer‘s organisation to ensure that all required data is defined and made available and that all activities required to complete and put into service these facilities for data exchange are carried out. switch rooms and battery room in the new NSCC building. the Contractor shall provide independent. All cables.33 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 1. The Contractor shall provide suitable routes from the boundary of the construction site to enable the electricity. labour. This would be from the Marshalling Cubicle to either the substation control rooms or the respective bays. where additional signals are required (and this may include controls) or where replacement materials are required the boundary shall be at the points of connection of the required materials.

7 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR MANUFACTURES OF PRODUCTS The bidder shall ensure. is designed/manufactured/produced by a manufacturer with a minimum of fifteen (15) years successful experience in designing/manufacturing/producing comparable products.8 THE ENVIRONMENT AND ADHERENCE TO THE ENVIRONMENTAL ACTS. for the strict adherence to the environmental safeguard measures stipulated in the environmental approvals and the relevant documents forming part of such approvals obtained under the above acts/regulations/guidelines with respect to this project. Batteries & 48Vdc Chargers). regulations and/or guidelines with respect to the execution of this project   National Environmental Act No. REGULATIONS AND / OR GUIDELINES The selected contractor is responsible for the full compliance with the following acts. In respect of design of products offered under this bid.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 1. If the offered products are manufactured under license. to the products offered under the contract. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Main Product List: SCADA Application Soft ware EMS Application Software SCADA Hardware Rear Projection Video Wall RTUs Outstation interfacing equipment Fibre Optic terminal equipment Communication interfaces Power line Carrier Equipment Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems (including Diesel Generator. In the case of Computer Based and other electronic equipment the general system shall comply with this requirement whereas the devices used and architecture shall follow the latest models and standards. UPS.34 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 . The Bidder shall provide adequate evidence of compliance to the above requirements to the satisfaction of the CAPC. Building Services M&E equipment 1. The bidders also shall take into consideration the relevant costs that will be incurred. that each main product (listed below) offered under this contract. the service experience of products manufactured by the parent company shall not be counted as service experience of the licensee's products. Bids that do not comply with the above requirements or with incomplete evidence of compliance may be rejected. 47 of 1980 including all the amendments Relevant Environmental safeguard requirements and reports under ADB‘s safeguard policy statement. the bidder shall ensure that identical products in design have been in service for a minimum period of five (5) years.

As defence against internal equipment failures the Master Station shall comprise a set of redundant hardware and software facilities as required to meet the availability requirements of this specification. However.35 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The design is required to ensure that failures of components or sub-systems are detected promptly and that previously redundant components are brought into operational use. The control rooms will be the only common point of failure with respect to external hazards.2. as far as is possible. the Contractor shall develop new software to provide all specified functionality that cannot be achieved using the Contractor‘s standard products. The system and applications to be supplied shall be based on proven products that shall. redundant elements of the master station (principally servers) shall be capable of being located in physically segregated rooms within the Control Centre building(s).1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS General This specification document details the functional requirements of the SCADA/EMS Master Station software to be supplied under this Contract. In this respect. To provide a first level of defence against external. for hardware and software. 2. Due to its pivotal role in the operational management of the power network the SCADA master station at the Control Centre must be secure against internal failures and external hazards. it is important that the objectives of the requirements are met even though the solution may not entirely comply with the Specification. The Bidder shall include details in their offer how each of the specified requirements will be met by naming the standard product/module that provides the specified functionality or by stating the extent of software development required to implement the functionality. without operator intervention. Further to this. and without causing a degradation of functionality or performance. the Contractor shall be responsible for supplying. This Chapter of the specification details the requirement for the Master Station and supporting equipment to be provided at each location.1 INTRODUCTION A new NSCC is to be established to facilitate control and monitoring of the 220/132kV network and the primary feeds to the 33kV networks. certain subsystems shall be replicated such that no single failure shall cause loss of functionality and that the availability of the Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Communication and power cabling shall be physically segregated to support the segregation of redundant hardware and software facilities.2 System Architecture The System design and architecture shall have followed industry standard open systems concepts with regard to interconnections with other equipment conforming to open standards and system upgradeability. 2. be configured to meet these functional requirements. such as fire. In normal operation all subsystems and functions shall be available. NSCC SCADA/EMS 2. However. The Contractor shall endeavour to meet the specified requirements using their standard software products. as well as for data management. all software.2. As a defence against this it shall be possible to utilise any of the workstations located outside the control room as operational workstations including those associated with the maintenance and training facilities.Section 6 . System to be supplied shall be based on mature products that have evolved and been proven in comparable projects. hardware. A new SCADA/EMS Master Station is to be supplied and installed in the newly constructed Control Centre building to provide the control and monitoring facilities. potentially common mode hazards. For example cabling to workstations outside the control room should not run through the control room and cabling to each workstation within the control room should be segregated. within the Contract price. The Bidder shall identify whether the offered solution is a deviation from the specified requirement or an alternative that meets the objectives of the specified requirement.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2. In this context it is recognised that such a system will have standard functional features not specified herein but nevertheless important or essential for the implementation of a fully operational system.2 2. documentation and miscellaneous items required to implement a fully operational system whether or not those items are explicitly specified or requested. The design shall be such that no single failure shall cause the loss or disruption to essential facilities.

The Bidder shall indicate if any additional hardware or software or licences. then duplication is not required. other than the workstations themselves. 2. No additional hardware or software shall be required to accommodate the expansion defined above for the Master Station. The Contractor shall demonstrate in the Factory Tests that these expansion requirements can be achieved without such degradation. In the event of detection of a data transmission error or failure. d) The above expansion shall be achieved without degradation to the availability or performance of the master station. the Master Station shall be capable of expansion to support 2 additional operator workstations within the control room and a further 2. transformers.2. if suitable diversity of printers on servers is provided and automatic reassignment. A two-fold increase in the number of Outstations. This is estimated to be some 50. would be required in order to ensure that the performance of the system is not compromised by such an expansion in the number of workstations. The design shall be such as to avoid interruption of data acquisition because of faults. etc shall be accounted for separately by the Contractor. Any additional capacity required for internal management. Redundant items shall not be vulnerable to the same events. 2. Under no circumstances shall it be possible for the system to lose data and be in an indeterminate state with respect to data validity. 2.Section 6 .4 Reliability and Availability It is a fundamental requirement that each system (and individual items of equipment within them) shall be designed for high reliability and that hardware and standard existing software used within the systems shall have been proven in service.36 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant .000 data points. 400kV). The delivered systems shall be dimensioned according to the following: a) b) c) A four-fold increase in the number of all database points both telemetered and nontelemetered. Indicative outline design for the SCADA system is shown in Drawing TD/CE/1/82/D/SCA-001. generators. Similarly for Master Station printers.g. operator workstations to be located elsewhere via a remote connection.3 Initial and Ultimate Sizing The initial sizing of SCADA Master Station shall meet the requirements of the Outstation telemetered data and non telemetered data. In addition. switches etc.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications functions meets the specified reliability requirements.5 Risks The construction of equipment and its installation shall be such that common mode risks from external hazards are minimised. The expansion capability of SCADA Master Station system is required to match power system developments over its service life of some 15 years. The Contractor shall identify where subsystems need to be replicated to meet the specified requirements: The SCADA Master Station workstations need not be replicated provided the functionality previously available at a failed workstation is automatically available at a pre-defined workstation and by suitable access codes at other operator workstations. The Master Station software including SCADA and applications databases and display facilities shall be dimensioned to accommodate a four fold increase in size of the power network elements (nodes. The Bidder shall demonstrate in the sizing calculation to be provided with the offer that these expansion requirements are provided for and can be achieved without such degradation.2.2.). The system must be designed to allow a faulty item to be removed from service and to be replaced without the functionality of the system being affected. Facilities shall be incorporated to indicate automatically to the operators that the relevant data has not been updated. The introduction of an additional voltage level (e. indications and alarms from the previously successful scan shall continue to be displayed. for example Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B.

1 Data Acquisition The data acquisition software shall be capable of supporting multiple telecontrol protocols for the monitoring and control of substation plant via RTUs and Substation Automation Systems (SAS) with Gateway access.2 Data Processing The SCADA system shall provide a comprehensive and flexible set of facilities for processing telemetered. 2. The data acquisition system shall send out polling requests for data in accordance with a preprogrammed routine so as to maintain the database updated with the latest data from all Outstations. calculated and data from other systems accessible at the NSCC. In the event of detection of a data transmission error or failure.3.2 ICCP Data Links Duplicated ICCP Data Links are required between the NSCC and the Colombo City Distribution Control to support the exchange of operational and commercial data including real time data acquired or calculated by the respective SCADA systems.1. The status of all Outstation communication shall be available for display at any of the Master Station Workstations. All operator actions required to enable and disable data acquisition in the manner outlined above shall be recorded in the events list.1 SCADA APPLICATIONS Communication 2. The IEC 60870 – 6 TASE 2 protocol shall be adopted for these links. 2. manually entered. The following requirements relate to specific types of data. indications and alarms from the previously successful scan shall continue to be displayed on the workstations.3 2. For each communication channel the data acquisition software shall detect loss of communication with an Outstation and raise an alarm.3. Where a report by exception technique is used the data acquisition software shall initiate a full scan of an RTU to retrieve the actual state of the RTU under the following circumstances: a) b) c) d) e) Master Station cold start RTU or SAS reset Restoration of communications Cyclically every 24 hours On request by the operator The facility to ―switch‖ Outstations into or out-of-scan for maintenance or commissioning purposes shall be provided. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 . 2. Where an alternate communication channel to the Outstation is available communication shall be switched automatically by the data acquisition software.3. It shall only be possible to ―switch‖ Outstations by manual command from an appropriate display. The installation plan shall include the measures to be taken to prevent such contingencies and will be subject to approval. Statistics on the performance of each communication channel shall be available for display.1. Segregation shall be used where possible and/or suitable means of protection. Facilities shall be incorporated however to indicate automatically to the operators that the relevant data has not been updated. The data acquisition system shall monitor the performance of each communication channel.3. The data acquisition software shall continue to operate on the alternate communication channel until instructed to switch-over to the main link by the Operator. All existing Outstations that are to remain in service operate using the IEC 60870-5101 protocol new Outstations shall communicate with the master stations using the IEC 60870-5-101 or 104 protocols.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications damage in a location shall not affect both parts of the duplicated/redundant equipment/component or cabling.37 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The system shall also maintain a separate list of all data points which have been manually taken 'off scan'.

A and B are constants that provide the scaling and offset for the analogue value X. the system shall not consider a value to have returned within a set of limits until it has done so by a predefined and operator adjustable margin. When enabled the scanned measured value shall be continuously checked against assigned limit values.For each value of this conversion type a database value is specified below which the converted value will be set to zero. Where conversion of raw data to engineering units is required this shall be configurable on an individual point basis. a value in engineering units. alarm supervision shall be between two adjustable alarm limits. A time-delay filter shall be provided to ensure that any transient limit-transgressions do not result in transient changes to the displayed or annunciated alarm state. All limit violations shall be annunciated as an alarm to the operator and recorded on the event list. To ensure that items whose values are varying just above and just below alarm limits do not generate a constant stream of alarms. an event shall be recorded in the event list.3. and shall be amendable on-line by the Operator. scaled and presented dependent upon the form in which the data is collected from the Outstation. Amendments to the active limits shall generate a message indicating the changes made to the limit values within the event list. Unique pairs of A and B are provided for each analogue point requiring this conversion. If this value is exceeded the last valid value shall be displayed and an out-of-range attribute shall mark the data item. A*X+B conversion . at database construction.1 Measured Values Scaling Measured values shall be converted. For bipolar measured values alarm supervision shall be between four adjustable alarm limits. This period shall be a system wide parameter.Section 6 . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The following conversion types shall therefore be provided for measured value scaling: a) b) No conversion .38 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Suppressed zero . below which the voltage shall be stored as zero.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2. For monopolar measured values. based on the number (1 or more) of consecutive scans for which the transgression is true. When disabled no limit checking shall apply to the selected measured value.The value in raw counts is stored directly in the database unchanged. It shall be possible for the alarm limits to be amended on-line by the Operator. An A*X conversion is provided by setting the B constant (offset) to zero. The following sign conventions for real and reactive power flow shall be used universally throughout the SCADA system: a) All active and reactive power flowing into a busbar shall be positive b) Limits All limit values shall be in engineering units. It shall be possible to specify for each voltage. All active and reactive power flowing out of a busbar shall be negative. c) Each measured value shall have an associated 'value out of range' raw data value threshold. To avoid annunciation of certain transitory conditions it shall also be possible to delay the annunciation of an alarm for a defined period. Whenever a measurement returns within limits from a limit violation.2.

Overrides shall be enterable and removable wherever the value is displayed subject to appropriate user function authority. a protection signal that is present for the duration of operation only) and non-fleeting or persistent (signal that remains in changed state until state changes again e. The System shall only permit the application of overrides for measured values by users with the appropriate area of authority. The ability to differentiate between ‗authorised‘ status changes. In many cases the indication wiring and interposing relays are existing and have been implemented as single point status signals. shall be provided.Digital Points Status Indications comprise signals formed as single or double point values. The appearance of digital points on displays shall be modified when an override has been applied. such as occur due to commands initiated by the operator. most signals are in this category) alarms. All measurements shall be eligible for overriding. . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B. All status changes shall be processed immediately. An output must be obtained from each of the two positions (e. protection operation.2 Status Indications .39 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope by a return to normal alarm when the Procurement of Plant . All digital points shall be eligible for overriding.g. Status changes arising from operator issued commands shall not be treated as an alarm condition.g. Single Points In general this category encompasses alarm and status indications.3. Overridden values shall not be updated by values telemetered from Outstations or calculated by the system for values which are scan inhibited. shall not result in an alarm signal until a predetermined period has elapsed to allow the device to reach its final position. On removal of an override the value shall be marked suspect until the value has been updated from the telemetered source or recalculated. The system shall also be able to process these as switch position but without the ‗validity‘ logic.g. Manual Overrides Facilities shall be provided for overriding digital point values with fixed values entered via the user Interface. 2. Unacknowledged limit alarms shall be annunciated again measured value returns within limits. Double Points Double point indications shall be used to indicate the status of circuit breaker and switch position (Open or Closed) and other devices where a higher integrity is required than is possible with single point indication. these being fleeting (momentary signal e.2.g. 00 or 11) shall result in the data being declared invalid. e. The appearance of values on displays shall be different when an override has been applied. 10 or 01) so that a persistent invalid combination (e.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Acknowledged limit alarms associated with the measured value shall not generate an additional alarm. Two forms of alarms shall be supported. Manual Overrides Facilities shall be provided for overriding measured values with fixed values entered via the User Interface.Section 6 . but shall be removed from the alarm list when the measured value returns within limits. Transitory conditions that generate intermediate signals as may occur with disconnects. Overridden values shall not be updated by values telemetered from Outstations or calculated by the system for values which are scan inhibited. and ‗unauthorised‘ changes such as occur from other actions.g.

Section 6 . The operands that shall be supported are as follows: a) Arithmetic       b) Unary   c) Square root Unary negation Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Exponentiation Modulus Boolean     Logical AND Logical OR Logical exclusive-OR Logical NOT d) Relational       Greater than > Greater than or equal to  Less than <  Less than or equal to Equal to Not equal to =  e) Functions      Absolute Minimum Maximum Logarithm Natural logarithm Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 2.2.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications On removal of an override the digital point shall be marked suspect until the value has been updated from the telemetered source or recalculated. On removal of an override the SCADA shall immediately request the present status of the point from the RTU.3. The construction of these derived data values shall be operator orientated and not require the use of the tools used for database management and manipulation. Overrides shall be enterable and removable wherever the digital point is displayed subject to appropriate user function authority.40 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .3 Derived Data Facilities shall be provided for deriving data values from other data items (including other derived measured values and digitals from anywhere in the system). The definition of a derived measured value shall permit the prioritisation of elements within a calculation.

A facility shall be provided for setting up and synchronising the stored values such that there is consistency with the actual measuring device. A derived measured value shall be processed in the same way as any other measurement. day. The energy metering data collected by the SCADA shall be stored within the SCADA system. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The alarm generated by the tap position processor shall be used to determine whether there is a fault on the tap position indication circuitry. area. 2. with appropriate functional authority.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications    Statistics Summation Sine. Examples of derived values that will be used are: -Line currents calculated from MW. limit checking and propagation of quality attributes. It is anticipated that the storage will be achieved by use of the historical data processing and storage facilities and may include some pre-processing such as totalisation by period.6.3. The performance requirements for the processing of derived values are specified in Clause 2. There would normally be an out of step indication as well derived directly from the AVR system.3.2 Event Inhibited The event inhibit attribute is applied when the data item is active and up-to-date but no event or alarm is to be annunciated or recorded even if a limit is transgressed or a change of status is detected. A lack of any other quality attribute can be used to indicate this state.2.2. 2.3. monthly and annual energy figures by substation. The arrangement should be such as to ensure the integrity of the data after temporary loss of the SCADA or communications.1 Normal Data A normal data item is defined as one which is active.3. region and for the total system. area.6 Data Quality Attributes All telemetered data.41 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .2. e. 2.5 Tap Position These shall be processed from transducers with mA or binary coded outputs and displayed as integer number tap positions.4 Meter Values Energy metering values will be available as pulsed inputs to Outstations.g. up-to-date and uninhibited. MVAr and Voltage measurements -MVA calculated from MW and MVAr values -MW values calculated from MWh values averaged over 15 minute periods -MVAr values calculated from MVArh values averaged over 15 minute periods -MWh and MVArh values calculated from MW values over defined periods or accumulative values 2. These attributes shall be propagated with the status or value of each data item.3. etc. The quality attributes required as a minimum are given in the following sub-clauses. This condition shall be annunciated as an alarm. The system shall provide facilities to enable the user. cosine and tangent and their inverse functions.2. Where master-follower equipment is installed the process shall identify whether a slave tap changer is out of step with the master. 2.6. to set or clear the event inhibit attribute on-line.2. And be available in one line and tabular displays. The SCADA system shall be able to report the daily. derived data and received via ICCP data link shall have attributes associated with each value that define the current quality of the data.12.

2. A change of state resulting from a successful control shall not generate an audible annunciation.2. such as when: a) A control check-back failure occurs at any stage b) c) d) A control is not executed within a predetermined time of selection There is a failure of a main computer resulting in a restart or changeover to a standby computer. Facilities shall be provided to inhibit control of any plant item suitable for supervisory control.g. Failure of a control shall be indicated by de-selection of the plant item and the presentation of an informative message. Only one valid control order may be sent at any time to a given Outstation.2. In communicating commands to the Outstations.g. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. It shall not be possible to control an item where an applied tag is specified as an interlock. The transmission of a command signal.6 Propagation of Quality Attributes A derived item shall have its suspect. e.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2. 2.6.42 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Controls may be individual or part of a user definable sequence. The system shall also cancel controls automatically.Section 6 .7 Controls The system shall provide the facility to control plant and equipment by telecommand.2. 2. The failed control shall generate an alarm and initiate audible annunciation. then an incorrect selection indication shall be given. then the command shall be blocked and an appropriate message given to the operator.3. the following conditions must be satisfied: a) b) Initiation of a command shall involve a ‗select before operate‘ procedure. e. The override feature shall be separate from the facility to change manually-dressed (non-telemetered and non-derived) data items.3. to trip a breaker which is in the open position. but the device is selected to local control at the substation. Any plant item so inhibited shall have suitable identification on the displays. If equipment suitable for remote control is selected. overridden or value-out-of-range attribute(s) set if any of its constituent elements has the corresponding attribute(s) set. Errors occur in the control protocol sequences. 2. An item shall remain suspect until a valid update is received.6.3.6.4 Overridden Data The overridden attribute shall apply when the value of a data item has been manually replaced.3.2. If equipment is selected which is unsuitable for remote control or if the wrong control initiation is attempted. However.5 Value-Out-of-Range The value-out-of-range attribute shall mark a measured value as exceeding the metering range of the measuring device. Successful completion of a control shall be indicated by update of its new telemetered state and the presentation of a confirmatory message. ‗close‘ or ‗trip‘ shall not interrupt the receipt of incoming data from the Outstation.6. 2.3 Suspect Data Data shall be marked suspect if the item is active but the updating of its value or status is discontinued for any reason other than an applied override.3. control orders may be sent to different Outstations at the same time. This should be confirmed to the Master Station from the appropriate Outstation.

Typically. Many events will arise from initiating conditions that have two well defined states and.43 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant . both contacts open or both contacts closed for longer than a defined time).3. An ‗alarm‘ is defined as an annunciated event. single bit state changes shall be evaluated by the system in the context of a coded group of bits for the purpose of registering an event. where both the open and closed states are monitored by separate auxiliary contacts) it will normally be required to record as events only two of the four transitions (i. Illegal values shall be alarmed.3.g. e and selected instances of i above.e.2 Event Handling As events are processed.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Cancellation shall return the plant item to a state in which a new operation may be selected.3.3. it will be required that the transitions between both states are recorded as events.3. c. log 'OFF' actions Measurand limit violations Manual diagram dressing actions Alarm acknowledgements System configuration and data amendment actions Conditions derived from the logical combinations of signals. alarms may be generated from any of sources a. requiring acknowledgement by an operator. when the breaker moves to the closed position and when it moves to the open position). fault messages Log 'ON'. However. 2. Event description text shall be appended to each item in the event list and be available for printing.3.   2. in the majority of cases.Section 6 . The Telecommand Log shall identify the user. In the case of double point indications. the signal shall be processed to give a discrete integer value output corresponding to the tap position and changes between these discrete values shall be handled as an event. a further event shall be derived from any incongruent condition arising between the independent contacts (e. Illegal values shall be alarmed.1 Event Descriptions Event descriptions shall comprise the following information for each event: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B. The actual events to be defined as alarms shall be user configurable. e. All control actions and individual steps of switching sequences shall be logged in a single Telecommand Log which shall be available for display on-line and/or printed if required.g. circuit breaker status. Where analogue transducers are used to provide transformer tap position indications.3. a) A state change of a binary signal input at an Outstation b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) A supervisory control action issued from the master station System generated messages. time and date of the occurrence of each entry.2. the resulting changes shall be used to update the real-time database. Certain exceptions to the normal interpretation of events shall apply:  A state change [source (a) events] normally expected to result from a supervisory control action [source (b) events] shall only be interpreted by the system as an alarm when the associated control command has not been issued. In the case of double point status indications (e.3 Alarm and Event Processing 2. 2. whether or not a transition is recorded as an event shall be user configurable. control action tracking messages. Where binary coding of transformer tap positions is employed. and dynamic display facilities.1 Definition An ‗Event‘ is defined as any change of state or threshold transition and includes the following. This situation shall also give rise to an alarm and the representation of the corresponding device upon diagram displays as being in an 'undefined' state.g.

3. The list shall be updated automatically with new entries as they enter the system. it shall be possible to generate an audible annunciation for selected alarms by setting attributes in the database. 2. as required. A search and sort facility shall be available to the operator. as required. location.3. message descriptions. it shall be automatically brought to the Operators‘ attention via the Graphic User Interface GUI. The criteria shall be entered through a pro forma mask that the operator shall be able to call up. so that it always displays the most recent entries. A list of substations and SCADA system groups with unacknowledged alarms shall be available to the operator. the value of the limit transgressed and the actual value of the measurand The value entered for manual entries Event list When an event list is first called up for display in a list window. It shall also be possible to save a number of search criteria for quick access and use in the future. whereby he shall be able to produce a reduced list.3. upon operator request.3. incorporating features such as variable Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.g. status.3 Alarm Management Where an event is configured as an alarm. to provide visual continuity. Additionally. source location.g. 2. message descriptions. but each new page displayed shall retain some lines from the previous page. NORMAL) Operator's identity (for e. If page 1 (most recent entries) of a list is displayed. incorporating features such as variable length character string searches and the use of wildcard characters.Section 6 . alarm acknowledgements) For limit violations. The search and sort facility shall be very flexible. Each alarm entry shall include the time and date of occurrence. message type. Event list shall be sized to accommodate at least 10 000 events and shall automatically archive any overflow on a first in first out basis. to achieve rapid location of any portion of a list.2 Date and time from the event message time stamp Location description (e. When the page is full the system shall refresh the display to ensure that the latest events are shown. the most recent page of entries shall be presented. action. whereby he shall be able to produce a reduced list. operator identity. The criteria shall be entered through a pro forma mask that the operator shall be able to call up. etc. operator identity. substation name) Voltage level (where appropriate) Circuit description (where appropriate) Signal specific description (e. it shall be paged automatically. A search and sort facility shall be available to the operator. filtered and sorted according to certain criteria. An operator shall be able to send the search output to a printer or a disc file. including either end of the list. manual dressing actions.g.2. It shall be possible to use the jump and page controls at will. and device or other identifier. OPERATED. The operator shall be able to page through the lists in either direction.3.3. The search and sort facility shall be very flexible. backup protection) Signal state (e. source location.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) 2. The mask shall allow entry of search and sort criteria such as: date/time. message type. commands. value and normal limits. In addition to the paging mechanism. filtered and sorted according to certain criteria.g. The alarm lists shall be displayed in chronological order with the most recent alarm first with the occurrence of new alarms handled in the same manner as events. The mask shall allow entry of search and sort criteria such as: date/time. there shall be a facility to jump immediately to an approximate position within the list.44 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .1 Alarm Lists Alarms shall be displayed on Acknowledged and Unacknowledged alarm lists. etc.3.

Section 6 . a) Priority b) c) d) e) f) g) Voltage level Substation Equipment type System Area of responsibility Time period A display shall also be provided which identifies all substations with unacknowledged alarms. Each suppression command shall be recorded on the event list. A nuisance alarm shall be defined by the occurrence of a user definable number of changes of state within a user definable period Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the message for both conditions shall remain in the alarm list and device symbols shall flash at half the rate of the alarm conditions. The acknowledgement shall be logged in the event list. It shall also be possible to save a number of search criteria for quick access and use in the future.3. 2. If the alarm is persistent it shall be displayed on the Acknowledged alarm list.3.3.2 Alarm Sequence All alarms shall be brought to the attention of the operators. d) e) f) The operator shall have the facility to accept alarms individually.3. Any device being displayed on a one line diagram to which the alarm is associated shall flash.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications length character string searches and the use of wildcard characters. Reset of alarm condition shall be treated in the same manner as the onset except that on acknowledgement the onset and reset messages shall be removed from the alarm list. It shall be possible to navigate directly to the substation unacknowledged alarm page from this display. This facility is intended for use in cases where faulty signals generate repetitive nuisance events and alarms. It‘s priority shall be highlighted with the use of colour. Silencing alarms shall not inhibit the annunciation of further alarms or constitute an acknowledgement of the alarm. b) c) The audible alarm may be silenced by the operator(s). 2.3. Flashing shall not be used in the alarm lists.3. Where the reset condition occurs before the onset has been acknowledged. Alarm list shall be sized to accommodate 5000 Alarms and shall automatically archive any overflow on a first in first out basis.45 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .3 Alarm suppression The software shall support two forms of alarm suppression manual and automatic. If the alarm is fleeting it shall disappear from the alarm lists. The alarm message will be acknowledged by the operator. For manual suppression. it shall be possible for the operator to suppress the processing of individual alarm. The presence of an unacknowledged alarm which has reset shall be indicated by colour in the alarm list. The alarm sequence shall be as follows: a) At the onset of the alarm condition the alarm will be entered into the alarm window. on a page basis and from diagrams on a device basis. and into the Unacknowledged alarm list where displayed. The system shall support the automatic suppression of nuisance alarms. Symbols on the one line diagrams shall cease flashing when the alarm is acknowledged.

3. The total pre event and post event storage times shall be readily adjustable using simple user instructions. per fault. Events where a time stamp is applied to a signal on receipt by the Master Station b. incorporating all additional detail necessary to furnish a comprehensive and fully functional interface for interaction with the system. The list will have the facility to sort the alarms suppressed by to display those by station and/or by type either manual or automatic suppression.4 Printing of Alarm & Event Lists Operators shall also be able to request the printing of all or a portion of any event or alarm list or search for an output list (see above) by defining the start and end points through a screen pro-forma or dialogue.3. such as Operator. All suppressed alarms either manually by the operator or automatically shall be displayed on a list suppressed alarm list.1 General The following sub-clauses outline the general functional requirements and principles of operation for the Graphic User Interface. etc. Events that are time stamped on occurrence by the Outstation The sequence of events processor shall maintain a chronological list of events that can be viewed on a station. 2. The Bidder may offer a system that records all data samples and provides facilities to construct such reports. Engineer. 2. Access control shall be provided which requires all users to identify themselves and enter passwords before being granted access. e.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications of time. An alarm shall be generated indicating that the event has been automatically been suppressed. 2.Section 6 . The records shall be available for inclusion in reports and shall be readily viewable by Operators at their workstations.3.4. When the number of changes of state fall below the user defined threshold then the SCADA software shall remove the automatic suppression of the alarm. The operator shall be able to define the start and end points in terms of message identity numbers or date/time stamps. The design of the User Interface shall be based on standard software packages.4.g. The data shall be readily available to include in reports.2 Access Control The SCADA system software shall be capable of supporting different levels of user. It is not intended that they should define in detail the methods of presenting information to the operator and the means of operator interaction with the system. Under these conditions the SCADA software shall automatically suppress the processing of this alarm. 2. A ‗first in first out‘ log of values and events shall be maintained such that following predefined alarm conditions the values of measurements and status (received from the entire telemetry system) for the previous 5 minutes and the values for the following 10 minutes shall be stored and made available in a disturbance monitoring record. The workstations shall be capable of supporting as a minimum the number of windows per display specified in the Schedules.4 Graphic User Interface (GUI) 2.3.6 Disturbance Monitoring A facility to record events associated with disturbances shall be provided. 2. circuit or system basis. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Supervisor. Rather.3.3.46 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . It shall be possible to alter the duration of the pre and post event recording by simple Operator settings. System Manager. The initiating of such recording shall also be possible from logical rules and calculated values.5 Sequence of Events Processing Sequence of events processing shall be provided whereby the order of occurrence of events shall processed for: a.3.3. An organised approach to handling multiple windows. is preferred. An alarm reset shall be generated indicating the removal of the automatic suppressed condition. The process shall also group the data on an event basis. which allows the operator to save and subsequently restore the screen layout and its contents.3. the main functional requirements and principles of operation have been defined and it is required that the Contractor shall develop his design accordingly.

These shall include selection of individual stations from the overview diagram and by database search selection using the station name or mnemonic.3. over/under voltage etc. historical.3.) Geographical areas Designated areas of responsibility Editing or creating data files. etc.2 Network Connectivity Display Network Topology Processing The topology of the power network shall be monitored to determine the network connectivity. It shall be possible to show the operating status of any circuit. Connectivity shall be determined and held for each version of the network image resident in the database. Access privileges shall be freely definable and shall determine access to areas such as: a) Functions (controls. 2. earthed. The connectivity data shall be updated automatically whenever a topology change is detected. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Additional means of navigating the network diagram shall be provided apart from panning. energised. earthing switches.3. bus couplers/section switches. with progressively more detail including measurement values shown as the display is zoomed in.1 Network Displays The network display facilities shall use the principle of a ‗world map‘ whereby different levels of detail from geographic overview to detailed substation plant/circuit are accessible. etc.4. isolated. The access control facilities shall be arranged to restrict functional access to predefined users. Schematic layouts shall be represented in which the substations are laid out in approximate geographic positions with the interconnections shown by orthogonal lines with minimal crossovers.) b) c) d) e) f) Data (real time. degree of loading including (warning and alarm states).3. including transformers. as a result of telemetered status changes and/or manual diagram dressing. buses. An alarm event shall be generated whenever the topology processor encounters a circuit arrangement resulting in the interconnection of the secondary windings of two transformers in either the same or different substations at the distribution level (11 kV or 33kV). by use of colour. whether real time or study cases. 2. It shall also be possible to navigate directly to the network display of an item of plant which is in alarm by selection from the alarm list (and similarly to an alarm list entry from an item in alarm on the network diagram). etc. disconnected. Fast panning shall be supported to traverse the entire network display and zoom/declutter facilities shall allow a large area of the network to be seen with a low level of detail.4.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The system shall be capable of supporting a minimum 32 different levels of users. It shall also be possible for the operator to access any data which has been associated with the plant item by selecting the item on the diagram displayed on the workstation.4. disconnects/isolators.Section 6 . The search facility shall allow the use of 'wild cards' so that it is not necessary to enter the full name. displays. The main network display shall be updated in real time with plant status and measurement information from SCADA or manually dressed and shall be used for initiating control actions and recording a variety of information concerned with the operation of the network.47 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Generally the design of displays shall focus on clarity and bringing abnormal conditions to the attention of operators. When fully zoomed in the diagram shall show the level of detail traditionally included on substation one line diagrams making these unnecessary. Database and graphic display amendment The actual access privileges and users will be defined during the detailed implementation phase of the project. reports. etc. The displays shall include most items of plant explicitly. shading and line format. reports.3.3 Displays 2.

style or thickness but not flashing). This function shall have both global and operator selective modes. although default selections shall normally apply.3. 2. The actual line attribute change invoked shall be freely user definable. each feeder) shall be distinguishable from others (i.g. energy meter advances (kWh.6 System Displays The following ‗System‘ displays shall be provided with the purpose of providing the operators with key system information:  Total System Demand (TSD) in MW as a digital readout derived from the SCADA/EMS system which shall calculate the TSD by comparing the TSG and the system frequency deviation. different colours or line types).3. frequency (Hz).3. MW. In operator selective mode. The line display attributes for the connectivity presentation function shall be set up in a priority display table such that when an operator invokes multiple connectivity traces (i. or a change of line type (e. originating at the primary substation source circuit breaker and terminating at the open point(s) of the circuit (feeder). 2. kVAh) and other measurements shall be available for display.Section 6 .        Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.e.e.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Connectivity Presentation The operator shall be able to call up connectivity information for superposition upon a network diagram display. TSD = TSG + ACE Total System Generation (TSG) in MW as a digital readout derived from the SCADA/EMS system by summing the generation outputs of all synchronised generators. These displays shall be driven by telemetered and manually entered data and shall indicate warning and alarm conditions. more than one feeder) on a display at any one time. each connectivity trace (i.3. Clear down shall be by manual command and automatically upon closure of the display window. the operator would position the cursor on a circuit element in the portion of the network of interest and all circuit elements electrically connected to that selected shall be traced and identified by the System.48 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . transformer tap positions. tables of measured values comprising circuit loading (A. Separate commands shall be available to enable the operator to clear down the connectivity traces both individually and globally. Area Control Error in MW derived by the AGC application Actual Time as real clock time and date Synchronous time derived from the system frequency Time deviation calculated from Actual Time – Synchronous Time Water levels for reservoirs and ponds System Frequency derived directly from the HV busbars of the adjacent Grid Sub Station. MVAr).3 Hydro Complex Displays Displays representing the hydro complexes shall be provided that show water levels for reservoirs and ponds in a cascade overview indicating spill gate operation.4. In global mode.4. 2. near spill and whether operation is near minimum limits.3.4 Tabular displays For each station. For example. In addition to these displays being available on Operator VDUs and the Video Wall.3. The identification shall be carried out by means of a change of colour. The operator shall have the facility of an independent command to visually accentuate the open points in the network. if yellow colouring is set up by the system engineer as the default line attribute. selection of the connectivity presentation function by the operator shall cause the lines of the relevant portion of the network to be displayed in yellow. voltages (kV). but not during panning and zooming actions.3. 2.4.3.e. Automatic clear down shall occur upon closure of the display window.4.5 Video Wall displays The video wall display shall be capable of presenting any of the Graphic and Tabular displays available in the system. all islands of interconnected equipment shall be highlighted. permanent pictorial displays shall be located adjacent to the Video Wall.

step zooming). The display of the other 6 frequency measurements shall be operator selectable and presented in the same panel. smooth panning and zooming) and to provide one step control functions (e. dialogue prompts and help screens. rather than completely filling the pro forma each time. Where practicable. All operator entries shall be checked by the system for validity and plausibility.3. Where text entry is more appropriate for the interaction or dialogue between an operator and the system. step-by-step. It should be noted that the frequency measurements are the most critical system control variables and are required to be displayed without any delays incurred in the SCADA acquisition process and must be available in the event that the SCADA system fails. preferably via the use of pop-up menus.7 Display Interaction The User Interface shall be designed to maximise the use of graphical interaction implemented using standard software wherever possible and to this end it must be stated where the standard software. selecting an alarm entry in a list may be configured to open a diagram window and display the related substation at an appropriate level of detail. 2.4 Supervisory Control The sequences employed to execute all required selection and control tasks. Context sensitive help screens shall always be available to the operator to assist him to interact with the system. An explanatory message shall be displayed. These reasons shall include the following: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. With the exception of the latter 6 frequency measurements these values shall be permanently displayed on a panel adjacent to the video wall. through each sequence by identifying the remaining valid entries. pointer selectable "softkey" symbols shall be available for use by the operator. Where appropriate. previous values or default values shall be entered into the interactive fields by the system. so that an operator only needs to make amendments. the help screens shall consist of the relevant pages of the Operators' Manual. Softkey control shall avoid the use of more cumbersome menu selection sequences in situations where one step execution of and rapid switching between functions is desirable.49 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Wherever possible. Provision shall be made for 3 such frequency measurements to be displayed simultaneously. 2. All such facilities shall be context sensitive and. Warning messages shall indicate if for any reason the selected control action is not possible. for example. Any invalid entry shall be detected by the software and ignored. Such soft keys shall duplicate equivalent selections available via the keyboard and through menus and shall typically be used to switch between mouse controlled actions (e. Linking shall also be possible between text lists (e. they shall be displayed sequentially at approximately the same position on the screen.g.Section 6 . the (latched) selection of a softkey function shall be visually indicated by a change of softkey appearance. For example. These shall contain field descriptions that readily identify the required information to the operator. It shall then be possible to continue the sequence with a valid entry.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications   System Frequency Trend derived directly from the above measurement A further 6 frequency measurements shall be available for display that are derived from other GSS or generating stations and provided by direct communication via digital channels supplied under this contract.3. The operator shall not be permitted to make invalid entries. an alarm list) and other windows. Where a command sequence requires selection from a series of menus. does not comply with the functional requirements detailed herein. Selection of a softkey function shall automatically cancel any alternative (mutually exclusive) selections previously made. All user actions shall be initiated using a mouse/trackball and keyboard using standard methods. as offered. It shall be possible to navigate directly from station single line level to both station acknowledged and unacknowledged alarm lists. pro forma screens (data entry masks) and dialogue boxes shall be used.4.4. The software shall also guide the user. For rapid selection and control of diagram manipulative functions in particular.3. only menu options relevant to the command sequence being executed shall be presented to the operator for selection. via the workstation.g. shall be by standard methods.g.

3. shall be provided. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. subsequent inadvertent operation of the ‗execute‘ key shall be prevented. Status changes arising from operator issued commands shall not be treated as alarm conditions. the ''circuit breaker deadline close' command should be issued by the operator. which will latch the command until one of the following occurs: the relay closes the 'circuit breaker. "incoming" and "phase angle" voltages to bus wires. Three special control signals are associated with such breakers: ''circuit breaker sync select'. the ''circuit breaker sync close' command should be issued by the operator.g. circuit breaker closing will be initiated by a 'circuit breaker close' command issued by the operator. the following conditions must be satisfied: a) Initiation of a command shall involve a ‗select before operate‘ procedure. This command shall be interlocked in software to prevent its issue if voltages exist on both sides of the 'circuit breaker. The ''circuit breaker sync select' command is latched within the switchgear control panel and connects the appropriate "running". In communicating commands to the Outstations. In the event that a command sequence is left incomplete. or the ''circuit breaker sync deselect' command is issued by the operator.4. if correct. This shall be achieved either by a 30 s time-out function initiated by the key sequence reaching the ‗execute‘ stage.4. e. Circuit breaker closure will be controlled as follows: (a) Where voltages are present on both sides of the 'circuit breaker. These voltages shall also be transmitted to the Master Station for display to the operator. Certain circuit breaker closing command schemes will incorporate synchronising relays. However. 2. ''circuit breaker sync close' and ''circuit breaker deadline close'. Alternatively the validity of the command should be checked at the main computer and. and ‗unauthorised‘ changes such as occur from other actions.50 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . i. This should be confirmed to the Master Station from the appropriate Outstation.Section 6 .e. (b) Where voltage exists on only one side of a 'circuit breaker. to trip a breaker which is in the open position d) Device or other device at the Outstation is already selected for control e) Device has controls inhibited f) Device has a tag applied which is specified as an interlock All command sequences shall be terminated by pressing an ‗execute‘ key. ‗close‘ or ‗trip‘ shall not interrupt the receipt of incoming data from the Outstation. e.g. The transmission of a command signal. transmitted to the Outstation at very high security. a watchdog timer expires. Unlatching will be performed locally by the closing logic. control orders may be sent to different Outstations at the same time. such as occur due to commands initiated by the operator. A ‗cancel‘ key shall be provided to allow termination of the command sequence. Checking for synchronism and dead line conditions will be carried out locally by the switchgear control scheme. by means of appropriate check synchronism and dead bus relays. b) The ability to differentiate between ‗authorised‘ status changes. protection operation.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications a) Device is not suitable for remote control b) Device is selected to local control at the substation c) Redundant control initiation is attempted. Normally. or through the ''circuit breaker sync deselect' command (common for the substation).1 Circuit Breakers Only one valid circuit breaker control order may be sent at any time to a given Outstation. This will initiate the synchronising action of the local synchronising relay.

If a control sequence fails because of an unsuccessful check or control. therefore. Automatic controls shall be issued by the control sequence function. 2. Feedback of command execution will be by an associated change in the indicated tap position.7.6 Set Point Control Means shall be provided to transmit set point values to Outstations for output as analogue or binary coded signals. Power station operators‘ acknowledgements shall be transmitted to the master station via the respective Outstations.3. Facilities shall be provided to allow the switching between automatic and manual control of the AVR‘s. All sequences shall consist of checks. Associated with each sequence shall be a text description to allow the operator to identify what will be achieved by the sequence and a summary of the steps involved. When selected to manual control. with a single control.51 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Where set points are used for the transmission of MW and MVAr target indications to displays at power stations. via the GUI. The operator shall be required to enter that the control instruction has been issued before the sequence will continue.4. 2. It shall be possible to execute a sequence automatically or on a step by step basis. from an EMS function).Section 6 .3. Any check must be successful before the system proceeds to the next step. The initiation and completion of a predefined control sequence shall be logged. the following principle of operation is expected to apply.1 Non-telemetered data Network diagrams may contain variable elements. it shall be possible for raise and lower commands to be issued to the tap changers from the master station.7 Manual Dressing 2. If acknowledgement is not received after a preset time (user configurable) an alarm shall be generated and a message shall be displayed to the System Control Room operators. Manual controls included within a sequence shall be carried out under instruction from the operator. the need for set point acknowledgement may vary. The system shall handle a sequence generated control exactly as if it had been manually generated and shall provide all of the necessary time-outs and check of plant status. Such set points may be used for machine control or remote indication.4.2 Tap Changers Under normal operation.4. This shall require the operator to decide whether to continue by retrying the check or to cancel the sequence. The raise and lower commands shall not require an execute action by the operator. These facilities shall include syntax and logical validity checks on the sequence. then an appropriate operator alarm message shall be generated and the sequence shall enter a paused state.3. Checks shall provide the facility within a sequence to verify that an item of plant is in a particular state or that an analogue value is within pre-defined limits. etc.5 Sequence Control Facilities shall be provided for the creation and editing of predefined control sequences to facilitate complex switching operations such as feeder switching. manual controls and delays. transformer tap changers will be controlled by automatic voltage regulating (AVR) relays.3. and this aspect shall be user configurable.3. Where the transmitted values have been manually set by an operator or the output of an EMS function has been manually endorsed by an operator receipt of new set point values at the remote station will produce an indication that they require acknowledgement by power station operators. 2.4.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2.4. at the substation. line switching. It shall be possible to configure such set points independently for manual entry. A failed check shall cause the sequence to suspend operation and alert the operator that this has occurred. Once acknowledgement is received. busbar changing. Circuit breakers and other remote controlled plant included in a control sequence selected for execution or being executed shall be identified on displays by a symbol.4. automatic controls. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. which are manually-dressed by the operators. the master station automatically resets the indication to show that acknowledgement is no longer required. or for automatic transmission (eg.

In such cases of multiple tags the tag shall be presented in such a way to show that other tags are present.7. These other tags shall be readily opened via the ‗priority‘ tag.3. shall be logged as an event.52 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.g. but the system shall also support user-definable tags: a) Permit-to-Work (PTW) b) c) d) e) f) g) Sanction for Test (SFT) Operational restriction Point of Isolation Earth point. Each tag placement. It shall be possible to set a number of tags for the same object but only the tag with the highest priority (Operator definable/selectable) will be displayed.9 Diagram Tagging 2. up to sixteen trends of real-time data or historical data. 2. The notepad pages shall enable supporting textual and graphical information to be held in the system. to insert a new (manually-dressed) value for the element.3. where it shall act as a selection point to tag data and corresponding notepad pages associated with each tag. with a suitable error message being displayed on the screen.1 General The operator shall have the facility to tag network diagrams to indicate various conditions. circuit breaker closure) associated with the element is disabled.2 Telemetered Data It shall be possible from the operator workstation to remove from scan any measurement. as described above. It is essential that all tag lists and associated notepad pages are held on disc to ensure non-volatility of data in the event of a total Master Station shutdown. 2.8 Trending The system shall be capable of displaying any measured value in graphical form to show the trend of the value over a selected time period. the following tags shall be provided.4. returned to their normal presentation and hence regularly updated on the displays. modification and removal shall be accompanied by an entry in the event list. This shall be suitably indicated on the display by a symbol or tag to indicate the removal from scan. Fault Information It shall be possible to place a tag marker anywhere on a diagram. It shall be possible for the operator to link the tag to diagram elements. The system shall support as a minimum 16 different tags. or indication that comes within the operators area of responsibility.4.4. from the workstation. with the manual-dressing also suitably indicated by a symbol or tag.3. On manual restoration of the elements back into service the readings shall again be recorded in the database. The system must recognise an attempt by the operator to make an invalid manual-dressing operation and this should be blocked. It shall then be possible. The manually-dressed changes shall be inserted automatically in the database and logged as an event. In particular.Section 6 . 2. The manually-dressed changes shall be inserted automatically in the database and thus on all other displays on which that element occurs.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Operators may change the status of manually-dressed elements on receipt of verbal instructions from site stating the actual element position. It shall be possible to compare on the same display. Manual-dressing operations. The trend display shall have adjustable x and y axis. so that control actions (e.4.3.9.

10 2. The system shall issue an alarm when the PTW/SFT files are 90% full.4. 2. advising that archiving is due to be carried out. 2.5 Operator’s Notepad The System shall provide a facility to allow operator‘s to create notes or messages to other operators.3.9. in the manner described for tag list entries. such that: a) b) c) Quick access links shall be established between the associated notepad pages. telemetered earthing point status information and manual diagram dressing information.4. with the following supplementary information: a) Unique tag number (automatically allocated by the system and corresponding to that displayed on the diagram) b) c) d) e) f) g) Date and time of placement or removal Location and circuit description of tagged item Operator's identity Description of tagging action .3.1 Printing Printer Management Facilities All printers supplied shall be under the control of printer management facilities which provide buffering such that print requests do not disable operator interaction at a workstation whilst printing is taking Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3.9.10.53 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .4.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2.3 Permits-to-Work and Sanction for Test Tags It shall be possible for an operator to easily link points of isolation and earth point tags to PTW/SFT tags.3.2 Tag Lists Each tag type shall have its associated listing.4 Earthing List The earthing list shall hold a comprehensive record of all earths applied to the network.3. 2. The notes shall be stored in the System and their existence shall be indicated on displays to catch the attention of operators.Section 6 .9.9. The list shall hold earth tag entries.3. list entries and diagrams An operator shall be able to initiate an automated search of the earth list for those entries linked to a particular PTW An attempt by an operator to remove a PTW tag shall cause the corresponding isolation/earth points to be identified.placement or removal The associated PTW/SFT numbers.4. It shall be possible to define notes which include displays or segments of displays. Expired PTW entries shall be retained on the system until manually archived. this fact shall also be notified to the operator attempting to remove a PTW/SFT tag or the relevant isolation/earth tag Removal of a PTW/SFT tag shall cause associated operational restriction tags to be identified to the operator.4. Where an isolation/earth point is associated to more than one PTW/SFT. An operator shall be able to view and print out both current and expired PTW/SFT lists. d) An operator shall be able to display and/or print out the PTW or SFT list in both tag number and PTW/SFT number order. It shall be possible to link any such entries to a PTW/SFT. 2. which shall record all tags placed on diagrams.4. Expiry time Where a tag has reached its expiry time the Operator shall be alerted to this automatically.

2 Transmission/Generation Network The transmission network presently comprises 220kV and 132kV cables and overhead lines. This facility shall be additional to those for printing of lists. 2. This facility shall be user configurable. such as the use of accelerating factors. Printer selection should preferably be via a menu list although the system shall preset the selection to a user defined printer. to aid the operator. Printer buffers shall also retain data waiting to be printed to cater for events such as printers being temporarily off-line for paper loading.2 Screen Prints An operator shall be able to initiate a screen print to a full graphic colour printer upon demand.4 2. Any decision relating to the selection of particular methods. periodic or continuous printing. The Bidder shall provide sufficient technical detail in the offer to enable a full assessment of the suitability and compliance of facilities. in his opinion. The Bidder shall state the service experience of each module. topology. Any EMS module requiring special development for this project shall be identified. It shall be possible for the print manager to automatically. It shall be possible to direct output to any appropriate printer type. the Bidder is invited to propose applications/modules as options which.4. reports. study cases etc. results. It is a requirement of the Contract that an interface be provided between the PSS-E applications and the SCADA/EMS system to enable interchange of data. etc that are specified elsewhere. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The suite of software shall comprise two principal sub-systems: (a) Network Analysis and Security Assessment (b) Forecasting. redirect print output to an alternative printer to that originally selected to cater for situations where the originally selected printer is unavailable for printing.3. which feed an extensive radially operated 33kV and 11kV networks. the Bidder shall offer standard EMS modules with proven software. The functional and performance requirements of the EMS are described in the following Clauses. The Contractor shall demonstrate the accuracy of solutions and optimisation result for each application prior to operational acceptance of the system. optimisation algorithms. The set-up and execution initiation for each application shall generally be through an Execution Control Display which shall have a similar layout for each application or facility. The application of 400kV is likely in the future. 2. 2. The printer management facility shall warn operators of pending print buffer overflow. The Bidder shall identify in Technical Schedules those EMS modules which will require modification to meet the specified requirements and shall provide an estimate of the extent of amendments necessary. future. at the time a print-out is ordered. The EMS system shall be able to interface with such a facility.1 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM General Introduction A comprehensive and integrated suite of power system computational assistance programs is required for the monitoring.4. and any proposed alternatives.10. The estimated CPU loading factors and execution times for each major application program shall also be stated in –the Technical Schedules. as appropriate. in order to ensure that the specified requirements are met. The Employer uses the PSS-E application suite for operational and network planning. whether for immediate. sparsity techniques or special file management and accessing techniques. In addition to the main offer. Wherever possible. diagrams. trend displays. In the near future the Employer intends to implement a ‗Transparent Despatch‘ facility to enable the details of daily despatch to be made available on line to market participants. offer improvements or cost savings. The Bidder shall describe the method and tools that are used in his standard system to achieve this.Section 6 . in any location. control and management of the 220kV and 132kV transmission network. etc.4. at each request.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications place. shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. or manually upon operator request.54 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . to be made. Production Scheduling and Despatch.

3 EMS Database The general requirements for databases.Section 6 . typically every fifteen (15) minutes for the complete sequence and at least every few minutes for state estimation. shall be standard modules within the EMS environment. as required. Means of easily duplicating data entries (e. The EMS shall cater for both existing and future multiple voltage network configurations and for a comprehensive mix of generating plant. are defined in Clause 2.4. etc) are defined in the Graphic User Interface Clause 2. to monitor and assess the security of the transmission system. The triggering events shall be user definable and shall include system load changes and circuit loading thresholds. amendment and data entry. input/output pro-forma.g.4 Real-Time Network Analysis 2. The collective capacity of these sources of generation is significant and must be taken into account in the EMS modelling and optimisation. These give a guide to the size of network that the network analysis programs will need to handle at the time of commissioning. their creation. However. Facilities shall be provided to allow the operator to specify that some of the programs in the Network Analysis Sequence. The design of the database shall be such that any new application program can be integrated with minimum interruption to the normal operation of the EMS. The programs shall be executed within a user-definable Network Analysis Sequence with a userdefinable periodicity. loading values in time-based schedules) shall be provided.1 General Requirements The real-time network analysis software shall comprise a number of power system application programs. so that no special purpose or customised support software or procedures shall be provided solely for the real-time network analysis functions.3. The real-time network analysis software shall comprise the following programs: (a) Network topology (b) State Estimation (c) Security Assessment (d) Bus Load Forecast (e) Loss Penalty Factors (f) Optimal Power Flow. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that these functional and performance requirements are met with practical and reliable software implementation. as appropriate. or upon operator demand. The scope of coverage of the EMS shall extend to the 33kV load points.4. It is important that.4. Each "load" above can comprise up to twenty individual 33kV feeders. There are a number of hydro and thermal generating stations within the Country. hydro or wind turbines exists in various parts of the network. 2. diagram displays.55 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . and upon operator demand. At times the generated output from these units exceeds the local load and provides an infeed to the transmission system. trend plots. as well as breaker status changes. The following Clauses describe some aspects of the functional and computational requirements of various key functional blocks in the EMS. for operator interaction with the EMS functions. embedded generation which may include small thermal. The general functional requirements of the User Interface (e.4.8 and specific data management facilities for the SCADA/EMS functions are defined in this Clause 2. 2. The EMS shall be capable of handling a 400% increase in network size. without the need for any hardware or software upgrade. the initialisation of Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the data entry task is minimised through the general use of default (or previous value) entries within screen pro-forma. When the triggering event is detected. or as a result of the occurrence of a triggering event. All support software for the real-time network analysis programs. Bid drawings show the Employer system for 2012 and 2016.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The transmission network is an island network but may in the future be interconnected with the Transmission System in Southern India.4. it shall only be necessary to carry out database amendments to incorporate the increase in network size.3.4. such as the security assessment and loss penalty factor programs can be executed not in every cycle but for every pre-defined number of state estimation runs. This is a significant issue and the system shall model this characteristic clearly. These programs shall execute in response to trigger events and/or cyclically. construction of display pages. each of which may be independently monitored for status and load (current).g.

using power system nomenclature. any previously scheduled real-time network analysis sequence shall be removed from the pending queue or. All inputs required for the proper execution of the real-time network analysis sequence shall be entered via Execution Control Displays and/or screen masks. programs which cannot be sensibly run without data from the non-converging program. terminated. 2.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications the real-time Network Analysis Sequence shall be delayed for a pre-defined time interval to allow the power system to attain a steady state condition. For example. Execution displays should provide details of program status under these conditions. Any one of the programs in the Network Analysis Sequence shall be executable independently. the controlled termination of a program which will not converge.2 Network Topology The Network Topology program is one of the basic functions of the real-time network analysis software. i. It shall be possible to define triggering thresholds for total system load change and percentage of circuit loading. e. upon operator demand. switches. For operator demanded and event triggered runs. It shall also be possible to define the priority levels of the outages in the list (f) Definition and display of the threshold boundary mismatch between the internal and external networks. The mismatch threshold defines the trigger for execution of the External Equivalent Network Modelling program (g) Definition and display of occurrences of anomalous data. It shall be possible to include both single and multiple outage contingencies in any one list. Execution Control Displays shall show the time remaining until the next scheduled periodic execution of the sequence. power lines and cables. blocked. convergence status. The Network Topology program determines the connectivity of the network components. are removed automatically from the execution cycle. etc. Only one real-time network analysis sequence will be executed at a time. The default contingency list used by the real-time Security Assessment program shall be defined via the Execution Control Display. irrespective of the execution frequency relationship defined above. shall be executed in the sequence.e. stopped.4. Real-time Network Analysis Execution Control Displays shall be provided for the following functions: (a) Definition and display of the selection and sequence of programs to be executed in the Network Analysis Sequence (b) Definition and display of the cycle period for the automatic execution of the programs in the Network Analysis Sequence.g. In addition. Manual input or override of measurement values and states of devices such as breakers. capacitors. all network analysis programs. those that cause measurements to be declared as bad data and raise alarms/messages (h) Identification and display of the status of each program including whether it is running. The period shall range from one (1) minute to sixty (60) minutes in increments of one (1) minute (c) Definition and display of the cyclic execution ratio for any program in the Network Analysis Sequence relative to the State Estimation runs. This is particularly important where the values generated by a program which does not converge would normally be used by a subsequent program in the EMS execution cycle. as well as to identify those breakers whose status change shall trigger the sequence (e) Definition and display of the contingency lists. or upon operator request. through the single line diagram of the internal as well as the external networks. shall be accepted by the program. When a new real-time network analysis sequence is initiated. and shall include a cursor selection point that allows a manual request for execution of the real-time network analysis sequence or any one of the programs in the suite of real-time network analysis software. run the Security Assessment software for every two State Estimation solutions (d) Definition and display of the events that will trigger the real-time network analysis sequence. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The convergence index for the last run of the State Estimator shall be displayed. generators. It establishes the single line node-branch model of the current power network using status values from the real-time database. e. if necessary. or a message to indicate that the sequence is currently in execution. The system shall deal with the non-convergence of any program in a manner which requires the minimum amount of interaction with the operator but results in a sensible outcome. reactors. due to the occurrence of a triggering event.4. Overall the EMS facilities shall provide a coherent and integrated approach and produce and present information in a form that is readily assimilated by system operators.Section 6 .g.56 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . if currently in execution.

When a measurement is identified as bad data for a number of specified occurrences. open ended circuits. MVAr injections (vi) Reactor. It shall be possible to invoke a trace from any point in the Transmission network for selected voltage levels. identified and eliminated from the solution process. pseudo measurements shall be used. To assist with the presentation of network topology the program shall include a facility for tracing network connectivity and presenting this on network diagrams either by a change or colour or a change in line type. far external networks. MVAr flows (iv) Transformer tap positions (v) Generator. based on assumption and historical data. The state-estimator is required to maintain an accurate balance between the estimated flows on the boundaries between the external and internal networks.4. The State Estimator shall be able to re-incorporate the measurements once they are checked as being nonanomalous. 132/33kV and 132/11kV transformer MW. If an Outstation fails the State Estimator shall continue to function without degradation in performance for those areas of the power system for which it still has telemetered values. This checking process shall ensure that data points which have been identified as anomalous are not utilised by the state estimator until they are shown to be permanently recovered. MVAr injections The State Estimator shall make use of all measured values where available. For the unobservable portion of the network. line currents. The state estimator shall continue to function without degradation in performance should the network split in to two or more observable areas (islands). Measured values which do not pass the checks shall be flagged and listed. alarms shall be issued and messages logged. (i) Busbar voltage magnitudes (ii) Line MW and MVAr flows (as shown on drawings) (iii) 220/132/33kV.57 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . grossly erroneous measured values shall be detected.Section 6 .3 State Estimation The State Estimation program is necessary in order to provide an accurate and reliable database for all subsequent energy management functions. For the un-observable portions of the network. The State Estimator shall also be able to detect and report measurement biases. including line power flows. etc. as stated below and indicated in the Bid Drawings and Schedules. (b) Bad Data and Measurement Bias As part of the state estimation function. The program shall generate summaries of equipment and network status including de-energised equipment.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The Network Topology program shall perform switch status validation to determine a consistent set of switch states. The State Estimation program shall make use of all relevant measurements in the network and calculate the best estimated system steady state solution. It shall also perform digital smoothing to minimise data acquisition time skewing for measured values and shall generate a vector of digitally smoothed MW. at all relevant line ends and buses for the state estimation and external network model calculation programs. The Network Topology program shall detect network islands and identify them to the operator. The State Estimation program shall also perform plausibility checks. bus voltages and phase angles for the observable portion of the transmission network. pseudo-measurements shall be computed and made use of with appropriate weighting factors. 2. The state estimator shall have the following features: (a) Measurement Data Real-time measurements will be available. Bad data and measurement bias information shall be summarised in suitable Tables for presentation to the operator. In addition. The calculated state values for both the internal and external networks shall be available for use by the other EMS application programs and for display on the single line diagram. which may include the near external networks. as well as parts of the internal network which become unobservable due to temporary loss of telemetered measurements.4. MVAr and voltage magnitude. equipment with an abnormal status. MW. The state estimator shall re-determine the best estimation of the system state after all such anomalous data is eliminated. a list shall be provided to indicate the electrical island to which each device /substation/power station is connected. (c) Transformer Tap Position Estimation Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

the system condition for future time horizons of up to two hours ahead shall be treated as the basis of the assessment. as defined via a realtime Execution Control Display. the post-contingency branch flow and nodal voltages. validating and ranking contingencies for addition to the contingency list. voltage limits. State estimation programs shall then be executed to provide the base case system state. for both the internal and external networks. It selects the contingencies from the contingency list according to priority.4.4. historical data. using power flow techniques with adequate accuracy. The program shall take due account of any automatic switching regimes (e. Circuit ratings and voltage limits shall be checked and the severity of security violations of the contingencies shall be ranked in order of their relative seriousness. Constraint violations shall raise alarms in the alarm list. Contingency Selection and Contingency Analysis. shall be utilised to establish the pseudo-measurements for the times of interest.4 External Network Modelling and State Calculation The network modelling program shall be able to accommodate external network models as may be required in the future. It shall be possible to define time steps at which the predictive security assessment will be made within the overall time horizon. (d) Contingency Analysis The second stage of security assessment is Contingency Analysis. In this predictive mode. For security monitoring purposes. (d) Security Monitoring The solution of the State Estimator shall be checked against the operating limits of the transmission network components. Two modes of operation are required. 2.4. 2. Each security assessment mode shall also be executable on demand or by user definable triggering events. which shall evaluate in detail post-contingency branch flows and bus voltages of the contingencies in the Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.58 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . via the execution control display. irrespective of whether they are in the contingency list or their priority in the list. loss of a transformer infeed at a substation results in restoration of supplies by automatic switching) and their impact on the security of the system. (a) Contingency Selection The Contingency Selection program is the first stage of security assessment. including line/cable ratings. There shall be user friendly facilities for defining. the limits may not be the actual operating limits of the components of the network. real-time mode and predictive mode: (a) Real-time Security Assessment In this analysis. The program shall determine. and generator power injection limits. At this point in the development of the transmission system the operators experience difficulties with voltage stability and load despatch which is often security constrained. Instead. Violation of the redefined limits shall be listed. (b) Predictive Security Assessment (Optional) In the predictive mode. shall be used as the base case. Significant deviation between the estimated values and the telemetered tap positions shall be reported. forecast of bus load distribution and generation schedules. scheduled switching actions. for the current network condition. The Bidder may offer other applications as options which would assist the operators assess security and network stability in a predictive manner. annunciated and displayed on the single line diagram.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The State Estimator shall be able to estimate both in-phase and phase-shifting transformer tap positions when requested by the operator. the State Estimation program shall allow the operator to define an operating margin for each type of limit.Section 6 . the results of the state estimation programs. Security assessment divides into two solution processes. Rather.4.g. Automatic and periodic execution of either or both security assessment modes shall be accommodated in the real-time network analysis sequence. the current system state.5 Security Assessment The function of security assessment is to predict post-contingency security violations using the solutions of State Estimation and External Network State Estimation programs. there will not be any real-time measurement values. Power circuits that are loaded to their security limits in the base case shall be selected automatically for screening.

The security assessment programs shall have the capability to handle single and multiple outage contingencies. The program will generally be activated following a user definable number of state estimation runs. the re-distribution of power injections shall be according to participation factors which are pre-defined by the user. Displays shall also allow estimated and forecast values for individual loads to be compared. ranked in severity order.4. Full AC network model equations. a list of violations for each contingency analysed. Output from the Contingency Selection program shall include a ranked contingency list. the active and reactive loads and generation injections and voltage magnitudes at different buses of the system. The results of each contingency analysed shall also be available for displaying with information (e. The results of the Bus Load Forecast are particularly useful to provide a source of information for pseudo-measurement values for those non-observable parts of the internal and external networks. It shall be possible to configure the OPF facility for a wide variety of optimising tasks via a user friendly interface which can be configured to speed up the execution of Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B. Based on these distribution factors and patterns. These factors and patterns shall be modified by applying smoothing techniques.4. The output of the Bus Load Forecast program shall be available for viewing by the operator in the form of tables and on network diagrams.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications ranked contingency list produced by the Contingency Selection stage. including any combination of: (i) Generators/Loads (ii) Transmission lines/cables (iii) Shunt capacitors/reactors (iv) Series capacitors/reactors (v) Transformers/Synchronous condensers (vi) Bus Couplers (vii) Outages causing islanding For generator and load outages.8 Optimal Power Flow This facility shall enable an operator to optimise a target functions such as minimisation of losses. location and type of violations) presented in a format approved by the Employer. A penalty factor matrix for typical system loading shall be stored and updated.59 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant . minimise generation cost via manipulation of the physically controllable devices or quantities on the system subject to a set of constraints. shall be used to derive these penalty factors.4. The Bus Load Forecast shall provide modelling of embedded generation sources in order to effectively represent the effect on bus loads when in operation. although this should not be the ultimate limit) or to define that analysis will cease after N successive contingency evaluations have resulted in no limit violation. The Contingency Analysis program shall provide outputs including: lists of contingencies.g. as configured by the operator via the Execution Control Display. based on current network configuration and State Estimator results. The bus load forecasting program shall analyse the results from the state estimation programs and update the stored distribution factors and load patterns with regard to both active and reactive power injections for different times (48 half hourly values) and day types covering the complete yearly cycle of climatic conditions. The values for the factors used in producing the forecast shall also be available. The matrix is required to support operational planning studies.Section 6 . where N is user definable via the real-time execution control display. immediately prior to generator plant scheduling calculations and periodically in support of load dispatching calculations. 2. for different times of the day. 2. a list of equipment subject to violations for each contingency. 2.7 Loss Penalty Factors The network Loss Penalty Factors program shall calculate the marginal losses with respect to active and reactive power injections at the Employer generator buses. that result in branch flow and voltage limit violations. shall be forecast. It shall be possible to limit the number of contingencies that will be analysed to a user defined maximum (typically 50. The analysis shall incorporate any subsequent and multiple tripping arising from violations caused by the first contingency.6 Bus Load Forecast A Bus Load Forecast program shall be provided to forecast the loads at all the internal and external buses. Results of security assessment programs shall be available for viewing. and any other outages which cause loss of generation or load.4.4. The Bus Load Forecast program shall be executed after each state estimation calculation. Load characteristics and time switched loads shall be taken into account by the forecasting process.4.

6 Study Mode Network Analysis Study mode network analysis provides facilities to allow operators to carry out short term or operational planning studies. any external fault impedance and the bus fault location. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.60 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . monitoring the optimisation analysis. It shall be possible to maintain at least ten save cases of each type on disk and archive save cases to a readily retrievable medium.Section 6 .9 Save cases Facilities shall be provided for generating save cases from study or real time databases. observing the effects of constraints and control actions on the target function.4. reviewing the active constraints and causes of infeasibility. There shall be facilities for identifying save cases and maintaining a record of those which have been stored on disk or archived. double or all three). The operator may choose to calculate the fault level at all buses or at selected buses. through the graphical interface. from disk or archive. ground fault current/power and bus voltages. It shall be possible to use the OPF in the real time and study mode environments. modifying variable limits. The operator shall be able to specify the faulted phase(s) (single. The OPF facility shall produce solutions quickly and shall be able to deal with situations where an optimal solution does not exist without frequent interaction with the operator. It shall not be possible to recover a save case into the real time environment. shall be possible even though the current database configuration (study mode or training simulator environment) is different from the one which was current when a particular save case was generated. The program shall be executed upon operator demand. including: (a) Network topology (b) State Estimation (c) Security Assessment (d) Bus Load Forecast (e) Loss Penalty Factors (f) Optimal Power Flow. 2. It shall be possible to set up scenarios for analysis from save cases and historical data. 2. interactively. Output of the program shall include lists of fault currents/powers and faults causing over duty of circuit breakers.4. Restoration of save cases. The operator interface to the OPF facility shall facilitate the selection of target functions.5 Real-Time Short Circuit Calculation The Real-time Short Circuit Calculation program determines the possible over duty of circuit breakers. It shall also be possible to display the results of the analysis on one line diagrams and in graphical format as well as in tables. Output of the program shall include lists of post-fault branch currents/powers. All real-time network analysis programs shall be available in study mode for operators to select for execution. the system states determined by the State Estimator shall be used as the pre-fault system condition. The following types of fault evaluation shall be provided: (a) Three-phase and Phase-to-Phase Short Circuit Faults The system states as determined by the State Estimator shall be used as the pre-fault system condition. selecting appropriate constraint limits. 2. If the system cannot restore a save case reports shall be produced advising on the probable cause and shall include details of all inconsistencies which it cannot resolve.4. pointing device and keyboard. selecting appropriate control variables. Data for the study mode is based on saved copies (snapshots) of the relevant section of the real-time database.4. and reviewing the performance and nature of the results of the OPF analysis. An operator shall be able to retrieve saved case databases and then modify them via single-line diagrams (using the pointing device and keyboard) and the study mode Execution Control Display. Detection of any fault which would overstress any circuit breaker shall be annunciated (b) Phase-to-ground Faults Similarly to the three-phase fault calculations.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications repetitive tasks.

up to several days ahead of the event. the facility shall permit the calculation of unit commitment schedules and expected generation power outputs at user defined intervals from 15 minutes to 1 hour. for example.Section 6 . using estimated demand data from the demand prediction facility. only be possible to initiate one study at a time from an individual workstation. In study mode it shall also be possible to use the output of the power flow and bus load forecast programs to generate base cases for the security assessment and other programs. upon demand. in order to minimise expected operating costs.Hydro Storage . to access the study mode environment from any workstation. Typically. The EMS functions shall be capable of incorporating these additional units as they are introduced onto the network. following changes in plant availabilities or demand expectations. These revisions may also be used to refine the scheduling of plant up to several hours ahead of the event. There shall be facilities which allow an operator to modify a save case after it has been recovered. similar to that for the real-time network analysis facilities. however. some of which are based on IPP agreements and a number of mini hydro and wind turbine stations.4. It shall also be possible to return quickly to the real time environment and without terminating the study session.61 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . it shall be possible for an operator to carry out security checking prior to any switching operation. The input/output data for the above programs shall be relevant to study mode analyses.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The HMI for the application programs in study mode.Coal fired steam turbine . It shall be possible with the right access privileges. The plant scheduling facility shall be fully integrated with the other EMS facilities to ensure commitment schedules do not.Embedded generation . as far as possible.Hydro Run of River . There shall be simple procedures for quickly utilising a study session based on the current real time situation regardless of the previous state of the study mode environment. together with the study mode application programs. By using interactive network editing capabilities. shall be. It shall be possible to apply the network analysis programs to save cases originating from the real time and study mode databases. The EMS facilities shall include a plant scheduling calculation for optimising the start-up and shut-down times of all generators. The facility shall run in both on-line mode. The scheduling facility shall be able to accommodate the following types of generation and produce optimal hydro thermal coordinated schedules taking into account network constraints: . Under these conditions the associated studies shall not interact at any level including event and alarm processing. In the on-line mode. the facility will be used to derive daily commitments. The study mode Execution Control Display shall provide facilities to allow operators to select some or all the study-mode application programs to be executed sequentially and automatically.Diesel .4. The system shall be capable of supporting the simultaneous execution of three different studies on three different workstations concurrently with the Real Time Sequence. for longer term costing evaluations with manually prepared data. and in study mode. It shall. It shall be possible for operators to define and save a number of such study-mode Network Analysis Sequences for subsequent selection and execution. the Employer proposes to install additional thermal and hydro generating capacity and there is expected to additional mini hydro and wind generators. including the study mode Execution Control Display. During the lifetime of the SCADA/EMS system. 2.Single and dual fuel fired Gas Turbines (Open and Combined Cycle) . result in any constraint violations.Hydro Chain/Complex .1 Introduction The system generation includes hydroelectric units and thermal units.HVDC Interchange Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.7 Generating Plant Scheduling 2. consistent with all system operating and security constraints.7. with the ability to calculate short-term revisions of these schedules. A workstation shall indicate clearly whether it is in the real time or study mode environment.

predicted system demands and system operational constraints. The hydro schemes also provide water for irrigation and domestic potable use. This imposes constraints on the use of water for generation. In study mode. Variable Data. etc. the bidder shall present in his bid the hydro optimization algorithm that he proposes to use. The scheduling application shall incorporate detailed hydro topology models of each of the hydro complexes that represent the reservoirs and plant characteristics. Variable Data These data are held in a variable generation data file that is updated systematically and regularly by the on-line data system and by manual input of information.7. 2. However. functions describing turbine heat rate and boiler efficiencies (xiii) Regulating Reserve functions and parameters (xiv) Emergency Reserve parameters (xv) Start-up heat as function of boiler and turbine down times (xvi) Governor regulating gains (xvii) Output dependent operational and maintenance costs. to prepare preliminary schedules and to assist in operational planning and maintenance programming.4. e. the scheduling input data comprises four principal data sets. hydro systems and current operational practice are given in Volume 7 Part D. start-up delays. Facilities shall be provided for establishing a library of commitment schedules. The Employer has database of historic data associated with the quantity of water that was available in a given year on a monthly basis since 1950. It shall also be possible to use the output of the generation scheduling facility as an input to other network analysis programs such as the security assessment program.Section 6 .g. (a) 'Fixed' Data (i) Minimum stable output for each generating unit (ii) (iii) (iv) Maximum and Economic Continuous ratings for each generating unit Maximum and Economic Continuous ratings of combined cycle units Maximum generation for each turbine (taking into account the MW/MVAr operating limits) (v) Boiler and turbine start-up delays as functions of down times (vi) Maximum sustained turbine output ramping rates (vii) Maximum sustainable step output changes (viii) Minimum turbine run periods (ix) Minimum turbine down periods (x) Overall generating unit heat-rate curves (xi) Efficiency curves for hydro units (xii) On combined cycle stations. The scheduling application shall take into account any constraints arising from the water flow management restrictions. After sufficiently studying the Sri Lankan hydro system detailed in volume 7. minimum run periods. their contribution shall be taken into account in the scheduling and despatch models. (b) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The applications offered shall satisfy the current operational practice in addition to the requirements specified in the section.2 Plant Scheduling Input Data In the on-line mode of operation. with sufficient detail to demonstrate its efficacy for the Sri Lankan hydro system. These are 'Fixed' Data.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Further information on the generating plant. Restricted outputs. the scheduling facility will be used to evaluate hypothetical future situations. run-up rates. The data include: (i) Boiler and Turbine Plant Availabilities for all periods of the scheduling timehorizon (ii) Fuel costs and calorific values (iii) Temporary modifications to plant capabilities.62 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The present mini hydro and wind generation stations are not subject to scheduling and despatch as their production is dependent on weather conditions and is usually automatically activated. water flow or fuel restrictions. This historic data will be made available to the Contractor for use in the water forecasting models of the scheduling applications.

the scheduling calculation shall have the capacity to derive weekly or daily unit commitment schedules together with short-term revisions following system changes or unexpected demand levels. together with any bulk supply point loads that are within network zones whose exports or imports are limited by transmission security considerations [see item (d) below].4 Generation Scheduling Operating Modes In on-line mode. System Operational Constraints The calculated generation schedule is required to satisfy the relevant system operating constraints. Outputs from the plant scheduler shall include: (a) Synchronising times and shut-down times for all generating plant over the scheduling time span (b) Run-up and loading profiles for all synchronised generators for each scheduling interval of the scheduling time-span (c) Expected emergency and spinning reserve generation for each scheduling interval (d) Expected active transmission security constraints for each period (e) Start-up costs of each plant item and system totals (f) Variable system generating costs by period (g) Total and marginal system generation costs (h) Hourly and daily summaries of the anticipated maximum and minimum load. 2. These shall include: (i) Minimum system spinning reserve (ii) Minimum system emergency or immediate reserve (iii) Generating Plant must-run constraints (iv) Simplified transmission security constraints in the form of modified generator or station output constraints and maximum zonal or group export and import limits (v) Minimum system frequency regulating gain These constraints should be defined for each quarter-hour period of the scheduling time-span.7. On-line monitoring facilities are required for four principal categories of power reserve: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. together with system operational requirements and security constraints. e. 2.7. Penalty factors. or other transmission loss coefficients.4. the scheduling function shall enable the operator to initiate long-term studies. as derived from network load flow calculations. ambient temperature and other restrictions (v) Time elapsed since last start-up. The operator shall be able to use stored data files for this purpose.7. In study mode. The predicted quantities shall include the total system demand at quarter-hourly intervals. demand and system data.Section 6 . the short-term demand prediction facility shall be invoked to derive predicted demands over the time horizon of the scheduling period.5 Reserve and Plant Monitoring The power system requires comprehensive reserve and plant monitoring facilities. derived from on-line data. shall be included as input data.g. over the relevant time span. and production costs. These will promote the improved management of system security and economy of operation. using manually derived generation. It shall be possible to run the scheduler on demand without degrading the performance of the SCADA/EMS System. derived from on-line data (vi) Time elapsed since last shut-down.63 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .4.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications (iv) (c) (d) Variations from normal heat rates and efficiencies. energy generated (MWh). due to cooling water temperatures.3 Plant Scheduling Outputs The plant scheduling facility shall derive the optimal unit commitment schedule taking due account of all plant operating costs and constraints.4. 2. It shall be possible to automatically adjust the demand data for present and scheduled load management using data from load management programs. (vii) Water availability for hydro units taking into account irrigation and domestic requirements/limitations (viii) Value of water (to be calculated by this application) and marginal rate curves (ix) IPP agreement values and conditions Predicted Demand and System Data At each initiation of an on-line scheduling calculation.

2. The facility shall also provide statistical measures of the accuracy of compliance of generating units with scheduling and dispatching instructions. This component may be subdivided into auto-standby and manual standby.64 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The reactive reserve in userspecified network zones shall also be derived. The EMS facility is required to model individual generating units in sufficient detail to permit the accurate estimation of emergency reserves available in response to credible system incidents.4.Section 6 . The display of spinning. Also to be included in this calculation is the expected load shedding via underfrequency relays over this timescale.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications (a) (b) (c) (d) Emergency Reserve .this reserve is the active power that is available within a few seconds of an incident. Forecasts up to a year or more ahead of the event are required. It shall be possible to generate save cases for load forecasts produced in the study mode and to generate a number of forecasts for the same period but using different assumption for each forecast. Standby Reserve . Reactive Reserve Generation .1 Introduction The requirements for computer aided demand forecasts divide into two categories: long-term predictions for production and operational planning and short-term forecasts for scheduling and load dispatching. requires the aggregation of the expected responses of individual generators. Plant monitoring facilities shall include the collation of data required to evaluate plant response models in relation to both steady-state and emergency operation. together with governor gains and response rates. for predictive security assessments and for operational planning purposes. This calculation shall be based upon bus demand data and under-frequency settings. as well as unsynchronised but ready to generate steam driven plant. including production planning and plant maintenance scheduling.this reserve will include that available from fast starting gasturbine or hydro generation. to cater for occurrences such as circuit breaker trips resulting in infeed losses (e. a consequence of plant scheduling and load dispatching.4.3 Short-Term Demand Prediction Facility Short-term demand predictions are required for plant scheduling.2 Long-Term Demand Forecasts Long-term demand forecasts are required for the purposes of operational planning. on request.4.4.this component is the reserve generation provided by the unloaded capacity of the synchronised generation. The facility is required to run both automatically with on-line data and in study mode for longer-term network and economic calculations: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 2. together with the reactive capacities of all unused static reactors that can be made available by switching. both for manually operated units and those under automatic generation control. including impending monthly peak demands and expected times of occurrence (b) Estimated monthly integrated energy demands under normal weather conditions (c) Estimated monthly and annual load duration functions for production planning and costing purposes. The long-term facility shall run in study mode. Predicted information requirements include the following items: (a) Predicted system peak monthly demands under average weather conditions. but it shall not require immediate access to on-line demand data.g. The calculation of this reserve.8 Demand Forecasting 2. using historical demand data from previous months and years.this capacity will be evaluated as the sum of the unloaded reactive generation that can be made available by increasing the excitation of synchronised generators. available to respond within a defined (user-configurable) time of a few minutes. generator trips). standby and zonal reactive reserves shall include the values of the prevailing user-specified targets for these quantities. Modelling of turbine response capabilities. adjusted to standard weather conditions and corrected for deviations from nominal frequency and supply voltage. These requirements are summarised below.8. Spinning Reserve .8. 2. for load dispatching.8. Input data will include historical demands over previous months and years. is required for this purpose.

9. Study Mode Short-Term Forecasts Study mode short-term forecasts are required for system security and plant scheduling studies. in order to minimise the minute-to-minute operating costs.4. 2. approximate bulk supply point demands for security assessment and network studies (ix) Predicted total reactive demand. and its distribution. 2. by time-of-day and season. (b) These studies require the same input data as the on-line load forecasts. Due account shall be taken of the current fuel or water utilisation of the generating plant.65 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . (iii) Meteorological data relating principally to weighted ambient temperature (for humidity). including weekdays. disable and set the execution periodicity for this facility through an Execution Control Display. (iv) Bulk supply point demand ratios.2 Computer Aided On-Line Load Dispatching The computer aided on-line load dispatching facility is required to run automatically and cyclically. derived from the power factor data in (vi) above (x) Statistical information relating to previous prediction accuracy (xi) Validated. Data outputs shall include: (vii) Predicted total system demand for each forecast interval for up to one day ahead (viii) By application of load ratios. holidays and other special days (vi) System power factor at principal demand points. with a user definable periodicity of 3-30 minutes. load management and load shedding. taking due account of historical and on-line demand data. The forecast interval shall be user configurable with a minimum interval of not more than 15 minutes. by time of day and season. together with adjustments for voltage and system frequency deviations. The calculated generator loadings shall take due account of all relevant input data as follows: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. It shall be possible to enter weather data manually and to acquire it automatically via Outstations which interface with appropriate sensing/measuring equipment.9. It shall be possible to enable. corrected and adjusted demand data for updating the historical demand database. These are detailed in the following Clauses.9 Economic Load Dispatching 2. the type of day. interchange schedules and IPP schedules. and prevailing or expected meteorological parameters.4.Section 6 . illumination index. The function of the on-line demand prediction facility shall be to forecast total system demand. or upon operator demand. taking due account of all operational requirements and system security constraints. time of day and year. but the input data will be manually alterable off-line by the user. Input data for the on-line facility will include the following items: (i) Recent on-line demand data obtained from the state-estimation facility (ii) Demand corrections arising from. relating principal substation demands to total system demand (v) Historical load data relating to typical standard daily load curves. the dispatch facility shall utilise both on-line data and database resident plant parameters to calculate the optimal trajectories of the outputs of all synchronised generating units.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications (a) On-Line Short-Term Forecasts On-line forecasts are required up to one day ahead of the event for scheduling plant and for loading of plant. the economic allocation of load. weekend days. obtained by averaging historical active and reactive recorded demands. In this mode. The load dispatching facility is required to operate in two main modes: Computer-Aided On-Line Dispatching Mode and Study Dispatch mode. embedded generation. and its distribution. wind speeds and precipitation.1 Introduction The functional requirements for load dispatching include the economic allocation of loads to committed generating plant.4.

the facility shall run on request. 2. whilst satisfying all system operating constraints. short circuit levels. Dispatch System Outputs (i) Target outputs of all synchronised generating plant. start-up delays. by means of manual modification of selected previous output data.4. prevailing and dispatched (iv) Active transmission security constraints (v) Average and marginal generation costs (vi) Transmission constraints MW.1 Introduction A requirement of the EMS facility is the inclusion of a reactive power scheduling function for maintaining an acceptable power network voltage profile.Section 6 . plant ramp rates and reserve functions (ii) For unit generators. load flow relating to security contingency analysis. loading rates and operating costs (viii) Prevailing load shedding profiles (ix) Reserve generating capacity requirement (x) Transmission loss penalty factors obtained from load flow studies (xi) Scheduled start-up and shut-down times of all generating plant. within a study mode dispatch. (ii) Identification of target outputs which have varied by more than a userdefinable threshold since the previous load dispatch calculation (iii) Active power reserve generation.10. overall heat rates as functions of sent out (SO) active powers (i.4. The facility shall enable the operator to evaluate load dispatching under hypothetical plant and demand conditions. with manually entered generator commitment schedules and predicted future demand profiles. Plant commitment schedules and demand profiles shall be prepared by the operator. By relaxing on-line plant or system security constraints. The reactive power scheduler shall utilise an optimal power flow calculation for optimising reactive power controls.e.g. these constraints will be defined by the user typically as a result of off-line studies (e. stability and reactive power considerations).4. economic continuous rating. reactors) (f) Transformer tap options Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2 Reactive Scheduler Input Data In on-line mode. or achieving an alternative objective function. The on-line reactive scheduling calculation shall be initiated automatically following execution of the on-line generation plant scheduling program or significant network topology changes.3 Study Mode Load Dispatching In this mode. maximum capability.10. an operator shall be able to evaluate the out-of-merit operational costs due to those constraints. MW net of unit and static station MW requirements) (iii) Fuel costs and calorific values (iv) Water values and marginal rate curves (v) Interchange transaction costs (vi) Energy dependent costs of operation and maintenance (vii) Emergency reserve availabilities. minimum stable generation.g. It shall be possible to run the program in study mode using saved case and manually entered data. the reactive power scheduler shall utilise the following input data: (a) Predicted quarter-hourly bulk supply point active and reactive demands (b) Network configuration and parameters (c) Generating plant schedule and expected loads over the period of interest (d) Permitted generator operating regions in active/reactive power output planes (e) Availability of reactive compensating devices (e. 2.4. In particular.9. They will take the form of additional limits on the power outputs of individual power stations or generating groups. together with defined run-up loading schedules (xii) Transmission circuit and zonal security constraints that may require out-ofmerit operation. whilst minimising losses. capacities. 2.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications (a) (b) Dispatch System Input Data (i) For all committed and scheduled units and interchanges over the period: generator operating limits.66 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .10 Reactive Power Scheduling 2. the dispatch facility shall enable the operator to evaluate the dispatch problem associated with any feasible set of committed generating plant and demand data. or upon operator demand.

Section 6 .4. The reactive schedule shall satisfy the following operational constraints: (a) User specified voltage limits and stability margins (b) Generator MVAr output limits (c) Circuit capacity and other security limits (d) Generator MW output limits. the generator active output limits will be constrained to those determined by the plant scheduling calculation. 2. system time deviation and. 2.4. The output of the Reactive Power Scheduler shall be in the form of detailed schedules of settings for the above devices.11 Automatic Control of Generating Plant 2. for each generating set available for automatic control. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. It shall be possible for an operator to enable the function to automatically issue controls to the devices (or values to set point displays). in response to the output of EMS scheduling and dispatching functions. which will result in the determination of the optimal reactive control settings associated with the projected plant schedule and loading profile. Subject to user-specified operational constraints. area interchange. Control of active power shall be handled by the AGC function described below. the minimisation of active power losses and the minimisation of a measure of the deviation of the voltage profile from a desired user-specified profile. in accordance with the schedules. The function shall provide power loading base points for all generators.2 Automatic Generation Control An Automatic Generation Control (AGC) facility shall provide the interface between the active power scheduling and load dispatching functions of the EMS and the generating plant. Scheduled MVAr set points. shall be catered for.4. means of enhancing the network voltage profile can be investigated. if required. the algorithm shall determine the values of the reactive control variables that minimise the objective function. including those not under AGC operation.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications (g) (h) 2. network configuration and system demand expectations.11. so that. It shall also provide means for automatically regulating power system frequency. Study mode operation will aid the operator in evaluating the effect of different operating regimes.4. for example. shall be converted to the corresponding generator AVR and generator transformer tap positions and the control actions shall be executed by issuing the necessary raise and lower output pulses to the devices concerned. 2.4 Reactive Scheduler Outputs The reactive power scheduler shall derive a schedule for reactive control variables over the daily load cycle and shall allow revisions of the schedule following significant changes in power plant availabilities.1 General Requirements A means shall be provided for directly controlling the output of those generating units with interfaces for supervisory control by the SCADA/EMS System. in study mode the operator shall be able to run the optimal power flow program without the constraints of the plant schedule (active power schedule). However. Normally. Control of both active and reactive outputs of generators.67 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .10.10. Reactive control of generating plant is required to follow the output of the reactive power scheduling function.11. via the SCADA interfaces.4. Reactive Power Calculation The optimising calculation shall permit a choice of objective function. The control variable schedule shall include the following: (a) Generator MVAr set-points (b) Multi-step reactive compensator switch positions and settings (c) Transformer tap positions (d) Switching of bulk reactive compensation. thus allowing any sub-optimality resulting from the plant scheduling function to be discerned. It shall be possible both manually to modify and to store the schedules and to use them to provide the data source for setting the foregoing power network devices.3 System voltage limits Other security and operational limits. including the minimisation of generation cost. in the on-line mode.

both for normal and emergency modes of operation. The PCE will include terms dependent upon the difference between required and actual plant output. Parameter tuning and control system testing shall require the temporary disabling of the control outputs to the plant controllers.4. The AGC function shall provide outputs for plant loadings in two alternative forms. The Contract shall include the supply.4. These will provide the reference frequency measurements for the AGC function and will assist operators managing islanded sections of network.4. Specific functions utilising the above interfaces are specified in the following Clauses. embedded generation) The general requirements for the above types of facilities are covered elsewhere in this Specification. the AGC function shall operate in both emergency and normal modes and it shall be possible to independently set operating limits and control parameters for each mode. The normal mode rate limit shall refer to sustained response whereas the emergency rate will be higher.1 Introduction The interfacing to the SCADA/EMS System with each of the transmission and generating stations for the transfer of operational information may take various forms.12.4. and reactive power schedule data. The first form shall comprise raise and lower pulses for governor speeder-motor action and the second form shall comprise set-point values for display and manual implementation.68 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . together with terms dependent on system frequency error and system time error.4.Section 6 .g.2 Active and Reactive Power Dispatch Schedules Each active power target output data.9]. control deadbands and predictive loading signals. The AGC operation shall initiate a change in unit power output by means of proportional and integral control action in terms of the plant control error (PCE).12. Facilities for avoiding excessive governor set-point control action shall be provided by the use of filtering. The AGC system shall include facilities for adjusting independently all control system parameters and plant static and rate limits. the load dispatch operator at the NSCC shall be able to either manually dispatch target active and reactive power output values to the set point displays of each generating set. and may include the following: (a) Telephony communication between the NSCC and station control rooms (b) SCADA Outstations at the stations for: Data acquisition Output to set-point displays Output of controls to plant (c) Facsimile communication between the NSCC and IPP stations control rooms (d) Via e-mail or CEB internal messaging facilities. The AGC facility shall include the facility for operating under Interchange and Area Control Error (ACE) modes. as derived by the On-line Reactive Power Scheduler [Clause 2. In particular. It shall also be possible to do this using Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. as calculated in the On-line Load Dispatcher [Clause 2.9]. (e) Data via GSM channels from certain plant (e. The AGC system shall include comprehensive monitoring facilities to enable the operator to analyse control system performance and to promote the tuning of control system parameters. 2. 2. depending on the facilities provided at each location.10] shall be arranged into schedules for issue to the power stations via the Data Exchange Facilities [Clause 2.3 Active and Reactive Power Set-Point Displays For generating sets with set-point displays driven from the power station SCADA Outstation. installation and commissioning of frequency measurements derived from selected station busbars. By means of user specified deadbands and filtering of the plant control error.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The power loading base points shall take account of the operating limits and dynamical rate constraints of the individual generating units to ensure that the base point load is within the plant's feasible operating region.12. excessive control action will be avoided and the plant loading instructions follow a smooth trajectory.4. It shall be possible for the load dispatch operator at the NSCC to manually amend the schedules prior to their issue to the power stations.12 SCADA/EMS System Interfaces with Power Stations 2. 2.

review and authorise switching schedules. and execution (local or supervisory) of the associated switching e) Managing the authorisation. This includes documents for use in the field. 2. issue and cancelling of the associated Permit to Work (PTW) f) Monitoring the progress of the job g) Managing the authorisation. 2. The data will include whether a machine is running and the MWh production value for predefined and operator adjustable periods (typically 15 & 30 minutes). e.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications the output of the AGC and Reactive Power Scheduler EMS functions in an advisory role. The scope of work shall include provision and implementation of set point displays for each unit defined in the signal lists as having set point outputs.g. The outage management facility shall receive inputs or requests for jobs/outages from the Employer‘s maintenance department via remote workstation(s) located in that department or from an NSCC operator. it shall be possible for the load dispatch operator at the NSCC to either manually dispatch active and reactive power output set points to each generating set.5 Embedded Generation Data Production data for embedded generators may be available from the respective locations via GSM channels or Operator entered values. issue and cancelling of any associated Sanction to Test (STT) h) Noting comments during and on completion of the job i) Identifying the relevant portion of the network diagram. e. The stations that are initially assigned for load frequency control are: Kotmale PS 3 units New Laxapana PS 2 units Samanalawewa PS 2 units Victoria PS 3 units The scope of work shall include the adaptation works to connect the set point at each generator unit and to set to work the AGC function with these generator units.12. sequence. switching schedules.2 Job Management There shall be an integrated facility for controlling scheduled and unscheduled work on the transmission network.Section 6 . it shall be possible to copy a switching schedule to other functions such as the Job Management and Load Shedding facilities. 2. The job management facility shall generate all necessary supporting documentation necessary for the execution of each job.5. 'jobs' or outages. or to enable those EMS functions to directly output the target values to the displays automatically.4 Active and Reactive Power Set-Point Control For generating sets with plant controllers able to be remotely controlled via the power station SCADA Outstation. 2.12.1 Switching Schedules There shall be facilities for assisting the operator to compile. 2. The data shall be used to provide approximate MW values for the preceding period.g.e. permits to Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. save.5.4. Once compiled and tested. or to enable those EMS functions to output the controls directly to the plant. This shall include pro forma facilities for: a) Identifying a job b) Noting the reason for the job c) Identifying the work to be carried out d) Identifying the time.4. using the output of the AGC and Reactive Power Scheduler EMS functions in an advisory role.5 OTHER APPLICATIONS The applications described in the following Clauses shall be provided at the NSCC.69 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . i. test. for outages resulting from faults.

6 HISTORICAL DATA The SCADA System shall incorporate historical database facilities for all measured. if required and appropriate. Date and time tags shall be allocated to each signal. the situation shall be brought to the Operator‘s attention by periodically annunciated alarms or by other suitable visually effective means. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.5. The facility shall provide assistance to the operator to restore load following an under frequency event.4 Expert System Assistance (Option) Bidders shall include in their offer as an option any 'expert system' based facilities they could provide that would be appropriate and effective in the context of the Employer‘s transmission system. It shall also be possible to archive job records. 2. fault isolation.5. alarms. Switch status indications. and provide advice on appropriate remedial action including recovery of unserved load. by compiling a list of those feeders shed through under frequency action. identifying faults. identifying those who planned. Where shed load has not been reconnected after an Operator definable period following its interruption. The facilities shall be able to support the fully expanded System without degradation of performance. The facility should also assist the operator. to utilise the switching schedule facility to compile a schedule for isolating the fault and recovering any load that has been lost and. their location and effect on the network. It shall be possible to extract statistical information from these job records. for restoring the system to its normal configuration. each stage resulting in tripping of the connected feeder circuits at the frequencies set. 2. 2. e. hospitals). and subsequent system reconfiguration.5.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications work. This shall be one alarm or alert associated with the load shed list so that one annunciation for any number of cases is required and where the list shows the remaining disconnected loads. 2. later. All signals shall be scanned periodically and updated values or digital status changes stored with station/point or other identifier. The under frequency scheme is currently arranged in a number of stages. 2. Such schedules would be used in times of shortage of generation or limitation of circuit loadings in order to curtail demand and protect the system or circuits. The facility shall enable selection of loads and/or MW to be shed.g. performed and approved the work. Location and Load Restoration (Option) Bidders shall include in their offer as an option facilities to assist the operator with fault detection. The facility shall be linked to the Switching Sequence facility so that shedding can be instructed using simple instructions from the UI which will result in the required sequence to effect shedding to be initiated.3 Fault Detection. generator trip). network connectivity information and other relevant data shall be utilised by a fault identification and location facility to assist the operator to identify faults. As each stage of tripping is reached signals are sent to the local Outstation. The list shall indicate the last recorded load of each feeder.5 Under Frequency Load Shedding An under frequency load shedding scheme is implemented at a number of substations. The scheme is designed primarily to protect the power network in the event of a loss of infeed (e. Although the load restoration is to be under operator control. digital and other internally calculated or generated signals.6 Load Shedding Schedules A function shall be provided that facilitates setting up of Load Shedding Schedules. authorised. Such facilities should provide the operator with assistance in analysing alarms and events. sanctions to test.Section 6 .5.g. It also includes any documentation to be kept as a hardcopy record of the work. the duration expected and to provide for a rotor system whereby the curtailment is shared by all but consumers with essential supplies (e.70 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . the System shall simplify the task by means of cross-linking the lists to diagrams and/or permitting initiation of control actions from the lists.g. location and restoration.

The reports shall be on a daily. The data extraction via the spreadsheet client shall be user definable on a point by point basis in terms of the start and finish times and pre-processing of the data before delivery to the spreadsheet. There shall be facilities for selecting on a point by point basis whether or not an historical record is maintained for each telemetered data point. The historical data database shall use highly efficient compression algorithms to store the data. This ensures there is easy access to historical data and that.71 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The format of these reports shall be fully configurable by the operator using any system data acquired and/or calculated. and presented either in tabular or graphical form. and support arithmetic and logical operations that may be needed on the data before presentation in the reports. 2. Ideally this should be done through a client facility that is integrated directly into the spreadsheet. weekly and annual basis and derived from half hourly values of: (a) Pulse accumulator MWh and MVArh values acquired from energy meters (b) MWh and MVArh values calculated by integration of MW and MVAr values (c) Generator unit despatch instructions (d) Generator unit incremental costs Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. etc. An alarm shall be given to the operator when the storage of data approaches its capacity at which time the data shall be sent to the Data Archiving System for long term storage and retained for future reference. 2. The design shall ensure that historical data is not lost if the historical database goes out of service and that when it comes back online. It shall be possible to use current online data. 2. date. report and manage the daily system production and related factors. There shall be facilities for extracting data periodically and on demand from the historical database directly into third party spreadsheet programmes such as MS Excel™. These shall include daily.7. Facilities shall be provided for the printing of these reports either automatically at specific times or on request by the operator.Section 6 . All reports shall be available for display on the operator workstations. monthly and annual reports of network conditions and loading. where consistent with the above requirements. These reports shall be routinely printed at a designated time.1 Routine Reports The Contractor shall configure and implement a set of routine reports.7.7 REPORT GENERATION Operators shall have the facility to configure periodic and ad-hoc reports. Data recovered from archive shall be accessible via the same tools as the current historical database. it is able to automatically un-spool data that has been saved instead of being passed into the historical database. The operator shall be able to request an immediate printout of any report and this shall include the values stored up to the time of operator request. The report generation facility must allow for selective searching for data by location.. All changes in each real time data point (analogue and digital) received from the plant shall be recorded in the historical database. The format of all reports prepared by the Contractor shall be to the approval of the Employer. It shall be possible to restore the data from the long term archive facilities at any time for viewing without disrupting the online historical data. The content and format shall be developed during the preparation of the Functional Design Specification. restored archive data or a mixture of both as the source data for reports.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Data shall be stored online for up to 12 months and be available for subsequent recall at any time. There shall be user friendly facilities for archiving data to archive files to hard disk and to back up media and for recovering archived data. Historical data held on the existing SCADA system shall be imported into the new SCADA/EMS System and consideration should be given to retaining the present data structure. report configuration and presentation is very flexible. The Bidder shall describe the report generation facilities offered.2 Energy Reports The Contractor shall configure and implement a set of reports to assist the Control Centre to record.

2.1 DATABASE MANAGEMENT General A data engineering tool with a graphical user interface shall be provided to generate and maintain all data and displays.Section 6 . The System shall prompt for supplementary data. (g) The system energy balance between production and energy delivered to the 33kV system The weekly and monthly reports shall present cumulative values in a similar manner.8. to accommodate such changes as:      Modifications to the power network topology Addition and deletion of substations (and Outstations) Amendment of signals at Outstations Signal processing requirements Reconfiguration of the communications network It is essential that database amendments propagate through the System and that all necessary consequential changes are carried out automatically. It shall be possible to store offline amendments ready for incorporation into the real time database. as necessary. because of telemetry failure) but retrieved at a later time. For example.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications (e) Generator variable and fixed costs (f) Generator unit availability (g) Generator scheduling constraints including permitted starts. it shall be possible to create an offline amendment of the database on the System Maintenance Workstation.72 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant . The format and presentation shall be developed during the preparation of the database. The daily reports shall present the following information: (a) Daily Despatch schedule per half hour (b) Daily Despatch actual per half hour (c) Load forecast per half hour (d) Load actual per half hour (e) Energy per half hour and daily cumulative values per unit and station (f) Other data and information shall be presented in a suitable text form to give a clear presentation of the factors influencing the daily production results. It shall not be necessary for the same data to be entered more than once in order to provide the source data for different SCADA/EMS functions.8 2. in Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B. The user shall be able to amend the real time database using screen pro forma and menu driven techniques. stops (h) Generator unit regulation participation (i) Hydrological data pertinent to despatch and production (j) Weather data (k) Load forecast values (l) Transmission constraints (m) Transmission loss factors (n) Scheduled maintenance (o) Unscheduled outages (p) Other data available within the SCADA/EMS system or entered by users. as required. The ability to activate downloading of stored databases to the online system shall not be limited to the System Maintenance Workstation user or to any specific workstation.g. The system shall be capable of updating retrospectively any data that was not available at the half hourly interval (e.

For example. operators familiar with the facilities shall be able to use quick selection methods such as the use of function keys and/or short form command line entries.73 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . for display.8. wherever possible. substations etc in accordance with user defined criteria and which can be designated for updating on a cyclic basis and on demand by the operator. There shall also be a facility for interrogating the Master Station database via SQL type queries. Validity and plausibility checks shall be carried out on all data entries. The user shall have access to the facility. menu selections. which shall include spreadsheet format or 4GL language. User interaction with the editor shall support different levels of user familiarity by providing parallel paths for command entry. through an interpretive high level interface. The Bid shall provide a detailed description of the facilities he will be providing in respect to the requirements of this clause. or below specified limits over a selected time period. Construction of the diagrams shall use graphic primitives. measurand alarm limits shall automatically be checked to ensure that HH>H>L>LL and that dead bands (which shall be user definable) do not overlap with adjacent limits. Such user defined symbols should be capable of being stored in a library for ready retrieval and use in diagram construction. and initiate its incorporation into the online System from a control room workstation at a later time. manipulation and printout facilities as are found in current proprietary products. The user shall be able to construct the definable symbols using other symbols and graphic primitives. Facilities shall also be provided which ensure that when restoring. The derived data shall be held in the database and shall be accessible. character fonts and user definable symbols. The diagram editing function shall be implemented using the same type of graphical user interface as that used for the power network control function. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 2. The access authority of the operator activating such a predefined database amendment shall be definable by the System Engineer and shall not be restricted to levels at or above those normally permitting on-line database amendments. Each symbol shall be capable of being scaled and oriented at will during construction of a diagram. User access to the function shall be controlled through the normal system access control mechanism. but be prevented from updating the current (operating) diagram files. as for any other real time data. modify and store diagrams. The Contractor shall prepare a set of 20 displays or status lists covering 20 different sets of selection criteria to be defined during the course of the contract and provide a pro forma template which enables an operator to quickly set up additional status lists. Facilities shall be provided which allow operators to quickly restore the original database on the operational system where amendments have been incorporated and found to be unsatisfactory. amending or regenerating the system database it is not necessary to re-enter all data which had previously been entered manually. 2. However. These facilities shall include functions for generating duration curves for showing graphically when measurands were above. etc shall be the sort of mechanisms provided to facilitate this activity.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications advance.4 Graphic Display Construction Diagrams shall be prepared and modified using an interactive screen display editor that shall be available at any workstation incorporating graphic display capability. This shall be capable of imposing different access restrictions to different display editing functions. equipment.2 Data Entry The data entry task shall be made as simple and error free as possible.8. At one level the user shall be fully guided through the interaction with the editor by the use of menus and context sensitive help screens. To assist the operator in making a query which relates to one or more items of equipment there shall be simple procedures for identifying the item or items of equipment to be queried on one-line diagrams.Section 6 .8. Screen proof reads. a user may be able to copy.3 Data Manipulation Function A facility shall be provided to enable the user to generate derived data using arithmetic and logical functions. reporting and historical data compilation. The library shall hold a minimum of 256 symbols. These facilities shall enable operators to define status lists which list data points. So for example. within. 2. block copying. The spreadsheet facility shall also include normal spreadsheet calculation.

and that of the associated communications arrangements. circuit breakers. the editing facilities shall enable the diagram elements from an adjacent plane or overlay to be transferred to the layer being constructed. it shall be possible to define line type (thick/thin. This shall provide a means for readily aligning the diagrams on different layers of the world map and speeding diagram building. For the purpose of training and becoming fully familiar with techniques and methods for data configuration. Diagram elements may be defined as the component parts of the power network representation. screen displays. circuit breaker.74 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . etc). They will use the Configuration and Maintenance Facilities in the task of entering the project specific data required to configure the new SCADA/EMS System database(s). power lines. It shall be possible to define elements such that they respond to a logical combination of database points (e. prior to making the Configuration and Maintenance Facilities available for use by the Employer. arc. shall be defined. A minimum of two vector character fonts. ellipse.1 Configuration Responsibilities It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all configuration tasks are completed correctly and in accordance with the approved project programme. etc. The responses for active and interactive elements shall be determined by user definable default values of attributes for each element type. This information shall be provided as part of the Contractors training effort.g. alarm points.Section 6 .8. line isolator. The Contractor shall be responsible managing this work through to successful implementation is completed. produced by the Contractor. comprising 96 characters each.g. The text strings constructed from them shall be capable of being freely scaled and oriented as for user defined symbols.4.. measured values. for example. etc. Bidders shall clearly define in their Bid the tasks they have allocated to be performed by the Employer. It shall also be possible to define the element as passive. To facilitate the tasks of data engineering the Contractor shall arrange for the Maintenance Workstation to be delivered at an early stage of the Contract. field signal definitions. Additionally. polygon. active or interactive. rectangle. it is intended that some members of the Employer‘s data engineering team will spend at least one month in the Contractor‘s Works assisting with Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. colour. but they shall be capable of independent amendment. etc.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications Graphic primitives typically comprise: line. the required programme for the performance of those tasks to meet the overall project programme and the resources required to complete those tasks. at a certain magnification level the substation diagram may represent each line end status as a single symbol. where the states of corresponding busbar isolators. to build screen displays and report formats. To assist the Employer in future data gathering and collation activities the Contractor shall specify the detailed requirements of all data necessary to configure the SCADA/EMS System to enable it to meet its specified functionality. The remaining database and graphics work will be completed by the Employer‘s staff following suitable training and under the supervision of the Contractor. circle. the number of workstations required to be used to perform those tasks. 2. During diagram construction. the entry of network electrical parameters. etc. text labels.g. the design of report formats. It shall be possible to select from a minimum of eight line types.g. Diagram construction shall be made less arduous by providing editing tools. etc are logically combined to a single status indication). as appropriate. line type. The Contractor‘s training regime shall ensure that the Employer personnel shall be fully competent to undertake these tasks as the system evolves over time following completion of the Works under this contract. the user shall be able to define certain attributes associated with the elements (e. The Contractor shall carry out any necessary training. e. It is anticipated that this configuration task will include the preparation of network diagrams. In this way the user shall be able to define how an element changes its appearance in response to a change in a database point or points to which it is linked. eight fill patterns and 32 colours. both in terms of man power and System facilities. the Employer will provide a number of staff to assist in this exercise. although default values (last setting) shall normally apply until changed. solid/broken) fill pattern and colour for each. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing the 'first fit' of user definable displays including the world map single line and geographical representations and individual object summaries together with displays relating to the SCADA System status (including Outstations). For construction of the multiple layers of a world map. Independently. to facilitate the copying of areas of the diagram and replication of them within the world map and to permit the relocation of areas of the diagram without disrupting connectivity. e.

8. Excel. c) Interface to a future ‗Transparent Despatch‘ facility. 2. The Contractor shall consider the implications of any such changes on the hardware and software capacity and performance of the system. If any changes are required to database. until the modified item is specifically substituted for the original. b) Interface to the Employer‘s PSS-E study and planning applications. e) Export of files in standard formats suitable for import into spreadsheets. The Contractor shall ensure all changes are subject to formal change and version control procedures.1 The major objectives of the training simulator are summarised as follows: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the item to be modified shall be copied into a work area for modification. The facilities shall be able to provide an audit trail to identify changes and the by whom the changes were carried out by. The Contractor or the Employer's staff under the supervision of the Contractor shall incorporate any such changes into the system. 2.10 OPERATOR TRAINING SIMULATOR Objectives 2. and shall advise the Employer of these implications. The Contractor shall include the cost of travel and subsistence for 6 persons in his Bid. alarm/event lists and reports available within the system h) E-mail i) Facsimile The external access shall not affect the operational performance of the system in anyway and shall be via a highly secure mechanism whereby non authorised user cannot access the system and no authorised external user can make modifications other than providing data such as may be required for reports or operational planning. trends.5 Changes to Configuration Data During the initial configuration period prior to provisional acceptance initial source data may change as the Employer's staff gain a deeper understanding of the process and they or the Contractor gather more complete and or accurate power system data. DDE and OLE shall be provided to access real time and historical data by Windows™ based applications such as Word. 2. the Employer will provide details of the changes to the Contractor. 2. Previous revisions of graphics and databases shall be retained for manual deletion by the system manager.75 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . f) Import/Export of data via ICCP (TASE 2) interface g) Web server that permits external users with appropriate access rights to obtain network displays. The original item shall be available for selection as part of the normal real time system operation.8. and update the source data under supervision of the Contractor.Section 6 . The data engineering tools shall have built-in extensive validation checks on power system components and their integration topology. etc. word processors and graphics programs.6 Change Control When modifying the database or displays.10.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications the initial data engineering tasks. d) Dynamic data linkages such as ODBC. screen or report configuration data after completion and before final acceptance.9 DATA EXCHANGE FACILITIES The System shall be capable of supporting the following data interchange facilities: a) Import/export of data via a standard SQL interface.

-Long-term dynamic models for generating unit components. Instructor facilities shall be provided to set up any number of pre-determined sequences of timed chronological events to change the state or value of any point defined in the simulation model.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications a) To enable control room operators to become fully practised with the SCADA/EMS facilities under steady state conditions. The basic functions available in the simulation environment shall be the same as those used in the operational system including SCADA functions.76 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . water flow and controls for hydro generators. -Simulate load shedding -Simulation of the operation of protection relays -Simulation of the operation of re-closers. The simulation software shall display to the trainee the redistribution of network voltages and powers based upon the simulated operating conditions.Section 6 . scheduling. The instructor shall also be able to activate individual events or chains of events at will from the instructors console without first having to set up a scenario. it shall be possible for save cases and database snap shots available on the main system to be loaded and used in simulation sessions. The man-machine interface of the instructor and of the trainee-Operator shall be the same as that of the Operators in the control room. power system analysis functions in real-time and study-mode. To fulfil the above objectives a separate operator workstation as a training simulator is envisaged. The simulation model used shall be identical to that for the power network applications. -Simulate random disturbances to measurements. However. The software facilities to be provided shall be fully described and are expected to include the features described in the remainder of this section. AGC. forecasting. active and reactive power loading static and dynamic limitations. The event simulator shall provide simulation of the real-time power system offering a realistic perspective to the trainee. -Simulation of the operation of synchronous-checks. despatch. -Simulation of the effects of a fault. A specific console shall be dedicated to the instructor for supervising the training.10. Individual points shall be described in these ‗scenario files‘. voltage regulators. including boiler and boiler controls. The bidder may offer a simulator meeting the full EPRI standard as an option. The network behaviour shall be presented either at real-life speed or with some acceleration or slow down factor.2 Simulation Functions The SCADA User Interface functions provided for the training simulator shall be the same as those provided in the Control Room except that the data acquisition functions shall be replaced by an event simulator. b) To provide realistic simulation of power network events in quasi-real-time so that control room operators can be exposed to a wide range of power network contingencies and interactively initiate remedial actions. -Simulate multiple islanding of the network Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. turbine controls (primary frequency regulator and interactions with AGC for secondary frequency regulation). The instructor shall be able to monitor simulated events and trainee responses during simulation and be able to introduce further scenarios at will. 2. -Load sensitivity to voltage and frequency. The simulator shall present the following features: -Variations of loads according to predefined models. The facilities shall not cause any disruption to the normal operation of the NSCC whilst training is taking place nor adversely affect the reliability and availability of the on-line SCADA system whilst training is taking place.

If the line has a permanent fault. the instructor shall be able to: -Modify the loads (individually or globally and time scheduled). Otherwise. the difference between the voltage magnitudes and phase angles at the two ends have to be less than a specified value for closure to occur. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Through predefined scenarios or through manual interventions during a session. -Automatic reclose relays attempt the reclose of transmission line circuit breakers after they have tripped. -Set RTU and communication lines out-of-service.3 Relay modelling Protection relay models which trip or close circuit breakers and switches for the purpose of protecting and controlling the Power System and its components shall be provided. transformers. In the case where the two ends are in different islands. It shall provide: -Bus voltages in the range nominal +30%/-30%.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications -Simulate reconnection of network islands The simulator shall compute a complete AC load flow solution in the acceleration framework. Inverse time over current relays shall be modelled.10. -Change plant control mode (local / AGC).. -Allow / prohibit supervisory control of breakers. When both ends of the breakers are in the same island. phase angles. These relay models shall trip the associated breakers if the violations exceed predefined thresholds based on duration and magnitude. The simulator shall be configurable to serve as testing tool during Factory and Site Acceptance Tests 2. Those relays that operate because certain simulated variables reach particular thresholds shall be explicitly modelled. the check is done on voltage magnitude and frequency differences. or conditional to some designated variables satisfying some instructor specified condition. Such events shall occur either at instructor specified times. the reclose operations are unsuccessful and there is no effect on the simulation except for circuit breaker status closing and opening. -Under/over voltage relays which trip bus load breakers or generators according to the value of the bus voltage. -Synchronous check relays shall be modelled which check voltage magnitude. -Trip lines or transformers. -Active and reactive branch flows. -Loads. Line or transformer overloads. and frequencies across a breaker before attempting closure. For example. a predefined end of a tripped transmission line will attempt three reclose operations at specified times. The following relay types shall be represented explicitly: -Under/over frequency relays which are activated by the value of system frequency. Relays which operate rapidly during transients in the system need not be modelled and only their effects are introduced into the simulation. Relays shall be modelled in such a way that the automatic switching operations in the network are accurately portrayed in the simulation. -Frequency in the range 45 to 55Hz. a short circuit on a high voltage transmission line activates protective relaying within a few cycles but this process shall be modelled in the scenario as the tripping of certain circuit breakers. the successful reclose at the near end is simulated in the power flow with subsequent reclosing of the far end. -Active and reactive generations. -Trip generating units. voltage and frequency excursions shall be processed by relay models.77 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . For example. The near end breaker (s) attempt reclose for a maximum of three times.Section 6 .

2.11. On completion of the project update and maintenance of the Antivirus product will be undertaken by the Employer IT staff. Where a number of servers are mounted within in a cubicle or suite of cubicles it is permissible for these servers to share a single system console connected via a KVM switch. All servers shall be equipped with a system console to allow the tracing of faults and stoppages. The data acquisition server shall be capable of being equipped with the following interfaces for communication with the Outstation equipment: a) V. For each communications channel the data acquisition server shall detect loss of communications with an Outstation and raise an alarm.4 Data Acquisition Servers Data acquisition servers shall be provided at the Master Station to independently carry out all acquisition and processing of telemetered data.11 MASTER STATION HARDWARE 2. However it is not acceptable for the system console to be shared with a server or servers located in another equipment room. The detection of the loss of a communication channel shall include the following conditions. Each data acquisition server shall be equipped with a system console to allow the tracing of faults and stoppages. graphics and the archive and retrieval of historical data on magnetic or optical media. including CRC errors. b) 64kbps interfaces c) TCP/IP 100/10 Mbps (where appropriate) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Highly reliable mass storage devices shall be provided to satisfy the requirements of the operating system. is exceeded for a predefined time. All servers shall have redundant hot swappable power supplies. The operation of this device shall not require that the device be physically connected to each computer in turn. MVA or current. 2. 2.Section 6 .78 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . length errors in data etc.28 interfaces for unbalanced communication configurable up to 9600 bps.3 Servers All servers shall be of a well proven design suitable for ‗real-time‘ operation where reliability is a prime consideration. a) No carrier from the Outstation over a user configurable time period (where appropriate) b) No reply from the Outstation for a user configurable time period and number of tries. Long term data storage facilities shall be provided for loading and backing up of software.11. The Bidder shall describe the management process by which this will be carried out.3.11. All servers shall be rack mounted within a cubicle. c) A user configurable number of bad responses in a user configurable period of time. database configuration.2. 2. There shall be a minimum of 50 per cent spare capacity above that required to allow for expansion for future use as specified in 2.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications -Directional and non-directional inverse time MVA or current flow relays which trip a line or transformer if a limit. and redundant systems mounted in separate cubicles for location in equipment rooms.2 Antivirus Software Antivirus software shall be supplied on all computer systems.1 Operating Systems It is required that each category of computer has its own operating system and that this operating system is capable of supporting all on-line and standby functions to be performed by that computer.11.24/V. applications and data.

Media support for Ethernet Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The operator workstations shall meet the requirements defined in Technical Schedules 2.Section 6 .79 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . powering off. operator workstations. or malfunction of a piece of hardware on a LAN shall not interfere with the operation of that LAN. There shall be a minimum of 50 per cent spare capacity above that required to allow for expansion capacity for future use as specified in 2. Failure of a LAN in a redundant configuration shall not degrade system performance below the specified performance requirements of Section 2. When required a firewall or filtering router shall be provided to separate the SCADA master station LAN from all other LANs and WANs. Redundant power supplies (for main switches). separate Ethernet switches and power supplies shall be supplied for each. routers/gateways etc necessary for the operation of the SCADA system. Centralised network management via SNMP.5 Operator Workstations Each operator workstation shall be equipped with alphanumeric keyboard and mouse/trackball and LCD screens. The removal. The Ethernet switches provided by the Contractor shall have the following minimum features: a) Multiple LANs supported concurrently.11. Each operator workstation shall be equipped with a low level audible alarm. The dual redundant LANs will be constructed. In particular. multiple independent Ethernet LANs shall be concurrently supported.1 Ethernet switches Where dual redundant LANs are required. Modular architecture permitting field configuration and upgrades. communications servers and peripheral devices shall be supported by a dual redundant LAN which conforms to IEEE standards. The number of workstations and LCD screens shall be as stated in Technical Schedules. The LAN shall be complete with all necessary terminal/printer servers. All transfers of devices between redundant LANs shall be performed automatically without disruption of any logical channel between applications. Single-mode fibre up to 2 kilometres. Each operator workstation shall be provided with adequate main memory for the required tasks with 50 per cent spare capacity. bridges.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2. Hot-swappable boards. All LAN equipment shall be rack mounted within a cubicle.11. There shall be 50 per cent spare capacity above that required for the fully expanded system.11. and redundant systems mounted in separate cubicles for location in equipment rooms. separate LAN switches equipped with redundant power supplies. Failure or degradation of LAN operation shall be reported via alarms. A highly reliable mass storage device shall be provided to satisfy the requirement of the operating system and applications software. repeaters.12.3. Routers Where routers are provided for connections of other LANs to the SCADA LAN for the purposes of remote access or the exchange of operational data these shall have the following minimum features: a. b) c) d) e) f) g) h) 2.6.2 Media support for Ethernet Category 5 e UTP or better.6.11.2. The LANs must be constructed to provide the necessary throughput to meet overall system performance requirements. 2.6 Local Area Network (LAN) Interconnection between computers.

7. Redundant power supplies.3 Colour Printers Colour printers shall comply with the above requirements for general purpose printers. f. LAN Management LAN management facilities shall be provided via a full graphical user interface that shall be supplied and configured.8 Video Wall The Video Wall shall provide for a 8 panel display with overall size of approximately 160 inches wide x 60 inches high comprising 50‖ (diagonal) panels. 2.80 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . e. and support peripherals. The system shall include both digital (DVI) and analogue inputs and allow easy expansion to support additional inputs for compatibility and redundancy purposes.11. 2. via external computer or terminal via networked RS-232.11. The number of colour printers shall be as stated in the Technical Schedules. 2.11. The design of the construction and appearance shall be subject to approval by The Employer. Each printer shall be capable of manual and automatic paper handling and be equipped with 500 sheet paper tray.11. The number of laser printers shall be as stated in the Technical Schedules..7 Printers 2.Section 6 . The equipment offered in this Contract shall be suitable for continuous 365 day per year 24 hour control room operation and have been proven by satisfactory operating experience in similar environmental conditions elsewhere.6.7. or via hardware switch through a standard GPIO port. The projection system must be capable of being controlled via remote keypad (wired or IR). Centralised network management via SNMP.11. This management function shall provide overall control and monitoring capabilities to reconfigure and indicate the status of the LANs. Printers shall have separate black and coloured toners and printers using individual colour cartridges are preferred to those that use single multi-colour cartridges. c. 2. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The construction shall provide for an aesthetic mounting and finish. 2.7. The joints between panels shall be such that lines or diagram elements crossing them are clear and without discontinuities (a maximum screen to screen gap of 1mm). by external computer via Ethernet.3 Category 5 e UTP or better G703 optical fibre interface Multiple routing protocols including RIP and IGRP Modular architecture permitting field configuration and upgrades. Each panel shall be set and be capable of automatically maintaining equal levels of contrast and brightness to each other in order to achieve an even and homogenous presentation of displays and information. Printer consumables shall be readily available locally in the Employer‘s country.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications   b.1 General The devices shall contain off-line self-test systems that provide the capability of adjustment and maintenance without interfering with the remainder of the computer system. Each printer shall be capable of printing at minimum speed of 15 ppm.2 Laser Printers All laser printers shall produce clear black & white copies on standard A4 paper or transparencies with a minimum resolution of 1200 dpi. Hot-swappable boards. The printers shall be able to print A4 and A3 black and white and colour pages.11. network equipment. d.

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2.11. The lower edge of the display units shall be 1. or motorized apertures. The display units and their supporting structure shall be enclosed in an external finish to the approval of the Employer. Samples of the proposed finish shall be provided to the Employer for agreement prior to manufacture. The Bidder shall specify the heat loads generated by the video wall equipment. d.11. The Bidder shall describe the resilience features of the equipment supplied. The installation of the display wall units shall be such that they appear as an integral part of the overall enclosure.5 metre above the floor level. In addition panels shall be located at each end to house the displays described in sections 2. The projection system shall not contain arc lamps.Section 6 .3. The entire video wall must be available for presentation of a minimum of 16 windows containing graphical displays.3 and 2. These panels shall be sized and constructed to house additional active video wall screens which may be implemented at a later date.3. b.g. motorized colour wheels. The video wall controllers shall be supplied with Microsoft Windows based operating system.3.8. The screen technology shall be of a Fresnel lenticular construction and not use a Blackbead screen technology.8. It must be possible to enlarge any single window to use the whole display area. The display units and associated equipment are to be installed in a suitable enclosure for location in the control room.4.81 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant . 2. The display units shall be installed fully in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions and in such a manner that allows safe access for maintenance. 2. The system shall automatically ensure a consistency of colour and intensity between each display panel. Each video wall controller shall be equipped with the following interfaces as detailed in the technical schedules: a. Green and Blue LEDs.11. c.11. 2.3 Video Wall Construction The minimum overall size of the video wall display area shall be as stated in the technical schedules. All maintenance of the display units shall be from the rear of the units.6.8.4 Software The video wall controllers shall be capable of displaying windows from all sources simultaneously. It must be possible to move and resize these windows to use any part of the video wall area. The Contractor shall be responsible for the confirmation of actual enclosure dimensions prior to commencing manufacture. The Bidder shall specify the viewing angle which must be at least 180 degrees horizontally and 120 degrees vertically. Outline details shall be submitted in the Bid and agreed with the Employer prior to manufacture. The Bidder shall state the brightness which shall be at least 450 Cd/m2 and also the brightness uniformity between centre and edge of screens which must be greater than 90%.4.2 Controllers Video wall controllers shall be supplied for interfacing to the SCADA system equipment.1 Display Units Each rear projection display unit shall be equipped with projector based on DLP technology capable of 1400x1050 SXGA+ pixels or higher resolution. Duplicated Giga/Fast Ethernet connections 2 off video/CCTV camera inputs. 2 off DVI inputs 2 off VGA inputs The video wall controller shall be resilient to single equipment failures e.8. through the provision of independently fed redundant power supplies.3. Fixed access shall be provided for maintenance of the units as part of the video wall supporting structure. Each display unit shall be equipped with a three colour LED light source using single separate Red. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B.

Outstations shall normally be synchronised directly from GPS equipment located at each of the substations. in addition to alarms caused by the above mentioned status changes (see (a)) and measurement limit violations. g) All application and standard software running as normal.5 Management Management facilities for the control.Section 6 . 2. day. and monitoring of performance shall be provided with the video wall controllers. f) One alarm page ‗accept‘ every 3 minutes. c) All measurements being transmitted to the Master Station at the update times specified in the Schedules with subsequent processing and presentation on displays at the Master Station. Time synchronisation between workstations and servers on the Master Station LAN shall be better than 10 ms. 2. 2. It shall also be possible to synchronise the Outstations from the Master Station via the SCADA telecommunication channels in cases where no GPS is installed or the GPS has failed. as the information is permanently on display separate dedicated display devices shall be mounted adjacent to the Video Wall and fitted with surrounds and bezels in keeping with the Video Wall design. backup.4. e) A new display being requested every minute (Each display containing an average of 30 analogue values and 50 indications).6.11.11. b) A total of 1 per cent of all analogue measurements exceeding their alarm limits per minute with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station.8. the Master Station equipment shall initiate a regular time synchronisation procedure. Similarly Hydro Complex Displays shall be provided in an adjacent panel to the Video Wall. The Bidder shall provide details of the time synchronisation procedure. Where the Master Station equipment is required to maintain time synchronisation of the Outstations.12.82 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant . with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. With the exception of the directly derived frequency measurements the system shall be able to present this information on the Video Wall.3. Facilities shall be provided for the definition of up to 8 video wall window layouts which can be recalled from the management interface. To this end the Video Wall housing shall have a panel at each end both with matching bezels.10 System Displays System Displays shall be provided to present the information described in section 2. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B.9 System Time Time synchronisation of the Master Station equipment shall be from the GPS master clock system located in the NSCC. This shall be from a dedicated console that provides control to all equipment connected to the video walls. 2. The time synchronisation procedure shall maintain time synchronisation between the Master Station equipment and each of the Outstations to better than 10 ms and to better than 20 ms between Outstations. d) A total of 2 per cent of all alarm points being initiated per minute.3.1 Normal Activity Conditions The normal activity level shall be defined as the following conditions: a) Changes in 2 per cent of all status indications per minute with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. month and year boundaries.11. The performance test shall be carried out at different times of day including crossing hour.12 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE The following Clauses describe the performance requirements for the System operating in its normal configuration. Updating shall take place automatically at start-up and regularly thereafter to ensure that the error between the GPS master clock time and Master Station Servers does not exceed 1 ms. However.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2.

The response times for events and alarms shall be measured from the time of occurrence in the field of the initial event/alarm to the time the relevant operator display is updated with real time data or an event or alarm appears in the respective list.Section 6 .12.83 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . e) A new display being requested every 15 seconds.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications h) Execution of topology processing and any cyclically executing EMS applications every 5 minutes. 2. in addition to alarms caused by the above mentioned status changes (see (a)) and measurement limit violations.g. Immediately after failover. If a display is suspended during panning and zooming.3 Computer Start Up Total time for the start up of a computer.12 The response times for interactions with the UI displays shall be measured from the time of completion of the initiating action on the operator display to the time the relevant operator display has been fully updated with the respective real time data resulting from the action.4 Transfer of Operation No operational feature of the SCADA/EMS System shall be unavailable for more than 30 seconds at any time due to the transfer of operation from one processor to another following processor failure (e. initialisation and database updating. including automatic program load.5 seconds after the panning/zooming operation has completed. Complete SCADA/EMS functionality shall be available within a further five minutes following a start up or automatic restart of the last computer in the minimum set of computers required to be running to support this functionality.12. the time for the display to be refreshed shall be no more than 0. at each operator workstation (Each display containing an average of 30 analogue values and 50 indications). d) A total of 10 per cent of all alarm points being initiated per minute. The time for the display to be refreshed following each step shall be no longer than 0.2 High Activity Conditions The high activity level shall be defined as the following conditions: a) Changes in 10 per cent of all status indications per minute with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. b) A total of 10 per cent of all analogue measurements exceeding their alarm limits per minute with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. 2. i) f) One alarm page ‗accept‘ every 30 seconds.5 System Response Times The performance of the System shall meet or better the maximum response times specified in Table 2. Panning and zooming in/out movements shall be achieved in increments of no greater than 1/8 the screen size. All applications and standard software running as normal. Updating from outstations may extend beyond this time but the full update of the System with data from the field shall not exceed a further five minutes. shall not exceed 15 minutes. shall not exceed five minutes. with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. The operators shall not need to login again and the display selections should remain as they were prior to the failover. including full update from the field. g) Execution of topology processing and any cyclically executing EMS applications every 5 minutes. failover to a hot standby computer or reconfiguration of networked tasks) or for any other reason. 2.25 second. 2. all functions shall be available to the operators. Thus. a complete restart of the System. Automatic restart following a power down shall not exceed five minutes.12.12. c) All measurements being transmitted to the Master Station at the update times specified in the Schedules with subsequent processing and presentation on displays at the Master Station. The Bidder shall provide detailed calculation that demonstrates that the proposed system has the capacity and response capability to meet the full requirements for performance initially and when a fully Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

durable construction and shall be ergonomically designed to facilitate operation of the equipment to be mounted on them.13 CONTROL CENTRE FURNITURE 2.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications expanded. The arrangement and method of mounting equipment on the desks shall be subject to approval. The design. appearance.Section 6 . and finish of the control desk shall be to approval. The control desks shall be of robust.1 Operator Desks The Operator Workstation VDUs and associated keyboards described in this Specification shall be mounted on control desks to be supplied under this Contract.12 Maximum System Response Times (seconds) Description Confirmation of point selection on a VDU The time between selection of a display and the VDU diagram fully updated shall not exceed Acceptance of a single alarm Acceptance of a page of alarms The time between selection of a control function and check back from the outstation as to whether or not the control can be performed shall not exceed The time between execution of a control function and initiation of the control at the outstation shall not exceed The time between the occurrence of a change of state or an alarm at an outstation and display at the Master Station shall not exceed The time between a change of state at an outstation due to a control action and display at the Master Station shall not exceed The time between successive updates of the main computer data base with analogue measurements shall not exceed a) MW. They shall provide for adequate writing space and have room for a communication console. The calculations shall demonstrate that there is sufficient disc capacity.84 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Table 2. processing power and main memory to achieve the requirements. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. MVAr & Voltage measurements b) Other measurements The time between successive updates of the main computer database with pulse meter values shall not exceed Loading of a save case and initialisation of a study mode EMS application Results available from a derived calculation Time from request of hard copy output to the commencement of printing Normal Activity 1 2 2 2 2 High Activity 1 4 2 4 2 1 1 2 4 2 4 5 5 20 40 30 30 10 2 2 30 2 5 2.13.

The chairs shall be of robust construction suitable for continuous use and shall be designed to give optimum body support and comfort during use. arm rest chairs complete with five castors shall be provided to match the desks.3 Equipment Stands All peripherals which are not free standing must be mounted on suitable robust stands. The furniture shall be of a good quality. 2. The chairs and their upholstery shall be of a design. tables and chairs in the quantities stated in the Price Schedules.4 Office Furniture A range of standard office desks. shall be provided by the Contractor. and shall be subject to approved.13. the design and finish of which shall be subject to approval. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The design of the furniture shall be in keeping with the general office décor. 2.2 Operator Chairs High back reclining swivel.13. All stands shall be complete with all necessary trays and accessories for orderly paper handling. durable and appropriately designed for office work where staff members are expected to be seated for several hours at a time. The proposed furniture will be subject to approval by the Employer.13.85 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 . construction and finish.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 2.

The intention of these documents and drawings is to provide the basic design concept.86 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . It is also recognised that such a system will have standard functional features not specified herein but nevertheless important or essential for the implementation of a fully operational system. all software. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. It also describes the overall functional. The Bidder shall identify where the solution offered is a deviation from the requirement or an alternative that meets the objectives of the specified requirement. Together. 3. the modification. 3. The transition from the old telecommunication network to the new telecommunication network should be carried out in a staged and overlapping manner to minimise ―cut-off‖ time and disruption to power system operation The strategy of working with one communication link (main or secondary) only at a time should be applied wherever possible during upgrading/reinforcement of the existing telecommunication network.1. The Telecommunication System Specification is to be read in conjunction with other documents containing the Technical Schedules and Drawings. the SCADA system and telecommunication system designs shall constitute a fully integrated and complete operation and control system.Section 6 .1 Specification and Design Criteria The equipment. International Telecommunication Union (ITU) Specifications and the General Technical Specification. documentation and miscellaneous items required to implement a complete and fully operational system that is fit for the intended purpose whether or not those items are specified herein. Such future flexibility shall be borne in mind in the detail design of the telecommunication system.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 3. In this context it is important to recognise that the systems being provided are likely to be expanded in the future and new facilities added. Equivalent national standards may be acceptable subject to approval by the Employer. extension and upgrading works carried out by the Contractor must be well planned and co-ordinated with other parties involved in the NSCC Project. installation requirements and other project specific particulars. Bidders may propose alternate design solutions so long as these match or exceed the specified functionality and performance. Further to this the Contractor shall be responsible for supplying. hardware.1. performance and general hardware and software requirements for the new telecommunication system needed to support the new NSCC SCADA system. Therefore existing telecommunication equipment should be re-used or de-commissioned and re-commissioned elsewhere and be integrated into the new telecommunication network wherever possible. The Bidder shall provide cross referencing for his Bid submission identifying where the particular clauses of this Specification and the associated General Technical Specifications are addressed. As far as possible these products shall be customised to meet the specified functional requirements. The Bidder‘s attention is also drawn to the Schedule of ―Confirmation of Compliance‖ which is contained in Volume 7. including details of necessary survey work to be undertaken by the Contractor. extended and upgraded in a cost effective manner to meet the new telecommunication requirements.2 Reference Documents and Standards All equipment supplied under this Specification shall conform to the latest editions of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Specifications. In order to minimise disruption to the Employer‘s power system operation. TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 3. ISO Standards. to be supplied to meet the requirements set out in this document shall be based on mature and proven products that have evolved and been field proven in comparable projects. including software. extension and upgrade of the existing telecommunication system and associated works. The proposed telecommunication system shall fully comply with the requirements stipulated in all these documents.1 INTRODUCTION The Telecommunication System Specification details the requirements for the modification. IEEE Standards. technical and functional requirements of the new telecommunication system as a base for preparation of offer by the Bidders. within the Contract price. It should be emphasised that the existing telecommunication system should be modified.

87 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The party line telephone system (PLTS) is a dedicated non-switched telephone system. The present system is based on an older ABB Spider Micro SCADA system commissioned in the year 2000. The existing SDH equipment is FOX515 from ABB. Multiplexing equipment and modems. The FO links are based on synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) technology operating at a STM-1 transmission rate (155 Mbps). Optical ground wire (OPGW). The existing telecommunication network (see drawing TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-006-PLTS not shown). Section 6. TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-005). having no remote control facility. Party line telephone system Administrative telephone system. Fibre optic terminal equipment. In recent years. It only covers about one third of the power stations and grid substations and further stations cannot be connected without severe degradation of the already insufficient system performance. Except for some voice links. operating over high voltage transmission lines. 3. consisting mainly obsolete and aged analogue Power Line Carrier (PLC) equipment. voice and teleprotection signals. The existing telecommunication system comprises the following sub-systems:         PLC equipment. with a SCADA system based on ABB BECOS 20 system. does not provide sufficient communication channels / capacity required for the efficient operation of the power system. SCADA data transmission between the RTUs and the control centre is using data channels with transmission speed of 200 bps via the analogue PLC links and 9600 bps via the FO links. Pilot copper cable links. which is exclusively used for system control purposes. fibre optic (FO) links have been increasingly used for these functions. which include the following:     Fibre optic links. via OPGW.(see drawing no. Part D. The system comprises of a master station equipment at the SCC and terminal equipment at all power stations and grid substations. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. It was commissioned in 1985. The SCADA RTUs communicate with the master stations at the existing SCC via data communication channels. Most of the PLC links are double channel equipment with one channel being used for party line telephone system and the other channel used for PAX system.Section 6 .4 Existing Control and Telecommunication Facilities At present a System Control Centre (SCC) is in operation and is located near Kolonnawa substation. The system can monitor the transmission network and power system only. 48 Vdc power supply system for both SCADA RTU and telecommunication equipment. VHF radio links.3 Site and Environmental Conditions All equipment supplied shall be fully suitable for operating at the temperature and humidity as specified in the General Technical Specification contained in Volume 4 Section 6 Part A and Volume 5. PLC links.1. The existing telecommunication network is composed of a mix of communication media. Teleprotection signalling equipment. The telecommunication network is used for the transmission of SCADA data. ADDS or underground fibre optic cables. It is responsible for the despatching of load to the power stations and the operation of the power transmission network. redundant telecommunication paths do not exist.1. ADSS and underground fibre optic cables.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications 3.

TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-001 shows an overview of the new telecommunication system requirements. c. The telecommunication system shall provide. 3.1 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS Introduction A reliable and high performance telecommunication system is needed to support power system operation. To accommodate the telecommunication services needed to meet the Employer‘s operational and administrative requirements. b. 3. the existing telecommunication network shall be modified. V. The Contract Implementation Programme that is proposed takes into consideration the above constraints. the existing telecommunication drawings contained in Volume 6. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. b. upgraded and expanded to meet the following: a. c.6 kb/s for connection to RTUs connected to the telecommunication network via DPLC links. as a minimum. c. with the objective of making both SCADA and telecommunication facilities progressively available throughout the power system. To facilitate future expansion of the telecommunication system to meet the requirements of power system expansion. d. Digital power line carrier (DPLC) equipment. Telephone system. b.24/V.3. the following facilities: a. Telecommunication management system (TMS). d. the Contractor shall take into account possible changes to the OPGW and SDH installation programmes and plan his work in a manner that mitigates against delay to the implementation of the telecommunication system in general.5 Implementation Programme The telecommunication system shall be implemented in accordance with the milestones set out in the Contract Implementation Programme contained in Volume 7 Part D Schedule E section 11. Part C may not be up to date and that a site visit by the Bidder will be needed to confirm the extent of work required. e. The Telecommunication Specification describes the project specific requirements to fulfil the telecommunication objectives including detailed functional and performance requirements of the various sub-systems comprising the telecommunication system.4. It should be noted that since some elements of the fibre optic backbone communication network rely on optical ground wire (OPGW) to be fitted on existing overhead transmission lines as well as the provision of some SDH equipment by others. The sub-systems include: a. High speed (nx64 Kb/s) data channels for connection to RTUs connected to the telecommunication network via optic fibre links. Voice channels. data and teleprotection signalling communication channels.1. The prime function of the telecommunication system is to provide the necessary speech.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The Bidder should be aware that due to constant expansion of the Employer‘s power network. 2 Mb/s transport service.88 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Digital teleprotection signalling equipment. Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) communication system. Drawing No. To meet the Employer‘s present and future operational and business requirements.2.Section 6 . Section 6. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the telecommunication system and the provision of telecommunication equipment under the Contract. To have sufficient telecommunication system spare capacity for selling to third parties at a later date.2 3.28 (RS232C) asynchronous data channels with speed up to 9.

However. which shall meet in all respects the performance specified under the prevailing site conditions. Teleprotection signalling commands will be transmitted as before via the existing PLC equipment. Transmission of teleprotection channels over physically separated multiplex equipment. Necessary teleprotection signalling equipment shall be provided by the Contractor to allow teleprotection signalling commands to be sent via the new fibre optic network.89 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Other non-critical operational and administrative data communication services using TCP/IP. Overhead lines that are to be fitted with OPGW currently use PLC links for transmission of teleprotection signalling commands. In general. The design objective with respect to reliability is to ensure that no single contingency results in loss or unacceptable degradation of service. Major telecommunication equipment malfunction alarms shall be transmitted to the NSCC via the SCADA system.Section 6 . Cross-connection criteria of channels shall be as follows: a. Teleprotection signalling channels. All necessary additional user interfaces shall be provided to meet the new communication requirements. data and teleprotection signalling channels can be automatically re-routed in the event of a trunk/node failure and/or traffic congestion occurring anywhere on the network. The proposed design shall incorporate proven technology. where the existing PLC equipment is relatively new the Contractor shall transfer all existing telecommunication services except teleprotection signalling commands from the PLC links onto the new fibre optic network. the telecommunication network shall be capable of providing a fully resilient network in which all speech.2. to demonstrate by means of tests at site that the Employer‘s existing equipment and any supplied by the Contractor perform satisfactorily together. In order to provide a cost effective telecommunication network. f. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor. resilient to hazards and robust in all respects. to alert the system operators of the operational status of the telecommunication system. assisted by the Employer. The equipment shall preserve configuration data during power failure and all modules shall be capable of hot swappable. b. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Transmission of ―main‖ and ―secondary‖ channels over physically separated multiplex equipment as much as possible.2 Design and Operational Philosophy The design philosophy of the new telecommunication network is that failure of any single component shall not cause failure of critical function. The Contractor shall furnish equipment. g. 3. Video transmission service (at a later date). The primary multiplexers shall be used widely at substations to combine at maximum of 30 pulse code modulation (PCM) voice channels or 64 kb/s data channels into a 2048 b/s signal. The system must be fault tolerant. subject to the proviso that any fault or failure of existing equipment shall be the responsibility of the Employer. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the parameters of the existing systems and equipment owned by the Employer and to ensure that new equipment supplied by the Contractor is fully compatible with such existing systems and equipment. the existing telecommunication equipment should be re-used or dismantled and re-commissioned elsewhere to form part of the integrated telecommunication network. Remote monitoring of telecommunication equipment operational status including alarms and performance shall be under the supervision of the telecommunication management system (TMS). In addition. These criteria will normally require dual routing or dynamically allocated virtual circuits.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications e. address the requirements set out in this document with respect to availability and reliability. where the existing PLC equipment is old and obsolete the Contractor shall transfer all existing telecommunication services including teleprotection signalling commands from the PLC links onto the new fibre optic network. and that the incidence of failure of components/elements is consistent with achieving high availability.

1 Configuration and Topology The new telecommunication fibre optic network backbone shall employ SDH technology with STM-1 (155. TCP/IP Ethernet networking. 3.4.2. All systems shall. Single fibre operation. such as corporate business computer applications and regional administrative communications etc. The Contractor shall carry out optical loss budget calculations for each fibre optic link to determine the most suitable operating wavelength to be used. It is desirable that no intermediate repeaters are employed. At substation sites currently with fibre optic communication facilities.90 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM). The following future upgrade options shall be possible: a. 3. It shall be possible to purchase the additional telecommunication hardware and software needed for future expansion and upgrade from different vendors. with 1310 nm being the preferred choice as most of the fibre optic span lengths are generally less than 50 km.Section 6 . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The new SDH network backbone shall be linked to the existing SDH network and also to the new DPLC network to form an integrated digital telecommunication network. The operating wavelength of the SDH network shall be 1310 nm or 1550 nm.2. if the distance involved so requires. SDH and primary multiplexers and cross-connect units will remain the same and be re-used for the new SDH network. System expansions and upgrades carried out at a later date shall be possible by means of minor modifications and/or by the addition of extra equipment modules to the telecommunication system. the telecommunication system shall have built-in flexibility to cater for communications requirements outside the power system operation of the Employer.3 Expansion and Upgrade Capability The telecommunication system supplied by the Contractor shall employ open standard concept in the design and shall offer greatest flexibility for future expansion and upgrade of the system and facilities. It is preferable that one common telecommunication network management system is used to monitor and supervise the new integrated digital telecommunication network.52 Mb/s) transmission level. A minimum of 50 per cent system expansion capability shall be provided over and above the capacity/channel requirements that are needed for the new telecommunication system. be supplied already equipped with a minimum of 25 per cent spare capacity including interface modules for each type of communication circuit. terminal hood closures. existing equipment such as indoor fibre optic cables. Open topology network allowing the most flexible way of building the SDH network shall be adopted and the network shall be able to evolve in functionality just by simply adding plug-in units. Longer span lengths may require the use of 1550 nm operating wavelength window. fibre approach cables. However. The Contractor shall be responsible for any modifications and re-allocations of existing channel assignment required to ensure that the telecommunication system can be developed and existing facilities are fully migrated to the new network with minimal disruption to power system operation. b. Details of system expansion and upgrade capability shall be submitted with the Bid. however. In addition.2.4 Telecommunication Network Approximate numbers and types of various communication channels required are detailed in the Specification for Bid purposes. However. The telecommunication network backbone shall be based on ring topology with self healing protection capability. c. the Contractor shall provide all necessary optical regenerative repeaters including solar power supply and all associated works and plant to enable the proper operation of the repeaters. optical terminal boxes. 3. the exact number and type of communication channels required shall be determined by the Contractor during the detailed engineering design of the telecommunication system.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The Contractor shall deliver any unused dismantled telecommunication equipment to the Employer‘s store.

c. data and teleprotection signalling connectivity between substations and NSCC using first order multiplexing equipment at all the stations. If a problem occurs in the working traffic path. 2 Mb/s tributaries on the STM-1 system will be utilised to provide voice. with regard to any deficiencies.4. Each SDH ring shall be designed to operate independently and a failure in one ring should not affect the normal operation of other rings. SNCP (Sub-Network Connection Protection) where working traffic flows in one direction and protected traffic flows in the opposite direction.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications The SDH network shall be designed for digital transmission using single mode optical fibres and shall conform to the relevant ITU-T recommendations for STM-1 transmission bit rate. to provide a higher transmission rate using the same optical fibres and repeater locations. b.841. The SNCP shall be in accordance with ITU-T G. In order to increase the availability and reliability of the telecommunication fibre optic network. The Contractor‘s design should therefore be flexible and be able to accommodate of such possibilities. The Bidder shall comment on the proposed SDH network topology. Voice channels (VF E&M 2/4 wire). The telecommunication network shall also have provision for an engineering order wire (EOW) facility capable of providing a dedicated telephone communication system for commissioning/maintenance purposes between nodes.4.2. The proposed SDH network design is shown in Drawing No.2. data. Fibre optic links that will be made available by others for use to implement the SDH fibre optic network backbone are shown in Drawing No. The proposed SDH network should be designed in such a way to allow easy migration to a fully integrated multi-service TCP/IP (transmission control protocol/internet protocol) networking for voice. The maximum transmission capacity which the proposed SDH network can be achieved and whether the upgrading can be carried out whilst the system is carrying live traffic shall be stated in the Bid.28).24/V. 3. TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-003. High speed (64 kb/s) data channels according G. A diagram showing the Bidder‘s proposed integrated telecommunication network and a detailed description on the functionality provided shall be submitted with the Bid. and with the appropriate quality of service (QoS) required for power system operation at a later date without sacrificing current investments in telecommunication infrastructure.703. Low speed data channels (up to 9. TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-002. the receiving node switches to the path coming from the opposite direction.91 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . performance. The Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed design and implementation of the network so that it achieves the design objectives set out in this document. 3. teleprotection signalling and video. in particular. nx64 kb/s data channels according to ITU-T V. e. reliability and availability.35.2 Network Design The design of the telecommunication network backbone should make use of independent fibre path where available to provide the necessary resilient.6 kb/s asynchronous V. Details of how this can be achieved shall be submitted in the Bid. by exchanging appropriate modules at a later date. The system shall be capable of being upgraded to the next hierarchy level STM-4 (622 Mb/s). Due to the variety of equipment available in the market place the final solution may not exactly mirror the equipment and connectivity shown here but it should achieve design objectives in terms of functionality. Remote subscriber channels.Section 6 . d. It should be emphasized that due to unforeseen circumstances it may be necessary to change some of the routing during the course of the Contract. SDH equipment shall be equipped with dual redundant hotstandby control modules and power supply units. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. if any.3 Network Protection The telecommunication network shall employ the following network protection methods as appropriate: a. The 2 Mb/s transmission system will interconnect the following end-user facilities: a.

conforming to ITU-T recommendation G. Existing fibre optic links.652. c. Ring MSP (Multiplex Section Protection) shares the ring bandwidth equally between working and protected traffic.1.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specifications b. b.4. The Contractor under this Contract shall take whatever steps necessary to ensure the works supplied by others are properly co-ordinated with the works supplied under this Contract and that together they provide the functionality and performance defined for the works in this Contract. 2 fibre bi-directional self healing ring. The Contractor must provide all information and complete comments on designs produced by others that relate to the works to be supplied under this Contract in a timely manner and in accordance with the programme for the works under the related contracts.92 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Details of the available fibre optic links can be found in the Table 3. d. A maximum of 4 fibres in each fibre optic link will be made available for telecommunication use. c. Linear MSP for point to point applications. Fibre optic links to be supplied under the NSCC OPGW Cable Contract.Section 6 . Details of the proposed network protection shall be submitted with the Bid. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Each fibre optic link generally comprises a total of 24 discrete single mode optical fibre cores. 3. Demarcation of responsibility between this Contract and optical fibres supplied by others is at the optical terminal box. The remaining fibres will be for other purposes and/or served as spares. The switch over times for SNCP and MSP shall be less than 50 ms. Fibre optic links currently under construction by others.2.4 Fibre Optic Links The new telecommunication fibre optic network backbone shall make the best use of the following available fibre optic links: a.

5 12.93 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .5 Remark Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW (?km) Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Ongoing OPGW (?km) Ongoing OPGW (?km) Ongoing OPGW (?km) Existing OPGW (?km) Existing OPGW Ongoing OPGW (?km) Existing OPGW Existing OPGW (?km) Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Optional under NSCC OPGW Contract Expected completion date As per NSCC OPGW contract ------As per NSCC OPGW contract --------Dec 2010 Dec 2010 Dec 2010 ----------------As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract SCC Colombo Region 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.6 0.2 0.0 6. route (km) 14.6 4.0 0.5 70.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 3.5 6.0 6.Section 6 .3 4.1 – Available fibre optic links Region FO Link 1 2 From Kolonnawa Kolonnawa Sri Jaywardanapura Sri Jaywardanapura Pannipitiya Pannipitiya Dehiwala Havelock Town Maradana CEB HQ CEB HQ CEB HQ Kolonnawa Kolonnawa Kelanitissa GIS Kelanitissa Kelanitissa GIS Kolonnawa Kelaniya Sapugaskanda GS Biyagama Biyagama Biyagama Biyagama To Athurugiriya Sri Jayewardenepura Pannipitiya NSCC Ratmalana Dehiwala Havelock Town Maradana Kolonnawa Havelock Town Maradana Kolonnawa ESCC Kelanitissa GIS Kelanitissa ESCC Barge Kelaniya Sapugaskanda GS Biyagama Sapugaskanda PS Pannipitiya Kotmale Kelanitissa Voltage (kV) 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 220 132 132 220 132 132 132 132 220 220 220 Approx.2 2.9 9.0 2.4 0.9 0.0 6.1 15.6 4.0 0.0 8.0 2.0 0.0 6.

0 68.2 86.3 18.0 17.3 30.0 Remark Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing OPGW Existing UGFO (?km) Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Ongoing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Optional under NSCC OPGW contract Expected completion date As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract Jul 2013 Apr 2013 Aug 2012 As per NSCC OPGW contract ----------------------As per NSCC OPGW contract Aug 2012 As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.6 10. 100MW Madampa Bolawatta Katunayake Kotugoda Kerawalapitiya Veyangoda Norochchole PS Aniyakanda Kelaniya Bowatenna Pallkele Naula Habarana Valachchenai Voltage (kV) 132 132 132 220 220 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 220 220 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 Approx.4 0.94 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .8 27. route (km) 22.5 29.5 100.9 34.0 100.0 37.0 31.3 29.0 117.0 45.0 42.0 17.1 – Available fibre optic links (cont’d) Region FO Link 25 26 Northern Region 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 From Kotmale Kiribathkumbura Kiribathkumbura Kotmale New Anuradhapura Puttalam Puttalam Puttalam Puttalam Pannala Pannala Bolawatta Katunayake Kotugoda Kotugoda Veyangoda Kotugoda Kotugoda Ukuwela Ukuwela Ukuwela Naula Habarana To Kiribathkumbura Ukuwela Kurunagala New Anuradhapura Norochchole PS Maho Madampe Pannala Diesel gen.6 163.0 14.7 11.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 3.

5 37.9 10.6 43. route (km) 48.1 – Available fibre optic links (cont’d) Region FO Link 48 49 Northern Region 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 Kotmale Region 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 From Habarana New Anuradhapura Old Anuradhapura New Anuradhapura New Anuradhapura Vavuni Kilinochchi Old Laxapana New Laxapana New Laxapana Old Laxapana Kotmale Kotmale Badulla Nuwara Eliya Old Laxapana Badulla Madagama (T-off) Old Laxapana Kotmale Victoria Randenigala To Old Anuradhapura Old Anuradhapura Puttalam Trincomalee Vavuni Kilinochchi Chunnakam New Laxapana Balangoda Canyon PS Polpitiya Upper Kotmale Polpitiya Rantambe Badulla Nuwara Eliya Madagama (T-off) Monaragala Wimalasurendra Victoria Randenigala Rantambe Voltage (kV) 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 220 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 220 220 220 Approx.3 18.1 Remark Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing ADSS Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Existing UGFO Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Dec 2011 Dec 2012 Dec 2012 Dec 2012 Expected completion date As per NSCC OPGW contract --As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract Jul 2012 Jul 2012 --As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract --As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.9 1.4 3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 3.95 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .1 67.0 5.0 8.3 53.5 16.8 32.0 103.2 0.Section 6 .5 74.0 35.1 30.1 16.4 38.5 29.5 75.

1 – Available fibre optic links (cont’d) FO Link 70 71 Kotmale Region 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 Southern Region 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 Approx.0 1.Section 6 .0 33.3 48.0 40.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 3.4 10.0 17.2 52.0 19.0 44.0 Region From Rantambe Mahiyanganaya Vaunativu Badulla Polpitiya Seethawake Athurugiriya Pannipitiya Panadura Horana Matugama Matugama Embilipitiya Matara Matara New Galle Embilipitiya Embilipitiya Balangoda Balangoda Balangoda Matara Matara-Embilipitiya (T-OFF) To Mahiyanganaya Vaunativu Ampara Wallawaya Seethawake Kosgama Thulhiriya Panadura Horana Matugama Kukule Ambalangoda AES PP ACE Matara PP New Galle Ambalangoda Samanalawewa Hambantota Samanalawewa Rathnapura Deniyaya Embilipitiya Beliatta Voltage (kV) 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 33 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 Remark Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW (?km) Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Ongoing OPGW Expected completion date Jul 2013 Jul 2013 Jul 2013 Jul 2013 As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract --------------Aug 2012 Dec 2013 As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract Dec 2011 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.6 0. route (km) 21.0 34.0 38.0 35.0 28.0 89.1 25.0 24.0 24.0 40.0 60.96 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .1 30.0 8.

by replacement of some of existing old analogue PLC equipment with the new digital one.2.5 Upgrading of Existing PLC Links New digital PLC (DPLC) links shall be established as reinforcement of the existing PLC links via 132 kV O/H lines. Badulla . The following existing analogue PLC links are to be replaced with new digital PLC links: a.Inginiyagala Kolonnawa . An engineering order wire facility capable of providing a dedicated telephone communication system for commissioning/maintenance purposes between PLCs shall also be provided.4. FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 Location Existing SDH Node New SDH Node STM-1 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.4.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3.2. The DPLC shall comply with IEC 60495 recommendation with channel capacity of at least 32 kb/s which enables transmission of up to 3 speech channels with transmission rate per speech channel (including signalling) 9. The new digital PLC equipment shall use existing frequency bands in accordance with the existing PLC frequency plan. coupling capacitors and matching units will remain the same.2 SDH Nodes No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 AES power plant Ambalangoda 132/33kV Ampara 132/33kV Aniyakanda 132kV Anuradhapura 132kV (old) Anuradhapura 220kV (new) Athurugiriya 132/33kV Badulla 132/33kV Balangoda 132/33kV Beliatta 132/33kV Biyagama 220kV Bolawatta 132/33kV Bowattenna PS Canyon PS CEB HQ Chunnakam 132/33kV STM-1 By Others. The scope of work shall include dismantling of existing analogue PLC terminal units and delivering them to the Employer‘s store and shifting the existing communication services to the new DPLC equipment.6 k/s. The Contractor shall ensure that the new DPLC equipment to be supplied is fully compatible with the existing analogue PLC system.97 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . data and teleprotection signalling channels at the following locations: Table 3. Necessary teleprotection signalling equipment or modules shall be provided by the Contractor to allow teleprotection signalling commands to be sent via the DPLC links.24/V. 3. PLC equipment such as line traps. up to 9 data channels with transmission rate per data channel 1200 b/s (ITU-T recommendations V. b.28) or combination of the two and up to 4 teleprotection channels out of band. The existing PLC terminals operate on nominal carrier frequency band between 50 and 500 kHz.Section 6 .Kosgama The Contractor shall transfer all existing telecommunication services including teleprotection signalling commands onto the new DPLC links. The new DPLC shall have the capability to fall back to analogue mode should the noise on the overhead power transmission lines is high.6 Communication Facilities The new telecommunication network shall be capable of providing the necessary speech.

FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 Embilipitiya 132/33kV Galle 132/33kV (new) Habarana 132/33kV Hambantota 132/33kV Havelock Town 132/11kV Horana 132/33kV Katunayake 132/33kV Kelanitissa 220kV GIS Kelanitissa 132kV Kelaniya 132/33kV Kerawelapitiya 132kV GSS Kerawelapitiya 220kV PS Kilinochchi 132/33kV Kiribathkumbura 132/33kV Kolonnawa 132/33kV Kosgama 132/33kV Kotmale 220kV PS Kotugoda 132kV (old) Kotugoda 220kV Kukule 132kV PS Kurunagala 132/33kV Laxapana 132/11kV PS (new) Madampe (Chillaw)132/33kV Mahiyangana Maho 132/33kV Maradana 132kV Matara 132/33kV Matugama 132/33kV Monaragala 132/33kV NSCC (National System Control Centre) ESCC (Existing System Control Centre) Naula 132/33kV Norochcholai 220kV (Puttlam PS) Nuwara Eliya 132/33kV Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. FOX515 STM-1 . . STM-1 By Others.Section 6 . FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 By Others.98 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 By Others.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification No 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 Colombo City DCC Dehiwala 132kV Deniyaya 132kV Location Existing SDH Node New SDH Node STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 .

4. FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 By Others FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 . STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 43 3.7 ICCP links between NSCC and Colombo City DCC Dual redundant ICCP (inter-control centre communication protocol) links shall be provided between the NSCC and DCC (Colombo City Distribution Control Centre) for the transfer of operational data. The Contractor shall determine the required speed of this link based upon the amount of operational data to be transferred between the NSCC SCADA system and DCC SCADA system.e. FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 New SDH Node Polpitiya 132/12. Details of the proposed ICCP links shall be included in the Bid. Each communication link shall initially cater for 4xE1 (i.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification No 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 Pallekele 132/33kV Panadura 132kV Pannala 132/33kV Pannipitiya 220kV Location Existing SDH Node STM-1 By Others. 4x2048 kb/s) but can be upgraded to a higher speed at a later date if required.2.99 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .8 Communication Requirements at Power Stations / Substations Communication facilities to be provided by the new telecommunication system are: (1) For sites that are connected to the telecommunication network via fibre optic links the minimal communication requirements shall be as follows at each site: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2.4. 3.5kV PS Puttalam 132/33kV Randenigala PS Rantambe PS Ratmalana 132/33kV Ratnapura 132kV Samanalawewa PS Sapugaskande 132/11kV GSS Sapugaskande PS Seethawake 132/33kV Sri Jayawardanapura 132/33kV Thulhiriya 132/33kV Trincomalee 132/33kV Ukuwela PS Ukuwela GSS Upper Kotmale PS Valachchanai 132/33kV Vaunativu 132/33kV Vavuniya 132/33kV Veyangoda 220kV Victoria PS Wimalasurenda PS Wimalasurenda GSS TOTAL 37 STM-1 By Others STM-1 By Others .

c. For example fault waveforms from the substation protection equipment.2. Performance monitoring and fault co-ordination facilities. and an alternative routing in the event that there is a failure and/or traffic congestion on the preferred routing.5 Telecommunication Management System A telecommunication management system (TMS) shall be provided to monitor the new SDH network performance and status and to make alternative routing and channel allocation changes as necessary. SCADA data communications protocol shall be based on IEC60870-5-101 and/or 104. e. d. End to end circuit management. Ability to integrate with other propriety equipment sub-management systems. c. the requirements shall be as follows at each existing site: a. 3. To ensure secure and reliable transmission at all times. The TMS shall enable the telecommunication network be configured in such a way that there shall be a preferred routing for normal operation for speech. the following features: a. Two voice communication channels. .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification a. f. Automatic reconfiguration of traffic requirements and channel re-allocation. (2) For sites that are connected to the telecommunication network via transmission media with limited capacity such as PLCs. Four spare 64 kb/s data channels for future use. b. Non-critical substation data communication link based on IEC60870-5-104 should be available as an option at a later date. c. d.24/V. The TMS shall have.Section 6 . data and teleprotection signalling communications. Two V 24/V28 data channels for connection of RTUs at the substation with NSCC. e. Three voice communication channels. Two V. as a minimum. f. b.100 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . teleprotection signalling for first and second main protection associated with existing circuits shall be implemented using separate multiplexing equipment and routed via physically segregated paths wherever possible. Multi-user capability. TCP/IP Ethernet communication link to NSCC via gateways for non-critical substation data. Independently routed teleprotection signalling channels as required. No single point of failure in the design. This link will be used to allow remote access to substation data that would be inappropriate to transmit over the SCADA links. and vice versa. The speed of data channels shall be able to be upgraded to nx64 kb/s if it is necessary to meet the performance requirements. In addition. g. All necessary switching and channel re-allocations shall be automatic during the changeover from the preferred route to the alternative route. g. Independently routed teleprotection signalling. This link may also be used to remotely reconfigure the SAS database or to adjust protection relay settings. User friendly computer based network management.28 data channels for connection of existing RTU at the substation to the NSCC. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. b. TCP/IP communication link is required for connection to the Substation Automation System (SAS). Two 64 kb/s data channels for connection of new RTU at the substation to the NSCC. The switching and channel reallocations from active to standby route shall be transparent to the users and shall cause no loss of information.

one black/white laser printer and one laser colour printer. PDH equipment.2. Details of how the various telecommunication equipment can be integrated and monitored by the TMS shall be included in the Bid.101 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Analogue PLC equipment.5. Teleprotection signalling equipment. In addition to monitoring and supervising the SDH network.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification h.1 TMS Control Centre Equipment Dual redundant application/communication servers shall be provided at the NSCC. it is recognised that not all the existing and new telecommunication equipment can be integrated in the TMS and that equipment monitoring can only be carried out via voltage free alarm contacts. However. b. Reports management The TMS shall include facilities that enable the system to be extended without interruption to existing services. The application/communications servers shall be interconnected with the operator workstations and printers via a dual LAN. 3.Rantambe Old Laxapana . c. 3. The TMS central computer system shall in turn initiate a regular time synchronisation procedure to maintain time synchronisation of the remote network elements. i. j. b. c. f. Security management.2 Time Synchronisation The TMS shall interface with the master GPS clock system at the NSCC for time synchronisation of the TMS central computer system. the TMS shall also be capable of monitoring the following telecommunication equipment: a. Digital PLC equipment.6 Teleprotection Signalling Equipment Overhead lines that are to be fitted with OPGW currently use PLC links for transmission of teleprotection signalling commands. PAX equipment. Kiribathkumbura -Kurunegala New Laxapana .Canyon PS Badulla .Samanalawewa Balangoda . Human machine interface (HMI) at the NSCC shall include two operator workstations.2. Details of how this is achieved shall be fully described in the Bid. d. A common integrated TMS for monitoring all telecommunication equipment is the preferred choice. The Bidder shall provide details of the time synchronisation procedure and method of interfacing with the master clock system. d. Compliance to international standards such as ITU-T. 3. e.Samanalawewa The Contractor shall provide necessary teleprotection signalling equipment including all necessary ancillary equipment so that existing teleprotection signalling commands can be transmitted via the new fibre optic network for the above PLC links: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. a. The following PLC links are using old and obsolete PLC equipment and the Contractor shall transfer all existing telecommunication services including teleprotection signalling commands from the PLC links onto the new fibre optic network.Nuwara Eliya Embilipitiya .2.5. Alternatively integration of the new SDH network components into the existing TMS provided by ABB. e.Section 6 .

3. The existing telephone extension lines. d. The new telephone system shall be capable of providing at least similar PLTS functions such as hot line telephone communications between Control Centres and Grid Substations/Power Stations. c.7.2 Voice Recording Equipment A PC based voice recording equipment shall be provided and be capable of interfacing with the new NSCC PAX to automatically log all telephone communications between operators in the NSCC and other personnel. removed and returned to the Employer‘s store.2. Kotugoda.2.1 Telephone Exchange Equipment Some of the existing telephone exchanges are old and operating at their design capacity and these are to be replaced with new modern telephone exchanges. New private automatic exchanges (PAX) are proposed at the following locations. The voice recorder shall record all voice communications on the telephone network. The Bidder shall comment on the effect of failures within the PAX on the integrity of communication channels routed through the PAX.Section 6 . The voice logging will be used for the purpose of determining sequence of operational events. Laxapana. The existing PLC equipment shall be decommissioned. c. TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-004 shows the proposed telephone network. 150 simultaneous subscriber to subscriber communication channels. Kotmale. A voice recording equipment and a main distribution frame (MDF) shall be provided at the NSCC.7 Telephone Network 3. 5 PAX-PAX tie lines.102 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 200 subscriber lines. b. The PAX shall automatically use available alternative routes in the event of faults or congestion.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The Bidder shall include details of the proposed teleprotection signalling system in the Bid. The new telephone exchanges shall be microprocessor based stored program control (SPC) exchanges. removed and returned to the Employer‘s store. c. b. 500 subscriber lines.7. The Bidder shall provide details of the proposed telephone network and method of providing hot line and party line functions. 3. The old exchanges as well as the existing PLTS in the SCC shall be decommissioned. It should be possible to preset individual channels to bypass some PAXs on the trunk routes to reduce the number of intermediate steps on the long haul routes. The capacity of the new NSCC PAX shall be as follows: a. All necessary interfaces shall be provided to enable hotline and party line functions are available in the new telephone system.2. The voice recording equipment shall be a multi-channel digital communications logger that can simultaneously record and replay voice messages. 50 simultaneous subscriber to subscriber communication channels. a. Drawing No. Provision of all necessary hardware and software required for voice logging shall be supplied by the Contractor. telephone numbering system and network shall be modified according to the Employer‘s new telephone network requirements. The capacity of the new PAX at the substations shall be as follows: a. 20 PAX-PAX tie lines. b. NSCC. Initially the equipment shall be capable of providing 16 simultaneous speech channels recording but with a capability of being expanded up to 32 speech channels at a later date.

1 At NSCC The new telecommunication equipment (excluding the TMS central computers. The TMS workstations and printers shall be powered from a 240 Vac UPS. operator workstations and printers that are to be installed in the NSCC shall be designed to operate from a 240 Vac uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system. 3. a new 48 Vdc power supply system shall be required. The Bidder shall include the supply and installation of all necessary interconnecting cables required for the proper installation of the telecommunication equipment in the NSCC and substation sites.Section 6 . Appropriate audible alarms and visual indications shall be provided to alert the operator whenever the disk storage space for voice logging is less than 50 channel hours. 3. 3. operator workstations and printers) shall be powered from a new 48 Vdc power supply system. Voice operation so that the equipment can be operated in a voice operated record start mode. 3.2. The digital voice recording equipment shall have sufficient built-in redundancy to prevent a single point of failure causing the equipment to malfunction. c. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.8. f.2 At Existing Substations and Power Stations The new telecommunication equipment shall be powered from the existing 48 Vdc power supply system.2. e. Transfer to tape cassettes and other archive media . During replay incoming messages shall be stored on the hard disk(s). The Contractor shall liaise with other parties to ensure that there is sufficient space and suitable environmental conditions for the installation of the 48 Vdc power supply system.2. The digital voice recording equipment shall have the following features: a. d. The new 48 Vdc power supply system shall be sized to meet the electrical loading of the telecommunication equipment plus 100 per cent spare capacity. the new telecommunication equipment shall be designed to operate from a nominal 48 Vdc. The voice recording equipment shall also be available for replay regardless of the operation of the system. b.8.2. User friendly.8 Power Supply Requirements In general. Date and time recording facility such that the date and time of each recorded call is easily traceable.103 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .8. positive earthed supply. Remote facilities interface (clean contacts for remote indicators/alarms etc).Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification All messages shall be digitised and stored on the hard disk(s). Voice playback facility. However at some sites. However. As majority of new telecommunication equipment will be powered from existing power supply systems.9 Equipment Locations The majority of the telecommunication equipment will be located at the NSCC and at existing substation and power station sites. the TMS central computers.3 At Employer’s HQ Building A new 48 Vdc power supply system shall be provided at the Employer‘s HQ Building by the Contractor to support the new telecommunication equipment. details of the anticipated power requirements and power consumption of the new telecommunication system shall be included in the Bid. g. The hard disk(s) shall be sized to provide a minimum of 2 500 channel hours voice recording on a roll-over basis. 3. Automatically monitoring the correct operation of the channel. Appropriate compression algorithm and sampling rate shall be used to minimise the disk space storage requirement and maximise voice recording quality.2.

Existing fault recorders. i.2. Master GPS clock system at the NSCC for time synchronisation of the telecommunication management system and telephone exchange equipment. e. Equipment and system designs proposed by the Bidder shall take into account the requirements outlined in the relevant internationally recognised Standards and Regulations to ensure electromagnetic compatibility. Fibre optic cables (supplied under the NSCC OPGW Contract). The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving and co-ordinating with other contractors or Authorities to ensure that the interfaces and the final installation between the telecommunication system with the other systems are fully compatible both physically and operationally. Co-ordination with other contractors shall therefore be required to ensure that the equipment cubicles are arranged in an orderly manner to facilitate ease of equipment identification and access for maintenance. The removal of existing telecommunication equipment shall cause minimal disruption to the power system operation. The telecommunication equipment will also be co-located with existing or new NSCC RTU and equipment supplied by others. Failure to co-ordinate or delay in providing or timely requisition of the necessary interfacing information/ requirements shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the Contractor shall bear any costs which may arise as a result thereof for the provision of modification to other works which are involved with or subject to another contract. A detailed method and programme for the removal of existing telecommunication equipment and transition from the old telecommunication network to the new telecommunication network shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the Employer. h. b. 3. The discarded equipment shall be returned to the Employer to be used as spares. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for any modifications and re-allocations of channel assignment required to ensure that the network can be developed and be capable of providing the necessary communication facilities and security required from one phase to the next.10 Transition from Old to the New Telecommunication System The Contractor shall determine the method. Existing Substation Automation Systems. timing and phasing of the removal of existing telecommunication equipment that are to be replaced by the new telecommunication equipment. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. c. The proposal shall also include any anticipated duration of outages required for the installation.12 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) As the telecommunication equipment will be installed in substations and power stations it must be able to co-exist and operate within the electromagnetic environment with adequate immunity to any electromagnetic disturbances in order that operations will be free of malfunction and safe. testing and commissioning work.11 Interfaces with Other Systems/Equipment The telecommunication system shall be equipped with the necessary hardware including interconnection cabling and software to enable interfaces with the following systems to be made: a.2. j. new telecommunication equipment will be located adjacent to existing telecommunication equipment or in a location previously occupied by existing equipment.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification In general.Section 6 . NSCC SCADA system. Existing power supply systems that are to be utilised for the new telecommunication equipment.104 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . g. f. (SAS) Existing telephone exchanges Existing ABB FOX515 SDH equipment New SDH equipment (supplied under the ongoing Station Projects) PMC Interface-Protection Monitoring Computer Interface d. 3.2.

circuit design. bonding.105 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The design shall take account of all aspects of EMC including. filtering.. for example. performance or loss of function. grounding. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. etc. equipment and cable screening. The inclusion of EMC requirements in the equipment/system design shall not cause any degradation of quality.Section 6 .

installation of SDH and primary access multiplexing equipment. all associated connectors. power supplies.707. The FOC system shall be capable of providing proper performance throughout the 15 year life expectancy of the system. Receiver sensitivity. The enclosures shall be provided with lockable doors. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3.3. digital cross connection units including necessary optical line terminal equipment. be highly reliable and provide secure communication for real time signals such as voice. Any failure shall produce automatic switch-over to the back-up unit and initiation of an alarm. G. This Specification includes for all design and engineering.957. All test loops and loopbacks shall conform to ITU-T recommendation X. In order to facilitate maintenance work and trouble shooting. G. The calculations shall include both a ‗worst case‘ and a ‗typical‘ loss budget calculation. The digital fibre optic communication backbone shall be based on the SDH technology and network architecture. testing and maintenance facilities etc. 3. the fibre optic equipment shall also have remote loopback test facilities. The FOC system shall be designed for digital transmission using single mode optical fibres and shall conform to the ITU-T recommendations G. and all necessary ancillary equipment including installation materials to complete the system. Mean launch power. automatic re-routing. Built-in test and self-monitoring facilities shall be provided to enable maintenance personnel to break-in and/or make bridging measurements without degradation or interruption of service. Bidders shall provide detailed design philosophies for equipment and routing redundancy. bandwidth management. prioritising of channels. Where the performance of the equipment could be susceptible to electromagnetic interference.783 and G. A redundant configuration for ensuring minimum down time in case of equipment failure shall be provided.1 Introduction This Specification defines the requirements for the design of a high bandwidth digital fibre optic communication (FOC) system and associated works. The optical power budget calculation shall take into account of the following parameters: a.Section 6 . service telephone handsets.704. which will not cause equipment malfunctioning. The multiplexing structure of the proposed FOC system shall allow existing PDH signals to be carried over the synchronous network and shall permit the extraction of individual circuits from high capacity systems without having to demultiplex the whole system. handheld maintenance terminal units. the Bidder shall state the maximum level of such interference.3. b.1. The equipment shall be suitable for operation in a substation with harsh environment as is found on site and with high electromagnetic interference. The proposed SDH system shall be capable of interworking with lower order PDH systems. All electrical and electronic equipment supplied shall be properly grounded and shielded to protect the equipment and operating personnel from effects of induced currents and voltages. equipment cubicles and enclosures. Cross connect facilities shall be provided to enable interconnections between different channels and network components. optical repeaters if required.3 3. system configuration. optical fibre distribution frames and patch panels.703.3. dynamic allocation. teleprotection and status/control signals. The equipment shall be rack mounted and be of modular design construction and be housed in approved equipment enclosures. SCADA.1 FIBRE OPTIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEM General Requirements 3. interconnecting cables including pigtails and patch cords. G.150. In order to maximise the benefit of the telecommunication network and to facilitate the operation and maintenance of the FOC system.2 Loss Budget Calculations The Contractor shall carry out loss budget calculations for each fibre optic link to ensure the FOC system meets the requirements of this Specification.106 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . alarm and fault monitoring. using the respective maximum and average attenuation predicted for each component in the system. the system shall include network management capability so as to facilitate system performance monitoring.

maintenance and repair work. c.4. Capability of routing TCP/IP traffic. d. Direct connection to multiplexing equipment employing pulse code modulation (PCM) techniques.1 General The FOC system shall have the following features: a. 3. Connector losses. f. The FOC system shall be capable of normal operation with or without the TMS. Preliminary loss budget calculations shall be included in the Bid.4.3. d. System design penalties.2 System Capacity and Performance The SDH network backbone shall be designed initially with transmission rate of 155.3. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. System performance calculations shall include a minimum safety margin of 3 dB. 3. As far as practicable all fibre optic equipment shall self diagnose internal fault conditions and separately alarm their occurrence. k.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification c.Section 6 . Maximum installed cable loss. The system shall incorporate all reasonable precautions and provision for the safety shut-off of the optical source to prevent exposure to laser light during installation.4 Functional Requirements 3. Laser products shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60825 specification. Comprehensive operation and fault diagnosis.773. High operational security and reliability. g.107 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . e. Redundancy capability where required.3. The designs shall also include diagnostic test facilities to allow step-by-step checking of the performance of the equipment. 3. The possibility of automatic laser shit down adjustment through the telecommunication management system should be supported. High quality transmission in accordance with ITU-T recommendations. j. metal cable sheaths and equipment housings shall be bonded to earth.52 Mb/s (STM-1). All metal parts. f. h. b. Integrated monitoring facilities. Details of the earthing arrangements shall be submitted to the Employer for approval. The TMS shall enable circuits to be automatically re-routed in the event of a trunk failure and/or traffic congestion occurring anywhere on the telecommunication network. e. Direct and easy access to the transmitted base band signal. Support Q3 interface in accordance with ITU-T G.3 Safety The FOC equipment will be situated in high voltage electricity substations which are subject to rises in earth potential at times of system faults.3. Capable of integrating/upgrading with existing system. Flexibility for adaptation to the desired transmission capacity. The FOC system shall be required to interface with the telecommunication management system (TMS) for the purpose of centralised supervision and monitoring of the telecommunication system performance. Margin for age degradation and temperature. Detailed calculations shall be submitted during the detail design stage for the approval of the Employer. All necessary hardware and software interfaces to enable integration with the TMS shall be provided under the Contract. i. Precautions shall be taken to prevent damage occurring to the equipment.

The SDH equipment shall be capable of being configured as a hub.5. 140 Mb/s.3. The SDH equipment shall be equipped with a range of plug-in tributary interfaces to support a comprehensive range of plesiochronous and synchronous tributaries including 2 Mb/s. Electrical line interface. add/drop multiplexer or terminal multiplexer. but not be limited to.813 and G. In addition. repeater. The overall mean equivalent bit error rate (BER) of the SDH system between any two end terminals shall not be worse than 10-9 under normal operating conditions. details of how the Bidder intends to perform synchronisation across the fibre optic communication network shall be included in the Bid. Switching shall also be possible manually for maintenance purposes. Tributary module. Jitter performance on STM-1 interfaces shall be in compliance with ITU-T recommendations G. P12. End to end error performance shall be in accordance with the requirements of ITUT recommendation G.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The system shall be capable of being upgraded to the next hierarchy level. by exchanging appropriate modules at a later date. b. The multiplexing structure of the proposed SDH equipment shall permit the extraction of individual 2 Mb/s tributaries from high capacity systems without having to demultiplex the whole STM-1 frame.826.1 General The SDH equipment shall perform both multiplexing and optical line terminating functions. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. During power or management connection failure alarm logs and performance monitoring statistics shall be preserved. cross connection.3 Service Channels Each optical line terminal equipment shall provide at least two analogue and four digital service channels for voice communications and testing purposes between any two terminal stations.Section 6 . if any. Cross connection levels shall include nx64 kb/s. 34 Mb/s.108 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Details of the performance of the proposed FOC system shall be included in the Bid. the following functional elements: a. for example from STM-1 to STM-4.4. Each SDH equipment shall comprise.3. and facilities for connection of unused multiplexer inputs to appropriate signals as specified by the manufacturer shall be provided. The 64 kb/s digital service channels shall be suitable for any data transmission requirements. The equipment shall provide interfacing and multiplexing for broadband. Optical line interface. The automatic switch-over to standby transmitter criterion shall be BER>10 -9. The SDH equipment shall be capable of upgradeable from STM-1 to STM-4 without disruption to existing traffic. c. or as an ‗east/west‘ mode when used in a drop and insert chain in a ring. between any terminal and repeater station and between any two repeater stations (if applicable) exclusively for the use of installation and servicing personnel. Each terminal equipment shall have a handset for voice communications. All features and functions of the SDH equipment shall be readily software configurable to suit operational requirements of the SDH system. The FOC system shall include provision for overcoming impairments caused by transmission delays.5 SDH Equipment 3.3. The FOC system shall preserve configuration data during power failure or management connection failure. 3. The aggregate ports of the SDH equipment shall be duplicated and shall be capable of operating in a ‗1 + 1‘ protected mode as part of a point to point link. The typical error rate for each traffic path shall be stated. 8 Mb/s. and from STM-1 operation. VC-12. 3. VC3 and VC-4 to enable interconnections between different channels and network components. Signal synchronising facilities are required to enable the system to be implemented effectively.825. wideband and narrowband applications. Compact unit design and flexible shelf architecture shall allow for housing of various plug-in units. The capacity shall be 63 E1 (2Mb/s) signals for STM-1 and 252 E1s for STM-4. The switchover shall be transparent to the data stream. to provide a higher transmission rate using the same optical fibres and repeater locations.

3. Control and alarm functions.2 Optical Line Interface The SDH equipment shall be capable of supporting the following optical interfaces: a. Each optical line system shall be suitable for duplex operation at optical wavelength of 1310 nm or 1550 nm over 2 optical fibres. It is preferable that the optical transmit and receive equipment are interconnected in such a way that a broken fibre will automatically switch off the optical transmitters at both ends of the section. The optical receiver equipment shall have a bit error rate performance suited to the requirements of the network. S-1. e. Where necessary receiver optical attenuators shall be provided to optimise link performance. The design of the transmitter shall be such that under fault conditions. the launch power shall be significantly reduced to a safe level. The electrical interface shall perform the same electrical functions as the optical interface unit. with optical amplifiers or attenuators provided to suit the optical performance requirements for each fibre optic link as far as is practical. Transmitters shall provide the continuous transmission of data timing information.2 STM-4 interfaces in accordance with ITU-T G. to simplify spares and maintenance aspects. The electro-optic converter shall have a power output suited to the requirements of the fibre optic links and shall be suitable for transmission length of at least 120 km without any use of intermediate repeaters.5. Switching unit. Power supply unit. The optical interface shall carry out the parallel to serial conversion of traffic from the switch unit into a STM-1 155 Mb/s stream. The optical section shall convert electrical signals into an optical signal for transmission over an optical fibre and perform a reciprocal function on the receive side. L1. SDH equipment shall be located on a fibre optic backbone system that serves the major facilities within the system.709.1 and L-4. Centralized function.1. b.1 and L-1. h.3. 3. The receiver shall automatically accommodate signal level changes due to temperature effects and ageing of the system. S-4.957. It shall be possible to use an optical line interface unit as a tributary module to enable STM-1 signals to be terminated when the equipment is configured as an ‗Add/Drop‘ multiplexer.2 STM-1 interfaces in accordance with ITU-T G.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification d. Engineering order wire (service telephone) unit.1. i. which will provide status indications. f. g.3 Electrical Line Interface The equipment shall support standard electrical tributary interfaces in accordance with ITU-T recommendation G.109 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . It shall be possible to use an electrical interface unit as a tributary module to enable STM-1 signals to be terminated when the equipment is configured as an ‗Add/Drop‘ mutiplexer.5. 3. The optical source shall have minimum life of at least 50 000 hours at an ambient temperature of +50ºC. Transmitters which output optical power of sufficient intensity to cause hazard to health shall have mechanical interlocks to isolate the diode supply current during the installation or maintenance of the equipment. A 10/100 Mb/s Ethernet LAN interface shall also be supported. L4. All transmitter equipment shall use the same laser type. Sign warning of possible hazard shall be permanently fixed at all appropriate points.957.703. STM-1 electrical line signals shall be in accordance with ITU-T recommendation G. Service data interface. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 . The transmitter shall have internal diode current and output power monitoring.

774 which shall make up the SDH payload before being sent to the switch unit.5. i. Bit error rate (BER) threshold high. The fault location and supervision system shall provide in-service bit error monitoring facilities. alarm and fault monitoring. g. Loss of incoming signal or loss of frame alignment. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The alarm concept shall conform to ITU-T recommendation G.110 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Failure of check bits. Loss of clock signal. Loss of frame synchronisation.784. Distance alarms. date and time of the occurrence of alarms. Equipment power supplies shall be monitored and a fuse alarm indication shall be provided for each cabinet or rack. 8 Mb/s. An alarm monitoring system shall be provided to monitor and display the locally derived alarms and if applicable adjacent repeater station alarms. Test points shall be available on each unit to help in failure diagnosis. The switching unit shall provide the change over facility from faulty units to the standby units to achieve 1+1 protection. The equipment shall be provided with a fault location and supervisory system to monitor the status and alarms of the SDH equipment. 3. Optical transmit power low. automatic rerouting. testing and maintenance facilities etc. Power supply fail or out of limits.3. In addition it shall allow full cross connections between tributaries. e.3. Multiplex input fail. It shall be possible to change alarm severity and threshold levels manually. h. system configuration. d. The alarm monitoring system shall form an integral part of the telecommunication management system. bandwidth management. k. Alarm indications shall be clearly displayed through LEDs on the front panel of the module. b.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3.4 Tributary Module The tributary module shall perform the selective extraction/insertion of tributaries to and from the STM-1 signal whilst enabling other traffic to pass through without interruption. Laser current high.5. c. 3. prioritising of channels. It shall also be possible to remotely display some of the alarms locally at that site via voltage free contacts. j. f. Optical receive level low.6 Control and Alarm Functions Comprehensive control and alarm functions shall be included to provide performance monitoring.5. The tributary module shall be capable of supporting tributary data rates of 2 Mb/s.5 Switching Unit A switching unit shall be provided to allow traffic from any line interface unit to be connected to any tributary port or any other line port. showing the location of each alarm displayed. 34 Mb/s and 140 Mb/s. The following alarms shall be provided on the SDH equipment as a minimum: a. The switching shall be done within the multiplexer without using the telecommunication management system. Digital data streams shall be monitored at all levels. These functions shall interface to the telecommunication management system to allow the control and alarm monitoring of the equipment to be carried out locally and remotely.Section 6 . The data from each tributary shall be mapped into virtual containers and tributary units in accordance with ITU-T recommendation G. The system shall be capable of providing details of origin.3. dynamic allocation.

3.3. The types and quantities of the cards for the 30 PCM 64 kb/s channels shall be supplied so as to meet the requirements of the Contract. e.3. selective calling to reach any station along the route and an audible alert provided at each terminal and repeater site.7 Engineer Order Wire An engineer‘s order wire (EOW) system providing call.Section 6 . 3.2 Multiplexer The primary digital multiplexing equipment shall be capable of combining 30 PCM 64 kb/s channels with standard frequency ranges of 300 Hz to 3400 Hz into a digital 2048 kb/s data stream conforming to the ITU-T recommendation G. 2-wire with ring down suitable for a remote subscriber telephone connection. Each power supply unit shall have fuse protection and alarm reporting/indications as standard features.5.8 Service Data Interface Means shall be provided for accessing auxiliary channels using spare bytes in the SDH ‗overhead‘ bit stream to enable management signals from additional equipment such as primary access multiplexers to be transmitted over the fibre optic transmission system. ring and speech facilities shall be provided with each SDH multiplexer. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.5. 3.9 Power Supply Unit The power supply unit shall be capable of being paralleled with another power supply unit in the same shelf to provide redundancy in case of a single unit failure.3. b. All primary access multiplexing. including redundancy requirements. The system shall be configured as an omnibus circuit. The digital interface of the multiplexing equipment shall be of a time division multiplex signal conforming to the ITU-T recommendation G. The number. bit rate and type interfaces available shall be stated by the Bidder.111 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .3. The system shall operate on a service channel in the STM-1 bit stream.3.5.703 to enable direct connection to the SDH optical multiplexing equipment. 3. All equipment shall be wired for their maximum capacity. c. 4-wire E&M signalling.6. demultiplexing and signal processing and conditioning equipment shall be provided to interconnect SCADA.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3.3. 2-wire E&M signalling. The multiplexer shall provide means to drop and insert individual 64 kb/s signals and allocate them to determined time slots in the 2 Mbps streams. Future extension shall be possible by simple field installation of appropriate modules.6 Primary Access Multiplexing Equipment 3. The FOC system shall be capable of supporting the following user interfaces: a. It shall be the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the types and quantities of primary multiplexing equipment provided shall be capable of meeting the required number of communications channels specified.10 Centralized Function The SDH equipment shall have comprehensive monitoring and high capacity management channels to facilitate centralised network controls and maintenance through the network. Path protection on 64 kb/s and 2 Mb/s shall be supported. 4-wire to 4-wire voice frequency. Communication interfaces shall be capable of being made available by means of insertion of appropriate plug-in cards into the multiplexer rack. 3. Power supply units located in the same shelf shall be capable of maintaining shelf power in the event of single power unit failure. 3.703.1 General Primary access multiplexing equipment shall be provided as necessary and shall comply with the relevant ITU-T recommendations.6. d. teleprotection and telecommunication equipment to the fibre optic communication system. 2-wire to 2-wire voice frequency.5. with a telephone handset.

3. Test points shall be provided on the channel cards for level measurement and adjustment. Alarm indications shall be clearly displayed through LEDs on the front panel of the module. In the event of failure.4 User Interfaces User interfaces shall be provided by the Contractor to accommodate various voice frequency (VF) and data channels requirements.6. Encoding law shall be in accordance with the requirements of ITU-T G. 3.703. k. with 8 coding bits per sample. l. Loss of clock signal. Failure of 64 kb/s interface. giving 256 quantisation levels.703. g. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 4-wire to 4-wire voice frequency with FSK modem and channel fail detection. Loss of incoming signal or loss of frame alignment. Remote alarms. b.3.6. BER threshold high. Alarm collection interface. e. The user interfaces shall allow direct connection to SCADA. Details of the channel cards to be supplied by the Contractor shall be included in the Bid. 2-wire loop disconnect signalling. resulting in a 64 kb/s rate for each channel. Signal synchronising facilities are required to enable the system to be implemented effectively. d.771. teleprotection and telecommunication equipment. All PCM multiplexing equipment shall be equipped with alarm circuits to detect at least the following: a.703. Power supply fail or out of limits. j.703.Section 6 . and facilities for connection of unused multiplexer inputs to appropriate signals as specified by the manufacturer shall be provided. f. Sample rate for each channel shall be 8 kHz with maximum deviation of 50 parts per million.112 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 64 kb/s data channel according to ITU-T G. The 2 Mb/s interface shall be 2048 kb/s 50 parts per million with a HDB3 line code conforming to the ITU-T G. details of how the Bidder intends to perform synchronisation across the fibre optic transmission network shall be included in his Bid.3 Alarm Indications The PCM multiplexing equipment shall have extensive alarm monitoring facilities.3. A suitable rack mounted level meter shall be provided at each station with the necessary test leads and patching cords. g. c. Jitter characteristics shall be equal to or better than ITU-T G. appropriate alarm indications shall be initiated. h. TCP/IP Ethernet communication. d. The multiplexing equipment shall have the following features: a. It is preferable that a channel card should contain all the components necessary to enable the same card to cater for as many different types of operation as possible by means of software configuration both locally and from a remote site. Data interface suitable for multirate synchronous/asynchronous data signalling. b. c. 2 Mb/s data interface according to ITU-T G. i. Multiplex input fail. It shall also be possible to remotely display some of the alarms locally at that site via voltage free contacts.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification f. In addition.

c.4. Multirate 0 to 19. Multirate 0. The Contractor shall ensure that the routing and rerouting of the SDH transmission network do not compromise the operating time of the protection signalling equipment.2 Data Interface Data interfaces of the following types shall be capable of being made available by insertion of appropriate cards into the multiplexer rack for direct connection to computer systems. barrier transformers shall be supplied for protection against induced overvoltages. with co-directional interface synchronisation.113 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .703. The interface shall be capable of operating from an external power supply with either positive or negative polarity grounding and a maximum potential of 100 V. Telephone ringing supplies shall form part of the interface equipment. Interfaces shall comprise balanced circuits with E & M signalling and recall facilities and shall be suitable for both standard telephone instruments and telephone consoles using dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) signalling.3. 3. 64 kb/s data interface according to ITU-T G. The E-lead shall be capable of switching currents up to 100 mA. This signal transmission time shall exclude any delay times of the teleprotection equipment. d. nx64 kb/s data interface according to ITU-T V.Section 6 .2 kb/s data interface according to ITU-T V.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Any special interfaces which are considered necessary for the provision of a full and complete installation of the telecommunication system shall be included in the offer and full details shall be supplied with the Bid.3.35. Signalling (E & M) channel interfaces shall be suitable for a maximum signalling rate of 300 baud.3 Teleprotection Signalling Interface The FOC system shall be capable of facilitating the transmission of teleprotection signalling commands associated with the power transmission network.21/V.4. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. VF signal levels shall be adjustable within the range: Input: -16 to +1 dBm Output: -7 to +7 dBm E & M signalling interfaces shall be provided on each 4-wire VF channel. Provision shall be made by the Contractor to enable direct connection to the teleprotection equipment for transmission of remote protection signalling/tripping commands. Sub-multiplexing up to 8 low speed (0 to 1 200 baud) asynchronous data inputs over a single 64 kb/s communication channel shall be possible.11. 2-wire analogue subscriber interfaces shall permit direct connection of subscriber sets to the PAX equipment. The maximum signal transmission time of the FOC system over any fibre optic links shall not exceed 2 milliseconds. b.28.703 using 120 ohms balanced impedance. e.3. In the event of a fault being detected an alarm shall be raised and the protection command inhibited. The transmission of protection signalling commands shall preferably be utilising a complete 2 Mb/s channel according to ITU-T G.6. 3.6.1 Telephony Interface 4-wire voice frequency channel interfaces shall comprise 600 ohm balanced circuits with a bandwidth of 300 Hz to 3400 Hz.6 to 64 kb/s data interface according to ITU-T X. Where modems are connected to communication cables. The external connections of both VF and E & M circuits shall be isolated from the associated board circuits. The protection channel interface units shall operate regular loop tests to ensure their readiness for operation.703. 2 Mb/s HDB3 coded signals on line interfaces conforming to ITU-T G. 3.4. The following data interfaces shall be supported as a minimum: a.6.24/V.

8 Optical Regenerative Repeaters 3. Each optical regenerative repeater shall be totally compatible with other optical repeaters and optical line system described in this Specification.3.703 unframed and G. Each two-way repeater shall comprise an optical receiver. Each spare fibre shall be equipped with an optical connector.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3. a regenerator circuit. The enclosure shall be one of two types: a.7 Cross Connection Equipment Cross connection equipment shall be provided as necessary to enable interconnections between different channels and network components be made. and with variation in power supply voltage and/or ambient temperature. The first type shall be suitable for mounting on overhead line towers. b.1 General It is desirable that no intermediate repeaters are employed. cathodic protection shall be incorporated where corrosion would otherwise occur. The repeater shall be equipped with facilities for sending alarm signals to the optical line system to indicate a fault condition. 3.8. The Bidder shall state the cross connect capacity for high density application. Proper operation of the repeaters shall be continuously monitored during service. and an optical transmitter.3. 3. The enclosure shall be weatherproof. Except for minor level adjustments. It shall cross-connect 64 kb/s as well as 2 M/s (ITU-T recommendations G. Loss of incoming signal or loss of frame alignment. c. 3. and to accommodate duplex repeaters and all necessary ancillary equipment including storage for sufficient length of fibre for at least 10 future splices. broadcast. add/drop and loopback. shall be connected to the fibres of the optical cable at the repeater sites by means of detachable optical connectors. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The optical repeaters shall be housed in a weatherproof enclosure. electrically and optically interchangeable.3. non-blocking. Cross connection functions available shall include pass through. Optical regenerative repeaters.4 Ethernet Interface The FOC system shall be capable of supporting a 10/100 Mb/s BaseT Ethernet interface complying with IEEE standard 802.114 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .8. Optical transmit power low. However.2 Alarm indications The following alarms shall be provided on the optical regenerative repeater equipment: a. if the distance involved so requires. Laser current high. where required.Section 6 . each optical line repeater shall be mechanically. Both types on enclosure shall be of sufficient size to meet minimum bending radius requirement of the fibre optic cable. The optical output level shall be maintained relatively constant with variation in the optical input level due to fibre length. The enclosure shall be weatherproof and suitable for installation in a manhole.704 framed) and VC12. If the enclosure is metal.6. d. b.3. the Contractor shall provide all necessary optical regenerative repeaters and associated plant together with detailed calculations justifying the need to have intermediate repeaters The locations for repeaters shall be determined by the Contractor and details of equipment locations shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the Employer. The second type shall be suitable for use underground. vandal resistant and equipped with all accessories necessary for securing to the tower and for grounding any metal parts.3. BER threshold high (for both directions of transmission).4.

b. Plug-in connection shall be used. destination or source.3. the repeater alarms shall be monitored and displayed on the alarm monitoring system. testing and isolation of both the optical fibre cable and fibre optic terminal equipment. Circuit re-routing/jumpering. 3. g. Optical receive level low.115 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Fixed couplers shall be provided for each fibre comprising a link. The optical fibre distribution frames or patch panels shall be mounted at a maximum height of 1. and to provide interface and/or cross-connect facilities between the digital multiplex equipment. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The alarm monitoring system of the repeaters shall also form an integral part of the telecommunication management system. All interconnection cabling from the equipment to power source and any necessary devices to protect the fibre optic transmission equipment from damage in the event of overload shall be provided as part of this Contract. All fibre distribution frames shall have a earth connection provided. Fault in supervision channel. 3. The equipment shall have protection against transient voltages and operate without degradation in performance for a supply voltage variation stipulated in the Technical Schedules.Section 6 . The capacity of the fibre distribution frame shall be chosen to accommodate the maximum capacity of the fibre optic communication system plus 50 per cent spare capacity to cater for any future expansions. f. The power supply input to individual items of equipment comprising the fibre optic transmission system shall be individually fused.10 Optical Fibre Distribution Frames / Patch Panels Optical fibre distribution frames or patch panels shall be provided as necessary by the Contractor to facilitate the termination of fibres. go or return. at the optical fibre distribution frame and shall be properly labelled with fibre identity. h. and shall be protected from corrosion by painting or galvanising. Sufficient space shall be available on the frame to allow ease of access and minimise the possibility of interference or damage to fibres carrying traffic during maintenance testing on the back-up or spare fibres. Facilities shall be provided for termination of any metal cores within the fibre cables.9 Power Supplies Requirements The fibre optic transmission equipment shall be designed to operate from a 48 Vdc (positively earthed) supply. complying with the requirements of IEC 60874. and the transmit and received direction of the transmission shall be segregated. Bridging measurements.3. Power supply fail or out of limits. The optical fibre tail cables and connections shall be substantially protected from possibility of damage due to maintenance or installation activity. Optical fibres shall be terminated by detachable connectors. d. The alarms from the repeaters shall be transmitted to the terminal ends. At the terminal ends. It shall be possible to connect each optical fibre to the appropriate point on any terminating equipment. c.5m above ground level so to facilitate ease of maintenance. Switch-over to standby transmitter.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification e. Circuit disconnection. Patching and test connections. The following basic functions of the fibre distribution frame are required: a.

The telecommunication management system shall provide equipment status and alarms. The TMS equipment shall be capable of providing proper performance throughout the 15 year life expectancy of the system. central computer system including system and applications software and human machine interfaces. handheld maintenance terminal units. Configuration management. Security management. g.116 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .1 TELECOMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Introduction This Specification defines the requirements for the design of a telecommunication management system (TMS) and associated works. Technical descriptions detailing the TMS performance and equipment configuration shall be provided in the Bid. interconnection cabling. system telemetry.2. and command controls. The TMS will be used for administering the management activities associated with the telecommunication system so as to maximise the benefits of the telecommunication network and to ensure that the telecommunication resources are utilised efficiently. c. 3. b. e. Fault management. Digital PLC equipment.1 General A telecommunication management system shall be provided by the Contractor to monitor and supervise the telecommunication network. equipment cubicles.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3.Section 6 .4 3. interfacing equipment. Teleprotection equipment. e. f.4. the following management capabilities: a. Analogue PLC equipment. d. as a minimum. The TMS shall also provide the necessary information to assist the Employer in the operations and maintenance of the Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Details of how the various telecommunication equipment can be integrated and monitored by the TMS shall be included in the Bid. PAX equipment. Reports management. it is recognised that not all the existing and new telecommunication equipment can be integrated in the TMS and that equipment monitoring can only be carried out via voltage free alarm contacts. d. The TMS shall be capable of monitoring the following telecommunication equipment: a. PDH equipment.4. power supplies and all necessary ancillary equipment including installation materials to complete the system. b. c. The TMS shall have. The telecommunication management equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and shall include a variety of built-in alarms associated with vital operating parameters. configuration and resource management. Performance management.2 Functional requirements 3. All necessary hardware and software interfaces to allow integration with existing and new telecommunication equipment for alarm management via external voltage free contacts shall be provided under the Contract. 48 Vdc battery and battery charger system. However.4. This Specification covers all design and engineering. A common integrated TMS for monitoring all telecommunication equipment is the preferred choice. SDH equipment.

at a future date.4. which enables easy integration with other management systems. The switching and channel re-allocations from active to standby route shall be transparent to the users.2. 3. d.4. for billing. Interfaces for proprietary network monitoring sub-management systems. Back up facility. appearing in full on the operator workstation. Remote control and reconfiguration of the network. h. All necessary switching and channel re-allocations for speech. Hard key licence. i.4. data and teleprotection communications shall be automatic during the changeover from the preferred route to the alternative route. b. as a minimum. new installations. On-line help facilities and easy to use graphical user interfaces. Historical and statistical information on network alarms and signal quality. k.117 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . On-line testing of any transmission network components. 3.3100 and G. 3. j. System set up and configuration of the network elements. the following functions: a. g. to the time of the relevant page.3010. b. and an alternative routing in the event that there is a failure and/or traffic congestion on the preferred routing.2.2. 3. Creation of end to end circuits and paths in the network. End to end circuit and allocation management capability.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification telecommunication resources of the telecommunication system including planning. The features to be provided by the telecommunication management system shall include at least the following: a. e. such as Q3 interface based on ITU-T recommendations M. administration of customers as well as business planning and forecasting. The system design concept shall allow a user to set up. Automatic generation of network configuration data. maintenance and provisioning of telecommunication network and services. The up date time of a visual display unit (VDU) screen shall be measured from the final action of the operator to request the display. f. administration. Real time status of every individual network component.774. via software configuration. c. the diagnosis of problems. It shall be possible to upgrade the TMS to include accounting and business management functions. the implementation of remedial actions and the allocation or reallocation of telecommunication resources.2 System Architecture and Design Concept The TMS functional and informational architecture and physical architecture shall be in compliance with ITU-T recommendation M. a preferred routing to be used for normal operation for speech and data communications between the Control Centre and remote sites. Ability to readily export/import files to Microsoft Windows based software packages such as Word or Excel for TMS report presentation. installation.2. The TMS shall provide standard management interfaces. l.4. Computer based system with multi-user capability. detection of degraded circuits and system performance. updated with real-time data.Section 6 . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.4.3 System Performance The response times required for the TMS are stated in Technical Schedules.4 Management Functions The TMS shall be capable of supporting a wide variety of management functions to cover planning. operations.1 Configuration Management The configuration management shall include. and vice versa.

d. f.826. f.Section 6 . Grouping of alarms. Automatic or manual switching from preferred route to alternative routes in the event of failures.821 and G. Configurable audible alarms.4. j. Software upload/download of network component configuration to/from system database. Locating of faults. h. with the requirements of ITU-T b. Ability to accept voltage free alarm contacts.4. c. c.4. Alarm delay time filtering. Display of historical alarm data. Performance Management The performance management shall include.4. o. Define data collection interval. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. As a minimum requirement. Archiving of event logs. 3. Diagnostic displays.2 The fault management shall report faults and system anomalies.3 Real time alarms acquisition and logging. Classification of alarms. Creating and editing of cross connections. delete or modify network links between network components by end point selection. Clock synchronisation. Fault Management d. Spontaneous printout of alarms. e. h. to alert the TMS operators. n. via the human-machine interface. as a minimum. i. Graphic display of alarms. Setting up and monitoring of loopbacks.2.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification c. m. Create or delete network components. l. i.118 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . b. Trends display. Create. Alarm list presentation. p. Initialise/reset performance monitoring data. Performance monitoring in accordance recommendations G. Alarm inhibiting/blocking. k. 3. g. g.2. Graphic display of network topology. e. j. Alarm reports. the following functions: a. the fault management shall include the following functions: a.

The system shall be designed. Assigning performance counter thresholds. which shall be mounted in accessible positions and clearly labelled. Two operator workstations. Control of line signal and tributary signal performances.119 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . the following functions: a.2. Interconnecting cables shall be made via substantial. Dual LAN. e. b.4.Section 6 . Telecommunication Management System 3. Performance management. 3. Dual redundant application/communication servers. 3. d. delivered and commissioned with sufficient capacity for meeting the required performance.4 Setting and clearing of performance counter thresholds. c. Alarm management report.2. System design shall meet the following general requirements: a. Security management report. The system shall have a high degree of automation and easy to maintain. g.4. c. Predicative capabilities. 3. The TMS central computer system shall comprise the following: a. Security Management The security management shall include. modification and testing with the minimum of disruption.4. the following functions: a. as a minimum. Audit trail of user actions Reports Management The reports management shall include.1 General The telecommunication management system shall be based on an open application environment and a standard user interface to ensure connectivity to different vendor‘s network components can be made easily. b. e.3. User groups with several levels of privileges. The proposed configuration of equipment shall be described fully.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification d. c. b.3. c. d. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. b. secure plugs and sockets.4.2 Central Computer System The TMS central computer system shall be based on a distributed client/server computer architecture as far as possible complying with internationally accepted standards. The system shall provide data retention feature to enable off-line analysis of configuration or of events and alarms. The system shall be user friendly.5 Users log on via passwords protection.4.4.4. as a minimum. The hardware design shall allow expansion.3 Configuration management report. 3. f. emphasising the availability and security provided.

The HMI shall also support multiple user levels such as operator and system manager etc.3. operator workstations. e. The level of control and monitoring authority for each user shall be configurable.3. Pan. Disk mirroring facility shall be provided. A highly reliable mass storage device shall be provided to satisfy the requirements of the operating system and applications software.120 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Applications software and operating system.4. Each workstation shall be equipped with a high resolution flat screen LCD type colour VDU.2 Local Area Network Interconnection between computers. g.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification d.2.3 Human-Machine Interface The human-machine interface (HMI) shall provide all the necessary facilities for the users to interact with the telecommunication management system. Database held on each server shall be updated simultaneously with the latest data from all telecommunication network elements. The maximum number of different level users supported shall be stated in the Bid. database configuration and graphics. There shall be 100 per cent spare capacity above that required to allow for extension capacity for future use.1 Telecommunication Management System Workstations Two workstations shall be provided. Archiving and retrieval of historical data shall preferably be via optical media such as CD or DVD. Provision shall be provided to allow the tracing of faults and stoppages. Interconnecting cables and interfacing equipment. The design of the human-machine interface shall be based on latest de facto standard software packages.3. 3. Each operator workstation shall be provided with adequate memory for the required tasks with 100 per cent spare capacity.1 One black and white laser printer. 3. routers/gateways etc necessary for proper operation of the TMS system. A highly reliable mass storage device shall be provided to satisfy the requirement of the operating system and applications software. The level of authority for each user shall be set so that the user‘s area of responsibility is defined.4.Section 6 . an alphanumeric keyboard and a mouse. The HMI shall be capable of supporting multi-layer graphics to provide both detailed and overview displays of the network topology and individual network components. The servers shall carry out the management functions as well as all acquisition and processing of network components alarms and data. 3. zoom and windowing facilities shall be provided. The operation of this device shall not require the device be physically connected to each computer in turn.4. 3.4.3.2. There shall be 100 per cent spare capacity above that required to allow for extension capacity for future use. The size of the VDU shall be at least 19 inch. Each server shall be provided with adequate memory for the required tasks with 100 per cent spare capacity above that required to allow for extension capacity for future use.3. bridges. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. communication servers and peripheral devices shall be supported by a dual redundant local area network (LAN) complying with internationally accepted standards. Application/Communication Servers Two servers shall be provided and shall be of a well proven design suitable for ‗real-time‘ multi-tasking operation where reliability is a prime consideration. Long term data storage facilities shall be provided for loading and backing up of software.2. f. The LAN shall be complete with all terminal/printer servers. Disk mirroring facility shall be provided. The transmission medium of the LAN shall be fibre optic.2. Failure of one of the servers shall not cause maloperation and/or degradation of the performance of the telecommunication management system. repeaters. One colour laser printer.

The application software offered shall facilitate the secure execution of these functions. c. 3. does not comply with the functional requirements detailed in the Specification. Each operator workstation shall be equipped with a low level audible alarm and a CD/DVD writer and reader device.3 Software Software program packages shall be developed in a high-level program language complying with industry recognised standards.4. The printer shall be capable of printing at least 20 ppm (pages per minute) and equipped with at least 200 sheet paper tray. Telecommunication network information shall be presented to the operator via the human-machine interface.Section 6 .4. Software development tools such as editors.2.4. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Source codes for software programs specifically developed for use in this Contract shall be provided so to enable the Employer to make minor modifications if required.3 Colour Laser Printer The colour printer shall produce clear prints on A4/A3 size paper with a minimum resolution of 1200 dpi. All firmware and software delivered under the Contract shall be the latest field proven version available at the time of design approval. continuous correct operation of all system functions b.4.3. 3. storage and retrieval.2 Black and White Laser Printer The laser printer shall produce clear copies on standard A4/A3 paper with a minimum resolution of 1200 dpi (dots per inch). program compilers or assemblers. It is intended that standard software will be implemented wherever possible and to this end it must be stated.121 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . program linkers etc shall be provided.3.3. 3. 3.2 Applications Software The TMS applications software shall include the following categories: a.2. by means of online and off-line test programs. The printer shall contain off-line self-test facilities that provide the capability of adjustment and maintenance without interfering with the remainder of the computer system. data acquisition and processing.3.1 Operating System Software Operating system software based on standard software packages shall be provided to control the execution of system programs. Data acquisition and control functions include management of database.3. All software licences required for proper operation of the TMS shall be included in the offer. The diagnostic software shall provide. User interface. It shall also be possible to allocate all areas of responsibility to any one operator workstation.3.3.3. Each category of computer shall have its own operating system and that this operating system shall be capable of supporting all on-line and standby functions to be performed by that computer. The printer shall contain off-line self-test facilities that provide the capability of adjustment and maintenance without interfering with the remainder of the computer system. The printer shall be capable of printing at least 12 ppm and equipped with at least 200 sheet paper tray. application programs etc and to allocate system resources. 3. Data acquisition and control. Support and diagnostic.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Workstations shall be fully interchangeable with areas of responsibility and functions allocated to any workstation. All applications shall be supported by user accessible ‗help‘ commands to assist the user in performing the tasks.4.3. where the standard software as offered.

f.4. database management and administration. Silencing alarms shall not inhibit the annunciation of further alarms or constitute an acknowledgement of the alarm. Full details of display generation and data modification procedures shall be provided. Classification and grouping of alarms shall be possible. h. d. Event displays. Each alarm entry shall include the time and date of occurrence. reports generation. e. historical retrieval and storage. TMS hardware configuration. 3. c. location. the following: a. Alarms Facilities shall be provided for processing of alarms. and status etc. Facilities shall be provided to allow. b.3. Trend displays.Section 6 .4.4. 3. The real-time databases shall be continuously updated by the processed information from the network components and that entered by the operator(s). c. When an alarm occurs an audible alarm shall sound and the appropriate symbols shall flash in the alarm field. Network component overview displays. The alarm list shall be displayed in chronological order with the latest alarm first. the following user displays: a.3 Network overview displays. 3. and in particular this shall give details as to how extra data points and additional network components would be incorporated into the database. g. b. Dynamic data linkages shall be provided to access real-time and historical data by industry standard applications software such as Microsoft Excel etc.4.4.1 Real-time Databases The system shall comprise a distributed real-time database resident on the application servers. Modification of existing databases and creation of new databases.4. as a minimum.3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification even when essential system components fail. as a minimum. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3. d.122 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The operator shall have the facility to accept alarms individually or a TMS of alarms. remote commands. Installing new or modified log formats. graphic displays generation. Tabular displays. Diagnostic displays. device or other identifier. The support software shall include automated back-up/restore and archive facilities provided by menu driven utilities.4 System Functions System functions of the TMS shall include alarms handling. 3. action.3. Adding/deleting network components and data Installing new or modified VDU diagrams and lists.2 Displays The TMS shall provide.4. Alarm summary displays. The database shall be open and the data dictionary published.

The chairs shall be of robust construction suitable for continuous use and shall be designed to give optimum body support and comfort during use.4. User customised report generation shall be possible.4 Telecommunication Management Centre Furniture 3.Section 6 . Alarms and events shall be logged on a designated printer as they are received at the central computer system with each item consisting of the date and time of occurrence. All stands shall be complete with all necessary trays and accessories for orderly paper handling.4. When the archive becomes full it shall automatically overwrite the oldest data on the archive without degradation of system performance. durable construction and shall be ergonomically designed to facilitate operation of the equipment to be mounted on them. The design.1 Control Desk A control desk shall be provided for mounting the HMI equipment described in this Specification. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the design and finish of which shall be subject to the approval of the Employer. 3. The control desk shall be of robust. All data shall be capable of being archived and retained for future reference.4.4 Event and Alarm Logging The TMS system shall incorporate long-term logging facilities for all alarm events. event or alarm.4.2 Chairs Swivel chairs complete with five castors shall be provided to match the desks.3.4. They shall provide for adequate writing space and have room for a telephone handset. 3. 3. Information on print-outs may be either in tabular form or in a preformatted report form and may be automatic at specific times or on request. to be approved by the Employer.4. The requested information may be presented on the operator‘s workstations either in tabular form or as selected variable on a trend display. user identification. Date and time tags shall be allocated to each event.4. The operator shall have the facility to recall data held in the data logger memory or from archives over a specified period of time.5 Reports All report generation shall be generated and edited using report generation software delivered with the TMS. An alarm shall be given to the operator when the storage of data approaches the capacity of the storage medium. The arrangement and method of mounting equipment on the desk shall be to the approval of the Employer.3.4.4. and sufficient information to enable full identification of the outstation affected. Any data processed by the TMS shall be available for storage and subsequent re-call. construction and finish.3 Stands All peripherals which are not free standing must be mounted on suitable robust stands. appearance. Data shall be stored for up to three months on a suitable storage medium and be available for subsequent re-call at a later date.123 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . operator commands and system generated actions.4.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3. together with a description of the operation.4. The chairs and their upholstery shall be of a design. 3. and finish of the control desk shall be to the approval of the Employer.

The nominal carrier frequency band shall be 40 – 500 kHz. 3.124 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .2. service telephone handsets.5 3. Details of the earthing arrangements shall be submitted to the Employer for approval.2 Functional Requirements 3.2.5. All metal parts.5.2 Carrier Frequency Allocation The DPLC equipment shall be capable of operating satisfactorily using the same frequency allocation previously assigned and with the same line traps. interconnecting cables.Section 6 . Precautions shall be taken to prevent damage occurring to the equipment.1 General Digital PLC equipment shall comply with the recommendations of IEC 60495 and shall be fully compatible with existing analogue PLC system. twin channel equipment. 3. The transmission capacity shall be at least 32 kb/s which enables transmission of up to 3 speech channels with transmission rate per speech channel (including signalling) 9600 bit/s.5.1 DIGITAL POWER LINE CARRIER SYSTEM General Requirements 3. up to 9 data channels with transmission rate per data channel 1200 bit/s Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The digital PLC equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and shall include a variety of builtin alarms associated with vital operating parameters.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3.5. The Contractor shall put forward a solution for mitigating the problems for consideration by the Employer. The DPLC equipment shall be capable of providing proper performance throughout the 15 year life expectancy of the system. suppressed carrier.5.5. The power line carrier equipment shall be designed to work over the high voltage overhead power transmission lines. telephone signalling.5. The DPLC system shall use the latest signal processor technology to permit optimal operating behaviour under all operating conditions. This Specification includes for all design and engineering.1.1 Introduction This Specification defines the requirements for the design of a digital power line carrier (DPLC) system and associated works.5. If any problems are foreseen by the Contractor he should draw attention to them at the time of preparing the site survey report. Technical descriptions detailing the DPLC equipment design and performance including equipment configuration shall be provided in the Bid.1 General Transmission shall generally be carried out by single sideband. equipment cubicles. coupling capacitors and line matching units. teleprotection signalling and voice frequency telegraph signals. metal cable sheaths and equipment housings shall be bonded to earth. The digital PLC shall be designed to transmit and receive speech.3 Digital PLC Equipment 3.1. Configuration of carrier frequency and setting up of transmission of speech. The equipment shall operate satisfactorily under all power system switching and weather conditions likely to be encountered at any time. handheld maintenance terminal unit. amplitude modulated.3. data and protection signals shall be software programmable.2 Safety The DPLC equipment will be situated in high voltage electricity substations which are subject to rises in earth potential at times of system faults. 3. power supplies and all necessary ancillary equipment including installation materials to complete the system. 3. Details of the maximum transmission capacity of the DPLC and the signal to noise ratio required shall be included in the Bid. DPLC terminals including user interfaces.

b. g.3. Number of teleprotection channels: Carrier frequency range: Nominal bandwidth for duplex connection: Output power: Coax impedance: Line impedance: Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR): – 4 per circuit. 3. The Bidder shall state the means of obtaining automatic gain control and the degree of regulation attained. The frequency difference between a transmitted voice frequency (VF) signal and the received signal shall be not more than the figure stated in the Technical Schedules. 8 kHz. j.3. 3. d. Details of modulation adopted for the digital PLC equipment shall be included in the Bid.9. f.28) or combination of the two and up to 4 teleprotection channels out of band.4 Automatic Gain Control Automatic gain control shall be provided to prevent transmitter overload and proper operation of the receiver. Programming and system configurations shall preferably be carried out using a window based operation.2 Design Characteristics The DPLC shall have the following characteristics: a. The Bidder shall state in the Bid the maximum numbers of speech channels and data channels possible. 0 .500 kHz. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.5.3 Carrier Oscillators The carrier frequency oscillators shall be fully field programmable and capable of producing the entire range of frequencies from 40 to 500 kHz. as required. Carrier oscillators shall be designed to operate with a high degree of stability and this shall be stated in Bid. The modulation used shall be based on internationally recognised standards such as 4-state phase shift keying (PSK). k.28).24/V. 320  30 dB. 75  unbalanced. 1200/9600 b/s (ITU-T V. 0 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (ITU-T recommendations V. h. e. c. Any means adopted to achieve end-to-end frequency stability shall be clearly stated. 4-state quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM) or OFDM (othogonal frequency division multiplexing) multi carrier etc and shall be compatible with the required transmission capacity and signal to noise levels.5.3. Transmission capacity: Number of speech channels: Channel (including signalling): Number of data channels: Transmission rates per data channel: 32 kb/s (minimum). 40 .24/V. 3.Section 6 . The DPLC equipment including transmit and receive filters shall be field programmable over the entire frequency range.5. The demodulation of the signals shall be coherent. i. The Bidder shall state the type of modulation scheme and the minimum signal to noise ratio for guaranteed performance.3. 9600 b/s.125 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . l. and shall interface with the telecommunication management system for remote supervision and monitoring. The digital PLC equipment shall be equipped with built in self diagnostics and status monitoring facilities including service telephone.

5 Service Telephone Provision shall be made on each carrier terminal for emergency and maintenance telephone communications together with audible and visible calling indicators. Multi-rate synchronous data with ITU-T X. c. Ethernet interface.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3. 3. e.126 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Test jacks and/or test points must be available for diagnosing problems. Important metering points. Low power supply voltage. Loop test facilities shall be provided in order that a PLC link can be fully tested from one end.3. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.9 Alarms Provision shall be made for the following alarms as a minimum: a.3. with suitable LED‘s and alarm relays.3. e. 2 and 4 wire E & M signalling.10 Power Supplies Requirements The DPLC equipment shall be designed to operate from a 48 Vdc (positively earthed) supply. Decadic signalling. control elements and visual indicators shall be on the front of the modules or front panel. Power supply voltage. All alarms shall be shown on the front of the module or panel by suitable LEDs. f.5.3. b.6 Test Facilities Means shall be provided for testing the input and output levels at all stages throughout the equipment.5.3. d.7 User Interfaces The following user interfaces shall be provided as a minimum: a. d. Low level transmit carrier. Remote alarms shall provide dry relay contacts for forwarding alarms to the Control Centre via the SCADA system. The equipment shall have protection against transient voltages and operate without degradation in performance for a supply voltage variation stipulated in the Technical Schedules.21/V.5. 3.8 Monitoring Provision shall be made for monitoring. g.5.11 interface. d. e. Ringer facility.24/V. Receive pilot level. Teleprotection commands. 3. b. 3. Low level receive carrier.5. Low receive pilot level. f. Receive carrier level. Engineering order wire maintenance telephone handsets shall be provided. Multi-rate asynchronous data with ITU-T V.3. c. b. and must have associated dry relay contacts.5. IF oscillator levels. System operating correctly. Low SNR (ie high noise level).28 interface. c. the following functions: a.Section 6 . 3. Transmitter output level.

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification All interconnection cabling from the equipment to power source and any necessary devices to protect the DPLC equipment from damage in the event of overload shall be provided as part of this Contract.127 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 . The power supply input to individual items of equipment comprising the DPLC equipment shall be individually fused.

The teleprotection signalling equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and shall include a variety of built-in alarms associated with vital operating parameters and a loop test facility. be capable of direct transfer tripping.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3. Permanent self-supervision.2.1 TELEPROTECTION SIGNALLING EQUIPMENT Introduction This Specification defines the requirements for the design of digital teleprotection signalling system and associated works. This Specification includes for all design and engineering of the teleprotection signalling equipment. atmospheric conditions and other sources of interference.6. Simple operation and fault diagnosis. Wide selection of user interfaces. d. The selection of transmission time. power supplies. The teleprotection signalling equipment and signal transmission shall not be affected by switching operations. in addition. Easy programming for optimum setting of signal processing time. and necessary installation materials to complete the system. special switching functions and digital current comparison protection. c. The teleprotection signalling equipment shall. The teleprotection signalling equipment shall employ state-of-the-art components together with the digital signal processing technique to provide programming facilities for flexible adaptation to various requirements of teleprotection signal transmission.Section 6 . The type of teleprotection signalling equipment proposed shall be clearly stated in the Bid.6. including all interconnecting cables. Teleprotection signalling equipment that is an integral part of the PLC or SDH equipment without going via multiplexing equipment is preferred. b. g. Teleprotection signalling in point to point or T-networks shall be possible.6. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2 Functional Requirements 3.128 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The equipment should be able to select and disconnect the faulty part of the system in the event of faults in high voltage installations within the shortest possible time. High equipment reliability. The protection signalling equipment shall be capable of providing reliable performance throughout the 15 year life expectancy of the system. Technical descriptions detailing the teleprotection signalling equipment performance and equipment configuration shall be provided in the Bid. e. The teleprotection signalling equipment shall be suitable for transmission of teleprotection commands in the high voltage networks and shall be capable of being used for blocking. It shall therefore be of a modular design so that it can be readily for direct connection to the PLC or SDH fibre optic equipment by insertion of a plug in interface module. dependability and security to suit the different operating modes shall be possible by means of programming using either a plug-in handheld terminal or programming switches on the equipment. The teleprotection signalling equipment is required to operate over PLC and fibre optic links. Direct integration to existing telecommunication systems. 3. The teleprotection signalling equipment shall be designed and manufactured in such a way that disturbances on the transmission path shall not lead to false operation or cause undue delay in the transmission of the tripping command. f.6 3. permissive and direct tripping commands without any additional equipment.1 General The teleprotection signalling equipment shall have the following features: a. security and dependability. Integral monitoring facilities.

6. The equipment shall have as a minimum the following relay interfaces: a. Alarms and monitoring indication shall be clearly displayed through coloured LEDs on the front panel of the module.6. h. 3. The equipment shall be equipped with alarm circuits to detect at least the following: a. 3. Receive signal low level.2. Alarm indication signal response. The LED alarm displays shall be capable of being reset from the equipment. The equipment shall have protection against transient voltages and operate without degradation in performance for a supply voltage variation stipulated in the Technical Schedules. Error rate of guard or tripping signal codes too high. Automatic loop checking. Command transmission – 4 binary inputs with (NO) 4 relay outputs. Loss of synchronisation. Components failure. d.2. g. Message – 8 (changeover) relay outputs.Section 6 . It shall also be possible to transmit alarms to the telecommunication management system. Loss of guard signal. Response of an internal test routine. b.3 System Performance The protection signalling system performance shall be in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60834 specification. f. 3.6.6 Power Supplies Requirements The teleprotection signalling equipment shall be designed to operate from a 48 Vdc (positively earthed) supply.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification h. appropriate alarm indications shall be initiated.5 Alarms indications The teleprotection signalling equipment shall have extensive alarm and operational monitoring facilities. e. In the event of failure.4 Interfaces The teleprotection signalling equipment shall provide suitable interfaces for the direct connection to fibre optic transmission equipment.2.6.2 System Capacity The protection signalling system shall be designed with a minimum of 4 diverse teleprotection command channels operating in full duplex mode. b. 3.2.2.129 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .5 ms. c. NCC SCADA system and SAS via voltage free contacts with a maximum operation time of 1. Bit error rate above the set level. The power supply input to individual items of equipment comprising the teleprotection signalling equipment shall be individually fused. Direct tripping – 4 binary inputs with 4 (NO) relay outputs. All interconnection cabling from the equipment to power source and any necessary devices to protect the teleprotection signalling equipment from damage in the event of overload shall be provided as part of this Contract. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.6. 3. c.

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

3.7 3.7.1

TELEPHONE SYSTEM Introduction

This Specification defines the requirements for the design of a digital telephone system and associated works. The private automatic exchange (PAX) shall be designed to fulfil the requirements for the Employer‘s private telecommunication networks and combine both power system operation and administration into one PAX. This Specification includes for all design and engineering, system software, telephony equipment including telephone operator‘s console and handsets, telephone socket outlets, interfacing modules, voice recording equipment, handheld maintenance terminal unit, equipment cubicles, main distribution frames, surge arrestors, isolation transformers, associated ancillary equipment, interconnecting cables and power supplies. The choice of system hardware and the associated software shall be restricted to the use of digital facilities, with the use of analogue techniques being used only at the interfaces to analogue power line carrier (PLC) equipment and telephone handsets. Technical descriptions detailing the PAX equipment performance and capacity, and equipment configuration shall be provided in the Bid. The equipment shall be capable of providing proper performance continuously throughout the 15 year life expectancy of the system. All equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and shall include a variety of built-in alarms associated with vital operating parameters. 3.7.2 Functional Requirements

3.7.2.1 General The PAX equipment supplied by the Contractor shall be capable of being integrated into the existing telephone network. To ensure maximum compatibility with future systems, all equipment and systems provided by the Contractor shall conform to the latest ITU-T recommendations. The PAXs shall be interlinked by either digital or analogue trunk/tie lines to form an integrated telephone network for the purpose of providing operational and administrative telephone communications covering all power stations, transmission and primary substations and Control Centres. The telephone network shall be transparent to the users and all users shall have the same functions and features as if they were connected to one exchange. The PAX equipment shall have facilities to give priorities and restrictions according to the function and importance of users. System parameters and database shall be configurable by software both locally and from a remote site. The PAX software shall be designed for the full capacity that does not required to be modified or replaced by the extension of the PAX hardware. Operating system software shall preferably be stored in EEPROM or similar technology. 3.7.2.2 System Performance The PAX equipment shall be designed with a low probability of losing telephone calls and be capable of providing the following minimum traffic handling capabilities: a. b. 0.4 erlang per extension. 0.7 erlang per trunk.

The signalling and switching system shall be designed in such a way that the call setup time to any extension on the PAX network shall be less than 2 seconds. 3.7.2.3 Network Management Facilities The PAX equipment shall be provided with network management and supervision capability so as to facilitate continuous access to operation and maintenance information associated with the telephone network. The network management and supervision equipment shall enable a network operator to monitor several communications links from a centralised location, and where necessary remotely carry out diagnostics and modifications to equipment configuration.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 130 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

All items of equipment necessary for providing the network management and supervision facilities shall be supplied under the Contract. 3.7.2.4 Analogue and Digital Interfaces The exchange equipment shall require both analogue and digital interfaces. The analogue interfaces shall be two and four wire interfaces, with and without E & M signalling and busy/test signalling, to suit telephone, PLC and pilot cable equipment. 2 wire loop subscriber/tie lines shall be possible as an option. The digital interfaces shall be 64 kb/s and 2 Mb/s with and without common channel signalling, to suit digital data links and inter-exchange trunks. Each 2 and 4 wire interface shall be protected; ie neither a short circuit nor open circuit on the line shall cause permanent damage to the exchange equipment. Each 2 and 4 wire interface shall be protected so that the application of a 500V, 50 Hz signal to either or both legs of the line, shall not cause permanent damage to the exchange equipment, or cause malfunctioning of the exchange equipment. Each 2 and 4 wire interface shall have an insulation resistance of greater than 10 mega ohms when a 500 Vdc megger is applied between the line terminals and earth. Each 2 and 4 wire interface shall be protected from electrostatic discharges transmitted to, or occurring at the line interface unit. Each 2 and 4 wire interface shall be capable of withstanding longitudinal voltage impulses, with a peak voltage of 2 000 volts, a rise time of 10 microseconds and a decay time of 1 000 microseconds, without damage. 3.7.2.4.1 2 Wire Analogue Telephone Interface

The interface shall be suitable for both standard telephone instruments and telephone consoles using dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) signalling. The interfaces shall provide BORSCHT functions (ie Battery supply, Over-voltage protection, Ring current supply, Supervision, Code, Hybrid and Testing functions) for each line connection. The line feed shall be sufficient to ensure the satisfactory performance of two telephones in parallel on a balanced line of between 0 and 1 500 metres in length. The range of loop resistance over which the interface will operate will be 0 to 500 ohms, with a similar limit for the Transmission Equivalent Resistance (TER). The 2 wire port impedance shall be 600 ohms, nominal, balanced and suited to the telephone instruments during ringing, signalling and voice transmission conditions. 3.7.2.4.2 Analogue Power Line Carrier Interfaces

The interfaces shall operate as four wire plus E and M interconnections, with the facility for equipment busy signalling wire and test signalling wire, for use with existing transmission equipment interfaces such as PLC and pilot cable interfaces. The electrical interface requirements are as follows: Transmit and receive pairs: impedance 600 ohms balanced; better than 20 dB; levels - 3.5 dBm. 48-volt battery and relay coil. voltage free relay contact to earth. voltage free relay contact to earth. return loss

E wire: M wire: Test/busy wires: 3.7.2.4.3 PAX to PAX Interface

The interfaces shall operate as digital trunk/tie line interfaces to enable exchanges to be interconnected with digital PAX and multiplex equipment. 2 Mb/s interfaces shall be in accordance with the requirements of ITU-T recommendations G.703 and G.732.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 131 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

64 kb/s interfaces shall be in accordance with requirements of ITU-T recommendation G.703, and shall be complete with channel associated signalling. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that these interfaces enable the full range of network facilities to be available for the PAX extensions. 3.7.2.4.4 Pilot Cable Interface

The interface shall provide facilities to interconnect telephone and other terminals to multiplex and between exchanges via pilot cable systems. These interfaces generally conform to those of the PLC system, and are suitable for extending 2 or 4 wire analogue telephone interfaces beyond the 500 ohm limit. All necessary isolating transformers shall be provided. 3.7.2.5 Interface with Other Systems/Equipment Provisions shall be provided by the Contractor to enable: a. b. PAX equipment to interface with the telecommunication management system. PAX equipment installed at the Control Centre to interface with the master clock system for time synchronisation purposes. PAX equipment installed at the Control Centre to interface with the voice recording equipment. PAX equipment to interface with the facsimile machines. SPC Telephone Exchange Equipment

c.

d. 3.7.3

3.7.3.1 General The PAX equipment shall be microprocessor based stored program control (SPC) digital type exchange with non-blocking architecture, suitable for the transmission of 64 kb/s and 2 Mb/s digital signals. It should be possible, if required at a later date, to interface with public switched telephone network (PSTN) and other public integrated services digital network (ISDN) exchanges. Details of how this can be achieved shall be included in the Bid. The PAX shall be capable of being connected via 64 kb/s and 2 Mb/s digital trunk links as well as analogue PLC circuits utilising multi-frequency and E&M signalling to other existing PAXs installed in the telephone network. It shall also be possible to transfer 30 voice channels to a remote place or as a tie line to another PAX. The PAX equipment shall also be capable of fully automatic switching and use completely solid state time/space switching methods. All PAXs shall provide an orderly shut down during loss of power and automatic recovery after restoration of power. Furthermore the PAXs shall be capable of being configured by software to automatically search for alternative routes in the PAX telephone network should the first choice route be busy or faulty so to maximise the availability of the network. Only if all possible routes have been attempted and found unavailable will the ‗engaged‘ tone be returned to the caller. The equipment shall be expandable to at least the specified maximum switching capacity without impairment to reliability and performance, and without the need for replacement of installed major software or equipment items. Failure of any single component shall not go undetected or cause failure of critical function. The PAX equipment shall be capable of detecting faulty trunk lines and disconnect them as well as periodically test their status and re-connect the trunk line once it is operational. The PAX shall report to the telecommunication management system should one or more trunk lines are faulty. The PAX shall be capable of incorporating the facility for recording voice messages on a store and forward basis. Telephones connected to the network shall be able to send a voice message to the PAX, together with a called extension number. A message waiting indication shall be available to telephone stations to advise that a message has been stored when a code prefix is keyed. Messages are to be password (key pad code) protected.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 132 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

3.7.3.2 Switching Facilities The switching equipment shall provide for the following facilities: a. b. The interconnection of calling and called extensions. The interconnection of the PAX exchanges for information, control and voice via multiplex circuits conforming to relevant ITU-T recommendations and PLC channels confirming to IEC 60495. Interconnection with central PAX telephone system manager console at the Control Centre. A traffic monitoring and reporting system.

c.

d.

3.7.3.3 System Facilities a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. Abbreviated dialling. Alarm signalling. Answering machine connection. Auto-attendant. Hot line dialling. Long line extension. Incoming/outgoing call barring. Automatic call distribution. Break-in/listening-in. Call identification. Central/distributed operator. Conference call. Day/night mode. Directory assistance/programming. Directory dialling. Emergency alarm. Message answering. Music on hold. Password protection.

3.7.3.4 Extension Facilities The PAX shall provide for the interconnection of any calling and called extension connected to the exchange, without the participation of a telephone operator, on the basis of keyed or dialled number information. The exchange equipment shall provide, as a minimum, the following facilities: a. b. Normal telephone-to-telephone communications. Limited access extensions and tie circuits for which special prefix calling codes shall be applicable and as a selectable option, that only specified calling extensions can access.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 133 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

c.

Priority access enabling selected extensions to interrupt busy extensions or trunks and either request or force the freeing of the busy extension or trunk. Both ‗request‘ and ‗forced‘ priority levels to be available. Automatic callback on ‗Busy‘ or ‗No Reply‘ in which the PAX will automatically initiate a retry of a called extension once the called extension becomes free. The calling extension will need to enter a prefix code for this facility to be operable. Conference call, both 3-way conference established by a normal extension, and a multiparty conference (up to 20 extensions) established through a multi-key hand set at each Control Room Operator position. Call transfer to enable a calling party to be transferred to another extension. Call transfer/follow-me to enable all incoming calls to be re-routed to another extension. Call transfer on no answer to enable incoming calls to be re-routed to another extension if not answered within a predetermined time (programmable time adjustment 5 to 30 seconds). Call pick up to enable a called extension to be answered at another extension by keying from that other extension using a prefix code. Last number redial to enable a call retry without re-keying the required extensions. Abbreviated dialling in which short key codes will enable access of previously stored longer numbers for extensions connected directly to the network. Call waiting indication, a busy extension shall receive a call waiting signal, once a calling extension keys a ‗camp-on‘ request suffix code. The exchange will automatically call the called extension when it becomes free, while the second caller is waiting. Extension group hunting, a number of extensions may be grouped on a common extension number and incoming calls shall be assigned in priority on cyclic order to the next free extension. Extensions directly connected to the network shall be able to press a hold button to hold an existing call while initiating a second call.

d.

e.

f. g.

h.

i.

j. k.

l.

m.

n.

The facilities shall be available on an assigned basis, whereby a central operator shall be able to allocate any or all facilities to any extension either directly connected, or remotely connected to the PAX on the network. The means of assignment shall be by the use of a simple task list, entered at the exchange administrative/supervisory terminal. The task list shall not involve complex codes and shall use a high level, easy to operate man-machine interface. All facilities shall be readily available without limitation, i.e. the use of any single facility or any combination of facilities shall not limit the use of other facilities on any extension. 3.7.3.5 Switching Capacity The exchange equipment shall have initial and final switching capacities as detailed in Technical Schedules. 3.7.3.6 Transmission Performance Transmission through the exchange will involve: a. b. c. 2-wire to 2-wire analogue working. 4-wire to 4-wire analogue and 64 kb/s digital working. 2-wire to 4-wire working, both analogue and 64 kb/s digital.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 134 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

d.

2 and 4-wire analogue and 2 and 4-wire 64 k/s digital to 2 Mb/s composite digital signal working, and the reverse direction. 2 Mb/s to 2 Mb/s composite digital signal working.

e.

The exchange transmission performance shall comply with the ITU-T recommendation G.712, for combined transit/local exchanges and related recommendations in regard to measurement techniques, interface characteristics, definitions and, in particular, in respect of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Relative level values and tolerance. Impedance, nominal values return loss, longitudinal balance. Terminal balance return loss. Nominal transmission loss and variations with time and input levels. Attenuation/frequency distortion. Group delay, absolute delay, absolute group delay and variation with frequency. Noise, weighted idle channel, cross talk, intermodulation, impulse noise, quantization distortion, spurious signals. Discrimination from out-of-band signals. Bit error rate performance.

h. i. 3.7.3.7 Software

The preferred software programming language is CHILL, as described in ITU-T recommendation Z.200. However, other high level programming languages may be offered if they can provide better reliability and maintainability required, and which conform to the basic structural requirements. Details of the programming language used and software licensing and upgrades arrangements shall be included in the Bid. The software shall be well tried and tested and shall be of modular construction, using a hierarchical set of function levels and modules. The modules shall be combined using structured programming techniques, in which each module is well defined and the communication between the modules also well defined. Security measures shall be provided to protect the system software from corruption. System parameters and database shall be user configurable by software. Password protection shall be used to allow only authorised users access to the modification of system parameters and database. It shall be possible to modify the database without disturbing operation of the exchange. All programming tools and man machine interfaces required for system modifications and re-configurations shall be provided under the Contract. 3.7.3.8 Maintenance The exchange shall provide automatic monitoring and reporting functions to verify the proper execution of call handling and exchange software or hardware malfunctions, and report on the condition of interfaces and exchange resource, eg memory occupation, call queue levels, CPU utilisation, traffic levels. The exchange shall be equipped with the following alarm facilities: a. Urgent alarms are those indicating the exchange has or is about to stop or that a major malfunction has occurred that can affect the operational service. Non-urgent alarms are resulting from transient conditions or self-clearing (automatic partial restart) conditions that do not affect the operational service.

b.

Classification and prioritisation of system alarms shall be configurable by the user. Local urgent and non-urgent alarm indicators shall be provided. Voltage free alarm contacts shall also be provided to enable integration into the telecommunication management system and SCADA system. Provision shall be provided to enable diagnostics and maintenance functions, telephone numbering changes and network management facilities be carried from a remote site.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 135 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

3.7.3.9 Hardware To meet functional, reliability and performance requirements, the hardware for the exchange shall use: a. b. c. d. e. Distributed call handling multiprocessor architecture. Duplicated processors each equipped with its own memory and memory control. Duplicated buses for common data, memory and control. Duplicated power supply units. High speed RAM backed by non-volatile, eg EEPROM, memory and duplicated hard disk storage (storage to have 50 per cent spare capacity). Duplicated ringing/tone signalling. Bulk software loading facilities, preferably of the hard cassette disk or CDROM/DVD type. System control and display panel. All switching/exchange equipment shall operate from a 48 Vdc power supply system. Synchronisation

f. g.

h. i.

3.7.4

The telephone exchange shall be provided with facilities for linking to a master clock system for time synchronisation purposes. 3.7.5 Telephone Numbering Plan

The PAX shall be programmed according to the Employer‘s telephone numbering plan. The exchange shall have facilities to transpose telephone numbers for routing to and from extensions on remote exchanges. It shall be possible to alter the numbering plan at a later date should this be required. 3.7.6 Telephone Signalling

Line, information, tone and ring signalling shall be provided to suit analogue and digital telephone extension equipment. Analogue telephone extension signalling shall provide the line, information, tone and ringing facilities as follows: a. The extension line control signalling shall use line loop signalling to initiate and terminate extension calling and answer activities, in accordance with BORSCHT exchange and multiplex interface requirements. Information signalling will be DTMF in accordance with ITU-T recommendations Q.23 and Q.16, and other associated ITU-T recommendations. Tone signalling will conform to the supplier‘s standard equipment and appropriate ITU-T recommendations. Ringing current shall be to the manufacturer‘s standard.

b.

c.

d.

The network signalling protocols for the PAX network shall be based on internationally recognised standards such as analogue private networking signalling system (APNSS) and digital private networking signalling system (DPNSS). Details of the PAX network signalling protocols proposed shall be included in the Bid.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 136 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

They shall be suitable for either desk top or wall mounted. Hands free operation. Ability to produce management and equipment status reports. 3. d. The following facilities shall be provided as a minimum: a. The final design and colour of the telephone handsets shall be subject to the approval of the Employer. circuit disconnection. provisions shall be made to enable details of each incoming and outgoing call on the network be recorded. c. In addition. Built-in speaker shall be provided to enable hand free operation. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the console shall also control the normal monitoring and operation of the switching network. and be ergonomically designed for "stress free" operation. 3. The operator‘s console shall be equipped with interactive VDU.7 Status Reporting and Call Detail Recording Facilities Printed and visual display reports of the status of the exchange shall be possible either as an integral part of the PAX equipment or via a personal computer (PC). handset.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 3. The final design of the console shall be subject to the approval of the Employer. The operator‘s console shall be capable of displaying the following information as a minimum: a. Line engaged. In addition.Section 6 . e. Ability to initiate multi party conference call. b. The reports shall be date and time stamped and identify exchange and software version codes. patching and test connections for the telecommunication system. Telephone System Management Console b. establishing multiparty conference calls.7. d. c. Record incoming and outgoing calls by destination and trunk groups. Called/calling parties identity on the other terminal.137 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . headset and exchange function controls.9 Telephone Handsets The handsets shall be of modern design and equipped with push buttons for call selection.7. call transfers and fault reporting. Priority override calls. keyboard. b. Ability to produce traffic analysis and summaries by locations and called number plus exception reports.7. circuit re-routing. 3. e. Longest waiting call. The facilities available on the console shall include at least the following: a. Ability to collect data either directly or via a remote data collection device. Waiting time for unanswered incoming calls. The data collection device shall be protected with 24 hours of battery back-up and equipped with floppy disk or tape back-up storage device.10 Main Distribution Frame Main distribution frame (MDF) shall be provided to facilitate cable terminations. c. stored and printed in a report form for administrative and operational purposes. Details of features provided for each type of telephone handsets shall be included in the Bid. Capacity to store at least 50 000 call records with expansion capability to 100 000 records. Centralised voice recording for operational telephone communications. including enquiries on system operation and extension numbers.8 A telephone system management console shall be provided for the PAX at the Control Centre.7.

Cross connection by means of jumpering facilities shall also be provided. Sufficient verticals and termination blocks shall be provided to accommodate the anticipated ultimate number of exchange and extension lines and cabling requirements for other systems. and shall be protected from corrosion by painting or galvanising.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Main distribution frames shall preferably be single-sided and suitable for wall mounting. All main distribution frames shall have an earth connection provided. During replay incoming messages shall be stored on the hard disk(s). surge protectors and barrier transformers etc shall be provided under the Contract. The voice recording equipment shall also be available for replay regardless of the operation of the system. Voice operation so that the equipment can be operated in a voice operated record start mode. Appropriate audible alarms and visual indications shall be provided to alert the operator whenever the disk storage space for voice logging is less than 50 channel hours. Automatically monitoring the correct operation of the channel. The capacity of the main distribution frames shall be chosen to accommodate the maximum capacity required for the telecommunication and SCADA data channels plus 50 per cent spare capacity to cater for any future expansions. b. g. Archiving on optical media such as CD or DVD for long term storage. The digital voice recording equipment shall have the following features: a. Voice playback facility. The hard disk(s) shall be sized to provide a minimum of 2 500 channel hours voice recording on a roll-over basis. d. User friendly. The voice logging will be used for the purpose of determining sequence of operational events.Section 6 . Appropriate compression algorithm and sampling rate shall be used to minimise the disk space storage requirement and maximise voice recording quality. e. Initially the equipment shall be capable of providing 16 simultaneous speech channels recording but with a capability of being expanded up to 32 speech channels at a later date. Date and time recording facility such that the date and time of each recorded call is easily traceable. Fuses. c. Remote facilities interface (clean contacts for remote indicators/alarms etc). Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Provision of all necessary hardware and software required for voice logging shall be supplied by the Contractor. All messages shall be digitised and stored on the hard disk(s).138 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . h. f. 3.7. The voice recording equipment shall be a multi-channel digital communications logger that can simultaneously record and replay voice messages. Sufficiently built in redundancy to avoid single point of failure.11 Voice Recording Equipment A computer based voice recording equipment shall be provided at the Control Centre to automatically log all telephone conversations between operators in the Control Centre and other personnel.

subject to the results of the site surveys. the Bidder is not restricted to offering individual transducers and may offer combined transducers or other signal conversion techniques suitable and proven in HV substation environments and providing they comply with the relevant IEC standards. It is expected that where new or replacement outstation equipment is required that each substation will be equipped with: a) Remote Terminal Units (conventional or distributed) b) SCADA Interface Panel(s) – SIP c) Bay Control Units (for distributed solutions) d) Plant interfaces (existing and new devices where required) e) Plant to SIP cabling f) SIP to RTU cabling g) 48Vdc positive earth power supply with battery and charger h) Communication interface All components shall be wholly suitable for operation in the hazardous environment of substations. 4. The Outstations proposed for this contract should have a proven track record of satisfactory operation in similar environments. and Distributed RTUs. provide:   Protocol Adaptation Signal data definition Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. OUTSTATION AND SUBSTATION ADAPTATION WORKS 4. Equipment construction and installation shall allow easy access so that tests. 4. For the purpose of this document Outstations includes Remote Terminal Units (RTU). The Bidder shall provide a reference list detailing where the proposed equipment has been supplied for comparable applications. relays and sundry other miscellaneous equipment are specified in the General Technical Specifications and Technical Schedules.1 INTRODUCTION This section describes the project specific requirements for the Outstation and Substation Adaptation works in terms of overall design.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 4. They also identify the number of transducers and interposing relays required.139 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The Contract also requires that all existing Outstations are connected to the new NSCC Master Station and where necessary that additional signals are incorporated.3 OUTSTATIONS Outstations supplied under the contract shall be entirely suited for operation in HV substations both in terms of functionality and suitability for the climatic and EMC environments.3.2. These tables identify the number of each type of signal required at each location. At these locations the Contractor shall. The installation shall ensure that exposure to hazards is minimised and where possible protected from common mode failures or damage caused by other failures. SCADA Interface Panels (SIP) or Marshalling Cubicles. Table 4.2 DESIGN OBJECTIVES The principle objectives of the design of the substation works shall be to provide high reliability & availability. functionality and performance. The general requirements of the various elements of the substation works including Outstations.Section 6 . The components/modules shall be designed to have inherently high reliability.1 and 4. 4.3 lists the locations where there are existing Outstations that the Contractor shall integrate into the new SCADA/EMS. cables. However. repairs and replacements can be carried without endangering or disruption to other parts of the works. Substation Automation Systems. ease of maintenance and to meet the system performance requirements.1 Initial Equipping of Outstations The Outstations supplied under this contract shall be equipped for monitoring and control as defined in Tables 4. This table indicates the activities and devices that are required to complete the integration task at each location.

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification     Point to Point Verification New/Additional Communication Gateway Port New/Additional Communication PDH Port New GPS And any other items to complete and set to work. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 .140 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

No. No. No. No. No. No. No.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 4. No. No. No.Humidity Transducer Binary Command Output Relays Status / Indication Interposing Relays Bay Control Selector Switches Connection of Sub RTU Cables: Power Cables Signal Cables All other Ancillary Equipment required Minor Civil Works Removal of existing equipment Unit Lot Lot Lot No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No.Frequency Transducers 4-20mA . m m Lot Lot Lot Qty 1 1 1 1 1 83 331 36 18 0 0 0 0 468 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 2 1 1 1 1 110 373 41 12 0 2 0 0 538 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 3 1 1 1 1 5 57 16 6 3 2 0 2 91 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 4 1 1 1 1 2 74 24 12 6 4 0 4 126 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 5 1 1 1 1 79 343 42 12 0 0 0 0 476 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 6 1 1 1 1 63 235 24 18 0 0 0 0 340 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 7 1 1 1 1 111 364 43 12 0 0 0 0 530 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 8 1 1 1 1 63 252 26 12 0 0 0 0 353 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 9 1 1 1 1 83 337 36 18 0 0 0 0 474 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 10 1 1 1 1 70 287 29 18 0 0 0 0 404 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 11 1 1 1 1 63 291 31 18 0 0 0 0 403 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 12 1 1 1 1 83 310 31 18 0 0 0 0 442 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 13 1 1 1 1 93 423 47 18 0 0 0 0 581 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 14 1 1 1 1 70 276 29 18 0 0 0 0 393 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 15 1 1 1 1 45 200 26 12 3 2 0 2 290 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 16 1 1 1 1 67 263 28 12 0 0 0 0 370 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 17 1 1 1 1 54 205 19 18 0 0 0 0 296 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 18 1 1 1 16 64 16 16 16 16 16 16 176 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 17 18 18 18 1160 4685 544 268 28 26 16 24 6751 18 18 18 18 18 18 17 9 0 6 9 10 0 9 2 12 12 4 0 1 1 3 83 349 32 1 1 2 110 387 30 4 1 3 3 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 65 2 6 1 5 5 0 0 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 90 0 11 1 10 10 8 0 6 0 5 5 6 0 14 0 12 12 3 0 6 0 5 5 8 0 8 0 7 7 12 0 6 0 5 5 11 0 6 0 5 5 13 0 8 0 6 6 9 0 12 0 11 11 11 0 5 0 5 5 12 0 1 1 2 79 355 28 1 1 3 63 253 20 1 1 2 111 376 30 1 1 2 63 264 20 1 1 3 83 355 26 1 1 3 70 305 22 1 1 3 63 309 20 1 1 3 83 328 26 1 1 3 93 441 32 1 1 3 70 294 18 8 0 6 6 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 45 214 16 6 0 5 7 8 0 3 0 3 3 8 0 8 1 1 1 8 1 1 1 2 67 275 24 1 1 3 54 223 14 16 16 1 8 64 1 135 6 112 117 135 1 2 3 3 32 32 41 1152 4947 361 0 1800 52000 18 18 17 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 1000 1 1 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. No.MVAr Transducers 4-20mA . No. No. No. No.Current Transducers 4-20mA . No. No.141 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . No. No.Tap Position Transducers 4-20mA – Water Level Transducers 4-20mA – Gate Limiter Transducers 4-20mA – Turbine Water Flow Transducers 4-20mA . No.Battery Transducers .Voltage Transducers 4-20mA .MW Transducers 4-20mA .4-20mA: Transducers Composite Transducers 4-20mA .1 Materials and Works for New Outstations Stations Embilipitiya SS Sapugaskanda GSS Bowatenna PS Anuradhapura New Valachchenai Nuwara Eliya Trincomalee Hambantota Seethawaka Veyangoda Canyon PS NSCC RTU Ratmalana Panadura Kosgama Kelaniya Ampara Matara Total Outstations without existing RTUs Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Item of supply/work Site Survey Design Works Installation and Commissioning RTU Complete with all necessary cards and racks I/O Cards/modules to provide for: Control Outputs Indication Inputs Measurand mA Measurand Binary (No of i/p bits) Indication Outputs Pulse Counter Inputs Set Point mA Set Point Binary Signal Totals per Station RTU Cubicles Complete with all necessary terminals fixtures and fittings RTU GPS Clock RTU Communication Modules/Interfaces RTU PSU SCADA Marshalling Cubicles Dual 48Vdc Power Supply .Rectifier/Charger 48Vdc Power Supply . No. No. No. No.Section 6 .Temperature Transducers 4-20mA . No.

MW Transducers 4-20mA .Current Transducers 4-20mA – Water Level Transducers 4-20mA – Gate Limiter Transducers 4-20mA – Turbine Water Flow Transducers 4-20mA .MVAr Transducers 4-20mA .Battery Transducers .Rectifier/Charger 48Vdc Power Supply . No.142 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Tap Position Transducers 4-20mA . No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 4. No.4-20mA: Transducers Composite Transducers 4-20mA . No. m m Lot Lot Lot Qty 1 1 1 1 1 120 375 40 18 0 0 0 0 553 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 2 1 1 1 1 115 430 49 18 0 0 0 0 612 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 3 1 1 1 1 212 661 84 18 0 0 0 0 975 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 4 1 1 1 1 90 391 44 18 0 0 0 0 543 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 5 1 1 1 1 16 276 52 12 18 12 0 12 398 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 6 1 1 1 1 91 379 45 18 0 0 0 0 533 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 7 1 1 1 1 115 519 64 18 9 6 0 6 737 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 8 1 1 1 1 96 302 35 24 0 0 0 0 457 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 9 1 1 1 1 73 346 33 18 0 0 0 0 470 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 10 1 1 1 1 85 307 55 6 15 10 0 10 488 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 11 1 1 1 1 114 340 39 18 0 0 0 0 511 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 12 1 1 1 1 79 308 45 0 6 4 0 4 446 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 13 1 1 1 1 12 104 27 0 6 4 0 4 157 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 14 1 1 1 1 88 401 54 36 6 4 0 4 593 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 15 1 1 1 1 37 178 27 12 0 4 0 4 262 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 16 1 1 1 1 37 316 50 24 0 24 0 0 451 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 17 1 1 1 1 9 56 17 0 6 4 0 4 96 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 18 1 1 1 1 2 184 41 18 9 6 0 6 266 1 1 1 1 1 Qty 18 18 18 18 1391 5872 801 276 75 78 0 54 8547 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 0 187 30 203 219 70 6 8 21 21 17 17 44 1391 6227 442 0 1800 54000 18 18 18 9 0 9 13 7 0 12 2 11 11 11 0 21 4 23 26 8 0 10 0 9 11 12 0 14 0 14 14 8 0 10 0 9 13 11 0 1 1 6 120 393 38 1 1 3 115 448 32 1 1 3 212 679 76 1 1 3 90 409 34 0 0 0 16 300 2 1 1 3 91 397 36 15 2 19 19 0 0 1 3 3 1 1 3 115 543 38 10 4 8 11 0 0 6 0 5 7 13 0 1 1 4 96 326 34 1 1 3 73 364 26 10 2 14 14 0 2 1 5 5 1 1 1 85 323 18 11 2 12 12 0 0 1 1 0 114 358 32 12 2 12 12 0 0 1 2 2 1 1 0 79 312 22 7 1 6 6 0 0 1 2 2 1 1 0 12 108 4 13 3 14 13 0 4 1 2 2 1 1 6 88 441 28 6 2 6 6 0 0 1 2 2 1 1 2 37 194 10 6 2 20 20 0 0 1 1 4 37 364 10 4 2 2 2 0 0 1 2 2 1 1 0 9 60 2 11 2 10 9 0 0 1 3 3 1 1 3 2 208 0 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 100 3000 1 1 1 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. No.Section 6 . No.Old Sapugaskanda PS Kelanitissa PS Anuradhapura Old Rantambe PS Laxapana PS (old) Kothmale PS Polpitiya PS Ukuwela PS Kurunegala Pannipitiya 132/33kV Victoria PS Balangoda Outstations RTUs with INDACTIC 33 RTUs Biyagama Habarana Total Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Item of supply/work Site Survey Design Works Installation and Commissioning RTU Complete with all necessary cards and racks I/O Cards/modules to provide for: Control Outputs Indication Inputs Measurand mA Measurand Binary (No of i/p bits) Indication Outputs Pulse Counter Inputs Set Point mA Set Point Binary Signal Totals per Station RTU Cubicles with all terminals fixtures and fittings RTU GPS Clock RTU Communication Modules/Interfaces RTU PSU SCADA Marshalling Cubicles Dual 48Vdc Power Supply . No. No. No. No. No. No.2 Materials and Works for INDACTIC 33 Replacement RTUs Stations Kiribathkumbura Randenigala PS Samanalawewa PS Kotudoga . No. No. No. No.Frequency Transducers 4-20mA .Temperature Transducers 4-20mA . No. No. No. No. No.Humidity Transducer Binary Command Output Relays Status / Indication Interposing Relays Bay Control Selector Switches Connection of Sub RTU Cables: Power Cables Signal Cables All other Ancillary Equipment required Minor Civil Works Removal of existing equipment Unit Lot Lot Lot No.Voltage Transducers 4-20mA .

5 .101 IEC 870 .5 .5 .5 .101 IEC 870 .5 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .101/104 IEC 870 .5 .5 .101 IEC 60870 .5 .5 .101 IEC 870 .5 .5 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .5 .2016 Under station project 2012 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .101/104 IEC 870 .101/104 IEC 870 .5 .2016 Under station project 2012 .5 .101 IEC 870 .2016 Under station project 2012 .101/104 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 . Computer Interface to VATech Stat.5 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .101/104 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .101/104 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .5 .5 .5 .101 IEC 870 .101/104 IEC 870 .2016 Under station project 2012 .2016 Under station project 2012 .101 IEC 870 .5 .5 .101 IEC 870 .101/104 IEC 870 .5 .5 .Section 6 .101 IEC 870 .5 .5 .101 IEC 870 .5 .5 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 870 .2016 Under station project 2012 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .5 .2016 Existing Protocol IEC 60870 .101 IEC 870 .5 .5 .5 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .101/104 IEC 870 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .101/104 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.5 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .5 .101 IEC 60870 .5 .101 IEC 60870 .101 IEC 870 .101 IEC 870 .2016 Under station project 2012 .3 Existing and Proposed SCADA Facilities and Protocols Item 560-1 560-2 560-3 560-4 560-5 560-6 560-7 560-8 560-9 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25 V1 V2 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16 SP17 SP18 SP19 Station Athurugiriya GSS Chilaw (Madampe) GSS KCCP / AES PS Kelanitissa 220kV GIS Kerawalapitiya PS Kotugoda 33kV GSS Puttalam GSS Ratnapura GSS Thulhiriya GSS Colombo Substation C Dehiwala GSS Havelock Town (SUB A) Horana Kelanatissa 132kV GSS Maradana GSS (SUB 1) Sri Jayawardhanapura GSS Vavuniya GSS Kolonnawa GIS Pannipitiya 220/33kV GSS Puttalam PS(Coal power) Veyangoda 220kV GSS Ambalangoda GSS Aniyakanda GSS Bolawatta GSS Deniyaya GSS Katunayaka GSS Kerawalapitiya GSS Kotugoda 220kV GSS Pannala GSS Laxapana PS (New) Wimalasurendra PS Wimalasurendra GSS Ukuwela GSS Badulla GSS Kukule PS Matugama GSS Chunnakam GSS Galle New GSS Kilinochchi GSS Maho GSS Mahiyangana GSS Naula GSS Pallekele GSS Polonnaruwa GSS Vavunativu GSS Upper Kotmale PS Beliatte GSS Baddegama Colombo B Colombo K Kadawatha GSS Kappalthurai GSS Kegalle GSS Monaragala GSS Piliyandala GSS Existing/Planned Outstation Type Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 561 .5 .5 .5 .143 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .5 .5 .5 .2016 Under station project 2012 .101 IEC 870 .101/104 IEC 870 .TH1 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB SYS 500 Gateway Interface to ABB PCU 400 Gateway Interface to ABB PCU 400 Gateway Interface to PSX 600-SAC Interface to PSX 600-SAC Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to ALSPA HMI Gateway Interface to ALSPA HMI Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Interface to VATech Stat.5 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 . Computer Under station project Under station project Interface to ABB Gateway Computer Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project 2012 .5 .5 .5 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 4.5 .5 .101/104 IEC 870 .

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

Item SP20

Station Weligama GSS 4.3.2

Existing/Planned Outstation Type Under station project 2012 - 2016

Existing Protocol IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104

Expansion and Upgrade Capability

The expansion capability of the SCADA system is required to match power system developments over its service life of some 15 years. All delivered Outstations shall be dimensioned according to the following criteria: a. b. c. d. All delivered Outstations shall be equipped to accommodate a 20% increase in I/O as defined in the I/O schedules Where spare capacity would mean that I/O cards with no signals are required then only the wired rack space shall be provided This expansion capability shall be realisable solely by the plugging in of additional I/O modules For stations where supervisory control is not yet required, the Outstations shall have the functionality to execute controls and sufficient rack space, processing power and power supply capacity to accommodate control output modules for the number of circuit breakers and switches being monitored. This expansion capability shall be realisable solely by the plugging in of additional I/O modules. The provision shall also take into account the requirement for a 20% increase in controls outputs. The SCADA Interface Panels (facilities) shall be equipped with sufficient spare terminals to accommodate the expansion requirements set out in ―a‖ to ―d‖.

e.

Cabling for these expansion requirements shall be installed between the Outstation and the SCADA Interface Panels. Cabling from the plant to the SCADA Interface Panels shall contain a minimum of 10% spare pairs for each signal type or a minimum of one spare pair for each signal type associated with the Outstation. 4.3.3 Functional requirements

4.3.3.1 General The standard Outstation software shall be capable of supporting, but not be limited to, the following basic functions: a. b. c. d. e. f. Data acquisition and processing, data preparation for transmission, data transmission, and performing control functions commanded by the Master station. Alarm/Event prioritisation for the interrogation of changes of status. Sequence of Events recording with a storage capacity for 24 hours alarm, event and measurement data. Synchronising of internal time clocks with a high resolution GPS signal or synchronising messages from the Master Station. Secure telecommand using the select/check/execute mechanism with OPEN and CLOSE command outputs. Initiate Load Shedding of pre-definable sizes of load following specific and/or broadcast instruction from the NSCC (the load shall be monitored on each MV feeder and based on a predefined priority the required circuit breakers corresponding to the predefined load shed value shall be tripped/opened). The predefinitions shall be readily set up and amended by the Operators in the NSCC. Programming to carry out specific user defined functions

g.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 144 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

The alarms shall be assigned with priority levels at the Outstation and transmitted according to priority or alternatively as soon as the alarms are received, whichever method is standard. The standard method employed shall be fully described. The occurrence of an alarm or an event shall be arranged for transmission to the Master station at the earliest opportunity. Alarms or events occurring during a transmission of measurements shall be arranged for insertion at the next convenient point in the message cycle. Details shall be provided in the Bid describing the message cycles employed for methods where priority assignments are implemented at the Outstation (e.g. arranging multiple alarms with different priorities). Each Outstation shall have the capability of automatic start-up and initialisation following restoration of power after an outage without need of Master Station intervention. 4.3.3.2 Time Synchronisation Outstations shall have the capability to time tag events and alarms to a resolution of 1 ms or better with respect to other time tagged signals in the same Outstation. To complement this feature, the Outstation clocks shall be synchronised to enable system wide comparisons to be made on the alarms and events recorded by different Outstations. The synchronisation shall be achieved by providing periodic time signals from GPS clocks and from synchronising messages from the Master Station. The resolution of time tags between Outstations shall be better than 5ms. In the event of a failure of the external synchronising time signal, the Outstation shall continue to perform time tagging from its internal clock until the synchronisation signal is restored and the clock is corrected to compensate for any time drift. 4.3.3.3 Communication Protocols 4.3.3.3.1 Master Station

The Outstation shall be capable of supporting the following master station communication protocol: a) IEC 60870-5 101 b) IEC 60870-5 104 4.3.3.3.2 Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED)

The Outstation shall be capable of supporting the following communication protocol for communicating with intelligent electronic devices: a) IEC 62056-21 b) IEC 60870-102 c) IEC 60870-103 d) MBUS e) Modbus RTU f) 4.3.3.3.3 JBUS Satellite RTUs

Where an Outstation is used to collect data from a remote location using a Satellite RTU a standard protocol shall be used to suit the communication medium available. 4.3.4 Control Security

Operation of control outputs shall use a true select/-/check/-/before/-/execute command sequence between the Outstation and the master station. The sequence shall include, as a minimum, the following functional capabilities: a. The master station shall transmit a control selection message addressing the required Outstation and control point within the Outstation, and indicate the control action desired.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 145 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

b.

The Outstation shall initialise its control logic, reassemble the control selection message received in (a) above, and transmit the reassembled message to the master station. The information in the message sent to the master station shall be generated by the Outstation‘s point-selection logic indicating the point and control function selected. It shall not be a simple repeat of the master station‘s message transmission. The master station will verify the returned message with the message sent in (a) and, if valid, shall issue an execute control message to the Outstation. The Outstation shall only operate the control point selected after the check - before - execute sequence above has been performed without error or interruption by any other messages. The Outstation shall reset its control logic upon any error in the sequence or if the execute message is not received within a set time (user adjustable) after the command message is received at the Outstation. Hardware Requirements

c. d.

4.3.5

4.3.5.1 General Each Outstation shall comprise microprocessor based equipment with its software (firmware) resident in non-volatile memory. It shall be readily possible to update the software (e.g. by PROM replacement) to alter or extend the Outstation‘s functionality. The Outstation shall be linked to the plant by means of a number of I/O modules with a main processing module processing the signals. The standard I/O shall include single, double point and multi-point teleindication input signals, analogue telemetering input signals, pulse counting and double point telecommand and teleswitching output signals. Communications to the SCADA master station shall be by communications modules via modems connected to the bearer circuits. The I/O modules shall include all interface and protection circuits. The design of all Outstation equipment shall be such, as to ensure satisfactory operation in an electrically hostile environment typical of high voltage electrical installations. In order to prevent incorrect functioning or damage to the equipment when subjected to interference arising from power system switching, fault currents and lightning, all Outstation input and output circuits, and power supply circuits shall be provided with isolation and/or immunity to electrical interference. Where the inherent withstand capability of Outstation I/O modules does not meet the test requirements specified in IEC 870-3 Class III then interposing equipment with the required withstand characteristics shall be provided. 4.3.5.2 Digital Inputs The digital inputs shall comprise ‗volt free‘ contacts. Changes of state in the digital inputs shall be reported to the main processing module for further processing. The inputs shall be configurable from a down-loadable database. Status changes shall be time tagged to a resolution selectable from 20 ms, 10 ms, 5 ms, 2 ms and 1 ms, with or without debounce filtering. Digital inputs may be single point, double point or multi-point. The interpretation of states for single or double point inputs shall be configurable. A single point indication shall be represented by a binary digit. Double points shall be represented by a pair of binary digits. 4.3.5.3 Analogue Inputs The analogue input module shall be capable of processing standard voltage and current inputs continuously. Input voltage and current range, and variable scan rate shall all be configurable. The inputs shall be multiplexed and digitised by the use of an analogue multiplexer and an analogue-todigital converter (ADC). A fast sampling, self calibrating ADC technique shall be utilised to measure the input signal. The ADC shall be capable of providing a minimum resolution of 11 bits plus 1 sign bit ADC specification over a wide temperature range. Additional software filtering facilities shall be provided for minimising sampling errors. Each analogue input shall be monitored, by the Outstation, against two upper and two lower limit values, with an alarm time delay. An alarm shall be generated only if the limit has been exceeded for longer

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 146 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

than the programmed time delay. This shall be operator adjustable from 1 to 300 seconds or by a variable number of scan cycle periods (1 to 100). Each analogue input shall be terminated with transient voltage protection components. In case of overload, the input circuit shall not sustain any deterioration of its characteristics. Furthermore, an overload present on one of the circuits shall not induce telemetering errors on the other circuits. 4.3.5.4 Pulse Counting The Outstations shall be capable of counting and storing the number of pulses generated by MWh or MVArh metering equipment external to the Outstation. The metering equipment will provide an isolated normally open contact. The pulse counter shall be incremented one count for each cycle of the input (pulse). The pulse counter shall be capable of accepting pulses at a rate of ten counts per second. The count shall be ―frozen‖ (transferred to a buffer register) when commanded by the master station or when commanded by locally generated contact inputs. The Contractor shall describe his method for ensuring the value recorded at the master station(s) corresponds precisely with the value indicated by the pulsing instrument. 4.3.5.5 Command Outputs Command outputs shall enable the Outstation to telecommand power devices by operating external interposing relays. Galvanic isolation shall be achieved by relays on the modules. Facilities shall be provided for pulse controls with programmable duration from 0 to 60 seconds. The module shall provide dual pole control outputs configured as high security select/actuate with check-back. The module shall operate by means of internal ―select‖ relays following a command from the master station. Each ―select‖ relay shall have a pair of isolated contacts which shall be used to select a power device. Once a particular power device has been selected, a second command shall be required from the master station to energise one of two ―actuate‖ relays. These relays shall each have a pair of contacts which shall be configured to complete the circuit to energise the selected power device using the substation/plant supply. The duration for which the external device is energised shall be determined by a programmable interval timer whose value shall be set either locally or remotely. The design of the command circuit shall ensure that no single hardware failure on the module can cause incorrect operation of the command outputs. Also an on-board watch-dog circuit shall be provided to monitor correct software operation. Should time out occur then all outputs shall be inhibited. 4.3.5.6 Digital Outputs The digital output module shall provide non-isolated digital outputs suitable for driving local display lamps or external interface relays. Each digital output shall be configurable between continuous and pulse modes. In continuous mode the digital output shall be set to a particular state and remain there until set to the opposite state. In pulse mode the digital output is set to the energised state for a predefined time. The time shall be user configurable for each pulse mode output. The mode and time information shall be down-loadable from the master station. 4.3.5.7 Analogue Outputs The analogue output module shall provide dc voltage or current outputs. The analogue output module shall convert data from digital form to analogue form utilising a digital to analogue converter (DAC). The DAC shall be cyclically tested for correct operation. The DAC shall be capable of providing a minimum resolution of 11 bits + 1 sign bit on unipolar, bipolar and offset outputs. 4.3.6 External Communications Interfaces

4.3.6.1 Master Stations Outstations shall have capability to support simultaneous communications with multiple independent master stations. Each Outstation shall be equipped with a communication port for communication with the SCADA Master Station. The Outstations shall be capable of expansion to support an additional port for communications with another Master Station. The communications interfaces provided shall depend on the type of communication channel available at the location:

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 147 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

 

SDH Node o The interfaces shall support 64kbps digital channels and TCP/IP Ethernet channels

DPLC Channel o The interfaces shall conform to CCITT Recommendations V.24 and V.28. The baud rate of each communication port shall be configurable over the range 50 to 9600 baud for connection to modems.

4.3.6.2 Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED) Each Outstation shall be capable of being equipped with up to 4 communications ports for communication with intelligent electronic devices (IEDs). The communications interfaces provided shall conform to EIA RS 485. communication port shall be configurable over the range 300 to 38400 baud. 4.3.6.3 Configuration and Maintenance Each Outstation shall be equipped with an external communications ports for connection to a portable configuration and maintenance PC. 4.3.7 Power supplies The baud rate of each

At each location the Outstations and ancillary equipment will be supplied from a battery backed dc power supply. Where a new power supply is required it shall be a duplicated system that meets the requirements for 48 Vdc Power Supplies specified in this document. The battery charger units shall each be capable of supplying 100% of the load for the fully expanded Outstations and following loss of primary supply to maintain supply for a period of at least 8 hours. This power supply is subject to voltage fluctuations and the Outstation shall therefore be capable of operating with supply variations of between +20 and -15 per cent of nominal voltage. Power input fuses and LEDs for monitoring shall be provided on the front of the unit. All power supply failures shall be reported to the master station. The power supply units shall incorporate surge suppression and isolation circuits to protect the Outstation modules from external electrical disturbances. Overvoltage and undervoltage protection shall be provided within the power supply to prevent the Outstation internal logic from being damaged as a result of a component failure in the power supply and to prevent the Outstation internal logic from becoming unstable and causing misoperations as a result of voltage fluctuations. 4.3.8 Configuration and Maintenance

4.3.8.1 Configuration Tools A portable PC based configuration and maintenance facility shall be provided along with all software and hardware necessary to interface to the Outstation. All database and software interfaces (Outstation diagnostics, database compiler, software listings, Outstation configuration listings, etc.) required for the maintenance and configuration of the Outstation shall be provided. The Outstation configuration and maintenance PC shall have diagnostics for the Outstation‘s processor(s), memory, I/O ports, and any other functional areas of the Outstation. The portable Outstation configuration and maintenance PC shall also be used to monitor and test the Outstation‘s operation and communication interfaces. The configuration and maintenance PC shall be capable of emulating both the master station and the Outstation. The Outstation shall have the capability to have I/O cards and distributed modules changed without powering down the equipment. 4.3.8.2 Database Management System Each Outstation shall be provided with a database management system. The database management system shall present the information via a user interface such that any individual database is transparent to the user.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 148 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

The database management and configuration software shall not impose a limit on the sizing of the Outstation It shall be possible to expand the Outstation up to it maximum physical limit without the need to reconfigure, or purchase additional software licence The database management system shall provide a means of verifying the database in order to check consistency and completeness of the database. The database modifications shall all be documented. The contents of a database shall not be lost if the power supply fails. Outstation shall start and load its database automatically. After a power failure, the

It shall be possible for the current database to be printed out on-line at any time on a printer connected to the Outstation. 4.3.8.3 Maintenance and Diagnostics Facilities The Outstation shall perform continuous self diagnostics to monitor its own operational capability. Any detected fault or abnormality which could affect the Outstations performance or operational capability shall be indicated to the master station and locally at the Outstation. The Outstation design shall facilitate first line fault location and maintenance to be readily performed on site. Maintenance equipment shall include an engineer's portable test unit. The test unit shall enable all the Outstation functions to be tested on site, with the Outstation in both off-line and on-line states. It shall provide an indication of the presence and location of any detected Outstation fault. Safeguards shall prevent the activation of Outstation control outputs with the test unit connected and the Outstation in the on-line state. The design of the O Outstation shall allow the replacement of I/O cards and distributed modules without powering down the Outstation. 4.4 SCADA INTERFACE PANEL

SCADA Interface Panels (SIP) or Marshalling Cubicles shall be provided to marshal all wiring related to supervisory measurement, indication and control functions from the local control panels, remote control panels, relay panels, transformer tap changers and other panels, as necessary. In addition to the standard requirements for equipment construction specified elsewhere in this Specification, each SIP shall incorporate terminal blocks and, where required, SCADA transducers. Terminal blocks or sections of terminal blocks shall be clearly labelled with the name of the circuit and its alphanumeric identity. With the exception of terminals for connections in current transformer (CT) circuits, all terminals shall be provided with an isolating link that may be operated without disturbing the connected wiring. Terminals used in CT circuits shall provide a means of maintaining continuity of the CT circuit external to the SIP, without disturbing the connected wiring, so that SIP equipment (such as transducers) may be safely disconnected from those terminals without disrupting the CT circuit. Terminals for the connection of transducer wiring shall be arranged to enable any one transducer to be disconnected and replaced without disrupting the connections or operation of any other transducer, particularly where more than one transducer is connected to the same CT or VT input signals. The field wiring side terminal blocks shall be grouped on the basis of individual circuits and bays. The Outstation side terminal blocks shall also be grouped on a circuit basis but split into Analogues, Indications and Controls. All looping between terminals and cross connections between the field wiring side and Outstation side terminal blocks shall be supplied and installed under this Contract. Each SIP shall be fitted with a Dummy Circuit Breaker to simulate the open and close operations of a circuit breaker to enable the command outputs of the associated Outstation to be tested. This shall comprise a latching relay with the dummy breaker relay ‗open‘ and ‗close‘ coils connected to a double point command output on the Outstation. Contacts on the relay shall be connected to a double point digital input on the Outstation to provide indication of the dummy breaker state, i.e. open and closed. 4.5 4.5.1 POWER SYSTEM MEASUREMENT TRANSDUCERS General

All power system measurement transducers for the measurement of MW, MVAr, voltage, current and frequency shall be plug-in type and individual transducers shall be enclosed and mounted in sheet steel cubicles. The location of these cubicles will be subject to the site survey but there is a preference for a

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 149 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

centralised arrangement. Transducers shall provide continuous dc analogue output signals from continuous ac analogue inputs. Transducers shall include all necessary circuits for signal amplification and for scaling. Transducers for MW and MVAr measurements shall correctly compound the voltage and current inputs to provide bi-directional output related to active and reactive power flow. Transducers for MW and MVAr measurement shall be suitable for three phase unbalanced load. Power system measurement transducers shall provide galvanic separation between the primary current, voltage transformers and the Outstations. Measurement transducers and interposing transformers connected to any main instrument transformer of one main circuit shall be kept fully segregated from those associated with any other main circuit. Test terminal blocks shall be provided with all transducers to permit injection testing of individual transducers, without interference to the continuous operation of other apparatus connected to the same current and voltage transformers. Isolation links shall be provided for current transformer circuits which automatically short circuit the current transformer output. 4.5.2 Overloads

Each current input shall be capable of carrying 200 per cent rated current continuously and withstanding ten times the rated current for 5 seconds. Each voltage input shall be capable of carrying 120 per cent rated voltage continuously and withstanding twice the rated voltage for 10 seconds. The output shall be limited so as not to exceed 1.6 times nominal full range output current. The open circuit output voltage shall not exceed 25 volts dc. Transducers shall be protected against overcurrent and overvoltage. 4.5.3 Burden

The burden imposed on the primary current transformer, at full rated input shall not exceed 1 VA per transducer. The burden imposed on the primary voltage transformers at full rated input shall not exceed 3 VA per transducer. Preference shall be given to transducers which offer burdens significantly lower than the values specified in this document. 4.5.4 Output

The output shall be linear in respect to the measured value with a range of 4 to 20 mA. Transducers shall be designed to operate into any load impedance between 20 and 1000 ohms, maintaining measuring accuracy to IEC 688 (Class 1.0). 4.5.5 Response time

The response to achieve a final steady value for any step change of 90 per cent of input range shall not exceed 1 second. 4.5.6 Power supply

Preference will be given to transducers which derive auxiliary power from the measured voltage input. An auxiliary dc supply will be available from the Outstation dc power supply system. Attention is drawn to the fluctuating nature of the dc voltage. Variations of between +20 and -15 per cent of nominal voltage shall not cause any detectable inaccuracies. 4.6 4.6.1 RELAYS General

Electrical equipment, materials and components shall comply with the requirements of IEC 150, IEC 439 and IEC 445 in so far as they are applicable to equipment of this type. All relays shall be hermetically sealed with transparent covers. All dc operated relays are to be equipped with flywheel diodes.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 150 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

3 Status indication repeat relays The status repeat relays shall each be provided with a minimum of three sets of contacts. (d) Generally comply with the foregoing requirements for Outstations Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. each set arranged to close while the relay coil is energised. all control interposing relay coils and contacts shall be continuously rated. One contact per pole is the nominal requirement but series or parallel arrangements of contacts for each pole will be considered. without failure. The relays shall have a high degree of reliability. Where such devices exist or are to be installed under other projects the Contractor will be provided with the operating schedules following contract commencement. shall be acceptable subject to the approval of the Employer. etc by means of light current signals from the Outstations.7 SAS GATEWAYS The SCADA system shall be capable of communication with SAS Gateways that operate with IEC 80670-5-101/104 protocols. 4.6.6. Where plug-in type relays are approved each relay type shall have a unique plug to socket colour.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Plug in types complete with socket bases and retaining clips. suitable for the loads to be switched.Section 6 . Where SAS systems are provided under this contract the following features shall be provided: (a) A full graphic HMI from which local control and monitoring can be carried out (b) Capable of supporting communication with more than one Control Centre using protocols as stated above (c) High reliability with duplicated LAN for acquisition and control within the substation. Interposing relays shall be capable of performing at least 25 000 operations at the rated duty. 4. Contacts shall be designed to conduct load currents of less than 5 mA and also be suitable for infrequent operation.2 Control interposing relays The control interposing relays shall provide a means of operating the electrical control circuits of switchgear (circuit breakers and disconnectors).151 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The relays shall provide double pole switching. 4. The control signal will be in the form of a pulse of short duration but to ensure high reliability. The rating of repeat relay coils shall not exceed 2 Watts. The Bidder shall clearly state the lowest operating current for the proposed relays. transformer tap changers.

the d. 2 x 100% chargers and 2 x 50% batteries. These shall be located conveniently for the connection of the power supply equipment. the SCADA Master Station. The Control Centre location shall be equipped with battery backed 415/230Vac Uninterruptible Power Supplies and diesel generator capable of supplying the complete building load.1. 5. Communication equipment located in substations. The UPS system shall have the following features: a. Simple operation and fault diagnosis When required by the Employer. A static voltage stabiliser shall be provided in the mains by-pass circuit to maintain ±2% static voltage tolerance when the by-pass is in use.1 General The UPS shall be rated to supply the complete Master Station system. it shall be possible to isolate inverters and static switches from the load by means of a manually operated make-before-break switch. For ease of maintenance. In this case the batteries shall be located in a battery room and connected to the rectifier/inverter units located in an adjacent room via fuse switches located in the battery room. generating stations and other locations where equipment may be installed as part of the overall communication system. High operational security and reliability b. POWER SUPPLIES 5.2. 5. c.g.1 GENERAL Secure power supplies are required at all locations where equipment is supplied under this contract. The Outstations and associated telemetry equipment in substations and generating stations. Integrated monitoring facilities c.1 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES Functional Requirements 5. The Bidder shall advise of any locations outside of the Control Centre or Substations (e.2. Components shall be capable of withstanding the thermal and dynamic stresses resulting from internal and external short circuits and circuit switching operations. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2 UPS Configuration The UPS configuration shall be ―parallel redundant hot standby‖ with 2 x 100% inverters.2. including those to the battery. b. The power supplies are required for: a. Similar parts shall be interchangeable. and Communication equipment.2 5. The manufacturer shall specify the size of conductor required for the battery cables. selected lighting circuits in the Control Room to allow for continued work and sufficient air conditioning to allow for the temperature and humidity in equipment room(s) to be maintained within operating limits. repeater sites or other buildings) where power supplies will be required. telecommunication equipment not supplied by the 48Vdc system.152 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . etc. The Contractor shall provide the cables interconnecting the UPS unit with external equipment.1. Damage arising from component failure should be confined to the component concerned. The NSCC – Control Room equipment. The manufacturer shall provide a suitable fused load-switch or moulded-case circuit breaker with the UPS unit to facilitate on-load isolation of the battery for the purpose of performing battery maintenance. The Employer shall provide primary supplies at each location. The Substations and other sites shall be equipped with 48Vdc battery backed power supplies.Section 6 . Contractor shall demonstrate this ability e. The functional requirements for these power supplies are detailed in the following sections.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 5.

The automatic retransfer of the load to the inverter shall be inhibited following a number of automatic transfers of the load to the bypass. via the inverters.2. Under synchronous operating conditions. for not less than 3 hours based on the full load plus the 50% spare capacity. 5. the load shall be transferred to the bypass supply through the static switch.2. The rectifier shall re-start automatically upon restoration of the mains power supply following a main supply interruption.1 Normal The output of the rectifier shall continuously supply the power requirements of the load. the batteries shall supply the power requirements of the load.3.2. The two inverters shall be operating in parallel and sharing the load equally. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. without the battery connected. while simultaneously maintaining the battery charge in the float charge mode. via the inverter.2.3 Overload When a disturbance/fault occurs in any of the inverters the faulty unit shall be automatically disconnected and the entire load supplied from the remaining inverter. 5. current limiting output type designed for float charge operation. The output voltage of the inverter shall also be controlled to maintain synchronism and phase with the mains bypass supply voltage.Section 6 . 5.2. provided the latter is within the tolerances specified for the load transfer conditions.3 Performance 5. The switching device shall be installed adjacent to the battery.1 Rectifier The rectifier shall be of constant voltage.2.153 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 5.2. the static switch shall initiate uninterrupted transfer of the load to the mains bypass supply in the event of deviation in the output quantities of the UPS unit resulting from a UPS component failure (including inverter static switch element. If both inverters develop a fault.4 Static Bypass Facilities shall be provided to enable manual initiation of uninterrupted transfer of the load from the inverter to the mains bypass.2. to a capacity that will enable it to again fulfil the discharge performance requirements. The UPS shall automatically resume synchronous operation with the mains bypass supply when the voltage and frequency of the latter are within the specified tolerances. The rectifier shall incorporate a ―soft-start‖ feature to gradually accept load on initial energising. In the event of automatic transfer of the load to the bypass circuit and subsequent restoration of the inverter output quantities to within the permissible tolerances. the UPS shall automatically resume synchronous operation with the mains bypass supply and shall initiate uninterrupted retransfer of the load to the UPS inverter.2 Main Supply Failure In the event of an interruption or depression in the AC main supply voltage to the rectifiers. while simultaneously recharging the battery. via the inverter. The UPS shall be capable of energising the load within the permissible tolerances and of achieving the uninterrupted load transfer requirements via the static switch.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Moulded-case circuit breakers shall be category P-2.2. external overload/short circuit condition or switching-off of the inverter. if these take place within the specified period. 5. The rate of recharging the battery shall be such as to restore it. Upon restoration of the AC mains voltage. in accordance with IEC 947-2. if applicable).2. If the mains bypass supply voltage exceeds these tolerances. if applicable. and from the mains bypass to the inverter. the rectifier shall supply the power requirements of the load.2. 5.2 Modes of Operation The operation of the UPS shall comply with the following basic operating principles. or outside the battery room. within the specified time. Normally both inverters shall be synchronised with each other and with the main supply. The output of the inverter shall be maintained within the voltage and frequency tolerances of the load at all times. then the UPS shall revert to unsynchronised operation at its own internally set frequency.

without overloading. shall not result in a trip of the rectifier or the initiation of battery discharge. whilst simultaneously supplying the full load plus 30 percent spare capacity. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. It shall be capable of being connected to the fully discharged batteries. when operating under constant currentlimiting conditions. The DC output current of the rectifier. iv. Facilities shall be provided to initiate battery rapid-charge operation by manual and automatic means. Ripple in the rectifier output voltage shall not exceed 2 percent of nominal voltage for all values of load within charger rating. The rectifier steady-state DC output voltage variations shall be controlled to within plus one percent and minus one percent of the set value (corresponding to the battery float-charge voltage) during load variations between zero and the rated output of the rectifier. Battery float-charge operation i. Battery rapid-charge operation shall be automatically controlled according to a constant current/constant voltage characteristic.154 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . and recharge them to their full capacity within a period of eight hours. Automatic initiation of battery rapid-charge operation shall occur following any period of battery discharge exceeding ten seconds. Switched diodes or supplementary battery cells as a means of limiting DC voltage variations are not acceptable:    System frequency between ±10 percent Output between 5 and 100 percent of rated output Output power shall be controlled via a full wave half controlled thyristor/diode bridge with free wheeling current facility.  The rectifiers shall be capable of limiting the output current to 110 percent of rectifier rating and be capable of operating continuously at that current. The range of adjustment shall include allowance which may be necessary to compensate for the ageing of the rectifiers. iii. shall be controlled to within plus two percent and minus two percent of the set value. The output current shall be smoothed by means of series reactance or equal. Each rectifier shall be capable of fully charging the two batteries upon initial installation. iii.Section 6 . which may be the result of motor starting activities. Battery rapid-charge operation i. ii. ii. Short-time mains supply voltage depressions of not more than 20 percent. Each charger shall be sized to supply full load plus boost charging the two batteries simultaneously. and during steady-state input voltage and frequency variations referred to above. On-line adjustment of the set value of float-charge voltage shall be possible by means of a potentiometer on the relevant control circuit card.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The DC output of the rectifier unit shall remain within the limits of ±2 percent under any of the following conditions.

The inverter shall be capable of the necessary output to satisfy capacity of the computer system and the essential services load.Section 6 . The inverter shall be capable of delivering sufficient short circuit current to cause the output fuses rated nearest to 10 percent of the UPS rated output current to interrupt the short circuit current within 3 ms when the UPS is not synchronised to the bypass power supply. The dynamic output voltage variations shall not exceed plus 10 percent and minus 10 percent of rated output voltage in the event of instantaneous load change of 100 percent rated output. The output voltage static regulation shall be maintained within plus one percent and minus one percent of rated output voltage. This Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. adjustment shall be possible ―on-line‖. designed to maintain a single phase.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification iv.3. for the specified input power supply conditions. At the end of the rated discharge period the voltage available at the output terminals of the UPS shall not be less than the minimum operating voltage of any load normally connected to the UPS including the spare capacity.8 lagging continuously when operated from the battery and charger system and alternatively from battery only. at the worst environmental conditions obtainable. float charging system and be capable of providing the guaranteed output throughout the range of ambient conditions specified. When rated load is suddenly applied or removed. The output voltage shall be restored to within the steady state limits within 0. The power supplies system will operate with battery terminals free of earth. 5. The waveform shall be such that there is no measurable difference between positive and negative half cycles. without the need for supplementary charging to restore the battery to its fully charged condition. A facility shall be provided for adjusting the synchronising frequency from one percent to two percent. 50 Hz supply at the appropriate voltage.2. The equipment shall be capable of providing an output voltage which has a waveform approximating to a sinusoidal shape under all steady load conditions from zero to rated load. A suitable earth fault detection scheme shall be provided. The float voltage of the batteries shall be the optimum required to ensure the maximum possible period between topping up with electrolyte.1 s. During variations greater than ±2 percent in the power supply frequency the inverter shall revert to internal frequency control. The total rms harmonic content of the output waveform shall not exceed five percent of the fundamental value and shall not contain harmonics higher than the 15th.3 Inverter Static inverters shall be of an approved type. The battery discharge capacity shall be such that with the charger disconnected. in accordance with IEC 269.1 seconds. the UPS shall be maintained in continuous operation at full load (including spare capacity) within its stated voltage limits for a period of three hours.7 lagging to unity. It shall be possible to vary the output voltage within ±5% of the specified output voltage. The main output circuit fuse links shall be of the slow-acting type g1.155 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . v. from no-load to full-load. the momentary voltage change shall not cause damage to any connected equipment and shall be capable of restoring it to nominal value in a period not exceeding 0.2. The output voltage shall be regulated to ±1 percent of rated output voltage with load power factor over the range 0. The inverter shall maintain output frequency such that synchronism with the bypass voltage is maintained. plus 50 percent at a power factor of 0. A suitable filter shall be included in the dc input circuit of all inverters to prevent noise from the inverter being fed into the dc supply system. The equipment shall be so designed and constructed that it is capable of operating reliably for long periods of time with minimum maintenance.3.2 Battery and DC Circuit The batteries shall operate in conjunction with a constant voltage. 5.

c. over voltages and any main or control circuit malfunctions. or The inverter output current limit is exceeded. or The inverter output voltage exceeds 105% of the nominal output voltage. The principle indications and alarms shall be: a.2. 5. f. 5.2. and to safeguard the unit and its components from the consequences of internal and external short circuits. howsoever caused. at any position.  Subject to fulfilling the above criteria. If tonal components are present.Section 6 .2. retransfer of the load from mains bypass to the inverter shall be initiated automatically following automatic transfer of the load from the inverter to the mains bypass. It shall be capable of conducting a current of ten times the rated output for not less than two seconds. and The inverter output and mains bypass voltage are synchronised Automatic transfer of the load shall be initiated when: The inverter output voltage drops below 95% of the nominal output voltage. Retransfer of the load from the mains bypass to the inverter Load retransfer shall only be possible when: The inverter output voltage is within ±10% of the nominal output voltage for more than 5 seconds. the noise limit shall be 5 dB(A) less.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The UPS shall be suitable for both floating output or with one leg of the AC output earthed. i.4 Controls and Instrumentation The UPS unit shall incorporate all the necessary equipment to enable operation. and The inverter output and mains bypass voltages are synchronised.5 Noise limits The sound pressure level measured at one metre distance from the UPS unit. protection and control of the UPS in accordance with this specification.3. shall not exceed 75 dB(A) at any load between zero and the rated output of the unit.4 Static by-pass switch The by-pass circuit shall have a continuous current rating equivalent to the rated output of the UPS unit. Facilities shall be provided to manually and automatically initiate transfer of the load from the inverter to the by-pass circuit and from the by-pass to the inverter. 70 dB(A). Inverter output voltage and current Battery voltage Rectifier alarms Inverter alarms Load alarms Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The criteria for load transfer shall be as follows:  Transfer of the load from the inverter to the mains by-pass load transfer shall only be possible when:  The mains bypass voltage is within ±15% of rated UPS output voltage.156 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 5. The automatic retransfer of the load to the inverter shall be inhibited following four automatic transfers of the load to the bypass. d. and The mains bypass frequency is within the tolerances specified. Transfer should be accomplished before the voltage reaches 85% of the nominal value. The UPS shall have a local control panel to show the status of the key parameters and mode of operation of the system.e.3. The combined detection and switching time required to transfer load from the inverter to the by-pass circuit shall not exceed 0.5 ms. Transfer should be accomplished before the voltage reaches 115% of the nominal value. e. if these take place within an interval of 5 minutes. Mains input voltage and current b.

free-standing support racks for batteries having plastic cell containers may be steel or solid wood. Nickel-cadmium battery cells shall be of the pocket plate. Contactors shall comply with IEC 158-1 and be rated for uninterrupted duty and intermittent duty of at least class 0.2. Nickel cadmium batteries having steel cell containers shall be supplied in wood crates.1 Electronic Equipment Enclosures Each unit consisting of a rectifier. unenclosed. The insulation level between transformer primary and secondary windings shall be capable of withstanding a test voltage of 2000 volts rms AC applied for one minute. Sealed. They shall be capable of withstanding the ‗let through‘ energy of the fuse controlling the AC supply to the transformer. Battery cell cover shall be sealed against creepage of electrolyte and shall be fitted with spray proof vent plugs. components.5.2.3 Battery cells and containers The battery cells shall be of the nickel-cadmium type and shall comply with and selected in accordance with IEC 623 and IEEE Std 1184. but where an earthed screen is inserted between the windings this may be reduced to a level of 1500 volts.2 Converter components Main circuit switches (mechanical) shall comply with IEC 947-3 and be of the independent manually operated air-break type for continuous duty. Separate. rated in accordance with the requirements of the Data Sheets and comply with IEC 742 as appropriate. comply with all the requirement details in the General Technical Specification. Steel racks shall have a plastic or epoxy coating to provide suitable protection against the effects of electrolyte spillage.1.5 Construction Requirements 5. All wood should be treated to render it non-hygroscopic and acid resistant.1. Battery enclosures shall be naturally ventilated to disperse gaseous products.157 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Remote indication of the ―general alarm‖ status of the UPS system shall be made available. The utilisation category for DC contactors shall be not less than DC-4 and for AC contactors not less than AC-3. Rectifier stacks shall comply with the requirements of IEC 119 and IEC 146 as appropriate.5. free-standing support racks in a separate room. They shall comply with utilisation category AC23 and DC23 for AC and DC switches respectively. The battery shall be positioned such that possible leakage of electrolyte or emission of gaseous products shall not cause damage to other equipment. Support racks for the latter shall be solid wood. or adjacent cells.Section 6 . 5.2.2. self-supporting steel cabinet forming an enclosure.1 Enclosures 5. recombination battery cells shall be of the flat plate construction incorporating electrolyte absorbed in the plate separators. 5. Each enclosure shall comply with the relevant requirements of the General Technical Requirements.2. Wiring and terminations shall. in general. A summary alarm shall be wired directly into the Control Room from the UPS indication panel and the individual signals shall be input to the Local RTU. Terminal pillar seals shall be of a design that prevents the initiation of pillar corrosion.5. Taping together of cells will not be accepted. The lowest rack for accommodating battery cells shall be a minimum of 30 cm above ground level. sintered plate or fibre plate types. Transformers and reactors shall be of the air-cooled type and comply with the relevant parts of IEC 146. 5. 5.5. Rectifier transformers shall be of the air-cooled type.2 Battery Enclosures The battery may be installed in a separate cabinet adjoining that of the rectifier/inverter or on separate. inverter and static switch shall be housed separately in one or more free-standing.5.1.2. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

filling or plugging of defective parts will be permitted without the approval in writing of the Engineer. bolts. 110% of distilled water. subject to the material being non-flame propagating and mechanically shock resistant. shall be supplied in separate containers. their short circuit rating being adequate to protect each circuit against the effects of a fault at the outgoing terminal of the unit. The diesel generator shall be wholly suitable for supplying UPS. A daily service fuel tank shall be provided and this shall have sufficient capacity to supply fuel for 8 hours continuous running of the generator at full load. Inter-cell connectors and terminals shall be insulated or otherwise provided with protective covering to prevent inadvertent short circuiting. Plastic containers of vented. No welding.158 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . All material used shall be of the best quality and of the class most suitable for working under the conditions specified and shall withstand the variations of temperature and atmospheric conditions arising under working conditions without distortion. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. if parallel operation of battery cells is thereby avoided. 50 Hz. plus 50% spare capacity. required for the batteries. small power and lighting. Cell terminal posts. A bulk fuel tank of sufficient capacity to store fuel for 7 days continuous running of the generator at full load shall be supplied and installed within the complex.3 5. inter-cell connections shall be of low resistance. The Contractor shall provide and install cables from the generator to the main switchboards in the new control centre building. Each outgoing circuit from the distribution board shall be controlled and protected by fuses and links or miniature circuit breakers.Section 6 . and also without affecting the strength and suitability of the various parts for the work which they have to perform. The Generator may be a packaged unit or housed in a purpose built structure which is separate from the new control room building.3. Vented.3. Batteries shall be supplied filled with dry electrolyte.1 DIESEL GENERATOR General Requirements A standby diesel generator and all its associated ancillary systems shall be supplied. 4-wire). In any case the location shall be above potential flood water levels. Batteries shall be supplied complete with all necessary interconnecting links.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Cell containers of plastic material. flooded cells shall be fitted with flame arresting vent plugs. Electrolyte level lines shall be marked on the front side of each container.2. bolts and associated hardware shall be of electrolyte-resisting material. in a clean condition when bolted and protected against corrosion. The Generator shall be located within the Control Centre site boundary in suitable accommodation which is also to be provided by the Contractor. 5. 5. The Contractor shall provide suitable foundations and a bund wall as part of the civil works to be provided under the Contract.4 Distribution Board The UPS shall be equipped with a distribution board that permits segregation of duplicated devices. are preferred. Steel cell containers are preferred in applications requiring large capacity batteries. 5. at 415/240 volts (3-phase. rectifier and computer loads. installed and commissioned by the Contractor. including HVAC.5. insulation terminal covers etc. or deterioration or the setting up of undue stresses in any part. The generator shall be rated for continuous output and capable of supplying the total load of the new control centre building (including the UPS and battery charging demand concurrent with supplying the load) and all electrical loads to be supplied under the Contract. The number of spare ways for future loads shall be at least 25 percent of the number required for the master station equipment. flooded cells shall permit the electrolyte level to be viewed through the container material.2 Design Requirements The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of all those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the Contract Works and of associated works supplied under other Contracts.

Gasket material shall be of the minimum thickness necessary and of approved composition. punching. Bolts and studs for electrical connections shall preferably be of brass M6 size. Lock washers shall not be used above M24 size except when a spring type is specially approved. Galvanising shall be applied by the hot dip process. cutting. Cast iron shall not be used for chambers of oil-filled apparatus or for any part of the equipment which is in tension or subject to impact stresses except where it can be shown that service experience has been satisfactory with the grade of cast iron and the duty proposed. brass or gunmetal to prevent sticking due to rust or corrosion. No bolt or stud shall project through its nut by more than approximately 10mm or four threads whichever is the less. nuts and washers on outdoor equipment shall be of non-corroding material where they are in contact with non-ferrous parts in conductor clamps and fittings and elsewhere if specially required. unless finished with an oil resisting varnish. fitted with locking devices of approved type and material. All connections and contacts shall be of ample section and surface for carrying continuously the specified currents without undue heating. a detailed explanation of the de-rating shall accompany the Bid. Joints employing a gasket material shall be so constructed that the packing is maintained under sufficient compression in all parts. mechanisms and moving parts. The preparation for galvanising and the galvanising process shall not adversely affect the mechanical properties of the material being coated. except for terminals and relay stems. The underside of all tanks shall be ventilated in an approved manner to prevent corrosion. connections and cabling shall be designed and arranged to minimise the risk of fire and any damage which might be caused in the event of fire.3. size M5 may be used. All apparatus. shall also be stated and the rating of the set will be based on the lower of the two. All apparatus shall operate without undue vibration and with the least practicable amount of noise. when necessary. A sound attenuation to 55 dB(A) (or lower) at 10 metres from the set shall be achieved. be constructed of stainless steel. When requested by the Employer.159 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Nuts and pins shall be locked in position with lock nuts or lock washers. the Contractor shall demonstrate this capability. irrespective of engine rating.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Corresponding parts liable to renewal shall be interchangeable. All taper pins used in any mechanisms shall be of the split type. so that an efficient joint can be made without the use of jointing compound. Suitable special spanners shall be provided for bolts and nuts which are not properly accessible by means of an ordinary spanner. The continuous site rating shall be based on the specified site operating conditions. Accessible means shall be provided for the easy lubrication of all bearings. The set shall operate at a maximum speed of 1500 rev/min. bending and removal of burrs shall be completed before galvanising.Section 6 . Surfaces in contact with oil shall neither be galvanised nor cadmium plated. or other devices if approved. Alternatively. All mechanisms shall. Pre-site drilling. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The average thickness of the zinc coating shall be equivalent to not less than 0. All rubbing or wearing surfaces shall be machine surfaced. Bolts. The site rating of the generator. 5. phosphor bronze or high tensile brass. and shall be secured by bolts or set screw of ample size.6 kg/m2 of zinc for all surfaces. but these must be of stainless steel. If the continuous site rating is less than the stated catalogue rating.3 Type of Diesel Engine and Operating Conditions The engine may be naturally aspirated or turbocharged and charge air-cooled and shall be capable of giving continuously at site not less than the specified output and an overload of 10% in excess of this output for one hour in any period of 12 hours of consecutive running.

access ladder. 5. For emergency use.3.Section 6 .3. delivery.160 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . It shall be of sufficient capacity to enable the service tank to be fitted in not more than 4 hours. vent and drain pipes. The pipe layout shall be such that it does not pass close to hot surfaces. fill pipe and cap. Level switches shall be provided for the following services: (a) Low level alarm (b) (c) (d) 5.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Attention is drawn to the requirement that the engine may stand for a considerable period yet must be immediately available for full load and any special lubrication or heating arrangements necessary to meet this condition shall be provided. A suitable strainer shall be supplied and fitted at the transfer pump suction line. The pump shall have on the suction side a course strainer and on the delivery side a duplex 'full flow' fine filter complete with Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 5.10 Engine Lubrication Lubrication of the engine shall be by means of an engine driven integral pump. a semi-rotary hand pump shall be supplied and connected in parallel with the motor driven pump. a fuel boost pump shall be provided between the service tank and the engine.3. The pump shall be directly driven by the engine. including the associated earthing arrangements. There shall be an indication. inspection manhole.3.3. level indication and access for inspection and maintenance. The fuel oil storage and delivery system. The pump motor starter control panel shall contain a selector so that the pump may be either started and stopped by hand or automatically on receipt of signals from the level switches in the service tank.5 Bulk Fuel Storage The bulk fuel oil tank shall be of horizontal cylindrical type.8 Fuel boost Pump If required by the engine manufacturer. of tank level together with an alarm from a separate initiating device for tank full.9 Fuel Oil Piping The Contractor shall provide and install all required piping to carry the fuel from the bulk storage to the service tank and the engine.3. level indicator. 5.4 Fuel The engine shall be supplied with and operate on diesel fuel. and in no circumstances shall it be permitted to pass over exhaust pipes. The tank shall be provided with all necessary fittings including fill. vent. drain and overflow lines.3. The capacity of the pump shall be such that the service tank can be completely filled in not more than 2 hours. overflow. at the filling point.7 High level alarm Low level start of transfer pump High level stop of transfer pump Fuel transfer Pump An electric motor-driven transfer pump shall be provided to enable the service tank to be filled from the bulk storage tank. 5. 5. All necessary valves and fittings shall be provided including sufficient isolating valves to enable items in the system to be serviced without draining down the whole system. fabricated from steel plate and supplied complete with mounting saddles. 5. shall be designed too minimise the risk of fire and explosion.6 Daily Service Tank The daily service tank shall be totally enclosed and of welded steel construction with suitable supports and shall be installed in a position where any fuel leakage cannot impinge on exhaust pipes or other hot engine surfaces.

the Contractor shall propose an alternative to item (c). the Contractor shall submit his calculations to the Engineer for examination. Micro switches shall not be used in any direct current circuit nor in any inductive circuit. The engine shall also be capable of being started by "push Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The device shall be fitted with one normally open and one normally closed contact which will trip and lock-out the generator circuit-breaker in the event of the automatic device operating. The overspeed condition shall operate both an alarm indicator and the emergency shut-down relay simultaneously. the bedplate shall be stress relieved before machining.15 Starting System Electric starting equipment shall be provided and so designed that the engine will start automatically on failure of the normal electricity supply. If a flange mounted generator is not employed. Visual indication of the cause of an alarm signal or shut-down shall be given on the local control panel.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification changeover cock incorporating pressure by-passes to facilitate oil flow to the engine should the filter become blocked.Section 6 . 5.12 Crankshaft The design shall avoid undesirable torsional oscillation at or near the designed running speed and.13 Governor The governor shall preferably be of the hydraulic type and shall be equipped with an adjustable droop mechanism. 5.3. fuel and water piping to avoid fracture due to vibration and to minimise conduction of noise.161 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The engine shall be fitted with a mechanically operated device which will shut off the fuel supply to the engine when any of the specified alarm conditions occur.11 Set Mountings To achieve simplicity in foundation work. An inhibit system to cater for normal shut-down and initial start-up shall be provided. the first operating an alarm indicator and the second operating the emergency shut-down relay. and all set-mounted ancillary apparatus. In the case of air cooled engines. Item (a) may be omitted if lubricating oil cooling is carried out by the jacket water. 5. the set shall preferably be mounted on a welded steel common bedplate. Flexible connections shall be provided to the exhaust. With the exception of the overspeed condition.3.14 Engine Protection The following protection devices shall be provided with the engine and the Contractor shall provide and install all the necessary alarm initiating devices: (a) High Lubricating Oil Temperature (b) (c) (d) Low Lubricating Oil Pressure High Engine Jacket Cooling Water Temperature Engine Overspeed. The alarm initiating devices shall be of high quality and of robust construction to withstand operation in high temperature and vibration conditions entailed with the diesel engine. the protection shall be in two stages. It shall control the speed within the limits specified and be capable of adjusting the engine speed to a minimum of 5% above and below the rated speed. The Contractor shall supply all lubricants necessary to commission the generator and it shall be fully lubricated at Handover. 5. air. The Contractor shall ensure that the lubricating oil system capacity shall be sufficient to enable the engine to run continuously for 12 hours at any load without replenishment.3. if required. Suitable anti-vibration mountings shall be supplied for the diesel generator unit.3.3. 5.

5. free standing cubicle shall be provided as the engine/generator control panel. It shall be protected against accidental. At the failure of the second attempt the starter circuit shall be locked out pending manual resetting. A suitable battery isolating switch.19 Air Filters Air filters shall be suitable for use in the environmental conditions which are likely to arise occasionally. welded on. 5. Each silencer shall be supplied complete with a drain off point. Without power supply to the charger.18 Silencers The engine shall be efficiently silenced with primary and terminal silencers complete with interconnecting exhaust pipe and fittings. A centrifugal pump shall be supplied to circulate the coolant.16 Cooling System The engine shall be provided with a two or three section oil and water tropical radiator capable of dissipating the heat from the jacket water. Due allowance for expansion of the exhaust system shall be made by the inclusion of expansion bellows if necessary. within 30 minutes. The necessary cowling shall be supplied and installed by the diesel plant manufacturer. The insulation shall be 75mm thick preformed rigid insulation wired on and then covered with hammered aluminium sheet. in order to prevent danger to personnel. front access.17 Safety Guards All moving parts shall be adequately guarded. The charger shall be mounted remote from the engine and shall include a battery charge fail alarm.Section 6 . Supports for the complete system shall be of the anti-vibration type and shall be so arranged that no weight is carried by the engine set. shall be provided on the engine to prevent starting while the engine is under maintenance. The battery charger will be supplied from the mains and an engine driven dynamo is not required. 5. All indicators. The silencers and exhaust pipes shall be provided with 25mm stools. The battery shall be adequately rated for any standing load and its specified starting duty. 5. The complete system including brackets shall be supplied galvanised and shall be insulated within the building. Upon restoring power supply to the charger immediately thereafter.3. the charger shall be capable of restoring the battery. The equipment shall include an adequately rated lead/acid starter battery and battery charger which generally comply with the requirements of IEC 60623 except that discharge time indication is not required. mechanical or electrical damage. the battery shall be capable of providing no fewer than four starting cycles within a period of 5 minutes. lubricating oil and charge air (if appropriate). to the satisfaction of the Engineer.3.3. The radiator may be mounted on or remote from the engine. control switches.3. The radiator must be generously sized to permit operation at full load and overload in the specified ambient conditions. alarm and control equipment shall be contained within the Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 5. each starting period and the period between such consecutive attempts being automatically time controlled by the equipment.162 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . to accept extruded mesh to provide a 25mm air gap between the hot surface and insulation to be applied. Electric starting equipment shall be provided and so designed that: (a) At engine speeds in excess of the minimum firing speed it shall be impossible to complete the starting circuit (b) Not more than two consecutive attempts to start may be made in any period of 1 minute. capable of being locked in both the open and closed positions.3.20 Engine/Generator Control Panel A rigid. Provision shall also be made for local manual starting of the set.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification button" from the local control panel specified. to a condition in which one more starting cycle can be completed. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing the fittings and wall plates necessary to carry the tail pipe through the generator room wall. instruments.

3 make the tripping circuit of the circuit-breaker stop the engine close a set of voltage free contacts to operate an alarm annunciator Engine/Generator Controls The following controls for the engine/generator set shall be provided in the control panel: (a) Automatic/manual selector switch for set starting (b) (c) Start pushbutton Stop pushbutton Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the audible alarm shall be inoperative.3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification cubicle and indicators. When the MANUAL/AUTO control selector switch is in the AUTO position. The alarms shall also be connected to the Auxiliary Plant Annunciator.163 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .20.g.2 Low lubricating oil pressure High lubricating oil temperature High jacket water/cooling air temperature (as appropriate) Engine on overload Overspeed Emergency shut-down Starter battery low-voltage Daily Service Tank high level Daily Service Tank low level Emergency Shut-down Relay A manually reset. A muting facility shall be provided for the audible device. accept. so arranged that upon the occurrence of the specified fault conditions. All alarm circuits shall derive their power supply from the starting battery. Alarms shall latch until accepted. the relay shall automatically: (a) break the closing circuit of the circuit-breaker (b) (c) (d) 5.3. reset and lamp test facilities.Section 6 .3. The following alarms shall be annunciated: (a) Failed to start (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) 5. Summary alarms shall be connected into the Master Station Computer System via the local RTU in order to generate System alarms. Alarms shall be inhibited from operating during transient conditions. The control panel shall incorporate the following equipment. 5.20. temporary overload and mains disturbances. instruments and control switches shall be visible from the front of the cubicle with the door closed.20.1 Alarms Annunciator A local alarm annunciator panel shall be provided equipped with audible and flashing visual annunciators. master shut-down relay shall be provided in the control panel. e.

5. salient pole. It shall have ball and roller bearings. and an efficient cooling system using a centrifugal fan.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (d) Emergency stop pushbutton (the emergency stop pushbutton only shall be operable without opening the control cubicle door) Speed adjustment Alternator voltage adjustment Stop/manual/auto selector switch for fuel transfer pump On/off switches for heaters in alternator stator and engine jacket (if required) Logic equipment for start sequence of set including lock-out after two attempts to start Automatic voltage regulator Engine/Generator Instrumentation (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) 5.22 Stator The stator core shall consist of high permeability. The critical speed shall exceed twice the overspeed test value. It shall be screen protected and drip proof with a large terminal box for outgoing connections. The generator shall be star connected. The generator shall be capable of maintaining continuous maximum rated output when operating within + 5% of rated voltage and at rated power factor. The machine shall have an ac exciter and liberally rated silicone diode assembly with a self contained excitation system with transistor automatic voltage regulator (AVR). tightly clamped and securely located within the machine casing.20.21 Generator The generator shall be a brushless.3.164 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . All windings shall be tropicalised and suitably impregnated to withstand the site ambient conditions. revolving field self regulating alternator of fabricated steel construction throughout. salient pole construction with heavy damper windings. 5.3. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. low loss steel stampings. a dynamically balanced rotating field.Section 6 .3.4 The following instrumentation for the engine/generator set shall be provided in the control panel: (a) Engine Speed (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) Lubricating oil pressure Lubricating oil temperature jacket water or cooling water temperature Engine hours run meter Generator frequency Generator voltage (with phase selector switch) Individual phase currents (3 instruments) Watt meter Kilowatt hour meter All transducers and connections necessary for the functioning of the above instrumentation shall be provided.

3. 5. preferably in one piece. A voltage setting device capable of adjusting the required voltage in steps of 1% between the limits of 95% and 105% of normal voltage at any load within the rating of the machine shall be mounted on the control panel. whichever is the greater. Where a separate exciter is provided.3. together with the generator neutral earthing connection shall be supplied and accommodated within a substantial dustproof sheet steel enclosure mounted at the generator neutral terminal position.26 Voltage Regulation Continuously active.25 Ventilation The generator and exciter shall incorporate shaft mounted fans of sufficient capacity to provide the machine cooling effect necessary to comply with the temperature requirements of the Specification when operating in the specified ambient conditions. Both ends of each stator winding shall be brought out to terminal positions on the stator casing. The field winding shall consist of electrolytic copper conductors insulated throughout with class 'F' materials. keyed and securely fixed to the rotor hub and fitted with interconnected damper windings to absorb the cyclic irregularity of the engine. 5. 5. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. required for any instruments and/or protection relays specified or for excitation circuit compounding or compensation. They shall be suitable for operation from the local single phase ac supply. resistors and any other auxiliary components necessary for the satisfactory operation of the plant. transient overspeeds in service and normal operation. Tubular low-temperature heaters of sufficient rating to maintain the windings in dry conditions during long periods of standstill shall be fitted in the stator casing and wired out to a terminal box on the bedplate.3.3. The ventilating circuit shall be designed to avoid hot-spots and to permit adequate cleaning by a portable centrifugal blower. They shall be fully insulated at all positions of support and shall be securely located against movement due to thermal and rotational cycling and the force arising during overspeed testing. quick acting automatic excitation control equipment responsive to the generator line to line voltage and loading conditions shall be provided to maintain the alternator voltage within the prescribed limits. All current transformers.Section 6 . Preference will be given to equipment based wholly or mainly on static state devices. When the generator maximum continuous load at rated power factor is rejected. The rotor poles shall be constructed of steel laminations. the exciter rotor shall be mounted on the extended main shaft at the free end of the generator. the phases and terminal box being arranged for 3-phase and neutral connection. 5. The minimum factor of safety of the rotating system shall be not less than 1. the regulator equipment shall be capable of limiting the generator momentary over-voltage to a value not exceeding 120% rated voltage and shall restore the voltage to within 2% of the nominal preset value within three seconds.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The windings shall consist of electrolytic copper conductors insulated throughout with Class 'B' materials. based upon the yield point of the part most highly stressed at the stated overspeed or during a stator 3-phase terminal short circuit at normal voltage.165 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The windings shall be effectively braced to withstand the maximum forces arising from any short circuit that may occur at the stator winding terminals. The equipment shall include all selector switches. packing or wedging. including their associated primary connections and secondary circuit terminal blocks. The characteristics of the exciter shall comply fully with the operational requirements of the alternator in matching the required loading conditions.5. indicating instruments. Any material that is liable to shrink in service shall not be used for bracing.24 Exciters The core and poles of the exciter shall be made of high permeability low loss steel stampings tightly clamped and secured to minimise magnetic noise. rectifiers.23 Rotor The rotor shaft and hub shall be of forged steel.

giving description and parts identification numbers. and all associated trenches or ducts required for the proper installation of the set.28 Alternative Generators The Bid shall be based on the requirements of the Specification.3. 5.29 Parallel Running It is not required to run the generator in parallel with any other generator set or in synchronism with the mains. Instruction Manuals (d) (e) 5. (b) (c) A general arrangement of the diesel engine. Spare parts necessary to keep the set in a state of operation for a period of 4 years or 12. shall be listed and priced as an option.30 Tools and Spare Parts A complete set of tools required to carry out all maintenance and normal overhaul work on the engine. 5.6. 5. 5.3.3. the voltage setting range being 105% to 125% in steps of 5%. or a detailed wiring diagram of the control cubicle. A general arrangement of the control cubicle showing cable entry and control wiring termination points. and phase rotation.3.27 Pulley Block A hand-operated lifting block and chain shall be provided for the set.31. The Bidder may additionally offer alternative arrangements to those specified in the foregoing clauses.Section 6 . The manuals shall contain: (a) Fully detailed instructions for operation.3.3. following the end of the Defects Liability Period. An electrical schematic diagram of the control cubicle. 5.31.166 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . maintenance and major overhaul of all parts of the complete plant supplied (b) A comprehensive spare parts list for the complete plant. polarity. A general arrangement of the alternator and exciter showing terminal markings.1 Drawings The Contractor shall provide the following drawings prior to delivery of the generating set: (a) A general arrangement of the complete generating set showing details of terminal points for cabling.31 Documentation Documentation for the generator set shall be provided as specified in Section 11 and shall include the following: 5. A separate price should be given for any alternative offers and full technical details must be included. generator and ancillary plant shall be included in the offer.2 Operating and maintenance instruction manuals and spare parts lists shall be supplied generally as specified in Section 11.000 hours.32 Inspection and Testing Inspection and testing of the engine/generator set shall be performed as provided for under Section 8. pipe work. wiring. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Over-voltage protection shall be provided. 5. the time setting range being adjustable within the range 1 second to 5 seconds in steps of 1 second. The principal dimensions and weights of the set and major components shall also be shown. capable of lifting the largest item that has to be removed from the plant for routine maintenance and overhaul.3.

the following features: a. There shall be no power interruption to the load during mains power failure or when the mains power is restored. At CEB HQ 10 hours autonomy. shall not exceed the equivalent of 2 mV at a frequency of 800 Hz after weighting as specified by ITU-T recommendations for any operational condition. The output of the battery and charger system shall be 48 volts (positive earth) and shall continuously supply the power requirements of the load. When the battery is connected to the charger.1. Voltage free contacts wired to cabling terminals shall also be provided to enable remote indication of each alarm. as a minimum.Section 6 .4 5.4.4. without interrupting supplies to the equipment. 5. The systems shall have. (c) Battery voltage low. for loads between 0 per cent and 100 per cent.4.167 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .1 per cent of the working voltage without battery. Simple operation and fault diagnosis.4. The boost charger shall be rated to restore the fully discharged battery to the fully charged condition within 12 hours.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 5.2 System Capacity and Performance The ampere capacity of the batteries shall be adequate when fully charged to maintain the stated load in normal operation within its stated voltage limits for a period of at least: a. (e) Battery earth fault.3 Alarm Indications The battery and charger systems shall be provided with efficient built-in self-monitoring and alarm facilities. Ripple voltage shall not exceed 0. At the NSCC the following signals shall be provided and wired up to the telecommunication network management system and SCADA system Local RTU: (a) AC supply fail.1. b. c. The rating of each charger shall be sufficient to carry the specified maximum load including the spare capacity. Alarm monitoring facilities. (g) Output dc MCB trip (Common for all MCBs). (b) Battery voltage high. 10 hours autonomy. High operational security and reliability.1. Alarm conditions shall be displayed locally.1 General The 48 Vdc battery and charger systems shall consist of 1 x 100% nickel cadmium (NiCad) storage batteries and 2 x 100% float/boost chargers and a distribution switchboard. (f) DC supply fail. 5. The batteries shall normally be kept charged by a dual battery charger unit. Variation shall not exceed 0. each charger comprising a float charger with manual boost charge facilities. the psophometric noise level at the output. whilst maintaining the battery in a fully charged condition. (d) Charger fail indication. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. At substation: b.5 V from 20 per cent to 100 per cent full load current. Automatic control of the output dc voltage is required. 10 hours autonomy. At Control Centre: c.1 48 V DC POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS Functional Requirements 5. An alarm shall be activated when a fault is detected.

The Contractor shall select the Ah capacity according to the actual equipment consumption. The positive and negative fuses shall be arranged in pairs and shall be fully segregated from each other by an insulating barrier. Under normal condition. Manual change-over of chargers shall also be possible.4. The voltage fluctuations caused by power consumption of various loads shall be kept within permitted limits. housed in totally enclosed translucent plastic or stainless steel containers. The final choice of battery installation method shall be agreed with the Employer. Cells shall be formed into a sub-assembly by mounting in groups. Nickel-cadmium batteries are required and shall be of the pocket plate. The positive and negative terminals of each complete battery shall be indicated by red and black markings respectively in an approved form.168 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 5. c. The batteries shall operate in floating service. A fuse box shall be provided for the battery. in robust containers. Each cell shall be identified by a number formed in a non-corrodible material and fixed to the cells to be visible when installed on the racks. 5. The battery unit shall be connected to the distribution board and battery charger by PVC insulated copper cables.2. In a battery room on heavy-duty epoxy coated metal racks suitably protected against corrosion and attack by the battery electrolyte.2 Battery Chargers The batteries shall normally be kept fully charged by a dual battery charger unit.2 Battery and Charger Equipment 5. The positive and negative terminals of each cell shall be clearly marked and permanently indicated.4. or semi sealed type. d. Inside a suitably designed battery cubicle. The fuses shall be of the high breaking capacity type in accordance with IEC 60269. The battery shall be spaced so as to permit easy access to all individual cells to allow replacement of cells and/or checking cell voltages and connections. Each cell shall be provided with a vent cap/electrolyte filler plug and a pressure operated gas release valve designed for intermittent operation. open. b. i.Section 6 .1 Batteries The batteries shall provide power supply for the telecommunication equipment demand and be designed to give at least 15 years life from the date of installation. Each cell container shall be equipped with an electrolyte level indicator and the electrolyte capacity shall be sufficient to ensure long intervals between topping-up. Sufficient alarm initiation outputs shall be provided to allow each alarm of the 48 Vdc power supply system to be displayed at up to three remote locations. b. Cells utilizing plastic containers shall be constructed so that the plates are rigidly held so as to avoid the possibility of distortion and short-circuiting of the plates. the healthy charger shall automatically take-over the full load current without supply interruption. Each battery charger shall be capable of simultaneously supply the full load and charging discharged batteries at the optimum rate. The use of a Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Stainless steel containers shall be insulated one from the other.e.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification In substations and generating stations a summary alarm shall be input to the respective Outstations.2. The standby time required to supply the entire dc power demand. The battery design shall be in accordance with IEC 623 and IEEE Std 1184. Taping together of cells will not be accepted. The batteries shall be housed in one of two ways: a. taking into consideration the following: a. The Contractor shall submit a calculation of battery capacity. The service voltage required shall not drop below recommended figures (permitted voltage tolerances of the individual loads). In the event of a failure of one of the battery chargers. The 50% spare capacity. they shall be continuously connected to load and to the charging rectifiers. each battery charger shall support half the load.4.

and to move the setting point within a range of 10%. If forced ventilation is unavoidable then 100 per cent redundant fans shall be provided. the rectifier shall automatically regulate the charging current and change over to the ‗Float charge mode‘. The output voltage shall be maintained constant and just sufficiently above the open circuit voltage of battery to keep the battery in a fully charged condition. The Contractor shall submit a calculation of rectifier load. the rectifier shall automatically select the ‗Boost charge‘ mode immediately on restoration of the ac supply. Internal cooling of the charger shall be by natural ventilation. The output dc voltage control range shall be adjustable and the range of voltage shall be stated in the Bid. Irrespective of the mode of operation the load voltage will be maintained to nominal level by the automatic introduction of suitable dropping diodes. 50 Hz three phase and a 240 Vac.169 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . When an ac supply failure occurs which lasts for more than five minutes. When selected to ‗Boost charge‘ mode. No break in voltage shall occur during such switchover. A mimic diagram shall be mounted on the front panel and shall clearly display the main circuit in relation to the various switching equipment. The operation of the rectifier shall be fully automatic. Should modular type of battery chargers are offered. full details shall be included in the Bid. In addition to ‗Boost‘ and ‗Float Charge‘ modes. Provisions shall be made to adjust the charging voltage for a fully charged battery with an accuracy of at least 1%. The battery charger shall be of the solid state static thyristor or switch-mode rectifier type suitable for dc power supply and charging of the associated storage battery. batteries. The mains supply voltages available to the chargers will be 415 Vac. switches. protective devices. etc. Double wound transformers shall be provided at the input side of rectifier to prevent galvanic connection between the dc and ac system. Current limitation shall be 100% of rated output current. indicating instruments. The charging rectifiers shall be of approved construction and shall be equipped with all necessary fuses. It shall be possible to select the charger to ‗Boost charge‘ mode. The charging rectifier shall normally operate in the float charge mode. and shall be suitable for automatic and manual control. lamps. Battery fuse shall be equipped with signalling contact. the charger shall also be equipped with manual equalizing mode for initial conditioning and periodical maintenance of batteries. All voltmeter instruments shall be connected via fuses to the busbars. enabling an easily visible detection of any blown fuse. feeders.3 Control and Instrumentation The battery and charger system shall have a local control panel to show the status of the key parameters and mode of operation of the system. The rectifiers shall be fed from the LVAC main switchgear. DC output voltmeter. Each rectifier shall be designed to carry 110% of rated output current for an indefinite time. The rectifiers shall be equipped with automatic current limiting devices to make them short-circuit proof. 50 Hz single phase. The rated output and current of rectifier shall correspond to the requirements of system load and battery charging. the battery condition shall be monitored and on achieving a fully charged condition. Each mode shall be signalled on the front of the rectifier cubicle. Rectifier ratings in all modes of operation shall be adequately adjustable to deliver the optimum charging rate recommended by the battery manufacturer while also supplying the normal steady state loads.2. Manual or automatic switchover from one mode to the other shall be possible. All fuses shall be equipped with a flag.Section 6 . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 5.4.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification modular type of chargers that have N+1 modules which capable of supplying the load such that the maximum load is divided upon N modules with one module acting as spare is also acceptable as an alternative solution to the traditional dual redundant battery charger configuration. etc. independent of load variations or variations of ac input voltage within the specified limits. The final location shall be agreed with the Employer. Each of the two rectifier cubicles shall contain at least the following indications/meters: a. The battery charger shall be installed in the telecommunication room.

Float mode. The main switchgear and distribution board shall be provided with a copper earth bus of the size not less 2 than 100 mm and in cases where two or more cubicles are installed adjacent to each other this earth bar shall be continuous.4 Construction The cubicles shall be completely self supporting. the busbars shall be completely insulated at the front. made of a required number of standardized. Sheet steel thickness shall not be less than 2 mm. Charger fail. The busbar shall be supervised by an under voltage relay to be set at 80% of rated voltage with time delay between 0-5 seconds. Switching of the outgoing feeders shall be effected by two pole.170 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The number of spare ways for future loads shall be at least 100 per cent of the number required for the specified loads. Cubicles and doors shall be structurally stiff and braced to withstand twisting without distortion.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification b. The cubicles shall be free standing. The Contractor shall submit a calculation of selectivity between all protective devices in a circuit for all 48 Vdc. The busbars shall be made of copper painted with suitable paint while all connection points shall be tinplated. The switchboard and charger cubicles shall be vermin and termite proof. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided on each circuit breaker for signalling circuits. The above-mentioned protective devices shall withstand the specified short currents. The short circuit rating shall be adequate to protect each circuit against the effects of a fault at the outgoing terminal of the unit. degree of protection IP51. 5.4. To ensure maximum safety to personnel. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Current limit. temperature compensated thermal overload and an adjustable magnetic instantaneous over current release for automatic tripping. dust-proof rigid unit. Adequate working clearance shall be maintained inside the cubicles. 13A. Under voltage. equipped with bottom frames suitable for bolting to the floor. feeders to the Employer for approval. manually operated miniature circuit breakers. sufficient creepage distance and shall be able to withstand all short-circuit conditions without damage. The busbars shall be supported by insulators having high mechanical and electrical strength. Time delayed releases shall be used wherever necessary in order to provide proper selectivity between circuit breakers of a circuit. The cubicle shall be designed for cable entry from the bottom rear and equipped with glands suitable for all incoming and outgoing cables.Section 6 . Charger on. secured with integral handles provided with locks and shall be flush fitting and sealed with a gasket made of rubber or other approved material to prevent the ingress of dust. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided on each circuit breaker for signalling circuits. A light suitably positioned to ensure even illumination of the entire panel shall be provided inside each cubicle as well as 1-phase.2. Over voltage. prefabricated.4. The board shall be composed of standard cubicle of approved construction. Boost mode. The distribution board shall be mounted in the telecommunication room.5 48V DC Distribution Board The 48 Vdc distribution boards shall supply power to telecommunications equipment. vertical sections bolted together to form indoor metal clad. Hinged doors shall be provided to provide easy access to equipment contained within the cubicle. socket-outlet of the same type as other outlets in the installation. Resetting shall also be provided.2. The miniature circuit breakers shall be equipped with an adjustable. LED indications for:        5. The hinged doors shall be of the lift-off type. Ammeters for charger current output &battery current.

The model shall be in sufficient detail to demonstrate.171 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The requirements for rooms are detailed in the following sections. Conceptual Design 2. ground works. During the initial design phase the Contractor shall provide a computer simulation of the building interior and exterior construction in sufficient detail to demonstrate the layout. The Contractor is required to carry out the design and construction of the new building. Provision of all necessary equipment. Three dimensional drawings of the Control Room interior shall be provided showing the perspective. Complete fitting out 8.1 INTRODUCTION A new building shall be provided at the designated location in Sri Jayewardenepura on the outskirts of Colombo. rooms and furniture. The Contractor shall also provide a physical model of the building and its interior to a scale of 1:100. The Bidder shall provide the conceptual design with his offer that presents the proposed design in sufficient detail to demonstrate the general appearance of the external and internal structure and finishes. Landscaping of site around building and reinstatement of surrounding boundary. HVAC. There should be provision within the control centre complex to accommodate all of the System Control Centre's operational and support staff. 6. access. and supervision to execute the works 6. The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete works including but not limited to: 1. etc). modification and maintenance of the SCADA/EMS system is performed A separate room for training and location of the Despatcher Training Simulator (e) (f) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. It shall also show access to the building for mains cables and communication cables via segregated and protected routes. materials. Satisfying all planning and building regulation requirements 4. Construction including piling.Section 6 . testing and Commissioning of all building services 9. Installation. colour schemes and layout of the furniture and equipment.2 ACCOMMODATION REQUIREMENTS The new NSCC building shall provide for the following accommodation: (a) Control room (b) (c) (d) Main equipment room for the NSCC Master Station and Communication equipment Office accommodation for Operational Support Staff Office accommodation for Commercial support (Future requirement for trading/energy purchase) A separate area/room in which management. Processing and obtaining all national and local construction permits and/or clearances 3. superstructure. access. CONTROL CENTRE BUILDING REQUIREMENTS 6. The results of the Soil Investigation and Land Survey will be provided to the bidders. Detailed Design 5.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 6. the layout of the control and equipment rooms including the service rooms (UPS. drainage 7. supplies. labour. and general appearance. ambience and appearance of the structure. layout.

Therefore. As the task of system control requires sustained vigilance and periods when high concentration is needed on the part of the operators. Operator Desks. Domestic facilities for the offices in general The services shall include: (a) Secure power supplies derived from different sources and a standby diesel generator and the associated distribution system (b) (c) Fire detection and fighting equipment. There shall also be a fitted kitchen and a rest/dining room suitable for 6 persons for operators to use while on break or meal times. 6. The UI principally comprises of SCADA/EMS workstations and communications facilities (telephone and radio based) scanning. Drawing Nos. 6. and other ancillary equipment. The Control Room shall be adequately sound proofed against noise from adjacent rooms. Lockers for up to 20 persons shall be provided. predominantly sitting in front of video monitors. and through restricting the general access of nonoperational staff or visitors to the control room. It is envisaged that all power system supervisory activities will be based in a single control centre that has been sized to accommodate the anticipated expansion in the number of operator positions and facilities for the next 10 to 15 years. It accommodates the operators. that environment shall be designed to eliminate as many sources of distraction as possible. The colours and design shall blend aesthetically with the Control Equipment (e. TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-001/002/003 and 004 illustrate layouts indicative of the required space for the respective functions and staffing. All the other control centre facilities referred to above are required to support the control room activities. The control room decor shall incorporate relaxing colour schemes that are light. Area/room for spare parts and equipment storage A reception area A visitors viewing area Documentation library Conference and meeting rooms Domestic facilities for the Control Room staff. the control room shall be segregated from the rest of the control centre both visually and acoustically.g. it is necessary to provide separate domestic facilities for them that are in close proximity and with ready access to the control room. the user interfaces (UI) they use to interact with the SCADA/EMS system. it is essential that aspects of control room design. The control room shall provide a work environment that assists the operators to effectively perform their duties. The duty operators must be readily available at all times in order to respond to any situation as it arises. printing and plotting facilities and a rear projection display wall.3 CONTROL ROOM The control room is the heart of the control centre. For this reason.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) Workshop and office facilities for communications and outstation maintenance groups.4 EQUIPMENT ROOM The Equipment Room is expected to house the following: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Access Control System The requirements for these are detailed in turn in the following sections. Such facilities shall include male and female toilets/washrooms and showers.Section 6 .172 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Workstation & Screens & the Rear Projection Wallboard). take ergonomics and comfort into account. Since operators spend long periods of time within the confines of the control room. such as the selection of decor and furnishings.

Air conditioning must be highly reliable and maintain conditions typically around 21 +. Equipment Room shall be designed with spare space for additional or replacement equipment in the future.173 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The Equipment Rooms shall be adequately sound proofed to prevent disturbance to people working in adjacent rooms. Higher levels of illumination are normally used in equipment rooms compared to control rooms. 6. o o o CE Communication Telecommunication Engineers SCADA Engineers individual office 1 person 2 persons Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification    The SCADA/EMS Master Station equipment The Communication terminal equipment (e. optical terminal box) PAX The Equipment Room shall be partitioned by a fire wall and fire door such that the redundant or duplicated devices of which the SCADA/EMS and Communication systems comprise can be installed in separated areas to avoid common mode damage by fire or fumes or fire fighting substances/actions. but the need to avoid glare and reflections on screens still arises. The equipment room(s) will need to be sized to house the system proposed along with its various peripherals and data storage devices. provision of offices shall be made for day staff comprising:       DGM System Control – CE System Operation – CE System Operational Planning – CE Performance Monitoring (Audit)– Training Engineer – SCADA/EMS System support.5. SDH multiplexer.g. Decor and wall coverings should be light but not bright and distracting and lighting is an important feature. o o o o o  System Administrator Software and Database Production Applications Network Applications SCADA/EMS Hardware individual office 2 persons 2 persons 2 persons 2 persons individual office individual office individual office individual office individual office Communication System Support.5 6.2C a relative humidity around 50% +. This ensures that noise from equipment cooling fans and banks of disk drives and the conversation of those using the associated maintenance terminals does not intrude on control room activities.10%.1 OFFICES FOR CONTROL CENTRE STAFF General In addition to the Control Room shift staff that will normally use the Control Room as their normal place of work.Section 6 .

The space and storage facilities shall allow easy access and identification of all items.10 VISITORS' VIEWING AREA The control room will become the focal point for visitors and the Contractor shall provide an area from which visitors can view and observe the control room activities without the need to enter the control room. A reception area with facilities for a receptionist shall be provided. Space for a SCADA/EMS 2 screen workstation with desk shall also be provided.7 DOCUMENTATION LIBRARY A significant amount of hardware. 6. Their offices shall therefore be conveniently located to allow this access. a number of technical references and technical papers should be available to the system control centre staff. will require a room within the control centre with sufficient size to house items in a logical and easily accessible manner. software. The Bidder may propose a number of offices to accommodate these members of staff and the respective functions taking into account the functional differences.6 STORAGE AND WORKSHOP FACILITIES Storage facilities shall be provided to accommodate all of the spares and test equipment delivered under the Main Contract. 6. 6.174 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . the design and location shall be such that reflections do not interfere with the operators‘ view or ability to read Operator screens or the Wallboard. along with suitable reading area and copying facilities.Section 6 . 6. The accommodation of this documentation. This is to ensure that such work does not cause distraction to normal control room activities or jeopardise the operation of other equipment. This may be through a double or triple glazed window (for sound proofing) behind or to the rear or side of the operators. and operation and maintenance documentation will be required for the new systems. However. Provision shall also be made for Drivers (6). The room shall house 2 workstations for the Telecommunication Management System and 2 persons. Additionally. The workshop facilities will also be used for the maintenance of outstation and communications equipment. Security (3) & Janitor (3) staff. Workshop facilities shall be provided that are suitable for carrying out maintenance to the control centre equipment away from the control and equipment rooms. but from where the operator VDU screens and the Wallboard can be viewed. There shall however be at least 3 individual offices and distinct open plan areas or 4 person offices to accommodate the others. to facilitate the easy manoeuvring of equipment in and out of the workshop. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 6.9 TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK MANAGEMENT ROOM A separate room shall be provided for the monitoring of the telecommunication system. This would serve the dual function of receiving visitors to the centre and to act as the first line access control to the control room. This room shall have sufficient space to house a 2 screen SCADA/EMS workstation and 2 persons for the Development System and for the Operator Training Simulator a 3 screen SCADA/EMS Operator Workstation and a single screen Trainer Workstation. This ensures the viewing area is positioned out of the operators' line of sight.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification    Electrical Superintendents Secretarial and Clerical support Commercial and Trading support - 7 persons 7 persons 2 persons (future) The foregoing staff will require frequent access to the control room or equipment rooms albeit restricted by ‗Access‘ rights. and to the exterior of the building. This workshop shall be provided with suitable access to both the control and equipment rooms.8 DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM AND TRAINING SIMULATOR ROOM The Development System and Operator Training Simulator shall be collocated in one room for the purpose of database maintenance and Operator Training.

In order to ensure high availability of supply. whether wide spread or to the control complex alone. A similar split distribution board should be provided to distribute the supplies from the UPS. A fault tolerant form of UPS. 6.g.1 General Requirements A secure power supply is essential for the control centre in order that the continuity of control activities is not affected by losses of power. the purpose here is to define the equipment that space shall be provided for and details particular requirements related to location and segregation: (a) A dual LV (415V) infeed to the control centre complex (b) (c) An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) with 3 hour standby battery capacity A standby diesel generator. shall be provide for the supplies to the master station and communications equipment and the control room workstations. the routes taken by these in-feeds and distribution cables shall each be securely protected against external hazards. The detailed technical requirements are specified elsewhere.13 DOMESTIC QUARTERS Domestic quarters shall be provided for 24hour on call staff. lighting. lounge area.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 6.14. The standby generator should also be connected to the main distribution board to provide supply to the control centre in the event of both LV in-feeds being lost. each supplying half of the total control centre load.14.12 MEETING ROOM A meeting room shall be provided close to the office of the DGM System Control for general meetings and for convening emergency response teams/meetings. The design of this room shall facilitate presentation and training and be equipped with overhead projector.14 POWER SUPPLIES 6. This shall be provided such that conditioning of the mains in-feeds and consequent protection from noise and perturbations occurring on the mains supply is assured and to permit continuity of operation should the mains in-feeds fail completely. The dual LV supplies shall be derived from different HV sources to minimise the possibility of simultaneous loss of supply from both in-feeds. dual redundant with static bypass. e. Furthermore. training and meetings.e. However the two LV in-feeds are derived. 6. 6.175 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . the UPS full rated load plus the load associated with recharging the UPS battery. 6.11 CONFERENCE ROOM This room shall house a conference table for up to 15 persons for the use of visitors. In any case. 6. Each infeed shall be fully rated to supply the entire control centre load and should be derived from separate diverse HV sources. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. it is also essential that the cables carrying those supplies to the control centre's main distribution board and subsequently to the equipment distribution boards are physically segregated as far as possible to avoid points of common failure or simultaneous exposure to hazards.2 Control Centre LV In-feeds The LV in-feeds to the control centre shall be provided from two independent LV (415V AC 3-phase) infeeds. The diesel generator should be rated to supply the complete control centre load including air conditioning.Section 6 . cooking facilities and sanitary services.14. i.3 Diesel Generator Room/Enclosure The diesel generator must be located in a position that is that is above the worst case possible flood water levels. With this arrangement either half of the board may be taken out of service for maintenance without total disruption to the control centre's power supply. the Contractor shall provide the following. a purpose built construction is necessary to ensure low noise outputs and minimal transmission of vibration and the ready removal of exhaust without disruption or discomfort of persons in the area. general services and the UPS system. The main distribution boards shall be arranged as two interconnected boards. electronic white board and sound system . This shall comprise two bedrooms.

5 LV Distribution Panels Separate LV distribution panels shall be provided for the Main Equipment Room and Control Rooms as well for all equipment forming part of the SCADA/EMS or Telecommunication systems and the equipment assigned to supply redundant or duplicated devices from different boards.15 ACCESS CONTROL An access control system is required that restricts access to persons into the building and to certain parts of the building.14. For the control and equipment rooms duplicated systems shall be provided with 2 x 100% cooling systems and fans.176 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . under floor or ceiling cavities shall be independently fitted with detection devices. Fire fighting facilities shall be provided in accordance with local regulations. The control room and equipment rooms shall be air-conditioned to provide both a comfortable working atmosphere for the operators and the correct operating environment for the equipment. drainage facilities.17 LAN The offices shall be fully wired for an office LAN to normal office standards.14. To ensure faults are revealed in good time each 100% system shall automatically switch over operation to the second system on a daily basis.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 6. To achieve secure operation of the air conditioning system. it should either comprise of duplicated units or incorporate standby units. UPS area and the diesel generator. 6. This is separate to LAN equipment that is to be provided as part of the SCADA/EMS system. Separate access control points shall be provided to the LV intake. Provision shall be made for fire fighting equipment in electrically hazardous areas and for sensitive computer and communication equipment.14. In other words each of the systems shall be able to satisfy 100% of the air conditioning requirements allowing one to be out of service for maintenance. 3 with 2 capable of providing adequate ventilation).Section 6 . otherwise the UPS shall be segregated by a fire wall. 6.16 FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM A fire detection system shall be provided that enables smoke or fire to be detected in zones of the building. Unmanned areas such as LV intake rooms.4 Uninterruptible Power Supplies A single room may be used to house the UPS system's rectifier/chargers and inverters provided that there are arrangements to by pass the UPS room. eye baths etc Air cooling for this room shall be provided to ensure they operate at a temperature that does not cause deterioration and reduction in service life. flameproof electrical fittings. reception. car parks.18 HVAC Air conditioning systems shall be provided for the building in general to normal office standards. 6. 6. Cable routing shall ensure protection from hazards and segregation to prevent common exposure to hazards. basins.7 DC Supplies Separate duplicated battery backed 48V dc supplies shall be provided and these may be housed with the 415Vac UPS system and its batteries providing that he same design criteria and constraints are applied. lifts. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The system shall provide access control points from the reception area and car parks for external access and internal control points for access to the Control Room and Equipment Rooms. 6.g.6 UPS Battery Room Where Nickel Cadmium or Lead Acid batteries are used the rooms shall meet the requirements for ventilation. It is expected that forced ventilation will be required to cool the UPS equipment room. 6. This shall be in the form of multiple fans (e. The general services LV distribution shall be separate from these. Control Room lobby and other doors with access to the control room. CCTV shall be provided to give views of the outside grounds. The CCTV viewing console shall be located in the Control Room.14. 6.

e. 6. In support of preventative maintenance all surface materials within the control centre including ceilings. or replaced. In addition to any statutory emergency lighting a set of luminaries shall be provided in the Control Room that have sufficient luminosity to allow Operators to continue work at their control room desks in the event of supply failure. The design of the control centre. particularly the control and equipment rooms.19 LIGHTING Lighting shall be designed to be glare free. ventilation and dehumidification to be run from the UPS backed power supply.Section 6 . It is important that the design of the building and its services supports principles that are conducive to rapid repair times with minimum disturbance to other control centre functions.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification In the event of a power failure where the only supply is from the batteries of the UPS system (i.20 MATERIALS Generally materials used for the construction and fitting out of the building shall be of high quality and to the required national or international standards. avoid reflections on VDU screens and the rear projection screens. Equipment rooms shall be illuminated to normal standards for working with machinery.177 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . and wall coverings should be selected to prevent the generation of static electricity and should be non-dust producing. removed for repair elsewhere. 6. This may be achieved by providing ample free space around items of equipment and by the use of a raised 'computer floor' or channelling to accommodate cables. needs to be undertaken with this requirement in mind. These luminaries shall be feed from the UPS system. 6. For the Control Room controls shall be provided to enable the lights to be dimmed to set a comfortable working environment where viewing of screen based data is not impaired. floors. The design shall provide for sufficient air cooling. cabling and connections so that they can be easily repaired in situ. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the diesel has failed to start) some form of emergency cooling may be required to ensure the SCADA/EMS Master Station continues to function. The luminosity levels shall be to normal office standards for the offices. It shall include the provision of ready access to all items of equipment.21 MAINTAINABILITY It is vital that the control centre facilities have an inherently high level of availability.

air conditioning) to ensure continuous operation.1 SCADA/EMS Availability The System availability shall be at least: The following SCADA/EMS facilities are the minimum that shall be available with a probability of 99.99. The System shall incorporate facilities to automatically recover lost data. including: i.2    AVAILABILITY REQUIREMENTS For the SCADA/EMS Master Station . correction and message retry mechanisms shall be provided to overcome soft errors.178 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .98%. reliably and efficiently over this period. The System's response to all corrupted message types shall be defined. It shall not be possible for the System to enter a state whereby loss of data is not deterministic (i.98%: a) All real time functions for which the System is designed. the System must always be able to determine if data has not been received successfully).g. The Bidder shall describe the self-checks carried out by the System offered and provide an estimate of the proportion of possible faults revealed by such checks. The overall System design shall incorporate redundancy to enable the System to continue to operate.e. following the failure of single items of media or subsystems. including the compilation of historical data records Supervisory controls EMS applications b) One less than the normal complement of User Interfaces in control rooms c) One less than the normal complement of hardcopy peripherals provided for real time output in the control rooms d) Mains supply from the UPS system e) Adequate environmental control (e. ii.995 and a MTTR of 12 hours 7. The equipment shall be designed to operate safely. The basic equipment life expectancy shall be at least fifteen years provided that normal routine maintenance is carried out.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS It is a fundamental requirement that the System (and individual items of equipment within it) shall be designed for high reliability and that hardware and standard existing software used within the System shall have been proven in service. 7.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 7. standby equipment and standby database information shall be automatically checked to ensure that successful changeover can take place when required. Error detection. For example.2. Calculations shall be presented to show the probability of single and multiple bit errors in messages escaping detection and possibly causing an incorrect response. random errors and burst data errors. In operation. For communication channels to each Outstation – 99. without loss of any SCADA/EMS functionality and without degradation of System performance.99% and a MTTR of 12 hours. iii. RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY 7. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Communication with at least 98% of in service Outstations Data acquisition. The replacement parts necessary to achieve this reliability shall be defined in the Bid. the System includes mains power supplies and the communication links that are used by the SCADA/EMS Master Station for communications with subsystems (principally Outstations) located remotely from the NSCC. In this context. assuming a 4 hour Mean Time To Repair (MTTR) For Outstations supplied under this contract – 99. the System shall automatically carry out sufficient self-checks to ensure that the overall availability of the System is not impaired due to the occurrence of unrevealed faults. iv.Section 6 .

In addition to the overall System reliability block diagram. The Bidder shall describe in detail the failure modes of the entire System. as the design phase of the project proceeds. exponential. reflecting the increasing depth of design detail. normal.g.2. unidentified causes) b) Faults shall be categorised according to their nature c) Unrevealed faults causing loss of essential functions (once identified) shall be considered a serious non compliance Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. This shall include: a) All assumptions made b) Assumed failure distribution. The Bidder shall state the methodology of the analysis and the source of the reliability figures. together with information on the source of any theoretical or practical data used.3 AVAILABILITY CALCULATIONS Theoretical and practical figures shall be given in the Bid Schedules for the reliability of each individual unit of the System in terms of Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF). Calculations for the availability of the System shall be included in the Bidder's offer.2 Communication System Availability A communication channel is considered unavailable when no routing to an Outstation is available or end to end service is not available. The method to be applied for defined system availability shall include: a) Comparison of the availability of the system (as defined above) with the specified requirements – all failures that cause the loss of the defined essential functions will be considered as failures regardless of their nature (e. The Contractor shall update availability calculations. the reliability in terms of MTBF shall be shown for other specific failure modes detailed by the Bidder. These shall be based upon the Mean Time Between Failure of items of equipment and a Mean Time To Repair stated above. environmentally induced.179 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . systematic software. 7.3 Outstation Availability An Outstation is considered unavailable when: a) Software malfunction affecting normal operation b) Any function is lost for all points of a single type c) More than one input card or output card of the same type fails d) One input card or output card of each type fails e) Communication with the Master is not possible because of Outstation failure f) 48Vdc power supply failure. The calculation of overall reliability shall be provided with this diagram.4 VERIFICATION The verification of reliability and availability of the system shall be realised by maintaining a register of all failures and restoration times which will be compared with the guaranteed characteristics for MTBF/MTTR and the specified criteria. 7. The reliability calculation for constituent printed circuit boards shall be based on ML-HDBK-217 or other comparable standard. complete with its reliability data. e. The overall assessment of System reliability shall be provided in the form of an overall System block diagram with each main item shown. 7. etc. clearly stating the effects of any subsystem or media failure on the availability and response of the essential SCADA/EMS functions. random hardware.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 7.2. Reliability figures of existing equipment shall be supported by evidence from operational experience at similar types of installation.g.Section 6 .

action taken and any implications for the future operation of the system.180 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . This method shall be adopted to monitor the reliability and availability during the Site Acceptance procedures and until the end of the Defects Liability Period. During this period the Contractor shall also keep a register and provide written reports of all identified faults (whether they cause loss of essential functions or not).Section 6 . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. that explain their causes.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification d) The calculation of availability of the essential functions shall be the sum of the unavailable times for one or more of these functions divided by the total time expressed as a percentage.

Type testing is required to verify that the equipment meets with the specified environmental conditions. and subassembly testing. INSPECTION AND TESTING PHILOSOPHY 8. The responsibility for specifying. at stages throughout the work.2 Responsibilities The Contractor's responsibilities shall include but not be limited to requirements to:   Produce written Test Plans. location and purpose of each stage. 'Subsystems' are defined as single items or small groups of closely related equipment (including software) such as Printers. The test methodology shall complement the design methodology and the two shall be developed in parallel. but all aspects must be to the satisfaction of the Employer. The principle of testing shall be that. method statements. Telecommunication Equipment and Power Supplies shall ensure that the equipment functionality is thoroughly exercised and validated at the Contractor's premises before delivery and commissioning. conducting and recording tests shall be with the Contractor. The 'System' is defined as the interconnection of all Subsystems and any other equipment which will eventually comprise all of the equipment supplied under this contract (with the exception of spares). This document does not constitute a Test Specification or Test Procedure for any part of the system. test equipment. Procedures.Section 6 . 8. Communication System and network media (OPGW. UPS System.1 GENERAL Approach to Testing The testing for the SCADA/EMS System. formal tests shall be performed and recorded against written test specifications.181 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . to provide a high level of confidence to the Contractor and the Employer (or the Employer‘s designated and authorised representative) that subsequent stages can proceed. Schedules. All Test Documentation for all tests shall be written by the Contractor and submitted to the Employer for approval at least 12 weeks before they are first used.1.1 8. testing and setting to work the ‗System‘ includes the existing Outstations. Operator consoles.1. Inspection of incoming goods and components. etc.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 8. namely:    Type testing Subsystem testing System testing. PLC etc) and their interfaces as well as new Outstations that are put into service under other projects during the currency of this contract. The Contractor under this Contract shall undertake to coordinate the System testing (and Subsystem testing. The degree to which the Employer intervenes in the process will depend upon the level of confidence built up during the project. if necessary) in collaboration with the Employer and related contractor(s).7 ) from the Employer prior to the commencement of the corresponding testing Provide the equipment. Workstations. Outstations. for all tests All test documentation associated with a subsystem or system test shall be submitted for approval by the Employer at least 12 weeks prior to the commencement of the associated test Ensure that all test documentation associated with any testing has achieved Category I approval (See Clause 11. test record sheets and procedures for fault reporting. rather it sets out the stages at which tests are required and the subjects. test software. This Specification covers the higher levels of complexity. shall be undertaken by the Contractor in accordance with the procedures set out in the Contractor's own Quality Plan and are not described here. personnel and facilities to conduct the test (described further in the next Clause) Successfully carry out all tests according to the approved test procedures and correct any errors prior to the witnessed acceptance tests    Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. In the context of interfacing.

even if not part of the Subsystem under test Consumables. subsystems. testing and calibration by the Contractor. but not limited to:     Laboratory test instruments Special test equipment. Software production and integration testing shall be performed in accordance with the Software Requirements of this specification and the Contractor's Quality Plan. systems following installation e) Site Update Period   To update and verify the SCADA/EMS database Point to Point testing of each outstation signal f) System SAT Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B.3 Test Equipment and Facilities The Contractor shall provide all equipment and services required for testing.1. It is expressly the responsibility of the Contractor to satisfy himself that items 'supplied by others' are in a satisfactory condition for the Contractor's tests to be conducted. to permit full testing of System functions and performance Other items of the System.Section 6 . All test software shall be subject to formal quality assurance requirements stipulated elsewhere in the Specification. shall be calibrated at the expense of the Contractor by an approved standards laboratory. The stages of testing to be performed at higher levels shall be based on the following: a) Type Testing  To prove that the equipment supplied meets with the specified environmental conditions b) Subsystem Factory  To prove the design of a Subsystem prior to the Subsystem being used in the System FAT c) System FAT  To check that the totality of the equipment supplied under the Contract performs in accordance with the Contract requirements d) Site Installation Tests  To check the operation of equipment.1. if required by the Employer. shall be performed in accordance with the Contractor's Quality Plan.182 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope Procurement of Plant . 8. 8. but approval by the Employer shall not imply any diminution of the Contractor's responsibilities. including.4 Testing Stages Inspection of incoming goods and components. emulators. specified elsewhere as being part of the Contractor's supply.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification    Provide facilities for the Employer to witness any Factory tests Produce permanent records of all test progress and results in a formal systematic manner Carry out all remedial work and re-testing necessary for the equipment to pass the tests Each of the above responsibilities shall be discharged to the satisfaction of the Employer. and subassembly tests. All test instruments shall be subject to routine inspection. simulators and test software. All test instruments shall be subject to approval by the Employer and.

Separate test procedures and result sheets shall be provided for factory and site acceptance tests. at least 10 working days before the commencement.5 Notice & Witnessing of Tests The Contractor shall provide. Test results from the prior tests shall be made available to the Employer on request. shall be taken by the Contractor and copies sent to the Employer within three weeks of completion of the tests. and shall arrange for the test to be repeated. Records of every test. The Employer shall have the right to witness any tests whether conducted at the Contractor's premises or elsewhere. 8. (f)and (g).1.6 Test Procedures and Result Sheets The Contractor shall prepare test procedures and result sheets for all tests. All test procedures and result sheets will be subject to review and approval by the Employer. or The result of the test is in accordance with the expected result described in the test procedure.1. 8. stability and robustness of the SCADA/EMS System 8. (e). to provide a series of tests of their accuracy. (d).Section 6 . and shall enter the results in the result sheets.9 Failures The Contractor shall correct all faults found during testing. 8. (c).1. Test result sheets will be retained as part of the permanent QA record for the equipment supplied. 8.1. to indicate the readiness of the equipment for tests to commence. at least six weeks in advance of the tests. when any changes are known.7 Contractor's Prior Tests The Contractor shall successfully complete a prior run of all tests. For each test.1. (b).4(a). whether witnessed or not. The test shall only be repeated when the fault has been remedied and the equipment demonstrated to function correctly. a master plan showing the scheduled dates of testing and shall provide updates to this plan. as part of the Programme of Work documentation. before the commencement of the formal tests.6.1. In general. but some other unexpected or unexplained event occurred which the Employer considers to be a fault Full use shall be made during the tests of operator manuals and other documentation provided by the Contractor. Any revisions to the test documents found necessary as a result of the prior tests shall be made before the commencement of formal tests.8 Conduct of the Tests The Contractor shall conduct the tests in accordance with the approved test procedures. the Employer will determine whether the test has passed or failed. The Contractor shall advise the Employer in writing of the actual date of commencement of every test in Clause 8. He shall also prepare a cross reference listing to show that all of the requirements of the Functional Design Specification have been included in the tests.183 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . using the test procedures and result sheets described in Clause 8. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification  To check that the totality of the equipment supplied under the Contract performs in accordance with the Contract requirements and interacts correctly with equipment supplied by others and interfacing to the Works g) Tests on Completion   500 Hour Trial Period 'Hands on' test period (following System SAT) to demonstrate the reliability.1. the test will be considered to have failed if either:   The result of the test is not in accordance with the expected result described in the test procedure.

without in any way prejudicing his rights under Clause 8.1.14 Software Failure Reports For each software failure that occurs. shall be charged to the Contractor at the standard hourly rate for the personnel concerned.11 of this Section.Section 6 .12 Fault Log The Contractor shall maintain a fault log throughout each series of tests. which shall determine the future conduct of test. 8. The report shall clearly show:      The most likely cause of the failure An analysis of any stress that may have been caused to other components of the equipment being tested as a result of the failure Whether the failure is a result of any component operating outside its design range Whether any design changes should be made to avoid further failures All such reports will be retained as part of the permanent QA record for the equipment supplied. 8. affect the validity of earlier tests then the Contractor shall repeat the earlier tests and obtain satisfactory results before repeating the test in which the fault was first identified. The report shall clearly show:    The observed symptoms The likely cause The fault category (from Table 1) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The Employer shall also have the right to suspend any test in the event of a fault being detected by the Contractor but not reported to the Employer within 24 hours. 8. and all charges incurred by them in so doing. 8. The Employer shall have the right to suspend any test in the event that errors or failures have become unacceptable.1. Time spent by the Employer and his representatives witnessing re-tests. 8. Every fault detected during the tests will be entered in the log. the Contractor shall investigate the failure and prepare a report on its cause(s) and design implications.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Where remedial measures involve significant modifications that might.1. will be charged to the Contractor. In this event.1. will be charged to the Contractor at cost. once the software has been approved for inclusion into the system and is subject to configuration control.10 Fault Categories The Employer will allocate a category to each fault. The Employer shall have the right to order the repeat or abandonment of any test in the event that results demonstrate that the equipment is significantly non-compliant with the Contract requirements.13 Hardware Failure Reports For each hardware failure that occurs at any stage of testing. subsistence and travel charges. The fault log will be retained as part of the permanent QA record for the equipment supplied. in the Employer‘s opinion. Test categories shall be as defined in Table 7.184 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . the suspension shall remain in effect until reporting has been brought up to date to the satisfaction of the Employer. or waiting at the Contractor's premises or the test site while corrections are made prior to re-test. including accommodation.1.1.1. All other costs incurred by the Employer as a result of such re-tests. If the Employer is required to return to the Contractor's premises or the test site to witness such re-tests then time spent by the personnel concerned in travelling to the site of and witnessing such re-tests. the Contractor shall generate a software failure report.11 Repeat Tests The Contractor shall correct and re-test every fault detected during the tests. together with the actions taken to clear and re-test the fault.

but requiring explanation and. Repeatable fault not affecting the functionality being tested in the session. correction. Major fault affecting the functionality being tested in the session. be waived. Other fault not covered above. The corrective action taken. Discussion is needed to establish the most appropriate action. The error will usually be amended during the test and the test will continue. accompanied by a proposed schedule of tests to be performed for each item of equipment. The environmental factors include climatic (temperature humidity. earthquake stresses) and chemical (salt laden atmosphere). The fault must be rectified before retest of the affected test sessions or sessions. The action taken will depend on the severity of the fault. electromagnetic (radiated and conducted). All such reports will be retained as part of the permanent QA record for the SCADA/EMS system. Testing may continue at the discretion of the Engineer. testing may continue. the type tests should also demonstrate that the equipment does not exceed accepted standards in terms of its impact on its environment (noise. Testing may proceed on other sessions if permitted by the Engineer. Testing may continue. mains harmonics etc. type test results shall show that the equipment being proposed for this Contract will perform in accordance with its design specification in the environments to which it will be subject in its application on this Contract. TABLE 8. at the discretion of Employer. If the submitted type test results are satisfactory then the type tests specified may.). Non-repeatable fault affecting functionality being tested in the session. The documentation shall be corrected before the tests are considered complete.Section 6 . Where appropriate. All software modules affected. in some cases. Discussion is needed to establish the most appropriate course of action.2 TYPE TESTS Full details of type tests performed on equipment identical to that being offered shall be submitted with the offer.). wind. and subsequently considered to be a normal acceptable occurrence. Minor fault.185 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .1: FAULT CATEGORIES Category 0 Definition An item recorded as a fault during testing. rain etc. The fault must be rectified before recommencing testing. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Documentation error or deficiency. In general. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The report shall also clearly show the following information that shall be entered when the failure has been investigated:    The actual cause of the failure. handling knocks. Deficiency in the ability of the test or test equipment to demonstrate the function being tested in the session. Repeatable fault affecting the functionality being tested in the session. An event not affecting the functionality being tested in that session. mechanical (transport vibration.

(The extent of this testing will be dependent on the extent and nature of the subsystem tests) 3. 8. of equipment that has been successfully factory tested (and the corresponding test records have been reviewed by the Employer) and is not required to form part of the System FAT. All corresponding inspection. The test shall prove that the Subsystem meets its particular physical. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.186 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 8. Test Procedures and Test Record Sheets have achieved Category I approval. System performance in the face of various contingencies 6.3 General FAT Requirements It is the responsibility of the Contractor to produce the Test Documentation for the FAT to the satisfaction of the Employer.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 8. maintainability and operability. Hardware functionality including firmware and operating system level software tests on CPU. equipment and software configuration 4. The FAT shall not commence until all documentation associated with the FAT including Test Plan.Section 6 .3. disks. Partial shipment may take place. System performance tests to demonstrate that the integrated system can achieve the guaranteed levels of response and to determine the limits of the response envelope 5. Integrated system tests to prove the functionality of all applications software in the context of the complete integrated system. stability and robustness (b) Inspection. I/O interfaces etc. The System FAT shall commence only if all associated subsystems have successfully completed their individual FAT to the satisfaction of the Employer. by agreement with the Employer. The Contractor shall have completed his own internal system integration tests prior to commencement of the System FAT. Coverage shall include. The System equipment will not be allowed on site until the FAT has been successfully completed and the Employer has reviewed the corresponding test records. the System will be ready for delivery to site. Tests shall be conducted to prove the integrated functioning of the system as a whole and shall include (but not be limited to) the following: 1. The System shall then be tested as a whole to prove that it meets the Specification in all aspects of function. the following: (a) Order of Tests. It is required that the results of the test shall demonstrate System reliability and availability consistent with the values specified and those guaranteed by the Contractor. functional and performance specification. hardware test and software test of any clearly identifiable Subsystem. but not be limited to. Upon satisfactory completion of the test. performance. and component and subassembly test documentation shall be complete and available for inspection prior to the commencement of a subsystem FAT.3. prior to use as a component in a System test. capacity. Hardware inspection 2. Soak test to give an indication of system reliability.3 8. The test shall be carried out at the Contractor's premises. The tests shall be carried out at the Contractor's premises.2 System FAT The System FAT shall combine all Subsystems and shall include other equipment that shall represent.3. The System shall be inspected to ensure that all interfaces mate correctly and that the System is complete. emulate or simulate those parts of the ‗System‘ to be eventually provided. Test Specifications.1 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS Subsystem FAT A Subsystem Factory Acceptance Test shall include the inspection.

The equipment shall be complete at the start of the tests and no interchange of modules or equipment shall be allowed. housing and mounting etc 3. The printing and recording equipment needed for conducting the test shall be run throughout the test. 2.g. may be omitted from the tests if agreed by the Engineer. No repairs or adjustments shall be carried out during the test period unless agreed by both parties.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Prior to commencement of the tests. as necessary. All parts subject to wear. 4. cabling. Sufficient hardware (e. tagging. Adequate accessibility 4. The test shall run for at least 200 hours continuously. Tests shall include: 1. quantities of items etc (c) Test Conditions. 6. The Contractor shall provide all the software necessary to carry out the tests.Section 6 . 8. such as electromechanical peripherals. Correct standards of workmanship and quality 2. Test equipment and test software shall be provided to load the equipment to a greater extent than the worst case predicted for the complete system. Correct identification labels. 3. Automatic changeover is not permissible. Verification of model numbers. Each subsystem and/or each module shall be tested cyclically at least once per hour whilst all other parts are functioning normally. The conditions of the tests shall be no less rigorous than: 1. Disc write/read tests 4. All modules must remain powered up for the duration of the test 9. RAM write/read tests 3. All necessary maintenance and adjustments shall be carried out before commencement of the test so that the tests can continue uninterrupted by routine operations. 7. The tests shall be carried out at the prevailing ambient conditions of temperature and humidity. It need not be permanently manned throughout this period provided that a comprehensive log of operations tested and faults occurring is printed. Compliance with the Specification and reviewed drawings (including compliance with fire safety and materials requirements) 5. Online loading and all functions shall be tested under these worst case conditions.187 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Where there is redundancy in the equipment the test period shall be divided equally between the redundant parts. CPU tests 2. All subsystem components shall have been successfully inspected and tested. Data highway loading tests Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. no special conditioning is required (d) Computer Equipment. the equipment shall be inspected to ensure: 1. 5. remote terminals) and/or simulation devices shall be provided by the Contractor to ensure that the Design System Loading conditions can be achieved and System performance demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer 10. and all corresponding documentation shall be complete and available for inspection.

assemblers. (h) Functional Tests During the functional tests.Section 6 . (g) Soak Test Each subsystem soak test shall be carried out over a period of time sufficient to fully prove the correct functioning of the equipment comprising the subsystem. where appropriate: 1. every function specified for the system in the Functional Design Specification shall be thoroughly tested. Availability and functionality of alarm and indication facilities Tests shall use simulated loads that present similar characteristics to those in the finally integrated system. a real network. Both positive and negative tests shall be carried out. cross-talk) or with other systems 4. where practical. The time shall be calculated as the number of hours continuously connected and running. Supply Quality 3. (e) Communication (i) Tests shall include.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 5. Loss of Link procedures 3. Efficiency 5. Programming. linkers and generation/startup utilities identical to any of those supplied under the Contract. control and configuration of the network.g.188 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . All errors or problems shall be printed out. Demonstrate that communication systems do not interfere with each other (e. The tests shall use a simulated network. Messages shall also be output periodically indicating continuing successful operation. all software for which source code is supplied under the Contract shall be reassembled and/or recompiled from source. Before commencement of the functional tests. Workstation equipment test Tests shall exercise communication ports and shall overload ports so that queuing of messages occurs. or where practical. (f) Power Supplies (i) Tests shall include: 1. The tests shall use a simulated network or. Switching and automatic switchover sequences 4. All of these activities shall use compilers. screen displays and reports shall be regenerated from source. Similarly. Data integrity in the presence of noise 2. a real network. The resulting object code shall be re-linked and used for the tests. all configurable databases. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Loading 2. The equipment shall perform successfully without errors or failures that are inconsistent with the reliability and availability criteria of the System design. The initial System soak test shall have a minimum duration of 100 hours. Demonstration of network management functions 5. Peripheral tests 6.

all factory acceptance tests shall include a 48 hour period of unstructured testing. The master station SCADA database shall be configured and populated with all system specific data. Simulation shall be used to represent the remaining Outstations.189 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . As a minimum the following shall be tested:                8.3.1 Master Stations For this Factory Acceptance Test.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (i) Performance Tests The performance tests shall demonstrate that the performance and response times of the equipment are in accordance with the specified requirements.3.4.Section 6 . tabular displays. each Master Station to be supplied. for the fully extended system. in particular. the Contractor shall include at least one Outstation of each type to be supplied.4. during which the Employer shall be at liberty to instruct the Contractor to carry out such additional tests as may be required to test the reliability and robustness of the system. system loading tests. All simulations must be substantiated to show that they provide a realistic simulation of the associated Outstations and the Master Station / Outstation communication process and data acquisition processing.data handling capacity and response times Data and graphic display management Multi-processor management including power fail/auto start-up Hardware and software diagnostics ICCP functionality Other data exchange facilities Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. (j) Unstructured Tests In addition to the structured tests described above. log reports etc shall be constructed for the test. as part of this Contract shall communicate with Outstations and/or equipment that can simulate their functionality and performance.3. Suitable simulation shall be provided for Outstation types that are existing and that will be interfaced with. 8. As a minimum the following shall be tested: Data acquisition and processing Alarm and Event Processing Measured and Metered Value Processing Calculated values Operator Interaction Authority Control and Processing Graphics Displays Tagging and hand dressing Reporting and Archiving Performance . All system graphic displays. (k) Outstations For the purposes of FAT and.4 Specific Test Requirements 8.2 Outstations For this Factory Acceptance Test each type of Outstation to be supplied as part of this Contract shall communicate with a master station or a master station simulator that can simulate the functionality and performance of a master station.

As the system will be integrated with the existing SDH and PLC equipment these shall be suitably simulated or emulated in order that the interface and interaction with these may be proven.Section 6 .4. The equipment meet the following EMC requirements with respect to: o Radiated immunity to a 5 W hand held VHF transceiver operating at distance of 0. b.4 Telecommunication The telecommunication network shall undergo Factory Acceptance Testing. As a minimum the following shall be tested:        All Network Analysis Applications All Forecasting and Scheduling Applications All AGC functions All Hydro Chain Control functions All Study Mode Network Analysis Applications Operator Training Simulator All Network Management Applications 8. The functionality of the Telecommunication Management System (TMS) shall be thoroughly tested including the circuit and hardware configuration.190 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . shall be verified. and alarm and event handling and archiving. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. For this test the complete telecommunication network equipment shall be staged at the supplier's premises including the core system. anticipated in the field. The units operate correctly when connected as a system in its operational configuration.3. and the network management system. All functions of the test equipment offered shall be tested fully. the Contractor shall demonstrate that: a. c.4. Where appropriate the automatic re-routing of circuits shall be demonstrated and the levels of disturbance to the directly affected services and services on the alternate route assessed.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification         Analogue and digital inputs and outputs Command outputs Pulse inputs Scanning. The FATs shall be arranged to represent working conditions as closely as possible. de-bounce filtering and time synchronisation Communications processing including multi-porting functions Data management Hardware and software diagnostics Compliance with communications protocols IEC 60870-5-101 and 104 8. The performance is in accordance with the requirements of the Specification. The test set up shall include a test SCADA Master Station and a number of Outstations. the peripheral network. During the FATs.3 Energy Management Software The EMS network model shall be configured and parameterised and the database populated with all system specific data.3. Prior to the tests the EMS network model shall be validated using the results of a 'bench marked' off-line load flow program. time tagging. The routing of all circuits. Links shall be set up with the maximum design optical budget loss and tests carried out to show that minimum levels of service quality are maintained. Tests shall be carried out to demonstrate that the telecommunication network is entirely compatible with the Master Station and the Outstations and that it provides the required level of service.25 m from the equipment with cubicle door closed or protective cover in place.

class III). Receiver sensitivity. class IV). Digital. In addition to the structured tests described above. d. i. all configurable databases. Optical output power measurement. o o o o o During the functional tests. linkers and generation/startup utilities identical to any of those supplied under the Contract. f. Digital power line carrier system. Similarly. Channel capacity. e.90.2) Rapid transients (IEC 60801-4. as a minimum. Digital teleprotection signalling equipment Telephone PAX equipment. electrical and optical interfaces. assemblers. Laser diode bias current measurement. all factory acceptance tests shall include a 48 hour period of unstructured testing. Data channel measurement. c. Electromagnetic fields (IEC 60801-3.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification o Radiated immunity to a GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) phone operating at distance of 0. Bit error rate measurements with optical attenuation representative of the link design budgets and also at the equipment design limits. d. class III). The performance tests shall demonstrate that the performance and response times of the equipment are in accordance with the specified requirements. VF channel measurement. b. Electrostatic discharge (IEC 60801-2. during which the Employer and/or its representatives shall be at liberty to instruct the Contractor to carry out such additional tests as may be required to test the reliability and robustness of the system. High frequency test (VDE 0435/T303. j. SDH Communication System The tests on the SDH communication system shall. Transmission rate. User interfaces.Section 6 . Analogue and digital service channels. class III. Telecommunication management system. screen displays and reports shall be regenerated from source. include: a. h. All of these activities shall use compilers. 8. ANSI C37.1 SDH communication system. c. g.4.191 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Voice recording equipment. Nominal operating wavelength. e. The power supply limits and tolerances are complied with. b.4. k. FATs shall include the following telecommunication sub-systems or equipment components: a.3.25 m from the equipment with cubicle door closed or protective cover in place. every function specified for the system in the Contractor‘s Functional Design Specification shall be thoroughly tested. l. f.

d. e. Engineer‘s order wire equipment operation. f. as a minimum. include: a. c. as a minimum. 8. Teleprotection Signalling Equipment The tests on the protection signalling equipment shall. Alarm and network management functions. Receiver dynamic range.3. e. System configuration and channel assignment. Integration interfaces with existing network. Transmission time. g.4. Digital Power Line Carrier System The tests on the power line carrier system shall. System redundancy and programming. Automatic reconfiguration of traffic requirements and channel re-allocation. p. Power supply limits. h. Power supply limits.3 Performance monitoring and fault co-ordination facilities.2 Engineer‘s order wire equipment operation.4. Alarm and network management functions.192 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . b. 8. Telecommunication Management System The tests on the telecommunication management system shall. User interfaces. Alarm functions. include: a. as a minimum. i. Transmitter output level. Different failure modes such as main and standby changeover.3.4.4 Transmission rate. Reports and system archiving.4. System programming. Interfaces with other telecommunication sub-systems or equipment components. i. Bit error rate measurements. c. f. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Failure modes and recovery. include: a.4. o. d.4. Signal boost facility. d. Channel capacity. c. e. h. Power supply limits. q.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification m. r. 8.Section 6 . b. g. Transmitter output level. n. Alarm facilities. b. End to end circuit management.3.

as a minimum. h.3. Automatic call logging functions. m. Switching facilities. k. Power supply variations. Voice Recording Equipment The tests on the voice recording equipment shall. 8.4. Alarm and network management functions. e. f.3. Extension facilities. g. include: a.4.4.Section 6 . 8. g. j. b.5 In service loop test. i. b. Power supply limits.5 Power Supplies The UPS System and Diesel Generator shall undergo Factory Acceptance Testing. Search and play back functions. Redundant processors functions. Alarm functions.4. Telephone network signalling system.3. include: a. VF and E&M signalling levels.193 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Tie line interface.6 Traffic handling capacity. 8. c. d. Operator console functions. Transmission performance.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification f. Interfaces with PAX equipment. c. Telephone PAX Equipment The tests on the administrative telephone PAX equipment shall. Batteries used duting the FAT shall be those provided by the manufacturer at their test facilities. Analogue and digital interfaces. Full rang of loading tests with efficiency and supply quality measured Response to step load changes Switchover sequences Failure modes and configuration tests Tests for charging batteries It will not be necessary to test the batteries to be delivered under this contract although inspection may be carried out at the option of the Employer. l.4. b. e. d. d. c. Power supply limits. 8. as a minimum. e. These tests may be carried out in the respective manufacturer‘s works. Equivalent loads shall be used for the tests. System configuration functions. The tests shall comprise: a.4 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTING Site Acceptance Testing shall comprise the following stages: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

to fully commission the System in such a manner as to enable trained operators to use the System. b) Duration and Downtime Each stage of the testing shall be carried out over a period of time sufficient to fully prove the correct functioning of the equipment. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. and the Employer will carry out all operational switching in accordance with a programme that will be prepared and agreed in advance between the Employer and the Contractor. All errors or problems shall be printed out. In addition. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to produce the Test Documentation for the SATs to the satisfaction of the Employer. The general requirements for testing and factory testing set out in preceding clauses of this Section are applicable to Site testing.4. in this volume of the Bid Documents. the Contractor shall prepare an overall test plan that covers all testing to be carried out on Site. It shall conform to the relevant requirements for test documentation set out in Section 11.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification      Site Installation Tests Site Update Period System Integrated Tests System Performance Tests Tests on Completion After equipment has been erected and connected up on site. within the scope of definite work. Documentation. and carried out jointly by Employer and the Contractor and third parties responsible for the Telecommunications and Outstation Works. The test plan will be subject to the approval of the Employer and should be closely coordinated with the Employer in terms of the availability of plant for testing and the timely provision of the associated permits to work. independent of any factory tests. c) Testing to Plant Initial setting to work and all subsequent 'live' tests will be directed by Employer. The Employer shall have the right. 8. to waive some tests and require additional tests to be carried out if findings on Site indicate additional or alternative tests are required to properly demonstrate that the works comply with the requirements of the Contract.194 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The test plan shall indicate test precedence and dependencies and should be co-ordinated with the Contractor‘s general programme of work. In support of the Site testing activities.3.3(General FAT Requirements) of this Section of the Specification.1 General SAT Requirements It must be emphasised that all testing that requires an interface to operational equipment must only be carried out after prior agreement with the Employer and adequate advance notice shall be given to the Employer by the Contractor of their intent to conduct testing involving operational equipment. They shall meet the appropriate requirements for the Factory Acceptance Test specified in Clause 8. the Contractor shall carry out to the satisfaction of Employer such tests as may be required to prove compliance with the Specification. The equipment shall perform successfully without errors or failures that are inconsistent with the reliability and availability criteria of the System design. the following requirements shall be met: a) Commissioning It shall be the Contractor's responsibility. Tests shall be subject to the Employer‘s standard safety procedures. Messages shall also be output periodically indicating continuing successful operation.

8. UPS System The purpose of these tests is to prove that the equipment or subsystems have not been damaged during packaging. the Contractor shall establish. Test procedures for point to point testing shall be agreed in detail with the Employer and must include a plan for the phased change over from any existing remote control and monitoring systems to the new system with the minimum of interruption to the Employer‘s operational capability. CEB HQ and each substation and generating station location.Section 6 . The scope of the re-testing shall be agreed with the Employer on a case-by-case basis. They will typically include the following steps: a) Local Tests for new Outstations Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Telephone system.4.4.1 SCADA/EMS Database The Contractor shall work in coordination with the Employer‘s staff to complete and verify the SCADA/EMS database. On completion of the tests. Digital power line carrier equipment. to prove that the equipment or subsystem is operating correctly and interfaces correctly to equipment and services on that site. 8. The activities shall include but not be limited to:     Completion and verification of network modelling fixed and variable data. DCC. The scheduling of Site Installation Tests shall be subject to coordination with the installation and testing schedules of equipment of other suppliers.4. to the satisfaction of the Employer. These procedures should identify when previous test results may no longer be valid due to subsequent changes on the system. delivery and installation on site. The communication installed at the NSCC. If test results are invalidated by subsequent actions then re-testing will be necessary. Coarse tuning of EMS applications.2          Site Installation Tests A site installation test shall be conducted on each part of the system comprising: SCADA/EMS Master Station.3.195 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .3 Site Update Period During this period the SCADA/EMS database will be brought up to date and the correct connectivity from the Master Station to plant shall be verified. it shall be tested without connection to plant or to the Master Station. Once an Outstation installation is complete and has been configured. 8.3. displays and or the system code. Digital teleprotection signalling equipment. Telecommunication management system.2 Point To Point Testing Site acceptance test procedures for the new SCADA equipment shall ensure that the SCADA database and displays are correctly mapped onto the Outstation input output connections to the plant. Fibre optic communication system. quality procedures that ensure the validity of the results of previous testing are systematically reviewed following subsequent changes in the database. the equipment or subsystem shall be considered ready for the next stage of testing. Therefore.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 8. to which the Subsystem is designed to interface.4. Setting up of Load Forecast application with live data/inputs. Setting up of reports with live data/inputs. The process of testing this mapping may take up to 6 months to complete for existing stations and will be an ongoing task as new Outstations under other projects are ready for service.

4. Where necessary to complete the work the Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating point-topoint testing activities with third parties responsible for the supply of existing Outstations and new ones provided under concurrent projects. If the Outstation and Master Station are stable and operate correctly during this period then with the agreement of all parties those Outstations for which full point to point testing is complete can be transferred to full SCADA monitoring and control. This test shall demonstrate that the overall design of the System meets the functional and performance requirements of the Specification in the field.5 Site Acceptance Tests . using the actual communications network and including equipment supplied by others. 8. c) Stability Tests Each Outstation should operate for at least two weeks monitoring only mode. To ensure prompt remedial action to be instigated the Contractor shall report any deficiencies in such equipment to the Employer fully in writing on their discovery.196 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 8.Section 6 . The correction of deficiencies in such equipment shall not be the responsibility of the Contractor. The System SAT shall be conducted after all the various elements of the System have been installed in the field and have all successfully completed their individual Site Installation Tests and the Site Update activities are complete. The Contractor's test plan shall take due account of the requirement to coordinate testing with third parties responsible for equipment to which the SCADA Master Station is designed to interface. The Contractor shall satisfy himself by testing and other necessary means that the physical communication links between locations supplied by others meets the Contractor's requirements. the links in all input circuits may be left closed but output circuits shall be opened. Conditions and constraints on site may require a different approach to the regime outlined above and a detailed procedure will have to be agreed with the Employer prior to the testing being undertaken. provided that the deficiencies have not resulted from inadequate definition and specification of requirements on the part of the Contractor. to which the System is designed to interface. Once this testing is complete and all problems remedied and retested. b) ‗Safe Plant‘ Tests Data communication to the master station shall be established for an Outstation following satisfactory completion of local testing. Once robust and stable communications have been established and proven between an RTU and the master stations the plant should then be placed in a ―safe‖ situation for personnel and for the power network according to the Employer‘s safety rules. Direct ―end to end‖ or ―point to point‖ testing shall then be carried out to demonstrate the correctness of the mapping between the Master Station database and displays and the connections to the plant. Testing to / from the Outstation shall be carried out using a local GUI or Laptop test device that emulates the master station.4 System Site Acceptance Tests .4. These tests shall be undertaken once the SCADA system is fully tested and operating in a stable and reliable manner. output signals from the Outstation should be simulated at the cross-connection terminals and correct receipt by the plant confirmed. Similarly.SCADA The System Site Acceptance (System SAT) Tests for the main SCADA system shall be conducted on all the interconnected equipment forming the Contractor's scope of supply.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification On completion of plant adaptation works in a substation or generating station the correctness of the works shall be tested by activating each connection on the plant and checking the correct signal is received at the cross connection terminals in the Marshalling Cubicles. Those outstations involving substation automation or DCS schemes will also require slightly different approach although the overall objective will be the same. This will allow all RTU input and output connections to be closed at the cross connections in the Marshalling Cubicles. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.EMS Site acceptance test procedures for the EMS applications software shall include tests to demonstrate the functionality and performance of all EMS applications. With the agreement of the Employer the System SAT may commence once a predefined number of Outstations have had their point to point testing completed. together with equipment of other suppliers to which the System is designed to interface.

c. e. System performance tests to demonstrate that the new telecommunication system will give satisfactory service under normal working conditions. If the Employer determines that a major fault has occurred then the Contractor shall rectify the fault to the satisfaction of the Employer and the 500 hours trial shall restart from the beginning. The correct routing. the Employer shall determine whether it constitutes a minor or a major fault. 8. The system is complete and configured according to the design. g.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The order of testing shall be as follows: a) First all Network Analysis Applications including Study Mode b) Then all Power Applications c) And finally all Forecasting and Scheduling Applications 8. in working order and available for use The initial issue of technical documentation and copies of marked as built drawings have been provided Training has been completed as required by the Contract The arrangements for support during the warranty period have been agreed b. c.197 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . and where appropriate. 8. The Contractor shall have a minimum of one suitably qualified engineer in attendance during the trial period. d. b. Communication end to end circuit testing. The trial period is the 'hands on' part of the Site Acceptance Testing and is to confirm the reliability. System trial operation and availability test over a period of 1 month. The costs of Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. the Contractor may not work or make changes to any part of the system without first obtaining permission from the Employer. Once the system is put into trial operation and availability testing.Section 6 . d. System functional and performance tests under abnormal conditions such as disturbances.5 TESTS ON COMPLETION Once the Employer has approved the SAT test results and the requirements of the previous Clause have been fulfilled the Contractor may proceed to apply to start the tests on completion. If any fault or unexpected event occurs during the 500 hours trial period. All test documentation and records are complete in order and signed off by the Contractor‘s test engineers The spare parts and test equipment are complete. e. Functionality testing of the telecommunication system.4. stability and robustness of the SCADA/DMS System.7 Readiness to Commence Tests on Completion The Contractor may apply to commence the Tests On Completion when the Employer is satisfied that the Site Acceptance Testing and commissioning has shown that the works as a whole comply with the specification and that: a.Telecommunications The Contractor shall test the telecommunication system as a standalone system prior to connection to the Master station and the RTUs.6 Acceptance Tests .4. f. The tests shall include but not be limited to proving: a. The tests on completion comprise a 500 hours trial period during which the System shall perform to the requirements of the Employer and in accordance with the specification. the correct automatic re-routing of all circuits.

The System and all items of equipment have successfully completed all the specified tests All failures. The re-testing shall take account of all aspects of the System performance and functionality that might be affected by the remedial work. problems and reservations noted during the tests have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Employer b. If either of these conditions has not been complied with.2 Partial & Operational Acceptance Depending on the scope and outcome of the Tests on Completion Partial and or Operational Acceptance Certificates shall be issued in accordance with the stipulations of the General Conditions of Contract. All costs associated with non-conformances and re-tests shall be borne by the Contractor.5.198 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . If the System as a whole is not available for normal operation due to a fault. 8.5. the Contractor shall be responsible for taking steps to rectify the situation in an agreed timescale.6 NON-CONFORMANCE In the event that the equipment fails during testing. 8. 8.Section 6 . the Contractor shall provide full details to the Employer of the reasons for the failure and the proposals for overcoming the failure. the trial period shall recommence from the point at which it was interrupted. then the necessary corrective action shall be agreed between the Contractor and the Employer. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. If such a failure occurs as a result of any deficiency on the part of the Contractor. but the fault is still judged by the Employer to be minor. as soon as the Contractor has cleared the fault to the satisfaction of the Employer. Minor faults that do not stop the system as a whole from functioning in accordance with the requirements of the Specification shall be remedied in a manner and to a timetable agreed with the Employer. Any proposed modifications to previously approved designs shall be approved in accordance with relevant provisions in the Contract documents before implementation.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification any such re-testing shall be borne entirely by the Contractor.1 System Acceptance The System will be accepted by the Employer in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract and if both: a.

These spares shall include but not be limited to: 1. with the faulty modules being either scrapped. subassemblies or complete items of equipment from other parties. the System design shall be such as to minimise equipment failures and optimise fault-finding and maintenance. power supplies and ancillary items 3. if damaged beyond repair. Teleprotection signalling units and interfaces Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Down-time must be reduced to a minimum. Processors. Diagnostic and test facilities shall be provided.2 MAINTENANCE PHILOSOPHY It is the intention of the Employer to ultimately undertake ‗first line‘ maintenance with assistance from the Contractor being provided through suitable maintenance contracts for problems that cannot be resolved by the Employer's maintenance technicians.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 9. UPS modules etc 5. including turn around times. Peripheral equipment shall be easily removable from service and either replaced by standby equipment or spare equipment without the loss of System operation. communication interfaces and ancillary items 2. battery cells. The Contractor shall operate a module repair and replacement scheme. SPARES AND MAINTENANCE 9.3 DESIGN TO FACILITATE MAINTENANCE As the System is required to operate continuously. main memory. The Contractor shall supply as part of the Contract a set of spares that comprises 5% of the total number of each type of installed replaceable units/modules (with a minimum of one unit of each type) to be supplied. The Bidder shall specify. complies with the requirements detailed in this Clause or take such other steps as may be necessary to ensure that the objectives of this Clause are achieved. interfaces and ancillary items 7. as part of the Works. discs. shall be provided by the Contractor. It is therefore of prime importance that the Contractor shall guarantee the availability of spare parts to facilitate the continued availability and performance of the System for that period of time. Processors. Where the Contractor purchases modules. In addition. 9. for the main equipment and all peripheral items.4 SPARE PARTS The maintenance philosophy that will be adopted will generally be for fault finding to card level and module replacement. Power Supplies. charger components. PAX modules.Section 6 . as an option.1 GENERAL The System purchased will be required to function for a minimum of fifteen years. including fault-tracing and clearance procedures. Comprehensive maintenance documentation. Comprehensive provision of self diagnostic facilities is an essential part of this scope of supply. required to enable first line maintenance to be carried out by the Employer. 9. as relevant to his Contract. the Contractor shall obtain statements from those parties confirming that their policy with respect to support of their product(s). SDH equipment and interfaces 6. as appropriate. 9. The requirements for spares and maintenance contracts to meet these objectives are detailed in the following Clauses. the provision of maintenance courses for the Employer's technicians and by the purchase of suitable spares holdings. One complete 48Vdc charger unit. including tools and instruments. equipment shall be designed to facilitate maintenance.199 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . details of which shall be provided with the Bid. RTU I/O modules. any special equipment. This objective will be achieved by a combination of a maintenance agreement covering Master Station hardware and software. LED Video Wall board lamps and ancillary items 4. or returned to the Contractor for repair. VDU screens.

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

In order to assist in the ordering of additional spare parts, the Bidder is required to recommend a spares holding to cover the first four years, following the end of the Defects Liability Period, and to provide a cost breakdown. The Contractor shall not have access to spares held by the Employer during the Defects Liability Period. The Bidder shall base the list of recommended spare parts on the above maintenance philosophy. This list shall be submitted as an optional price and shall include a cost breakdown. Prices for the supply of spares shall include all associated charges and shall remain valid for orders placed within the term of the Defects Liability Period. The Employer shall be at liberty to order quantities of spare parts at variance with those listed by the Bidder. The prices shall remain valid for any such variation of quantities, unless stated otherwise in the Bid. The cost of spare parts shall not be used to calculate the cost of any variations to the Contract. The spare parts recommended shall be identical functionally, electrically and mechanically, to the corresponding parts in the equipment supplied under the Contract and shall be suitably packed and clearly marked, ready for reception at the Employer's stores. Any special handling instructions shall be clearly marked on the packages. The Contractor shall supply equipment lists of the recommended spare parts which include the names and addresses of the individual manufacturers of the listed items. The recommended spares holding shall be quoted on a unit basis, as an option, for selection by the Employer at any time up until the end of the Defects Liability Period. The availability of spare parts to the Employer, at a reasonable cost, shall be guaranteed by the Contractor as follows: a) The Contractor shall maintain an adequate stock of spare parts for a minimum period of ten years (or until the end of the equipment's specified life) after the product has been removed from quantity production, declared obsolete or officially removed from sale b) Where a component, which is not under the Contractor's control, has become unavailable, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to offer a compatible alternative at reasonable cost c) Design improvements or changes made to a product during its production run shall be carefully assessed such that component interchangeability shall not be affected. This requirement shall apply to equipment manufactured by the Contractor and also to equipment purchased from other suppliers. 9.5 MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT

A maintenance agreement shall be offered to cover Master Station hardware, system software and all application software maintenance and support. The maintenance agreements shall provide the requirements detailed in the following Clauses. The Bid shall provide the costs of providing such agreements as Optional Works considering mandatory spares offered. The prices shall incorporate escalation formulae to provide a means of adjustment during their period of validity (5 years from the end of the Defects Liability Period). Prices quoted shall include the costs for providing guaranteed attendance within 24 hours of callout. Costs for providing a quicker response shall also be stated. 9.5.1 Scope of Agreements

The Contractor shall fully support all Master Station hardware and software supplied under the Contract for the life of the System or until such support is no longer required by the Employer. The level of support provided shall be defined in the maintenance agreement. The Bidder shall provide details of the maintenance agreement including elements supported by suppliers of proprietary equipment. The details shall show a breakdown of each type of service for each part of the overall Master Station system 9.5.2 Period of the Maintenance Agreement

The maintenance agreement shall come into effect on the expiry of the Defects Liability Period. It shall be extended each year on the anniversary of that date for a further period of 12 months unless and until the Employer terminates the Agreement.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 200 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

9.5.3

Charges for the Maintenance Agreement

During the Defects Liability Period, all the conditions of the maintenance agreement shall apply without additional cost to the Employer. The charge for provision of services under the maintenance agreement shall be calculated from a formula to be stated in the maintenance agreement. This formula shall remain in force for a period of five years commencing from the day after the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period. The terms of the formula may include local labour and materials indices and currency exchange rates but the formula itself shall not be changed during the five year period. Two months before the expiry date of the current annual maintenance period, the Contractor shall calculate the maintenance charge that will apply for the following year, using labour and materials indices and exchange rates that are current at that time, and may submit an Application for Payment of that amount. The Employer will check the amount claimed and, if satisfied with its correctness, will pay the Contractor the amount due within 28 days of the date of the Application for Payment. The terms of the maintenance agreement may be renegotiated at the expiry of the five year period. 9.5.4 Maintenance Services

The maintenance agreement shall include provision of the services defined below. The charge for these services shall be stated in the maintenance agreement. Where indicated below, the provision of services shall be included within the annual charge, such that no additional maintenance charge shall be incurred by the Employer when they use these services. Costs of any routine maintenance shall be included within the annual charge. 9.5.4.1 Telephone Support The Contractor shall provide verbal telephone support to the Employer personnel during normal the Employer office hours to provide advice on the use of system facilities and to assist with any problems that may arise. This service shall not be subject to a use charge. 9.5.4.2 Remote Access Support The Contractor shall offer, as an option, to provide facilities for remote support and maintenance of the SCADA/EMS System via a dial-in modem link (or equivalent) back to the original supplier of the System or other appropriate organisation. The amount by which the annual maintenance charge would vary for inclusion of this option in the agreement shall be clearly identified in the Schedule of Prices. This facility shall incorporate appropriate measures, to the satisfaction of the Employer, to ensure the System is secure against any unauthorised use of the link. The facility shall also prohibit the initiation of commands via the link port that may interfere with the Employer operations, e.g. prevent the issue of SCADA control commands. It shall be possible to configure which of the System's facilities are prohibited to be used via remote access. 9.5.4.3 Fault Rectification The Contractor shall rectify all faults identified by the Employer. When a fault occurs, the Employer will advise the Contractor of the nature of the fault and confirm the date and time of reporting it. The Contractor shall provide a suitably qualified and experienced maintenance engineer on site within the guaranteed response time stated in the maintenance agreement. The Contractor shall ensure maintenance personnel are available 24 hours per day, 7 days per week for repair of high priority faults. Lower priority faults may be repaired during normal working hours. 9.5.4.4 New Software Releases New software releases may take place during the life of the System to provide solutions to identified problems, or enhancements to System functionality and or performance. The Contractor shall notify the Employer of all such releases of software. The maintenance agreement shall include the issue, installation and testing of new software releases, as necessary, to resolve identified problems and to ensure continued software support by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer (all costs shall be covered by the annual charge).

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 201 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

New software releases that are not essential to resolve identified faults and are not necessary in order for the Contractor to maintain software support may also be available. The Employer shall be entitled to purchase these optional updates at their discretion. The costs of any such upgrades are to be separately negotiated between the Employer and the Contractor. A decision by the Employer not to purchase such upgrades shall not effect the obligation of the Contractor to continue to provide System support under the maintenance agreement. After any new software has been installed on the Purchase equipment, the Contractor's maintenance personnel shall test the software at least as thoroughly as it was tested during Factory Acceptance Testing. 9.5.5 Termination of the Agreement

The Purchase may terminate the maintenance agreement at any time. Such termination must be in writing and will take effect from the expiry date of the current maintenance year. 9.6 PRODUCT CHANGES AND ENHANCEMENTS

Changes in the design of items of equipment may make items supplied for this contract obsolete and may therefore affect the future spare parts availability. The Contractor is therefore required to have a company commitment to product enhancements in order to avoid obsolescence, while taking advantages of new technology in an evolutionary manner. Design changes and product enhancements should therefore be made such that they are directly compatible with the present items. The Contractor is therefore required to: a) Fully document and forward to the Employer details of product improvements that are made during the marketing period of the equipment, as soon as it is incorporated on the product line. This documentation shall clearly identify changes to be made and reasons for the change. This requirement shall also apply to the Contractor‘s sub-suppliers. b) Notify the Employer 12 months prior to ceasing production of replacement parts (for spares inventory purposes). c) Notify the Employer within 2 months after a design change has been implemented (after expiry of the Defects Liability Period) on equipment supplied for this Contract. 9.7 CONSUMABLES

All consumables such as printer paper, printer toners and cartridges, cartridge tapes, discs, etc., sufficient for one year of normal operation of the System shall be provided by the Contractor as part of the Scope of Work. These items shall be delivered in accordance with an agreed programme, but the initial consignment shall be available to the Employer at the start of the Defects Liability Period. The Bidder shall submit with the Bid a proposed list of consumable items suitable for two years operation of the system. The list shall include itemised prices, valid for purchase in quantities at the discretion of the Employer at any time up to the end of the Defects Liability period. 9.8 COMMISSIONING PERIODS

The Contractor shall be required to provide all necessary spare parts and consumable items up to the time of Handover, including those required for the site commissioning period and for the Reliability Test Period. The Contractor shall note that spares and consumables purchased by the Employer will not be available for use by the Contractor during site acceptance testing and commissioning, or during the trial period. 9.9 TOOLS AND TEST APPARATUS

Specialised tools and test apparatus listed below, that is required for maintenance and fault finding including that used for setting, measuring and maintaining performance levels shall be supplied as part of the scope of works for each of the equipment types or subsystems supplied under the Contract. The types of tools and apparatus shall be defined in the Price Schedules and the Bidder shall state the recommended numbers of each device. 9.9.1 SDH/PDH tester

The SDH/PDH tester shall have the following minimum features:

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 202 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

                   

Transmission test functions such as optical power measurements at 1310nm and 1550nm wavelengths, BER testing, end-to-end error performance etc Already built-in interfaces such as E1 balanced, E1 unbalanced, STM-1/4/16 etc Full PDH support from 1.5Mbps to 140 Mbps including nx64kbps User configurable setup and automated functions Anomaly generation and analysis Line bit rates up to 2.5Gbps Overhead byte capture capability Intrusive, non intrusive and monitor modes capability Automatic protection switching with resolution of 1ms Round trip delay measurements Service disruption measurements Alarm and error resolution better than 100ms Rugged and light weight Touch screen display User friendly Long battery life for continuous testing Built-in data storage capability USB connectivity for data transfer to PC/flash disk Reports and print outs Complete with hard protective case and accessories 9.9.2 Datacom tester

The datacom tester shall have the following minimum features:           Support V.24/V.28, X21/V.11, V.35/V.36 and 10/100Mbps Ethernet interfaces DTE/DCE emulation and bidirectional monitoring capability Support data rate up to 10Mbps Self loop testing capability User configurable setup and automated functions Rugged and light weight Large display screen User friendly Long battery life for continuous testing Complete with hard protective case and accessories 9.9.3         Digital multimeter

The digital multimeter shall have the following minimum features: Voltage (ac & dc), current, resistance continuity with beeper, frequency, diode test USB connectivity for data transfer to PC/flash disk Minimum 0.03% dc accuracy Rugged and light weight Large display screen User friendly Long battery life for continuous testing Complete with hard protective case and accessories 9.9.4          Signal generator

The signal generator shall have the following minimum features: Flexible signal generator capable of analogue, digital and mixed signals Real-time sequencing capability for infinite waveform loops and pattern length generation Minimum of 4 channels Minimum of 14 bit resolution Minimum of 1.2 GS/s sampling rate User friendly Rugged and light weight Long battery life for continuous testing Built-in data storage capability

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 203 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

  

Data transfer to PC/flash disk Reports and print outs Complete with hard protective case and accessories 9.9.5 Maintenance laptop computer

The laptop computer shall have the following minimum features:        Minimum dual core Pentium processor Minimum 4Gb RAM Minimum 250 Gb HDD Built-in USB, RS232, ethernet & wireless LAN interfaces Qwerty keyboard and optical mouse Complete with necessary operating and applications software Complete with protective bag and accessories 9.10 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD

9.10.1 General There shall be a Defects Liability Period that shall apply to the entire Works provided under the contract. The Defects Liability Period for each part of the Works shall commence on the date that the associated Operational Acceptance Certificate is issued and will cover the Works or portion thereof covered by the Certificate. The Contractor shall provide Spares and Maintenance support during this period including the provision of Master Station hardware and software support specified for the Maintenance Agreement. Where any item of equipment has an original supplier‘s warranty that extends beyond the Defects Liability Period then that warranty shall be effective up to its expiry date. 9.10.2 Attendance During the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall attend to and clear all defects within a reasonable time of being notified of the defect in writing. All critical faults that have an operational or security impact upon the System shall be attended to within 2 hours of notifying the Contractor of the fault. Less critical faults shall be attended to within 24 hours. The Contractor shall maintain the necessary field staff to enable these targets to be met. If the Contractor does not attend to the defect within the stipulated period (from notification) and thereafter remedy the defect within an agreed period, the conditions of contract shall apply in respect to the 'failure to remedy defects'. 9.10.3 Quality Control The Contractor's actions during the Defects Liability Period shall be subject to quality assurance and the Contractor's Quality Plan and Procedures shall reflect this requirement. The quality control shall ensure full documentation of the following: a) Record of dates of defect notification and attendance b) Full report on the nature of the defect c) Reasons for the defect d) Recommended remedial actions e) Agreement with the Employer on recommended actions, testing by the Contractor to prove efficacy of remedial actions and timetable for implementation f) Results of corrective actions and any associated tests. 9.10.4 Access The Contractor shall comply with and make due allowance for the Employer‘s access control and Permit to Work system when attending to defects.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 204 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

9.10.5 Replacement Parts Where the agreed remedial action is replacement of defective parts, then these shall be replaced within 48 hours of the requirement being identified. The Contractor shall provide, as part of the Scope of Work, a spare parts holding sufficient to ensure that equipment repair times are consistent with the specified, or otherwise approved, availability target figures, for the duration of the Defects Liability Period. The Contractor shall supplement the initial spares holding, if omissions or inadequacies become apparent during the Defects Liability Period. The Employer will hold the spare parts for use by the Contractor. All surplus spare parts remaining at the end of the Defects Liability Period shall be retained by the Employer.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 205 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

10. TRAINING 10.1 GENERAL

The Employer considers that a programme of training for all staff expected to be involved with various aspects of the Project is particularly important if the SCADA/EMS System is to be effectively utilised. The Contractor shall run a programme of courses to cover all the Works to be supplied under the Contract, the various grades of personnel involved and at times to suit phases of implementation of the Project. The programming shall ensure that the Employer‘s personnel are fully trained in operational, maintenance and system engineering aspects prior to initial commissioning. The programme shall also be arranged to minimise the time between completion of training and commencement of system commissioning. Training shall include but not be limited to the following areas: a) SCADA/EMS System                SCADA/EMS System Overview Operations Database and Display Maintenance SCADA Applications EMS Applications Other Applications Administration

b) Outstations Outstations Plant Modifications and Interfaces

c) Telecommunication System Telecommunication System Overview Fibre optic communication system Telecommunication management system Digital power line carrier equipment Teleprotection signalling equipment Telephone system

d) UPS and Battery Charger Systems e) Building Services and Diesel Generator The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Employer, a synopsis of all training courses offered at least eight months prior to initial commissioning. Generally courses should be scheduled to take place on Site. However, courses necessary for personnel involved with data base building may take place at the Contractor‘s works. Additionally, where specialised equipment is only available at the supplier‘s works courses may be held at these works. The Employer wishes to introduce a number of their engineers into the project at an early stage. There shall therefore be provision for incorporating the Employer‘s engineers into the SCADA/EMS System integration, database population and display building, and pre-acceptance testing activities at the Contractor‘s works. It is anticipated that this work would involve up to four engineers from the Employer, for training in system administration, SCADA database and display maintenance, EMS database maintenance and EMS applications tuning. The Contractor shall arrange for all travel and accommodation as well as travel visas for the Employer‘s engineers when attending this training at the Contractor‘s works. The Contractor shall provide in his offer for the air fares, hotels, subsistence and local travel for the Employer‘s staff while they are attending this training at the Contractor‘s works, relevant training materials and training notes and training facilities including the use of any test instruments and equipment during the training period.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 206 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

depending on the detailed design of the products supplied under the Contract. Access Control and Security f) Data Acquisition g) Alarm and Event Handling h) Supervisory Control i) Historical Data Recording and Reporting Facilities Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. All training courses. how the skills developed can be used h) Description of course activities i) Description of course documentation.207 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . but not be limited to. This shall include all ‗third party products‘ such as operating systems and their associated utilities and diagnostics.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 10. the Employer‘s staff shall be able to operate and maintain the all equipment provided under the respective sections of work and in the case of the SCADA/EMS System to supervise (control and monitor) the operation of the electrical system in all operating modes using all facilities. The scope and content of courses should ensure a systematic and comprehensive coverage of all the operational functionality and maintenance requirements identified in both the design and the operations and maintenance documentation for the Works delivered under the Contract. The training shall be to such a level that on completion of the courses. 10. i.e. i. ‗hands-on‘ experience of the equipment involved. The Contractor is therefore requested to provide a number of different courses to accommodate the requirements of the different skills each group of personnel will need to acquire in the context of the Employer's actual operating environment. All courses shall consist of a series of lectures. the specific topics listed in the following sub-clauses. Deployment and Maintenance Utilities e) User Interface. the skills the course is intended to develop g) Aims.3 SCADA/EMS SYSTEM COURSES 10. or equivalent topics.2 CONTENT The syllabus of each course shall contain the following types of information: a) Course name b) Duration c) Locations for the training d) Types of staff who would benefit from the course e) Pre-requisite skills of course attendees f) Objectives.Section 6 .3. discussions and demonstrations and. All relevant equipment documentation shall be available during the training courses. the courses shall include.e. notes and documentation shall be in the English language. Pre-recorded video presentations shall not be used as the primary means of training. engineers and maintenance staff. They shall also be able to maintain and trouble shoot the equipment up to the point where. As a minimum. the Contractor recommends calling out specialist service agencies. As a minimum the course shall include: a) Hardware and Software Architecture b) Operating Systems and Associated Utilities c) Applications Architecture and Deployment d) Database Systems.1 Overview Course The SCADA/EMS Overview course shall include an overview of the functions and facilities of the system and an appreciation of the operational and maintenance aspects of the system. due to the nature of the fault. particularly for operators.

Searching.3. As a minimum.3 Database and Display Maintenance Courses Database and display maintenance engineers will require a detailed appreciation of the tools for populating and editing the databases and building and amending user graphical displays. As a minimum the database courses shall include: a) SCADA Database Architecture b) Database Rules and Naming Conventions c) Data Categories and Attributes d) Data Entry and Modification e) Mapping Data points to Outstation Addresses f) Outstation Data point Addressing Conventions g) Switching Between Databases h) Historical Database Architecture i) j) Historical Database Management Historical Data Archiving and Retrieval k) EMS Database Architecture Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. these courses shall include: a) Workstation Access and Security b) Navigation of the User Interface c) Network and S/S User Displays d) Network Colouring and Tracing e) Display Data Presentation Conventions f) Real Time and Study Mode Views g) Alarm and Event Presentation.2 System Operation Courses The SCADA/EMS operations courses shall equip Operations staff with a detailed knowledge of the system operational functionality and how it may be applied in the day to day operation and management of the network.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification j) Printing k) EMS Applications l) Common Applications m) System Status and Management 10. Sorting and Filtering h) Supervisory Control i) j) Manual Entry/Hand Dressing EMS Applications k) Common Applications l) Job Management m) Switching Schedules n) Safety Documentation Facilities o) Tagging p) Trending q) Printing and Printer Management r) Historical Data Access and Report Generation s) Log books and Scratch Pads 10.Section 6 .208 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .3.

operating system.4 EMS Applications Courses Power systems analysis engineers will require a thorough understanding of the theoretical underpinnings of the EMS applications and how to configure.5 System Administration Courses The system administrator is the key to the secure and efficient operation of the Master Station. Telecommunication management system. Digital power line carrier equipment. a) Basic functionality of each application b) The displays associated with each application c) Use of tuning parameters d) Power system model parameters e) Verifying and Interpreting Results 10. run.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification l) EMS Database Data Entry and Modification m) Data Consistency and Integrity n) Database Verification o) Database Update And. d. c. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.4 LAN management and TCP/IP addressing Operating system administration TELECOMMUNICATION COURSES Training courses to be provided include: a. tune them and verify the results. they shall cover: a) Managing the SCADA/EMS applications software b) Building the operational system from source code c) Running diagnostic routines d) Managing user accounts e) System Backup management f) Rebooting servers and workstations g) Managing trace files and crash dumps h) Adding/Changing hardware i) j) 10. these courses shall cover.209 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .3.Section 6 . as a minimum the display courses shall cover: a) Display Construction Conventions b) Defining Layers and Levels of Detail c) Using and Amending Graphics Libraries d) Drawing and Editing e) Linking to Dynamic Data f) Defining Display Navigation g) Updating and Distributing Displays 10. As a minimum. As a minimum. The system administration courses shall provide an introduction to the task of managing the system hardware. Teleprotection signalling equipment. Fibre optic communication system. b. local area network and the SCADA/EMS applications software.3.

data communications and Outstation equipment Test gear Fault diagnosis to module level including the use of online and. The courses shall provide the attendees with a sufficient understanding of the functionality of each part of the system and its operation and maintenance requirements. based on the following numbers of personnel per course. System expansion and upgrade capability. testing and commissioning techniques. Fault finding and trouble shooting. i. b. d. if applicable. Telephone system. Repair and routine maintenance. System hardware and software. Installation. 10. f. Computer. As a minimum the contents shall cover: a. the UPS System. j. c. e. The Employer‘s staff will be present during the installation/commissioning period and it is essential that they are fully involved in any on-site corrections/modifications to hardware. SCADA/EMS Courses No of Trainees Duration (days) Location Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. together with the cost per additional attendee for larger numbers. e. h.5 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE COURSES Personnel who will be responsible for maintaining equipment will require a significantly different type of training to enable them to undertake fault finding to ‗lowest replaceable unit‘ level. b.g. System operation and configuration. The telecommunication training courses carried out at manufacturers‘ works shall be conducted in two sessions at different time so to enable the Employer to plan his staffing resources accordingly. Cabling requirements. g. f. Interfaces and standards supported. Maintenance courses of appropriate content and duration shall be provided for the Employer personnel that cover: a. It is anticipated that these courses will be conducted on the Contractor's premises or at the locations of the subject equipment's manufacture prior to the equipment's delivery. System design/budget calculations.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification e. 10.Section 6 . e. System overview and architecture.210 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . c. offline diagnostic software Preventive maintenance Calibration of equipment Fault finding exercises d.6 COURSE ATTENDEES The Bidder shall provide prices for each of the above courses. There shall also be maintenance courses for all auxiliary systems and subsystems supplied under the Contract.

The Bidder may be required by the Employer to make a video recording of any of the formal Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification SCADA/EMS Courses System Overview Course System Operation Courses – Senior Engineers. and fully documented notes shall be available to the Employer no later than 2 months before the commencement of the course. The prices for the complete courses quoted in the Bid shall cover all the Works delivered under the Contract. The times at which the various training courses will take place shall be stated.211 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 2 sessions for 5 persons System Operation Courses – 3 sessions for 5 persons Database & Display Maintenance Courses EMS Application Courses System Administration Courses System Maintenance Courses Telecommunication Courses System Overview Course Fibre optic communication system – 2 sessions for 4 persons Telecommunication Management System – 2 sessions for 4 persons Digital PLC equipment system – 2 sessions for 4 persons Teleprotection signalling equipment system – 2 sessions for 4 persons Telephone system – 2 sessions for 4 persons Outstation Courses Outstation Functionality Outstation Architecture Outstation Hardware Outstation Software Maintenance and fault finding Expansion procedures Power Supply Systems Other Equipment NSCC UPS System Building Services Equipment No of Trainees 20 10 15 6 6 4 6 Duration (days) 1 10 5 10 10 10 10 Location Sri Lanka Works Sri Lanka Works Works Works Works 20 8 8 8 8 8 1 10 5 5 3 10 Sri Lanka Works Works Works Works Works 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 Works Works Works Works Works Works Works 2 2 5 5 Works Sri Lanka Attendees of all courses shall be provided with sets of relevant course materials.Section 6 .

The prices of the training courses shall be detailed in full such that additions/deletions to personnel/courses can be calculated by the Employer without recourse to the Contractor. Each course shall be reviewed on completion to determine if the trainees have achieved an acceptable level of ‗take up‘. 10. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.212 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The Bidder shall include in their offer an outline proposal in terms of content and duration for the formal part and for the ‗on the job‘ training at the SCADA/EMS supplier‘s premises.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification training courses run by the Contractor to be used in the future for ‗in-house‘ refresher training and training additional the Employer personnel.1 Course Duration The courses shall be of sufficient length and pace and include sufficient practice exercises to ensure that the subject matter is covered thoroughly and the trainees are able to demonstrate their understanding of what they have been taught. Additional training on specific topics shall be provided if the required take up of knowledge and skills has not been sufficient to meet the goal of the course. It is expected that a period of three months at the Contractor‘s works will be necessary for a trainee to gain maximum benefit from this type of training.Section 6 .6.

). System documentation shall comply with the relevant sections of ISO 6592 (or an equivalent national or international standard).. manuals.5 3. Documentation and drawings shall relate solely to the actual equipment supplied. Outstations.4 3. where this is requested.2 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2. 11.4. One sample copy of a set of operating manuals supplied for a similar contract shall be provided with the Bid.213 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . All information shall be presented in a format that enables the Bid to be assessed and compared with other Bids.7 3. workstations. printers. etc. specifications. size and layout of the NSCC building shall be provided with sufficient detail to enable the proposal to be evaluated and compared to other offers. all interfaces to other systems and how all items of equipment are interconnected (e.3. The following specific items of documentation shall be included in the Bid: Table 11. One copy of the Bidder's current QA Manuals and an appropriate sample of a Project Quality Plan shall be supplied with the Bid. the connections to the Master Station. etc. information relating to variants not supplied under this Contract and options that are not potential future extensions to the supplied System.1 Items to be Provided with the Bidders Offer Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Deliverable Documents SCADA/EMS System Overview SCADA/EMS Master Station Equipment and Applications Telecommunication Overview Fibre optic communication system Telecommunication management system Power line carrier Teleprotection signalling equipment Telephone system Optical budget calculations Specification Reference 2 2 3.2 3.Section 6 . e. An overview drawing of the Telecommunication System shall be provided that clearly shows the topology of the SDH system. The Bidder shall provide clear distinction in their Bid between the main offer and any alternative offer(s) or options that are not included in the Bid Price for the main offer. They should not include any irrelevant or superfluous information.6 3. Drawings that illustrate the general appearance. component lists.g. This may be submitted electronically in CDROM. PLC links. Outstations.2. along with an issue or revision number and a record of modification.g. An overview drawing shall be provided that clearly shows the architecture of the SCADA/EMS Master Station. the Network Management System and the PAX. These may be submitted electronically in CDROM. DOCUMENTATION 11.1 GENERAL The following details the document requirements for the Works covered by the Specification Document. Any additional features offered that have not been requested in this Specification shall be clearly identified in the offer. All drawings.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 11. All Schedules shall be fully completed in all respects and a copy provided in electronic form. shall have a unique document identification number that conforms to an approved numbering scheme.2 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH THE BID The Bidder shall provide sufficient information to fully describe their Bid in all aspects and to clearly demonstrate the compliance of their offer with this Specification.5 3.2.

4 Vol. design documentation and drawings. Before proceeding with the manufacture of equipment. Table 11.3 Outstation equipment Deliverable Documents Specification Reference 4 5 6 6 2.4 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for requesting information in a timely manner to meet their programme requirements. the electrical network and associated plant including substation plans. 1 PART I Section 3 11.2 below shall be supplied after Award of the Contract.12 7 17 17. The Contractor shall also provide. information in the form of drawings and documents relating to the existing operational transmission SCADA system. The submissions shall be sufficiently detailed to enable the design to be assessed for compliance with the Specification with respect to design. During the design phase.2.7. shall be submitted by the Contractor for review by the Employer by the dates and in the numbers and types specified. paragraphs or sections within the FDS to the relevant tests within the factory and site test procedures to verify that all aspects of the supplied System are tested against the approved design. as part of the Functional Design Specification (FDS).1 General The documents and drawings to be supplied after the award of Contract are specified below. A column shall be included to indicate how closely the proposed design meets the specified requirements. This information shall be provided via the regular meetings and reports.3 2. The documentation listed in. but not limited to.Section 6 . including the Functional Design Specification. upon written request. operation and maintenance. paragraphs or sections within the FDS prepared by the Contractor that uniquely address each specified requirement.1 Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems & 48Vdc systems Proposed control room design NSCC Building Conceptual design System sizing calculation System Performance calculation System Availability calculation QA Manuals Sample Quality Plan and Procedures Project references where offered system(s) are in service. the Contractor shall provide sufficient information to enable the Employer to be assured that the design is proceeding satisfactorily.214 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . installation.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Item 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 11. Detailed Project Implementation Programme Hydro optimization algorithm DOCUMENTATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING THE CONTRACT 11. a traceability assessment that shall provide cross references between each Clause within this Specification (and other pertinent documents) and the clauses. The Employer shall make available to the Contractor. A further traceability assessment shall also be provided that cross references the clauses. manufacture. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3.3.4.

Latest Date for Submission 4 weeks from effective Contract start date.8 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2 12 13 14 15 16 11.4.5 11.5.3.2 Items of Documentation to be Deliverable during the Contract Item 1 Deliverable Documents Programme of Work Reference 11.6 11. 11.2 3 months after the Effective Date of Award Not less than 8 weeks before tests are scheduled to be conducted.Section 6 . Dimensions & Environmental Requirements for all Equipment All Functional Design Specification Documents Control Centre Designs. 4 weeks from effective Contract start date.3 2.3 4 weeks before delivery of system to site Not more than 12 weeks after test(s) performed 1 months prior to commencement of training 3 months after hand over.2 11.5. Chapter 4 Section 6 Part C 11.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 11.3.1 Detail any information or actions required for Contractor‘s work to proceed Detail power supply requirements at sites where equipment is to be installed. 5. Detail for equipment to be supplied.5.1 11. 17 18 Synopsis of all Training Courses All ‗As Built‘ Documentation 10.Control and Equipment Room layouts Test Plan.215 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 4 weeks from effective Contract start date. Detail any requirements for interfacing to equipment outside of contract supply. Schedule and Procedures for Factory Acceptance Testing Details of Delivery Arrangements Draft Design.4 General Requirements Vol.1& 11.3. Operation & Maintenance Manuals Detailed Installation Programme Test Plan.8.4.3.4 11. 2 Quality Plan and Procedures Schedule of Contractor‘s Documents and Drawings Specification of Configuration Data 3 4 5 Civil Works Requirements 6 Power Supply Requirements 2 months after the Effective Date of Award 7 Specification of Communication Requirements 8 9 10 Weights. Schedule and Procedures for Tests on Completion Test Reports 11 11.

fire detection and protection system.3.2 Items of Documentation to be Deliverable during the Contract Item Deliverable Documents Reference Latest Date for Submission Each Month commencing end of first complete month following contract start date.Section 6 . 11. specifications of materials and equipment.216 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . design calculations and a design analysis for the project for item 5 in Table 11. The Contractor's Document Schedule shall Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3 Schedule of Contractor's Documents and Drawings A Document Schedule shall be submitted to the Employer for approval that lists all the documents and drawings to be submitted by the Contractor. As the design process proceeds.3. The design documentation shall consist of the following as a minimum: a) Architectural Drawings b) Foundation Plans with location of piles and columns c) Slab thickness with steel reinforcement d) Slab control joints e) Elevation view of wall sections f) Roof plan and roof framing system g) Concrete masonry details h) Concrete masonry wall expansion joints i) j) Details of foundation connections Beam to beam. The Contractor shall correct and resubmit drawings and documents that are rejected or returned with comments or corrections. climate control-air conditioning) m) Detailed lighting design calculations and layout drawings n) Detailed plumbing design drawings o) Detailed lightning and earthing protection design.2 Specific Requirements for NSCC Building The Contractor shall provide the detailed drawings. beam to girder and beam to column connections k) Detailed electrical drawings that include load design l) Detailed drawings and specifications of each of the services provided (Access control.3. showing the scheduled date of first submission and expected date of final issue. The sequence of submission of the drawings and documents shall be such that all relevant information and data is available to the Employer for examining each document on the date it is received. 19 Monthly Progress Reports 11.5 11. It is an essential part of the design phase of the project and the approval procedure that documents and drawings should be updated periodically to reflect those amendments and the increasing depth of detail available. Documents and drawings shall be subject to review and approval by the Employer. it is inevitable that amendments will occur which will impact upon previously submitted and reviewed documents.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table 11.2.

The title block and system of serial numbering shall be approved by the Employer. coding and testing activities for each software module design. The following activities shall be identified: a) Design activities b) Provision of information by the Employer c) Data engineering d) Submission of design documents and drawings for review e) Receipt of final design documents and drawings f) Placing of purchase orders g) Receipt of materials h) Fabrication and manufacture i) j) Submission of test documents for review Testing at manufacturers' premises k) Delivery l) Installation m) Commissioning n) Site testing o) Training p) Delivery of final documentation For software production. the commencement and completion dates for the principal activities and the critical path for the whole of the Works. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The Contractor shall include the Employer's drawing number on all drawings. revision number and issue record and a graphic scale. numbers will be issued to the Contractor for this purpose. on the PERT chart. The dependencies between tasks and the critical path for software production shall also be identified.4 Programme of Work The Contractor shall submit a Programme of Works soon after Award of Contract. The detailed programme shall be in the form of a PERT or other approved type of chart and shall indicate for each Section and Sub-section of the Works. together with the anticipated dates. where appropriate. the Programme of Work shall show clearly.3. A detailed Programme of Work shall be submitted following the site surveys and as part of the Functional Design Specification documentation. Blocks of drawing The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing and keeping up-to-date a contract drawing list showing the numbers and titles of each drawing and document and the current status of approval by the Employer.Section 6 . the design. This shall be the programme submitted with the Bid. All drawings submitted shall be folded to either A3 or A4 size. All documents and drawings shall have a title. the drawing title block shall be clearly readable without needing to unfold the drawing. the PERT shall identify the latest dates for supply to the Contractor of data and interface details. Finally.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification indicate those drawings and documents due for periodic update and resubmission. When folded. document/drawing number. 11. modified and updated as required to correspond to actual Contract start date and any agreed amendments.217 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

expressed as a percentage. The FDS shall include. but not be limited to: a) Description of the design in sufficient detail to demonstrate compliance with the Specification. indicating where development work is required that is specific to this Contract b) A reliability and availability study (this shall include Failure Modes and Effects Analysis) c) Documentation for existing standard elements/modules within the overall design d) A traceability reference between this Specification and the Functional Design Specification e) A traceability reference between the Functional Design Specification and the Test Procedure documents For ease of handling and review. it is preferred that the FDS be partitioned as follows:     Hardware Functional Design Specification (HFDS) – Master Stations Hardware Functional Design Specification (HFDS) . A functional overview of the complete System shall be provided that shows (preferably in diagrammatic form) each functional element in the System and all the interfaces of those elements with each other and with the external environment. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. inter-relationships with other contractors. Notwithstanding this requirement.1 Functional Design Specification The Functional Design Specification (FDS) shall detail the design for the full scope of Work being performed under this Contract. training of the Employer personnel. 11. 11. particularly in relation to the completion of any dependent works.4 DESIGN DOCUMENTATION 11. etc. placing into service. their impact on the works and programme are identified and the actions taken by the Contract to correct the problems are stated.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The programme PERT chart shall be updated monthly to reflect any significant changes that may have occurred during the previous month and to indicate progress to date.218 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The Installation Programme shall show all site activities.5 Monthly Progress Report The Contractor shall monitor the Programme of Work on a continuous basis and shall submit a monthly report to the Employer giving the latest status of progress. testing. showing cumulative progress towards scheduled completion. The report shall also include a narrative section in which any problems encountered during the month are described. and interfaces to other works. The FDS shall specifically demonstrate how the requirements of this Specification are realised within the Contractor‘s design. The Contractor shall produce a detailed Installation Programme for each part of the Works. The first report shall be due one month after the Effective Date and monthly thereafter throughout the period of the Contract.Outstations Software Functional Design Specification (SFDS) Communications Functional Design Specification (CFDS) The design shall be fully described at a functional level. including delivery of equipment to site. based on their range of standard products. showing deviations with respect to previous programmes and the logical sequence of works. any change that could adversely affect the Installation Programme shall be advised immediately to the Employer. installation.4.Section 6 . of all items shown in the Schedule of Work. The Monthly Progress Report shall include the latest issue of the Programme of Work PERT chart (or equivalent) and a Monthly Progress Schedule that shall indicate progress made the preceding month.3. It shall also cover the design of features that are being delivered as part of the Contractor‘s standard product that have not been requested in the Specification.

loose-leaf file holders. and performance criteria (e. The design capacity (e. Master Station LANs. functional elements will generally equate to items of equipment with their associated signal and power supply interfaces. The design description must address all the requirements of this Specification and provide adequate qualitative and quantitative information to support the design. The communications documentation shall describe the proposed communication links and networks and shall address the following topics for each communication system.4. e. e. The protocols employed by each communication link or network shall be included in the CFDS.). links to other systems. functional elements will generally be individual programmes and databases with their associated data exchange interface specifications. Copies of these shall be supplied in a durable hard copy format.             Communication System Architecture Media requirements Connectivity and routing Modes of Operation Communication System Elements Error Control Protocol Fault Tolerance Communication System Performance Throughput/capability calculations Availability calculations Communication Error Messages & Alarms 11. display call up time. links to the Outstations and SAS gateways. scan rates.g.4. availability and reliability shall be clearly described. where applicable.).219 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . This right would be exercised for the purpose of obtaining software development/amendment services from Contractors other than the supplier. 11. The functional elements of the CFDS will include the communication equipment provided under this Contract and its interfaces with other communications systems. should also be in a form that will permit maintenance staff and programmers to readily obtain an overall appreciation of the operation of the System and individual programs. its interfaces to other functional elements and its user interfaces. Design measures incorporated to improve System integrity. and for the System as a whole. The Employer shall have the right to make available to third parties documentation supplied as part of this Contract. number of I/O ports.2 Specific Requirements for Communication Documentation Where communications equipment and systems are included in the scope of work then the following specific requirements shall apply to the corresponding documentation. shall be provided for each functional element.3.g. RAM.4.g. etc. data rates. database size. both ‗as installed‘ and ultimate system expansion.1 Standard Operating Software The standard operating software documentation will normally consist of the manuals and handbooks supplied by the software producer/publisher or a computer manufacturer.g.g. whilst being fully detailed. both ‗as installed‘ and expansion limits.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification A complete description shall be provided for each functional element that includes its function.Section 6 . Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. In the HFDS.3 Software Design Documentation The documentation. e. 11. For the SFDS. as applicable. operators. etc.

databases and test data to be used.2   Applications Software Description of the Contractors standard (existing) software (including software from third party suppliers) Listings and diagrams for all bespoke software (which includes new and customised software specifically for this project) This design document shall comprise two parts. Each procedure or subprogram shall be preceded by a block of comments which describe the operation of that subprogram. The purpose of this document is to provide the history of each software module and the final version number in the delivered software such that the Employer can include additional notes as they makes further changes to the design.5. This document shall also include the software procedures followed during the design and testing phase. It shall also describe the overall sequence of tests. The current Test Schedule shall be submitted each month with the Contractor's Monthly Report while testing activities are in progress. It shall describe the approach the Contractor plans to take with regard to factory and site acceptance testing. The Test Schedule shall show. e) Data specification including definitions. the estimated start and completion dates for each test. 11. 11. such that they can readily be understood.2 Test Procedures A detailed Test Procedure for each system or sub-system test shall be forwarded for approval by the Employer prior to the scheduled start date of each test. facilities for simulating external plant.1 Test Plan and Schedule The Contractor shall submit a Test Plan and Schedule for approval by the Employer prior to the scheduled start date for the first Factory Acceptance Test (FAT). then comments shall be included at logical points within the code. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. on a Gantt or other approved type of chart.4. These shall have clear and unambiguous descriptive comments. It shall clearly define the breakdown of the System into separately testable sub-systems. The Contractor shall keep the Test Schedule up to date. showing revised dates as appropriate and the status of each test. The Test Plan shall also show any proposed parallel testing activities.Section 6 .5. 11. flow and database organisation f) A complete description of all standard software not covered by the above but necessary to gain a full understanding of the system. including suppliers' standard programs.4 Design Control Document The design control document shall include the change control status of each software package (down to individual modules).Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 11. If any programs are written in low level language. Copies of each shall be supplied bound in durable folders and shall include the following information: a) Overall System description b) Memory allocation and utilisation maps c) Detailed program descriptions of all programs including executive and standard programs with a Pseudo-code (Structured English) listing. or alternatively a flow chart.3. of each level from the top down to individual module d) Program listings of all program code. thereby providing the means for uniform continuity in the System design and design changes. namely.220 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . dictionary. expected duration. the planned configuration for each test. The purpose of the Test Plan is to provide an overview of all testing to be carried out on the System. etc. written in the English language.4.5 DOCUMENTATION FOR ACCEPTANCE TESTS 11.

11. location and details of all standard hardware. All manuals shall be supplied in durable binders and shall be identified with the title of the Project. Each Test Procedure shall include. so that they cover the various portions of the equipment supplied. This shall be a detailed point by point description of the facilities and methods of configuring them from the System Engineer‘s viewpoint.3 System Engineer's Manual The System Engineers' Manual shall describe the configurable elements of the System. 11. The manuals shall be subject to amendment as required by the Employer.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS The Contractor shall submit the draft Operation and Maintenance Manuals (O&M manuals) for approval before plant erection commences.6.3 Test Reports Following the completion of the hardware and software acceptance tests (factory and site). of equipment either manufactured or purchased by the Contractor. The aim of this document is to provide a first line introduction and summary description of the System and to provide references to more detailed description of the operation and maintenance of the System contained in the other manuals. 11.Section 6 .6.6. circuit Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. function. These manuals shall include complete instructions for operation and maintenance of all hardware and software supplied under this Contract. instruction manuals.5. facilities and any specific maintenance requirements.e. as follows. final versions of drawings etc. the following: a) Test objectives b) Test conditions and test configuration including support facilities.2 Operators' Manual The Operators' Manual shall describe the Operator facilities and use of the System. The Maintenance Manual shall provide all the information required for a competent technician to diagnose faults and carry out repairs down to a lowest replaceable unit level. This shall be a detailed point by point description of the actual utilisation of the System facilities from the Operator‘s viewpoint. fault-finding and repair. and they shall be indexed and cross-referenced. interconnection.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The Test Procedure shall clearly indicate how each System element. hardware and software that will be required to run the test c) Test sequence d) Duration of test e) Step by step instructions f) Expected results including the interpretation of test data for tests to be performed g) Acceptance criteria based upon conformance to the Specification h) Standard forms to record test results for evaluation 11. the results obtained. lists of any reservations noted during the tests and the manner in which they were corrected.221 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The manuals shall be subdivided. the Contractor shall submit a test report that shall be a complete record of the actual tests carried out. but not be limited to.5 Maintenance Manual The Maintenance Manual shall describe routine maintenance requirements. will be tested and the criteria that will be used to assess the success or failure of the test will be determined. 11. This shall include all handbooks.6.6. down to an agreed level.. 11. 11.4 Hardware Manual The Hardware Manual shall describe the construction. The design principles.1 System Manual A System Manual shall describe the System configuration. i.

rating.             Communication System Architecture Media requirements Connectivity and routing Modes of Operation Communication System Elements Error Control Protocol Fault Tolerance Communication System Performance Throughput/capability calculations Availability calculations Communication Error Messages & Alarms Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The manual shall provide the user with the necessary instructions to load the System software. test point values/waveforms and interconnections. All component symbols shall be marked with their circuit references and the nominal value of components shall be marked on the circuit diagram. modify and/or reprogram the System and reline and compile the programs. Equipment drawings shall show the layout of equipment in racks or cubicles and the essential mechanical features of all racks. 11. The programmer's manual shall also describe the testing and debugging processes. 11. Equipment instruction manuals shall include circuit diagrams for each unit.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification operation. Simple first line fault diagnosis and module replacement procedures based on flow charts shall be included. The function of all controls. switches and indicating devices shall be indicated in accordance with the inscriptions on the equipment. cubicles. as applicable.6.222 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .8 Communication Documentation The communications documentation shall describe the proposed communication links and networks and shall address the following topics for each communication system. self-explanatory. 11. readily related to other diagrams and shall include such information as supply voltage values.7 Programmer's Manual The programmer's manual is primarily intended to describe software development/amendment. type number.6 Equipment Manual A log book shall be supplied with each set of equipment giving the manufacturing and testing history of the equipment. tolerance. shall be shown on the circuit diagram enclosed in dotted lines and appropriately identified. Spare contacts fitted to relays and switches shall be shown on the diagram. Components external to a unit or sub-unit. manufacturer and the Contractor's circuit reference number. units and sub-units. The circuit diagram for any one unit shall be completely self-contained. sub-unit and plug-in board used in the complete equipment. with component layout details and normal signal levels superimposed. Component lists shall state the value. are to be supplied. but essential to its operation. test procedures and fault analysis shall be included.6. complete with any safety or other restrictions that are placed on these procedures.6. Complete circuit diagrams.Section 6 .

11.8 ‘AS BUILT’ DOCUMENTATION All design documents.7 DOCUMENT SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL Five (5) copies of each drawing and document shall be submitted for approval after review by the Employer. as necessary.Design drawings not forming part of the final design. The Contractor may proceed with the relevant part of the Works subject to the modification noted by the Employer. All revisions to drawings and documents by the Contractor shall be plainly marked together with the date when the changes were made. to reflect the ‗As Built‘ condition of the Works and submitted to the Employer in three copies. that are related to the Contractor‘s detailed design. drawings and manuals shall be revised. revised or deleted. Category II .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 11. the Contractor shall not make further alterations without the agreement of the Employer. When folded. manufacture data sheets etc.223 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing and keeping up-to-date a contract document and drawing list showing the numbers and titles of each drawing and document and the current status of approval by the Employer. The Contractor may proceed with the relevant part of the Works. Additional copies of particular drawings or documents shall be supplied by the Contractor in response to specific requests by the Employer. Category I shall mean that the Contractor may proceed with the relevant part of the Works in accordance with respective document. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The Contractor may not proceed with the relevant part of the Works.Information noted. Category IV shall mean that the Employer has noted the information on the drawing or document and that it is a detail not required to be classified into Category I. the drawing title block shall be clearly readable without needing to unfold the drawing. Once a drawing or document has been approved. All drawings submitted shall be folded to either A3 or A4 size.Not approved . Drawings and documents in Category II or III shall be revised and re-submitted to the Employer for his approval within 14 working days calculated from the date of receipt by the Contractor of the Employer's comments. Category III . Category V .Section 6 .Approved except as noted. Copies of revised pages of the list shall be distributed to the Employer whenever a drawing or document is included. All ‗online‘ help files shall also be updated to the ‗As Built‘ condition before issue of the Operational Acceptance Certificate.returned for modification. Category III shall mean that the Contractor must revise the drawing or document and re-submit it to the Employer to reach Category I. the Contractor will be informed of the category into which each drawing or document is to be placed. The list shall be included in the monthly report prepared by the Contractor. Category IV .Approved. Category II shall mean that the drawing or document shall be modified to the extent noted by the Employer and re-submitted to the Employer to reach Category I. These categories are as follows: Category I . Category V shall mean that the Employer has noted the information on the drawing or document. Documents in this category may be equipment wiring diagrams.

0 Rev.1 and contained in Section C of the Bid Documents. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev.2016 Sri Lanka map showing Location of sites CEB Hydroelectric Power Complex .2012 220/132kV Network One Line Diagram .Mahaweli NSCC SCADA System Architecture Overview of the New Telecommunication Network-2012 Available Fibre Optic Links Proposed SDH Network Topology Proposed Telephone Network Existing Telecommunication System Existing Telephone Network Site Plan .NSCC at Sri Jayewardenepura Indicative Ground Floor Plan st Indicative Control Centre 1 Floor Plan nd Indicative Control Centre 2 Floor Plan Indicative Control Centre Front Elevation Indicative Control Centre Section Indicative Control Centre Power Supply System Gabion Wall Chain Link Gate Chain Link Fence Layout Plan. DRAWINGS The drawings referred to in the Specification are listed below in Table 12. 0 Rev.Section 6 . 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev.224 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Laxapana CEB Hydroelectric Power Complex . 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. Table 12-1 List of Drawings Associated with the Specifications Drawing Number TD/CE/1/82/D/NET-001 TD/CE/1/82/D/NET-002 TD/CE/1/82/D/NET-003 TD/CE/1/82/D/HES-001 TD/CE/1/82/D/HES-002 TD/CE/1/82/D/SCA-001 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-001 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-002 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-003 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-004 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-005 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-006 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-001 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-002 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-003 TD/CE/1/82/D/ NSCC-004 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-005 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-006 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-007 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-008 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-009 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-010 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-011 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-012 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-013 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-014 Revision Rev. 0 Title 220/132kV Network One Line Diagram . 0 Rev. 0 Rev.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 12. Longitudinal and Cross Section Indicative Control Centre Finishes Schedule Engineering Survey Plan for Proposed Control Centre Sectional Drawings for Proposed Control Centre Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 0 Rev.

The approach when defining these signal lists was to identify a standard set of signals applicable to all plant at each voltage level. repeat relays. access and routing Location of new equipment Planned routing of cables Implementation plan Final list of signals and corresponding transducers and interposing devices to be implemented 4 5 6 7 8 9 The survey report shall be submitted to the Employer for approval. The report shall identify where existing equipment is unsuitable or requires modification The environmental conditions and condition of any environmental control (e. line matching units including coaxial cables to be retained are in satisfactory condition.Section 6 . moisture etc. 13. Ventilation. For bidding purposes the Bidder shall assume that unless stated otherwise that interposing equipment is required at a substation for all I/O listed in the Schedules. equipment and devices and calculated in accordance with the unit rates defined in the schedule of rates. transformer etc. The survey report shall detail the work required depending on the age and original specification of each switchboard. identify those signals that must be provided and those that. 13. Air Conditioning. 13. The Bidder shall complete the schedule of unit rates for additional transducers. The Contractor shall be responsible for the plant interface design and the undertaking of any modifications to existing equipment necessary for establishing the plant interfaces for the signals included in the lists. SITE SURVEYS 13. interposing relays. due to the anticipated problems and difficulties of providing them. the Contractor shall detail this in the survey report.3 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS AND SIGNAL LISTS FOR OUTSTATIONS A single line diagram of the existing and a signal list for the planned configuration at 2012 has been provided in Part D Appendix 2 for each of the locations. etc. coupling capacitors. In practice this may vary because of the particular plant in question and the survey shall identify such variances. The findings of the survey shall be used by the Contractor in his detailed design and implementation plan.1 GENERAL REQUIREMEMNTS The Contractor shall conduct comprehensive surveys at each site where work under this Contract is to be carried out. Lighting. The survey report shall include but not be limited to: 1 2 3 Condition of existing equipment to which the Contract Works must interface or may affect.) and any remedial action required.4 EXISTING PLC SYSTEM For existing analogue PLC links which are to be upgraded to digital PLC links. Where such work would be required to implement the signals or controls identified in the signal lists. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed survey report describing the work and materials required to complete the installation and put the equipment into operation. this shall not extend to replacement or retrofitting of auxiliary contacts on switchgear and Current or Voltage Transformers (CTs & VTs).Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 13. These surveys are intended as a guide and as a set of preliminary information. The final cost for the outstation works will be against a measured amount of installed material. compatible with the new digital PLC equipment and that the Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. could be omitted.2 PRELIMINARY SURVEYS Preliminary surveys of a selection of sites have been carried out by the Employer and the details are provided in Part D Appendix 1.g.225 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Limitations for connection to existing equipment Available space. the survey shall establish whether the existing line traps. However. It shall be the Contractor‘s responsibility to verify any information that is used in the design and implementation of the works. cleanliness and exposure to dust.

routing. termination and any other works necessary for completion and putting into service. All equipment that is to be removed including equipment that is already out of service and located in the communication rooms where new equipment is to be installed. The report shall detail the survey finding and any anticipated duration of power outages required for the installation of the digital PLC equipment. Outstation and Power Supply equipment is to be installed.226 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Where this equipment is still in service the report shall detail the implementation process that will ensure the continuity of service associated with that equipment during its replacement or the transfer of service. shall be removed by the Contractor and delivered to the Employer‘s stores for subsequent disposal by the Employer.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification coupling bandwidth is correct for re-use. cabling requirements. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. In many cases the installation of new equipment will require that existing equipment be removed. 13.5 EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED The site survey shall determine where each item of Telecommunication.Section 6 .

227 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Fusion welding of steels Non-destructive examination of welds Galvanised wire for telephone and telegraph purposes Chromium plating Packaging Code Bourden tube pressure and vacuum gauges Dimension of temperature detecting elements and corresponding pockets Metallic coatings – Hot dip galvanised coatings on ferrous metals – Determination of the mass per unit area – Gravimetric method Metallic coatings – Hot dip galvanised coatings on fabricated ferrous products – Requirements Metal and metal oxide coatings – Measurement of coating thickness – Microscopical method Non-magnetic coatings on magnetic substrates – Measurement of coating thickness – Magnetic method Standard Voltage High voltage test technique Environmental Testing Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code) Recommended graphical symbols Pollution classification 60038 60060 60068 60529 60617 60815 14. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS AND STANDARDS 14. IEEE Standards. ISO Standards. METERING AND CONTROL IEC BS/Other EATS50-18 Description Design and Application of Ancillary Electrical Equipment Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The applicable standards include but are not limited to those listed below: 14. International Telecommunications Union (ITU) Specifications and the General Technical Specification.3 PROTECTION. screws and nuts Specification for approval testing of welders when welding procedure approval is not required.1 GENERAL All services and equipment supplied under this Specification shall conform to the latest editions of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Specifications.Section 6 . 1 BS 3643 BS 4190 BS 4872-1 BS EN 1435 BS 182 BS EN 12540 BS 1133 BS EN 837 BS 2765 ISO 1460 ISO 1461 ISO 1463 ISO 2178 Description Specification for high voltage busbars and busbar connections Environmental Management Systems Quality Management Systems ISO metric screw threads ISO metric black hexagon bolts. 1 ISO 9000.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 14. Equivalent national standards may be acceptable subject to approval by the Employer.2 GENERAL STANDARDS IEC BS/Other BS 159 ISO 14000.

4 BS/Other Description Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and their accessories Electrical relays Dimensions of Mechanical Structures of the 482.6 mm (19") Series Acceptance inspection of Class 2 alternating current watt hour meters Class 0.228 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . control and laboratory use Alternating current static watt-hour meters for active energy (Classes 1 and 2) SCADA/EMS AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT Standard IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC 60038 60050 60060 60068 60130 60255 60304 60326 60332 60353 60358 60481 60495 60529 60651 60664 60693 60708 Description IEC Standard voltages International Electro-technical Vocabulary High-voltage Test Techniques Environmental Testing Connectors for frequencies below 3 MHz Measuring relays and protection equipment Standard colours for insulation for low-frequency cables and wires Printed boards Tests on electric cables under fire conditions Line traps for ac power systems Coupling capacitors and capacitor dividers Coupling devices for power line carrier systems Single sideband power line carrier terminals Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code) Sound level meters Insulation co-ordination for equipment within lowvoltage systems Dimensions of optical fibres Low-frequency cables with polyolefin insulation and moisture barrier polyolefin sheath Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.5.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification IEC 60051 60255 60297 60514 60521 60947 61000 60282 60289 60044 60076 60186 61010 61036 14. 1 and 2 alternating current watt hour meters Low voltage switchgear and control gear Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) High voltage fuses Reactors Instrument transformers Power Transformers Voltage transformers Safety requirements for equipment for measuring.Section 6 .

229 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . TASE 2 Services and protocol Connectors for optical fibre and cables Calculation of thermally permissible short-circuit currents.Part 5-103: Transmission protocols – Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment Tele-control equipment and systems .Measurement methods and test procedures Optical fibre cables Safety of laser products Teleprotection equipment of power systems RTU centralised and distributed solutions Tele-control equipment and systems – Part 5: Transmission protocols – Section 101: Companion standards for basic tele-control tasks Tele-control equipment and systems – Part 5: Transmission protocols – Section 102: Companion standard for the transmission of integrated totals in electric power systems Tele-control equipment and systems .Section 6 . tariff and load control –Direct local data exchange Programmable controllers Fibre optic communication subsystem test procedures Optical Amplifier test methods Optical Amplifier IEC 60870-5-102 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 60870-5-104 IEC 60870-6-503 IEC IEC 60874 60949 IEC IEC IEC IEC 60950 61000 61010 61037 IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC 61107 61131 61280 61290 61291 IEC IEC IEC IEC 61300 61334 61753 61850 Fibre optic interconnecting devices and passive components Distribution automation using distribution line carrier systems Fibre optic interconnecting devices and passive components performance standard Communication networks and systems in substations Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Telecontrol Protocols compatible with ISO standards and ITU recommendations. taking into account non-adiabatic heating effects Safety of Information technology equipment Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Safety standards Electricity metering – Tariff and load control – Particular requirements for electronic ripple control receivers Data Exchange for meter reading.Part 5-104: Transmission protocols – Companion standard for basic tele-control tasks Telecontrol equipment and systems .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Standard IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC 60793 60794 60825 60834 60870 60870-5-101 Description Optical fibres .

Glossary of Terms Electricity metering – Data exchange for meter reading.702 G.Section 6 . tariff and load control Fibre optic active components and devices Fibre optic active components and devices Safety aspects for xDSL signal on circuits connected to telecommunication networks Industrial. Transmission performance characteristics of pulse code modulation channels.653 G.731 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 2048.712 G.230 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Standard IEC IEEE ISO/IEC ISO/IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC 61970 Parts 1/2/3/4/5 1003. G708 & G709). NERC CIP 9075-1/10/13/14 62005 62051 62056 62148 62149 62367 CISPR 11 Description Application Interfaces Application Software Information security Information security Reliability of fibre optic interconnecting devices and passive optical components Electricity metering . Sub STM-0 network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN) Pulse code modulation (PCM) of voice frequencies.1-2008 X Windows 27001/1/2/5/11.704 ITU-T G.706 ITU-T G.709 G.703 G.652 G. 8448 and 44736 kb/s hierarchical levels Frame alignment and cyclic redundancy check (CRC) procedures relating to basic frame structures defined in Recommendation G. 6312. scientific and medical radio-frequency equipment – Electromagnetic disturbance characteristics – Limits and methods of measurement Characteristics of a single-mode optical fibre cable Characteristics of a dispersion-shifted singlemode optical fibre cable Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters of optical amplifier devices and subsystems Digital hierarchy bit rates Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces Synchronous frame structures used at 1544. ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T G. Primary PCM multiplex equipment for voice frequencies.707 ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T G.661 ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T G.708 G.711 G.704 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (merged version of G707.

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Standard ITU-T ITU-T G.737 ITU-T ITU-T G. The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048 kb/s hierarchy ITU-T ITU-T G.735 Description Characteristics of primary PCM multiplex equipment operating at 2048 kb/s.783 G. Characteristics of an external access equipment operating at 2048 kbit/s and offering synchronous digital access at 384 kb/s and/or 64 kb/s. Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management.772 G.823 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.736 G.784 G.797 G.781 G.744 G.732 G. Second order PCM multiplex equipment operating at 8448 kb/s Second order digital multiplex equipment operating at 8448 kb/s and using positive/zero/negative justification Protected monitoring points provided on digital transmission systems Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission systems Synchronous digital hierarchical (SDH) management information model for the network element.231 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Characteristics of primary PCM multiplex equipment operating at 2048 kb/s and offering synchronous digital access at 384 kb/s and/or 64 kb/s.821 ITU-T G.773 G. General considerations on second order multiplex equipments Second order digital multiplex equipment operating at 8448 kb/s and using positive justification. Characteristics of asynchronous digital multiplex equipment operating at 2048 kb/s. Synchronization layer functions Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional blocks.774 ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T G.742 ITU-T ITU-T G.745 ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T G.Section 6 .803 G. Characteristics of a flexible multiplex in a plesiochronous digital hierarchy environment Architecture of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC) Timing requirements at the outputs of slave clocks suitable for plesiochronous operation of International links Error performance of an international digital connection operating at a bit rate below the primary rate and forming part of an integrated services digital network.812 ITU-T G.741 G.813 G.

13 K.14 M.11 K.958 G.3016 M.842 G.2101 ITU-T ITU-T M.3013 M.3100 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3000 M.957 G. sections and transmission systems International multi-operator paths. constant bit-rate digital paths and connections Management capabilities of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures Interworking of SDH network protection architectures Management aspects of the optical transport network element Digital sections based on the 2048 kb/s hierarchy Optical interfaces for equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fibre cables Digital transmission system on metallic local lines for ISDN basic rate access Connection characteristics Low frequency interference due to unbalance about earth of telecommunication equipment Principles of protection against overvoltages and overcurrents Induced voltages in cables with plastic-insulated conductors Provision of a metallic screen in plastic-sheathed cables Performance limits and objectives for bringinginto-service and maintenance of international SDH paths and multiplex sections Bringing-into-service international multi-operator paths.874 G.2120 ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T M.825 Description The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) End-to-end error performance parameters and objectives for international.232 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .1430 K.2130 M.3020 M.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Standard ITU-T G. sections and transmission systems fault detection and localization procedures Operational procedures for the maintenance of the transport network Overview of TMN recommendations Principles for a telecommunication management network Considerations for a telecommunication management network TMN security overview TMN interface specification methodology Generic network information model ITU-T G.826 ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T G.961 G.Section 6 .831 G.3010 M.10 K.2110 M.841 G.921 G.

LAN Cables EMC Directive 89/336/EEC Limits and methods of measurement of radio interference characteristics of information technology equipment Emissivity (Industry) Immunity (Industry) Electrical Protection Relays IEEE IEEE EIA EIA EEC EN 1613.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Standard ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T M. Humidity Test on Terminations a Dynamic Short-circuit Performance of Heat Shrink Joints and Termination Kits components shall conform to High Voltage Test Techniques Guide to the selection of HV cables Specification for PVC insulated cables (non armoured) for electric power and lighting Conductors of insulated cables Impulse Tests on cables and their accessories Partial Discharge Measurements Electric cables .464 568 89/336 55022 EN EN BS 14.Section 6 .3400 Q.V. insulation for low frequency cables and wires Tests on electric cables under fire conditions Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.16 Q. 61850 802 RS.233 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .3200 M.Calculation of current rating Standard colours for P.C.150 Description CORBA generic network and network element level information model TMN management services and telecommunication managed areas: overview TMN management functions Maximum permissible value for the absolute power level of a signalling pulse Technical features of push-button telephone sets Principles of maintenance testing for public data networks using Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) and Data Circuit-terminating Equipment (DCE) test loops Outstation data networks Standard for local and metropolitan area networks Private Branch Exchange (PBX) switching Equipment for Voice Applications.3120 M.23 X.5 50081-2 50082-2 142 AUXILIARY POWER AND CONTROL CABLES IEC BS/Other BS 2484 BS EN 50262 VDE 0278 ESI-09/13 60060 60183 60227 60228 60230 60270 60287 60304 60332 Description Specification for straight concrete and clayware cable covers Metric cable glands For Thermal Short-circuit.

234 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification IEC 60502 60507 60840 60885 14.9 INSPECTION AND TESTING IEC 60068 BS/Other Description Environmental testing 14.10 ANCILLARY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT BS/Other Description General requirement machines for rotating electrical IEC 60034 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. coding and special purposes Low voltage fuses Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies Circuit Breakers for household and similar installations Low voltage switchgear and control gear Residual current circuit breakers 14.6 BS/Other Description Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cables for rated voltages from 1 kV up to 30 kV Artificial pollution tests on high voltage insulators to be used on A.7 DC BATTERIES AND CHARGERS IEC 60146 60269 60439 60623 60947 IEEE 1184-2006 BS/Other Description Battery chargers Low voltage fuses Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies Batteries Low voltage switchgear and control gear 14.C. systems (applicable to outdoor termination only) Tests for power cables with extruded insulation for rated voltages above 30 kV up to 150 kV Electrical test methods for electric cables LVAC SWITCHFUSE BOARDS IEC BS/Other BS 381 C 60269 60439 60898 60947 61008 Description Specification for colours for identification.8 EARTHING SYSTEMS IEC BS/Other BS 7450 IEEE 80 IEEE 32 Description Code of practice for earthing Guide for safety in substation grounding Neutral grounding devices 14.Section 6 .

Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification IEC 60072 60085 60947 BS/Other Description Rotating electrical machines – Dimensions and Output Thermal evaluation and classification of electrical insulation Low voltage contractors switchgear and control gear: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.235 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

The Contractor shall fully detail the environmental suitability. 15.236 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .2 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS Site outdoor operating conditions are as tabled below. Outstations and Telecommunication equipment will be located in suitably air-conditioned buildings/rooms. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 15. Site Operating Condition Altitude Ambient temperature: Maximum outdoor – shade Maximum outdoor daily average Maximum outdoor yearly average Minimum outdoor yearly average Maximum ground at depth 1 m Relative Humidity: Maximum Minimum Yearly average Maximum wind velocity: Rainfall per year: Maximum Minimum Maximum in one day Yearly average Atmosphere: Average no. performance and reliability of the equipment to be supplied. of days per year of thunder storms 30 500 mm 50 mm 65 mm 150 mm 92% 12% 38% 145 km/h +22C for approximately 6 hours per day +35C +35C +8C +21C Value(s) Up to 2500 meters above sea-level Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The indoor equipment to be provided under this Contract shall be suitably protected from these elevated levels of temperature and humidity.Section 6 .1 INDOOR INSTALLATIONS It is expected that the SCADA/EMS system(s). the temperature and humidity may rise significantly in the absence or failure of air-conditioning or ventilation (see Climate Conditions).Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 15. unless otherwise stated in the Specific Technical requirements in the contract document. However.

5 PRODUCTION OF CONDUCTED ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE The Works shall not introduce conducted interference that disturbs its own internal operation or generates interference on the incoming power supply that causes maloperation of sensitive equipment supplied by others.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 16. the Works shall be immune from the levels and types of electrostatic discharge (ESD) which can be found in a typical office environment. 16. 16.Section 6 .25 m from any point of the Works with all equipment doors closed and covers in place) b) cell phones when operated in the 900 MHz frequency band (or future frequency bands utilised by Third Generation mobile phones) within the same rooms as the equipment (0. The Contractor shall describe in the relevant maintenance manuals any special precautions to be taken to guard against the effects of ESD when the Works are under maintenance. standards relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) the equipment complies and whether type test certification demonstrating compliance with such standards exists b) Degree of compliance with the requirements of the EEC directive on EMC.1 GENERAL The electromagnetic environment comprises: a) Conducted emissions and susceptibility b) Radiated emissions and susceptibility c) Conditions leading to electrostatic discharge.e. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.7 EMC STANDARDS The Bidder shall indicate: a) With which. i.25 m from any part of the Works with all equipment doors and covers in place) c) Typical levels of broadcast radio and television signals d) An electromagnetic field with a field strength of 10 V/m measured by the method specified in IEC/BS EN 61000-4-3. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY 16. Directive 92/31/EEC and Directive 93/68/EEC.3 PRODUCTION OF RADIATED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY Emissions from equipment supplied under the Contract shall be limited to ensure there are no unwanted internal effects on the Works and no interference to the operation of similar equipment (supplied by others) located in the same or adjacent rooms. 16. if any.237 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Directive 89/336/EEC amended by Directive 91/263/EEC.4 SUSCEPTIBILITY TO CONDUCTED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY The Contractor shall ensure the Works are immune from the effects of the following types and levels of conducted electromagnetic interference: a) Impulse Voltage Withstand b) High Frequency c) Signal lines Common Mode Rejection shall be better than 50 dB at 50 Hz d) Signal lines Series Mode Rejection shall be better than 40 dB at 50 Hz 16.2 SUSCEPTIBILITY TO RADIATED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY The Works shall be immune from the effects of: a) 5 W hand held VHF transceivers when operated in the same rooms as the RTU equipment (0. The Works shall conform with the requirements in the following Clauses with respect to the above listed phenomena. 16. 16.6 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE During normal operation.

unless named and proposed in the Bid. In addition to covering the manufacture of all equipment. in order that the Employer can gain objective evidence that the level of quality control is adequate to meet the Contract requirements. inspections and witness tests on equipment or software. including curriculum vitae. For the required level of quality assurance to be achieved. The Plan shall also identify the Employer's approval activities and make due allowance for the time involved in these activities. In addition. Subcontractors shall not be used except by prior written approval of the Employer. QUALITY ASSURANCE AND MANAGEMENT 17.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 17. The Contractor shall submit the Quality Plan revised to include a complete list of all site personnel detailing names. The Contractor shall ensure that all the requirements detailed hereunder are applied to his Subcontractors such that the Employer and/or his representative can perform the same level of surveillance stated hereunder at the Subcontractors works. site installation and commissioning.238 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . to agreed time scales. they will be applied. and testing. the Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting and testing the items upon receipt and ensuring their fitness for purpose. 17. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 17. installation and commissioning activities. the Contractor shall take responsibility for such items.2 ACCESS FOR THE EMPLOYER'S REPRESENTATIVE The Employer and/or the Employer's Representative reserve the right to visit both the Contractor's and any of their Subcontractors' premises. The Contractor shall carry out the Works in accordance with sound quality and environmental management principles. as necessary. All corrective actions and remedial work shall be carried out at the Contractor's cost. These visits may be in addition to those necessary to undertake product audits. The Contractor shall provide for approval full details. Flow charts. this control shall encompass hardware and software design activities and. the Contractor shall demonstrate that he has a functional and adequately documented Quality Management System formulated to satisfy the requirements of the ISO 9000 series of standards. at mutually agreed times. If the Subcontractor has a suitable Quality Assurance Scheme complying with the ISO 9000 series of standards. In addition. the Contractor shall supplement his Quality Management System with the requirements detailed hereunder where they do not already form part of his standard Quality activities. Otherwise. 17. Personnel shall not mobilise to Site prior to approval being given.4 QUALITY PLAN A final Quality Plan shall be submitted for the Employer's approval within two months of Contract Award.3 SUB-CONTRACTORS Where proprietary items are purchased from a Subcontractor.Section 6 . and in particular shall have management systems which conform to the requirements of the ISO 9000 family of standards for Quality Management and the ISO 14000 family of standards for Environmental Management. of all engineering.1 GENERAL The Contractor is required to control the quality of all equipment within his scope of supply. positions and responsibilities complete with an organisation chart. manufacture progress. where applicable. technical and other key staff to be employed at site. the Plan shall make provision for the Employer to witness test and final inspection stages at the appropriate Manufacturer's works. and when and by which organisation. However. The Quality Plan shall cover all test and deliverable equipment and software. supplemented with brief explanatory text are the preferred method of presenting information that identifies the various stages of control. This activity shall be documented in a manner that provides a high degree of assurance that the required level of product quality has been achieved. then inspection of records will normally be sufficient to establish compliance. all design activities undertaken by Subcontractors will be subject to all the requirements stated within this Section.

there shall be one Record Sheet for each piece of equipment (Line Replaceable Unit) or software module. by the Contractor. These audits will review quality records and associated documentation relating to each element of the Works in order to gain assurance that work is being carried out to the required level of quality. It will be necessary for all major hardware items and assemblies to have unique serial numbers and for all software modules to have version numbers. at no extra cost to the Employer. The Design shall be subject to review prior to release for coding. Records generated to substantiate the attainment of performance and design standards must be retained. The latter shall permit inspection of module definition. The frequency and depth of ongoing surveillance activities by the Employer and/or the Employer's Representative will be dependent upon the results of initial audits. installation and commissioning associated with each element of the Works. 17. The SQP shall identify and describe the organisation. coding and testing. manufacture. analysis. The SQP shall also identify and make timely provisions for special needs (controls. facilities. detailing results of inspections and delivered tests. responsibilities. for at least 5 years following completion of commissioning of the Works and shall be filed in such a manner that retrospective review by the Employer can readily be effected. All quality records must refer to these numbers. testing. These reviews shall be carried out independently of the designer of the particular part under review. tools. The SQP shall state the software practices and procedures to ensure conformance with all software requirements of the Contract. then due notice will be given to the Contractor that urgent remedial or corrective action is required. This shall be carried out by the Contractor to agreed time scales. The quality records and associated documentation shall ultimately cover all stages of design. There shall be particular emphasis on the allocation of authorities and responsibilities in respect of the detection.7 ORGANIZATION Software quality management shall be clearly described by the Contractor. Normally.239 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . skills. as applicable. Each item of equipment must have a unique Certificate of Inspection and Testing.9 REVIEWS The Contractor shall reference or document the procedures to be used for reviews to ensure that the software meets the contract requirements.8 PLANNING The Contractor shall prepare a Software Quality Plan (SQP) that meets all quality requirements.5 AUDITS Correct functioning of the Contractor's Quality System will be verified by the application of an internal audit programme at various critical stages in the progress of the Works. and authorities for its execution and all key functions as described in succeeding paragraphs. reporting. However. shall be put in place by the Contractor.Section 6 . at the Contractor's own cost. 17.6 QUALITY RECORDS In order to maintain control over the quality of all Works during design and manufacture. At the end of this 5year period. evaluation and rectification of quality related problems during all phases of the contract. a System of Quality Record sheets. Inspection and Test plans shall be generated for both equipment and software production. The procedures shall include:      Descriptions of the objectives of each review Identification of key milestones in the software life cycle for reviews Methods for specifying non-scheduled reviews Identification of the function of the personnel involved Provision for the recording of analyses and recommendations for reviews Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. etc. 17.) required for its execution. and correction of software problems and deficiencies. Should major deficiencies be found in either the product or in the methods for the control of quality. providing all serial numbers of equipment are shown and an appendix to the certificate details the acceptance parameter bands within which the controlled parameters have been found to conform. The SQP shall also identify the methods to be used for detection. Software Quality 17. the documents shall be delivered to the Employer. batch-produced items may be covered by a Batch Certificate.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 17.

CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT      17.10 The Contractor shall identify all Software Quality measures related to software integration and testing. Provision for ensuring that timely corrective action is taken by reviewing deficiencies and tracking their clearance.11 The Contractor shall reference and document Software Quality procedures that shall include: 17. The procedures shall include a method for: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 . document. calibrated. The Contractor shall identify the CM procedures to be applied to software development. authorised changes have been incorporated in the design Verification that tests have been carried out in accordance with the requirements of the quality procedures and the requirements of the Contract with particular emphasis on the identification of software tested Review of test records to ensure all witnessing results. the Contractor shall ensure that procedures exist to identify. Analysis of data and examination of problem and deficiency reports to determine the causes and to propose corrective measures. and only. This shall require the Employer's approval. Review of corrective measures to determine their effectiveness.12 A Software Configuration Management (CM) Plan shall be produced defining the manner in which the changes to software are controlled and logged during the lifecycle of the project. CORRECTIVE ACTION        Adoption of a System to report problems and deficiencies to the appropriate management level. approval by the Employer of the content of test plans. specifications and records shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Inspection and Test requirements. These measures shall ensure that an adequate range of procedures are in place and that they are rigorously enforced. The validation and verification modules and sub-modules shall be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the relevant quality procedures. Provision for defining all necessary re-testing to validate modifications to any item of software. test data. Specifically. control and maintain all software design changes. with particular emphasis on ensuring that all.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification  Methods to ensure that the recommendations arising from reviews are monitored to ensure that timely corrective action is taken TESTING 17. The results of such validation and verification exercises shall be fully documented. Provision for controlling and accepting non-conforming software. The measures shall include:   Software Checks to determine if the software requirements and design have been analysed for testability Review of test documentation to ensure it has been produced in accordance with the requirements of the associated quality procedures and the requirements of the Contract. test files and hardware used as a tool for software testing to ensure it has been documented. tested in accordance with the relevant quality procedures and requirements of the Contract Maintenance of test-related documentation to allow test repeatability Where appropriate. Analysis of deficiency trends to prevent the development of non-conforming software. verified. validation and certification have been carried out in accordance with the relevant quality procedures and the requirements of the Contract Identification and review of any software.240 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .

Keeping secure masters at separate locations. The Contractor shall make his support tools available for reasonable use by the QAR for verification purposes. The Contractor shall provide the QAR with the accommodation and facilities required for the proper accomplishment of his work. The control of the identification inspection status. Ensuring that modifications are properly integrated. The provision of validated copies. Obtaining approval to implement a modification. The QAR shall be afforded unrestricted opportunity to verify conformance of the software with Contract quality requirements. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. ACCOMMODATION AND ASSISTANCE The Employer shall have the right to appoint a Quality Assurance Representative (QAR) to monitor the Contractor's software quality as applied to this project. If the Contractor demonstrates to the satisfaction of the Employer that the required level of software quality is being achieved during the course of the Contract then this Clause would not normally be invoked. Ensuring that non-conforming software is identified and segregated. The Contractor's personnel shall be made available for operation of such support tools as required. registration and updating. Producing build documents at baseline.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification           17.Section 6 . The proper marking. storage and handling of software media.13 Program and/or module version identification.241 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . and shall provide any assistance required by the QAR for assessing the state of the quality control aspects of the Contract material. The QAR shall have the right of access to any area of the Contractor's or their Subcontractor's premises where any part of the Work is being performed. The control of support software.

All outdoor apparatus and fittings shall be designed so that water cannot collect at any point. full details of these measures shall be submitted for approval. The equipment offered in this Contract shall have been proven by satisfactory operating experience.Section 6 . Particular attention shall be given to ease of maintenance and fault finding. quantities.1 GENERAL In complying with the requirements of this Specification.3 DESIGN. All equipment shall be designed to prevent accidental contact with live parts. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 18. including those due to faulty synchronising and short circuit. All equipment shall be designed to minimise the risk of fire and any damage that may be caused in the event of fire. repairs and maintenance. mites. adjustment or anticipated replacement shall be readily accessible. Equipment manufacturers/suppliers shall take all reasonable precautions to minimise the susceptibility of their equipment to electromagnetic interference produced by other equipment and plant. Printed circuit cards shall be clearly labelled and the associated sockets shall be coded in an approved manner to prevent incorrect assembly. Cast iron shall not be used for chambers of oil filled apparatus or for any part of the equipment that is in tension or subject to impact stresses. The design shall incorporate all reasonable precautions and provisions for the safety of those concerned in the operation and maintenance of electronic equipment and systems. pressure. STANDARDIZATION AND INTERCHANGEABILITY The works shall be designed to facilitate inspection. throughout this Contract shall be in the SI-system of units (International System of Units). All apparatus shall also be designed to ensure satisfactory operation under the atmospheric conditions prevailing at the site and under such sudden variation of load and voltage as may be met with under working conditions on the system. etc. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. insects. provided that this design is in accordance with this Specification and particular equipment or system specification. The equipment shall be designed to operate satisfactorily under all variations of load. Equipment shall be designed to facilitate inspection. and of associated equipment. The material used in the construction of the equipment shall be of the highest quality and selected particularly to meet the duties required of them. Continuity of supply is of prime concern. and the particular equipment or system specification. maintenance and repair. equipment or system design is to conform to the best current engineering practise. All apparatus shall also be designed to ensure satisfactory operation in all atmospheric conditions prevailing at the sites and during such sudden variation of load and voltage as may be met with under working conditions on the system. cleaning. birds. All bolts. 18.2 SYSTEM OF UNITS Technical Data dimensions. 18. and temperature that may be met in normal usage under the variation in climatic conditions given in the Specifications.242 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Test points and components requiring testing. The equipment shall be of the manufacturer‘s standard design. nuts and screws shall comply with the appropriate international standards for metric threads. both with respect to arrangement and detail. The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of all those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the works. Where it is necessary to take specific measures on site in order to achieve the desired degree of immunity (e. rodents or micro-organisms.g. All equipment shall be designed to obviate the risk of accidental short circuit due to animals. The design shall include all necessary interlocks for the operation and maintenance of the equipment in accordance with the Employer‘s safety rules and system operation/maintenance practices of the Contract Works and of associated works supplied under other contracts. Electro-mechanical armature type relays shall not be employed in any sequencing or timing functions.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 18. special earthing or screening arrangements). All equipment shall be designed to operate without undue vibration and with the least practicable amount of noise. reptiles.

the Contractor shall show that the equipment he is offering meets the requirement in one or more of the following ways: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Material specifications. Where life expectancy is limited by the availability of replacement components. and physical properties best adapted to their various purposes in accordance with the best engineering practice. frequency of operation. To enable maintenance to take place during the working life of the equipment. All work shall be performed by workmen skilled in their respective trades. All works shall be performed and completed in a thorough workmanlike manner and shall follow the best modern practice in the manufacture of high grade equipment. cubicles and similar enclosed compartments shall be equipped with anti condensation heaters actuated by hygrostat and thermostat to restrict condensation. design and tests. equipment shall be designed for a minimum working life of 15 years in the specified environment and application. However.Section 6 . All equipment shall be of rugged & durable construction. 18. Normal routine and breakdown maintenance shall be assumed and it is accepted that certain consumable components and modules may need periodic replacement or adjustment. the Contractor shall state the period for which production of the equipment is likely to continue and give guarantees regarding the time period for which he will hold spares. 18. Components. rodents or micro-organisms. All contactors or relay coils and other parts shall be suitably protected against corrosion. All equipment shall conform to the applicable standards as to material. Corresponding parts throughout shall be made to gauge and shall be interchangeable.4 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP Materials used in the manufacture of the specified equipment shall be of first class quality and of the kind. and finishes shall conform to the best modern shop practices in the manufacture of finished products of a nature similar to those covered by the Specification. treatments. the Bidder shall state the expected frequency of such replacement or adjustment and the life expectancy. workmanship. Higher grade material shall be used in every case where ordinary material may be insufficient. he shall submit evidence by presentation of respective certificates. insects. as well as for the efficiency.243 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . mites.5 EQUIPMENT LIFE Unless otherwise specified in the particular equipment or system specification. All apparatus shall be designed to obviate the risk of accidental short circuit due to animals. designed for frequent operation. Tolerances. component ratings and all other factors determining equipment life shall take this into account. losses and technical performance of the equipment in strict compliance with the Contract Documents and particularly with the provisions of the Scope of Works and Specifications. shall be shown on the appropriate detail drawings submitted to the Employer for approval. etc. it may be acceptable to meet the design life by the use of a replacement sub-unit using different components but having the same or better (but fully compatible) overall performance. birds.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Kiosks. but no particular method of demonstrating it is called for. If the Contractor desires to use stock material or components not manufactured especially for works under this contract. paints. The Contractor shall guarantee for the quality of all materials. All equipment performing similar duties shall be of the same type and manufacture in order to limit the stock of spare parts required and maintain uniformity of plant and equipment to be installed. The Contractor shall indicate in the respective Technical Schedules the proposed materials and their applicable standards for all major items of the supply. including grade of class.6 RELIABILITY Where a quantitative requirement for reliability is specified in a particular specification. that such material or components comply with the requirements stated in the Specifications and to an approved standard and that the quality of such material is adequate for the intended use. The materials used for the construction of the plant shall be selected carefully for the purpose intended and with due consideration of site conditions and tropical environment. fits. 18. to the Employer's satisfaction. composition. taking into account functions such as duty cycle.

batteries used inside equipment shall be of the totally sealed. on failure. Where approval is given. 110 volts dc for power operated isolators and earthing switches. and shall verify this calculated reliability against the actual performance in the field over a given trial period. could cause loss of a function or malfunction of a particular system. the Contractor shall supply details of design changes and show how these could affect reliability. each phase shall be switched simultaneously. alarms and HV circuit breakers closing and tripping supplies. The Contractor shall undertake to provide upon request failure distribution data for all components. Double-pole switches shall be used to break singlephase ac mains supplies. For multi-phase supplies. Full details of how the ―inservice‖ data was collected and processed should be given. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. multi-window alarm schemes. Double-pole switches shall be used to break singlephase ac mains supplies.7. 18. the plant provided under this Contract shall operate reliably between eighty percent (80%) of the nominal voltage and 110% of the maximum of the nominal and float voltages. such as power supply units (PSUs). assemblies and units which.7. For multi-phase supplies. the Contractor shall calculate a reliability assessment based on the reliability figures of the individual components. 18. Where ―in-service‖ data is not available for the equipment offered. but in addition. Where the equipment offered is an updated version of equipment already in use. All mains transformers shall have an electrostatic screen which shall be earthed.244 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Where the Contractor includes within his equipment or system specially designed components. then ―inservice‖ failure rates shall be given as above. Where the equipment offered is identical to that already in use.2 Direct Current (dc) If electronic equipment or system require the use of local internal batteries approval must be obtained. he will be required to state the methods he adopts to achieve a reliability consistent with the specified overall reliability of the equipment or system. 3. leak-proof type.Section 6 . 2. wires external to the equipment shall be colour coded in accordance with the current IEC Recommendations. Such information must be accompanied by details of the environment in which the equipment is used and total operating hours accumulated. Except where prior approval is obtained.1 Alternating Current (ac) All mains supplies shall be switched and fused. 110 volts dc for facia type. for example transformers.7 POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS All mains supplies shall be switched and fused. 48 volts dc for supply of communication and telecontrol equipment Unless otherwise specified or a wider operating range is specified in relevant international standards. The neutral shall be connected by a removable link located near the protective devices. each phase shall be switched simultaneously. The electricity supplies for auxiliary supply are as follows:       415 volts 3-phase 50 Hz 4-wire 240 volts single phase 50 Hz 110 volts dc for essential indications. or bought-in items of equipment. the Contractor shall state ―inservice‖ failure rates. All mains circuits shall be protected only in the phase-lines by fuses of suitable rating or by other suitably approved protective devices. 4.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 1. 18.

operating coils.2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers Miniature or moulded case circuit breakers. the incoming (supply) circuit shall be connected to the bottom terminals. Where fuse carriers are mounted vertically.e. Similar racks or cubicles shall. be employed for all apparatus. Cubicles. unless otherwise approved. account is taken of the circuit time constant. 18. cabinets. fabricated steel construction. Protection circuits incorporated into PSUs shall be such that any overload of the output or short circuit current does not damage any components within the PSU. All moulded case circuit breakers shall be provided with an auxiliary contact(s) for remote indication of circuit breaker operation and interlocking purposes. RACKS AND CONTROL PANELS 18. Where circuit breakers are used in circuits containing inductive loads. CABINETS. Main supply fuse links shall. Swing frame gates for mounting equipment shall be avoided as far as possible but where essential the wiring to the mounted equipment shall be flexible. The contacts of the fixed portion of the fuse or link shall be shrouded so that accidental contact with live metal cannot be made when the moving portion is withdrawn. They shall be of the free standing type.8. 18.7. shall be designed and tested in accordance with IEC 947 and supplementary requirements of this specification. Circuit breakers shall be mounted in such a manner so as to give easily visible indication of breaker position and shall be grouped and spaced according to their function in order to facilitate identification and easy replacement. be of the high rupturing capacity cartridge type. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. unless otherwise specified. PSUs shall incorporate over-voltage protection devices to protect the components that comprise the output load. hereafter called circuit breakers.Section 6 . The general design of racks and cubicles shall be subject to approval. The cubicles shall be equipped with lighting fittings of an approved type. of adequate length.g.3 Power Supply Units (PSUs) PSUs shall be of approved design and such that they do not impose parasitic or harmonic voltages on the station battery system or electronic equipment. Where fuses are used the Contractor shall ensure that proper discrimination between main and sub-circuits is maintained. They shall be suitably rated for both the continuous and short circuit loadings of the circuits they are protecting under all service and atmospheric conditions stated in the specification and ensure that correct discrimination is maintained between main and sub-circuits.7. exceed 2300 mm in height. adequately protected and run for a distance along the hinge length of the swing frame to allow the wires to be twisted rather than bent when the gate is swung.4 Protection 18. and provided with shelves. All cubicles shall be fabricated with metal pockets to hold the equipment drawings and termination diagrams.245 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . it is essential that they are suitable for satisfactory operation in the circuit in which they are used. All incoming circuits in which the voltage exceeds 110 V shall be fed through isolation fuses or circuit breakers and/or links. e. 18.7. i. Neither racks nor cubicles shall.4.4.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 18.8 CUBICLES. racks and control panels shall all conform to applicable IEC 297 Standards. as far as possible.1 General All the apparatus of solid state type shall be mounted on plug-in cards in cubicles.1 Fuses and Links Carriers and bases for fuses and links shall be in accordance with IEC 269 standard and colour coded to permit identification of the circuit rating. Means shall be provided to prevent the circuit breakers being inadvertently switched to the ‗OFF‘ position.7.

3 Marshalling Cubicles Including SCADA Interface Panels Marshalling cubicles shall be of fabricated steel construction of minimum thickness 2 mm. wiring. cable glands and gland plates for small wiring and multi-core cables. and shall be flush fitting and sealed with a gasket of rubber or other approved material to prevent the ingress of dust. washers or tags. etc shall be such that cable terminations are arranged suitably for top or bottom cable entry for all cables. system control. galvanised and painted. hand lamps. precautions shall be taken to exclude dust from individual groups of equipment. In each marshalling cubicle circuits shall be grouped and labelled according to function (i. shall be not less than 200 mm above the base of the cubicle to allow access for applying the cable gland. The cubicle doors shall be of the lift-off type. except a lighting or heating circuit. etc being plugged into such supply. Fans shall comply with the noise limitations imposed by the international standards.8. vermin proof and so designed that condensation shall not affect the insulation of the terminal blocks or cables. Air filters shall be renewable and arranged for ease of replacement. All cubicles shall be adequately ventilated to restrict condensation and where necessary shall incorporate anti condensation heaters.e. All filters shall be accessible and easy to clean. Where forced ventilation is approved. terminals shall be provided for connecting the screens of screened twisted pair cables. These items shall be located in an approved. The Bidder shall state the time for which the equipment can remain operational after failure of the forced ventilation system. Racks and cubicles shall be complete with all necessary tag blocks. wiring ferrules. 18.2 Cubicle Wiring Cubicle wiring shall be insulated with polyvinylchloride to IEC 228 standard. The equipment installed in the cubicle/panels shall be easily accessible. labels and door locks. The design and construction of all racks. easily accessible. Marshalling cubicles shall be complete with all necessary terminal blocks. and earth bar with earthing connection. special sockets shall be provided on the panel to prevent portable tools. Circuits working at different voltages shall be adequately segregated and labelled. Power supply busbars in cubicles shall be carefully routed and each busbar shall be shrouded. dustproof. All marshalling cubicles shall accept a common key for locking. the cubicles shall be equipped with the proper and approved cooling and ventilation system.Section 6 . or other apparatus for which regulated supplies are required. cubicles. Forced ventilation shall not be used without approval. Where appropriate. alarm and tripping circuits. The cooling air for the cubicles and cabinets must be cleaned and free from dust. to be isolated from the bus wires.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Where regulated supplies are made available on panels for operating test instruments. plug-in group or terminal block shall be not less than 400 mm above floor level. The gland plates shall be removable and in the case of floor mounted bottom entry cubicles. The lowest mounting point. If the equipment in the cubicles/panels is of the nature to dissipate heat. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.246 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Cubicles and doors shall be structurally stiff and braced to withstand twisting without distortion. Wires shall not be joined or teed between terminal points. position and so arranged that the terminals face the access direction for convenience during maintenance. Within the cubicles and racks. Cubicle doors shall be provided and arranged to lie flat back when open and not restrict access to the apparatus contained within the cubicle. fans shall be duplicated to provide 100 per cent standby capacity and shall initiate remote alarms in the event of failure. Fuses and links shall be provided to enable all circuits in a cubicle.8. terminal blocks. telephone circuits. It shall not be possible to inadvertently short busbars either between themselves or to earth. Bus wires shall be fully insulated and run separately from one another along the top or bottom of the cubicle. junction boxes. It shall be possible to work on small wiring for maintenance or test purposes without making the cubicle dead. 18. secured with integral handles provided with locks and duplicate keys to an approved system. etc) with the labels attached to the fixed portion of the terminal boards.

Links shall be provided to isolate individual circuits or groups of apparatus for maintenance purposes whilst the rest of the apparatus is functioning normally. etc. boards being inserted upside down. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Cubicles containing a working voltage in excess of 110 V shall carry a prominent electrical shock symbol and a ―DANGER‖ label in English. Covers of transparent insulating material shall be provided on terminal blocks on which connections for circuits at 110 V or higher are terminated. Terminals other than those described above may be permitted but the type and arrangement of termination shall be to approval.g.2 Connectors Multi-pole connectors shall be provided with means whereby each free plug or socket can be locked in the match positions. Sufficient terminal blocks shall be provided to allow individual cores to be connected to separate terminals together with a further 20 per cent spare terminals. Other methods of connection such as taper pin connectors. control panels mimic diagrams.4 Equipment.247 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .3. The design and arrangement of connectors shall be such that incorrect mating cannot occur.1 Terminal Blocks Terminal blocks shall be of non-flammable insulating material with a comparative tracking index of not less than 500 in accordance with IEC 112 standard. Identification labels shall not be affixed to wiring trunk covers nor shall they be affixed to removable or interchangeable covers. Not more than one wire may be terminated at each insertion type terminal.8. Where possible. PCB connectors shall incorporate reliable means (e. etc. Internal component label lettering shall be not less than 4 mm high and any supplementary detail on the same label shall be differentiated by employing a lettering size of at least 1 mm less than that used for primary information. All cubicles shall have an identification label affixed externally. terminal blocks shall be of the insulation displacement type. The use of terminal blocks as junction points for wires that are not required in the associated cubicle shall be avoided. the terminal blocks shall comprise an insertion type terminal for the multi-core cable and insulation displacement for the telephone cable joined by withdrawable or ‗U‘ links to facilitate isolation. polarising slots) to prevent incorrect mating. Sinhalese and Tamil on the door of the cubicle. The type of insulation displacement connector (IDC) chosen shall be one that grips the insulation or employs a strain relief clamp.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 18. They should be mounted vertically and set not less than 100 mm apart with a minimum distance of 200 mm between the top or bottom and the gland plates. IDC headers should employ ejector latches. they shall be of a type that provides gripping and support for the insulation as well as the conductor. 18. Terminals for stranded wire conductors shall normally be of the insertion clamp type incorporating captive pressure screws which do not bear directly on the wire but on a serrated clamping plate. components and terminal fields shall have suitable identification labels affixed. Where the use of snap on connectors is agreed. The design of clamps shall be such that the cable is not compressed sufficiently to cause creep in the insulation.8. For telephone type multi-pair cables. They shall also incorporate means for clamping the incoming cable so that the conductors are relieved of any stress. shall be to specific approval. drawings.Section 6 .3. fibre optic connectors. wire-clamp connectors. Suitable warning labels shall be provided. These terminals shall also be provided with facilities for the insertion of test probes on both sides of the link. Components and Terminal Identification All equipment.8. 18. or a board being inserted into the wrong socket. For multi-core cables. terminal blocks shall be provided with links to isolate individual circuits for maintenance purposes whilst the rest of the apparatus is functioning normally. Each item shall have a unique reference for identification and this shall be consistent on local labels. Where connections are to be made between multi-core cables and multi-pair telephone type cables. All terminals shall be numbered.

g. 18. The instruments with associated circuits. For indoor applications where purpose built accommodation is provided.5 seconds through the primary of their corresponding instrument transformers. All ferrous metal surfaces shall be cleaned using dry blast cleaning and a suitable anti-rust treatment applied prior to the application of the final protective finish. Approved means shall be provided for zero adjustment without dismantling the instrument or removing the instrument from the panel. ergonomically suitable for the function that they have to perform. and arranged for ease of replacement and maintenance. wide angle type. consistent with good visibility of indication in a well lit room. etc which may have occurred during transportation. All paints shall be applied in strict accordance with the paint manufacturer‘s instructions. All instruments shall be back-connected and their cases shall be earthed. For indoor applications where the equipment is housed in the same building as that enclosing water and steam operated equipment.8. this equipment should be separately housed with a degree of protection of IP 52. Where dust can adversely affect equipment within the enclosure. the degree of protection shall be to IP 44. equipment. centre zero instruments or displaced zero instruments shall be employed as approved. shall not be damaged or have their accuracy impaired by the passage of fault currents. but generally in compliance with the requirements of IEC 1020.8. lamps shall have the minimum power consumption. colour and size of lettering shall be submitted for approval during the design phase. 18. Analogue instruments shall be of an approved moving coil type. Paint colours shall be to the approval of the Employer. switch. colour and shape of keys and push buttons shall be to approval. adhesive fixing shall not be used. this equipment shall be separately housed with a degree of protection of IP 54. junction boxes and distribution boards shall be afforded adequate protection against corrosion. Where light emitting diodes (LEDs) are used. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. with a dead beat mechanism. Where the equipment can also be adversely affected by dust within the enclosure.Section 6 . (e. The Contractor shall make good using the same coating to the satisfaction of the Employer any deterioration of protective coatings. they shall preferably be high output. and shall be of an approved type and size. marshalling boxes. Digital indicators shall be to approval.9. deterioration etc.6 Painting and Finishing All cubicles.5 Degrees of Protection Equipment degree of protection shall be provided in accordance with IEC 529 standard. equivalent to 20 times full load current for not more than 0. The display shall not ‗hunt‘ about an average value at a rate that renders it illegible.3 Indicating Lamps Indicating lamps and lamp-holders shall be of approved types. 18. paintwork. Identification labels shall be securely fixed to steel work and wiring and other items shall not obscure the label. 18. To reduce heating and fouling of the control boards. control and relay rooms in auxiliary plant buildings) the degrees of protection shall be to IP 42.9 CONTROL AND INDICATING DEVICES 18. A schedule of proposed labels and safety signs detailing size.9. All non-locking keys and push-buttons shall be spring loaded and so designed as to avoid inadvertent operation.1 Keys and Push Buttons The type. fixing arrangement.248 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . mechanical damage.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification All labels and safety signs shall be affixed using screws or bolts with captive nuts. Digital indicating instruments shall conform to IEC 485.2 Indicating Instruments All analogue indicating instruments shall conform to IEC 51 standard industrial grade. position. In two-directional circuits.9. For outdoor applications the degrees of protection shall be to Ingress Protection (IP) 65 or higher. erection and commissioning. 18.

All special tools for withdrawing plug-in cards shall be provided.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The colour of lamps shall be to approval. cable lists. lugs.1 General The cable installation to be provided shall include all cables required for the supply. LV power cables with compacted or compressed type stranded conductors will not be accepted. They shall be clean and free from flux likely to cause particles to adhere to the board and cause short circuits. terminal diagrams.10 SECONDARY WIRING AND CABLES 18. 18. cables shall have galvanized steel wire armour with a thermoplastic waterproof over sheath. Terminals shall be provided for all cores. The Contractor shall undertake all relevant design and engineering of the cable systems for equipment in its scope of supply. single strand annealed copper conductors with a cross sectional area of 1. piping and accessories. Printed circuits shall be to approval. brackets. cleats. Methods of mechanical protection. cable schedules and the cable route plans. The Contractor shall submit design calculations to demonstrate that the maximum continuous current carrying capacity of any power cable will not be exceeded after taking installation dependant de-rating factors into account and short circuit currents. Plug-in cards shall be spaced such that an electrical short circuit to adjacent cards cannot occur during insertion. cable markers.6 mm2 may be used. The installation shall be complete with all cable terminations. and shall submit for review the cable connection schematic diagrams. cable ladder racks. control. 18. 18. fittings. Suitable extender cards shall be provided to enable plug-in cards to be tested in circuit. Where routed outside buildings or enclosures and where no other overall mechanical protection is afforded. clips and all fixings. indication and monitoring of all plant provided under this Contract. Also for telephone type cables conductors of cross sectional area of 0. but not less than two cores for future use. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Any screening and cable segregation necessary to prevent spurious signals being induced between cables shall be shown on the block cable diagrams. In special cases for light current installations. single core or multicore XLPE insulated.5 mm2. All similar plug-in cards shall be interchangeable. All cables provided must comply with the latest applicable IEC standards. All control and small power wiring and cabling (except fibre optic cables) supplied under this Contract shall have multi-stranded copper conductors complying with the requirements of IEC 60228 and IEC 60228A. Insulation and protective levels for printed circuit modules shall as a minimum be in accordance with IEC 870-3 Class II.10. ferrules.4 Plug-in Cards The number of different types of plug-in cards shall be kept to a minimum. The design and construction of plug-in cards shall be such that they shall not distort.Section 6 . other than steel wire armour. The clarity of these fascias and legends shall not be impaired by the incident or transmitted light. Cables shall comply with the relevant parts of IEC 60502 and IEC 60811. shall be subject to approval. The cards shall be colour coded and also provided with an approved form of interlock to prevent them being inserted in an incorrect shelf position. steel wire armoured (aluminium in the case of single core cables) and sheathed with LSF. numbered ferrules. cable trays & covers.9. The minimum conductor size shall not be less than 2. but generally in accordance with IEC 73 standard. Illumination of fascias and legends and all indicating symbols shall be clear and distinct and shall be subject to approval.249 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .10.2 Cable Types LV power cables shall be 1000 V grade. All multicore control cables having more than 7 cores shall have approximately 20 per cent spare cores. thermoplastic insulation and thermoplastic inner sheath. junction boxes. All ducts and covers shall be sealed after installation of cables. steel wire armouring and PVC outer serving.5 mm2 may be used. Printed circuit boards shall be tinned and varnished or otherwise protected against corrosion and all connectors (plug or edge type) shall be plated with gold. glands.

where considered necessary shall also incorporate a sunshade to protect the installation from the damaging effects of UV radiation. Individually screened pairs or overall screened multicore cables shall be provided where it is necessary to provide immunity from interference and reduce the effect of induced extraneous voltages.10. These measures shall be subject to approval. termites and also mechanical damage. the weight. Each core of a multi-core cable shall be readily identified by a number impressed into the insulation every 100 mm. Cable cores. 60754. In order to maintain this formation. number and configuration required for each tray plus additional cables. Each cable shall be identified by means of indelibly marked identification labels fixed adjacent to the cable gland at each end of the cable. the cables shall be clamped together at intervals not exceeding 1 metre. All cables shall be mechanically protected throughout the installed route. 61034 and be anti-vermin and anti-termite impregnated. Cables shall be neatly laid throughout and in such a manner as to avoid any undue sagging of cables. Cables shall be marked at each end of the run with a marker consisting of a label attached to the cable with two straps. The outer LSF sheaths of cables shall have reduced flame propagation characteristics in accordance with IEC 60331. supported on trays and racks. the cables shall be securely fastened at intervals of not more than 1 m with clips. twins.3 Cable Laying. 18. and the cable support system. the cores shall be uniformly twisted and the lays arranged such that cross talk is reduced to a minimum. Three single core cables forming one three-phase circuit shall be installed in trefoil formation. the routes used for normal running equipment. Cables shall generally be routed to avoid hot or fire-risk areas and to minimize the risk of damage from any source. Cable cores shall be terminated without the addition of separate tails. This sealing shall consist of one-hour fire resisting materials such that a maximum of 100°C is Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. or segregated from. UV radiation.250 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The layout of all cables shall be arranged to have adequate clearance from other services. The screen single core cables shall be earthed at one end only. Termination and Identification All cables shall be installed above ground level or in trenches. the cables shall be segregated as fully as possible. Precautions shall be taken to ensure physical contact does not take place anywhere throughout the run. Where run on trays or racking. All cabling and wiring shall be flame retardant Low Smoke & Fumes (LSF) type complying with IEC-332 Part 3 and during combustion shall emit no halogen gases and produce minimal smoke. vermin. Glands appropriate for use with Steel Wire Armoured (SWA) type cables are to be provided and arrangements for multicore SWA type cables are to be taken into account in the switchboards. The emergency equipment shall be connected with fire-resistant cables. Where SWA cable is not used then provision must be made to protect the cable from damage due to physical abuse and attack from vermin. Running equipment cables along the same route as power cables shall be avoided. The labels shall be made of material which is resistant to the effects of corrosion. All cables shall be installed and terminated in accordance with the manufacturer‘s recommendations. straps or saddles. All sheaths shall be free from defects and impervious to water. quads and individually screened multi-pairs shall be colour coded. Cables that are likely to be exposed to sunlight during operation and maintenance shall have ultra-violet safe insulation. Wherever cables pass through floors. moisture. Where this is not possible. Cables running inside buildings or concrete trenches shall be laid on trays. Nonferrous glands shall be used for single-core cables. or in the case of telephone cables with cable ties. in excess of those installed. Equipment that is required for emergency use shall be cabled using routes that are different to.Section 6 . walls or other partitions a suitable method of sealing shall be used. All cables shall be glanded at both ends with glands of type/material suitable for the application. Cabling and wiring shall be designed and the installation arranged to minimize the risk of fire and damage.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Where twin or quad make-up is required in any cable. Sufficient slack shall be provided near the ends of the cable runs to allow for disturbance during maintenance or repair. not less than 25% by weight and dimensions. The trays shall be of adequate strength and size to carry in one layer.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 18. the door hinges will not be accepted as a means of earthing this part of the equipment. All ‗clean‘ instrument earth bars shall be clearly labelled as such. connected through any field junction boxes. flexible cable or braid shall be used for earthing these items.11.11. The cable armour shall be connected to the site earth at a single point. a stud type terminal of diameter not less than 12 mm or a tapped boss of equivalent size shall be provided on the outside of each cabinet or structure for the purpose of making the connection to a convenient local earth point. shall be waterproof. desks etc.2 Safety Earthing All non-current carrying metallic parts of plant. Except where otherwise approved. Cubicles.3 Cable Screens and Armouring The design of equipment shall be such that cable screens and cable armouring are kept electrically separate throughout the equipment installation so as to avoid the introduction of earth loops and minimise interference pickup. Connection of the instrument earth to the site earth shall be by separate conductor to the equipment safety earth. or areas with water spray fire protection. Seals in damp areas. All seals shall be vermin and termite proof. The whole installation shall be arranged to prevent the spread of fire.11 EARTHING 18.Section 6 . Protective screens around insulated cables shall be insulated from field instruments. etc. racks. enclosures. Where there is a conflict between these two.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification maintained on the cold side of the seal with 1000°C applied to the hot side.1 General Earthing of electronic equipment is required to reduce the effects of interference and for the safety of operation and maintenance staff. Cable armouring shall not be used as a protective screen. 18.11. 18. personal safety shall always take precedence. When apparatus or instruments are accommodated on panel. equipment. cubicle doors or swinging frames. but shall be electrically isolated from the enclosure. shall be earthed by connection to the earth bar in an approved manner and all earthing terminals and connections shall be of adequate dimensions. shall be equipped with a ‗clean‘ instrument earth comprising an insulated copper earth bar for the connection of cable screens. Equipment shall be designed so that the armouring of all incoming and outgoing cable and can be connected together externally.251 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . smoke and fumes through each partition. and be continuous up to the earthing point in the destination cubicle or desk. components.

programme development and management utilities. 19. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 19. This waiver shall not apply to any third party software that has been modified in any way by the Contractor or his subcontractors. Such modification shall be subject to the design control and quality assurance provisions of this Specification. However.252 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Software For the purposes of this Specification. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.1      GENERAL Functionality Performance Reliability and availability Quality assurance standards SCADA/EMS applications shall comply to Common Information Model (CIM) and Generic Data Interface (GID) standards as defined by IEC 61970. instrumentation or the process being monitored and/or controlled. standard software for data acquisition. as stated in this Specification: Words used in this Specification to describe categories of software shall have the meanings defined below. Existing Software ‗Existing Software‘ means any existing software forming part of the Contractor's standard product that has been proven in use at several sites over a period of at least one year. are not required to meet the design or coding requirements of this Specification. including third party software items. and the Contractor shall be responsible for the integration of all hardware and software supplied. ‗Software‘ shall mean all coded instructions and data that are processed by a computer or other processor controlled device. Entry of this data shall not require any alteration to program coding. or to cause the software to function according to project requirements. New Software ‗New Software‘ means any software that is developed or modified to provide facilities required for this project.Section 6 . includes operating systems. Configuration and Source Data ‗Configuration and Source Data‘ includes any software configuration tables or data entered to define the characteristics of plant.2 THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE Standard third party software that was originally designed for purposes unrelated to this project. for example. into a single integrated package that meets the requirements of this Specification.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 19. This. It does not include any software that requires development or modification to meet the requirements of this Specification. such as operating systems. All software provided shall meet the following requirements. and embedded software on proprietary equipment such as network interface cards and printers. whether such facilities are explicitly specified or not. display and control. compilers. the Contractor shall warrant that such items are suitable for the purpose for which they are supplied.

The Bidder shall provide details of all programming languages used. and to notify and correct errors. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3. 19. they cannot become corrupted due to interrupted transfers or inadvertently over-written. 19. for example containing the real-time data.1 Programming Languages The SCADA/EMS system and all new software shall be written in a standard high-level language that is suitable for implementation of real-time systems. 19. Verification and Testing The level of software validation. Real-time and calculated data shall be held within the system database in a manner that makes them readily accessible to all programs that require this information. and it is not intended that quality assurance procedures should be applied retrospectively. They shall make documentation for that software available for inspection during the Bid evaluation period. there shall effectively be one master System Database in which each item of data is stored only once.4.2 Existing Software It is recognised that existing software may not have been developed in accordance with the requirements of this Specification.4 Software Validation. The System Database shall be structured in such a way as to simplify maintenance of data and programs and it shall not be necessary for the user to enter the same data into the System more than once. Mechanisms shall be provided to ensure consistency between the master system database and any online or backup copies. Where the software is of a proprietary nature and not of the Bidder's design.4.253 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . geographical data.3 Configuration Data The Contractor shall establish quality control procedures to ensure that configuration data is in accordance with Clause 17 and any subsequent updates to such data are correctly entered into the SCADA/EMS system. The Employer reserves the right to audit the quality control procedures used by the Contractor for the production of new software. for example.Section 6 .3 CODE AND DATA STANDARDS 19.3. The System Database may comprise a number of databases. 19. where possible.4 APPLICATION OF QUALITY ASSURANCE This Section defines how the Contractor's quality assurance procedures shall apply to the different categories of software.4. plant records.3. but such distribution of data storage shall be transparent to the user. Database protection at both field and record levels shall be provided to prevent inadvertent corruption of the database.. the Bidder shall provide evidence of their experience with the software and its performance in similar applications.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 19. etc. The mechanisms shall operate automatically and shall include periodic cyclic checks. 19.3 Program and Data Security The software design shall ensure the integrity and safety of all code and data at all times so that. verification and testing to be applied shall be clearly identified by the Contractor.2 Database Structure In order to ensure the integrity of all data held by the System.1 New Software All new software (if applicable) shall be produced in accordance with the software quality assurance procedures described in this Specification.4. 19. 19.

254 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .5 Functional Design Specification For each function to be realised using software. 19.5. The detailed design shall include data flow diagrams.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 19.5. the Contractor shall prepare a detailed design document that shall describe how the function is to be implemented. as specified in Section 4 ‗Documentation‘.6 Detailed Design For each new software function defined in the FDS.5. 19. which shall be subject to the Contractor's quality control procedures. The Employer will not be held liable for any costs incurred by the Contractor as a result of changes to work carried out before approval of the FDS. These procedures shall ensure that work is only carried out on the latest version of all software and documents. The FDS shall state which functions will be implemented with existing software and which functions require the development of new software or modification of existing software. They shall also implement procedures for controlling all changes to issued software and documents.5 SCADA/EMS SOFTWARE 19.3 System Development Methodology All software development shall be carried out in accordance with a recognised System Development Methodology (SDM). 19.Section 6 .4 Documentation Documentation for each phase of software development shall be produced. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. proprietary application software provided by the Contractor and their subcontractor that forms the complete SCADA/EMS System and its associated ancillary systems. structured English or pseudo code specification of module logic and such other documentation as is specified in the approved SDM.5 Change and Issue Control The Contractor shall implement procedures for controlling the issue of all software and related documents. module interface definitions. The Contractor shall not purchase any specialised hardware for this Contract nor commence the production of any software until the FDS has been approved. The FDS shall be produced in accordance with the approved system development methodology and shall be submitted for review. 19. the Contractor shall prepare a formal written Functional Design Specification (FDS) fully describing:     The functionality that will be provided The methods and algorithms used to realise the functionality Details of the user interface Details of the data inputs and outputs of the function The FDS shall not include the coding for any function unless the inclusion of segments of code would be useful to describe the functionality of a particular function.1 General The following requirements shall apply to all. 19.4.5. reviewed and approved in accordance with the approved SDM. The Contractor shall keep backup copies of all issued software. 19.2 Software Life Cycle Quality assurance controls and verification shall be applied to each phase of the software system life cycle.5.5. Documentation shall be an integral part of each phase and not a separate activity. program structure charts. The Contractor shall provide a traceability reference with the FDS.

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

19.6

OPERATING SYSTEMS

19.6.1 General Each computer system shall be provided with a real-time, multi-user, multitasking operating system that provides a suitable environment for executing the software intended to be utilised on each system, especially for real-time functions. UNIX or LINUX solutions are preferred rather than WINDOWS. If WINDOWS solutions are offered the Bidder shall describe in detail the specific means of mitigation of risks to reliability and security. It is preferred that each processing base unit, e.g. workstations, servers, front-end processors, shall use the same operating system and the same version/upgrade of that operating system. The number of different operating systems shall be kept to a minimum and, preferably only one operating system should be used for all computers. The Contractor or their subcontractors shall have made no customisation to the supplied operating system(s). A priority system of resource allocation shall allow both real-time and other tasks, such as system configuration and maintenance, to execute in the same environment while maintaining absolute priority for real-time tasks. A memory protection system shall prevent any task from writing into a memory partition that is allocated for the exclusive use of any other task. Facilities shall be provided to monitor the correct release of memory when tasks terminate and no longer require the memory allocated to them. The operating system shall fully support the hardware, both in its initial configuration and in any expanded configuration that the Employer may purchase from the Contractor, and shall provide software control of all functions of the hardware. 19.6.2 Security The Operating System shall support multiple users simultaneously exercising its resources and the resources of the computer system (e.g. disk drives, etc). Identification and password security shall be implemented for each user and a file protection scheme supported. Access by any user to any file, package or system facility shall not be granted unless the user is known to the system and has the required authorisation level for the operation they wishes to perform. The following access authorisation levels are required for files:     Execute only Read only Read/write/update Modify the file definition (e.g. name, password, etc).

19.6.3 System Utilities The operating system shall include the following utilities as a minimum:         An intelligent file backup utility that will only backup files that have been modified since the previous backup was made A copy utility to copy files from one medium to the same or a different medium A utility to dump an image of an entire hard disk, e.g. to another hard disk or tape, and to restore such images back to a hard disk A utility to undelete files that have been previously deleted A utility to check the integrity of a disk, to diagnose any problems and lock out any faulty areas of a disk A utility to de-fragment all the files on a disk A utility to view the contents of a file, either in ASCII text or hexadecimal format, without changing the contents of the file A directory sort utility, enabling the directory to be displayed with the listing sorted in ascending or descending order of file name, file size or file date

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 255 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

  

A sort/merge utility that can sort or merge a number of files of any size according to one or more sort keys Facilities to dump nominated areas of memory and the CPU registers to disk, particularly for investigation after a task crash All utilities shall include context sensitive help.

19.6.4 Text Editor At least one text editor shall be supplied with the operation system and the following facilities are required for all text editors provided: Windowed and full screen operation of the facilities defined below            The ability to edit files formatted for input to all language translators provided, files formatted for printing and free text Horizontal scrolling facilities to allow editing of files with line lengths that are longer than the screen width The ability to edit files that are larger than the amount of free memory available to the editor The ability to work on a copy of a file without affecting the original The ability to locate text containing a specified string of characters, and the next occurrence thereof, including the optional use of wildcards The ability to search for, insert or delete variable length strings of data The ability to move or copy an identifiable string of data from one part of a file to another part The ability to move or copy an identifiable string of data from one part of a file to a specified location in a different file The ability to merge text from several files The ability to display text either as ASCII characters or in hexadecimal representation, or in both formats on the same screen Context sensitive help

19.6.5 Software Configuration and Maintenance Facilities Facilities shall also be provided for the maintenance of the System software, whether or not the source code is provided with System. 19.6.5.1 Diagnostics and Fault Monitoring

A complete package of diagnostic programs shall be provided with the System that will allow testing of all system devices, including inter processor links and communications with RTUs, to determine whether or not a problem exists and to isolate a problem to a certain area in the device. Both online (self diagnostic) and offline diagnostics shall be provided. Facilities shall be provided to run diagnostics on all relevant subsystems of the SCADA/EMS System. 19.6.5.2 Error Detection and Reporting

Malfunctions to be reported shall include excessive program execution time, communications errors and identification of faults in each hardware device provided. Any malfunction shall cause a message to be generated in clear English text and brought to the attention of the operator, so that remedial action can be taken. It is not acceptable to merely generate an error number that must be looked-up in a manual or elsewhere. Facilities shall be provided to display the status of all flags and devices on demand.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 256 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

19.6.5.3

Online Performance Measurement

An online performance measurement and analysis tool shall be provided to check system operation and to enable tuning and optimisation of the system as a whole. This tool shall measure overall CPU utilisation and identify the resources used by individual users and tasks. 19.6.5.4 Telemetry Communications Statistics

The system shall continuously calculate and update statistics on telemetry scans and errors, and provide facilities for this information to be displayed on request. The following information shall be provided for each outstation (RTU or SCS) and for the total of all outstations on each data line: a) b) No response Invalid response The number of times an outstation failed to respond to a request from the Master Station The number of invalid replies received from an outstation in response to a request from the Master Station, tabulated by error type (e.g. incorrect message length, CRC error, address error, etc.) Total number of scans (valid and invalid) carried out during the reference period

c)

Number of scans

The above information shall be accumulated as follows:       Current hour Previous hour Current day Previous day Current month Previous month

In each case, the 'current' figures shall be updated continuously. At the end of each hour, day and month period respectively, the 'current' figures shall be transferred to the 'previous' figures and the 'current' figures shall be reset to zero. An historical record of communications statistics shall be maintained by the system complete with a long term archiving facility. 19.6.5.5 Software Maintenance Facilities shall be provided for generating the System‘s executable code from source code. These facilities shall be the same as the facilities used at the Contractor‘s factory or completely compatible with them. It is anticipated that these facilities will be used by the Contractor onsite to build and integrate any software fixes or updates received from the factory, or prepared onsite, into the System. Any modifications prepared onsite shall be managed under the overall software quality procedures. It is not intended that these facilities be used routinely by the Employer but they are required in order to safe guard the Employer against the loss of software support, for any reason, from the Contractor. In that case these facilities would permit the Employer or others, to effect any necessary software maintenance, modification or addition. 19.6.5.5.1     Language Translators

The following facilities are required for all language translators (compilers and interpreters) provided: Separate compilation/assembly of subprograms Clear statements to be produced, in plain English, of error conditions that are encountered during the translation process and execution Optionally produced source listings Optionally produced cross reference listing, providing an alphabetical listing of all program variables showing where in the program each variable is defined and used

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 257 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

 

Optional trace and debug facilities in accordance with the requirements of Clause 19.7.9 Optional code optimisation to produce code for normal or fast execution. Source code processed and object code produced in each case shall be compatible, for example, a subprogram compiled for fast execution shall correctly link to a subprogram compiled for normal execution A ‗make‘ facility that shall check the date and time when each source code file for a specified program was last modified against the date and time when the associated object code file was created, and automatically recompile all source files that are more recent than the associated object file A ‗build‘ facility that shall recompile all source code files for a particular program regardless of the relative date/time of source and object files. Linker

19.6.5.5.2

The linker shall be able to accept one or more object modules produced by an assembler or compiler, resolve symbol and procedure references between them and produce an executable image. If more than one language translator is provided then the linker shall be capable of linking object modules produced by any or all language translators into a single executable program. The linker shall optionally be able to produce a storage map of all linked modules, including library modules, and a tree-structured map showing the calling structure. 19.6.5.5.3 Program Maintenance Libraries

Program maintenance library facilities shall be able to create and update program libraries of source and object programs and provide the following facilities:        Support for any number of source or object program libraries Facilities for the creation, deletion and copying of individual libraries Facilities to add source or object modules to a specified library Facilities to delete source or object modules from a specified library Facilities to extract a source or object module from a specified library, modify it and re-insert it in the library Facilities to extract a source or object module from a specified library and insert it in another library A facility to display a directory listing of individual libraries, showing the name and version number of each member and the date it was last modified Trace and Debug Facilities

19.6.5.5.4

Trace and debug facilities suitable for debugging programs written in any of the languages used on this project shall be provided with the System. Both source code and machine code debugging shall be supported as described below. Source Code Debugging Source code debugging facilities shall be able to set, remove and locate breakpoints in the source code of any of the languages provided. While the program is halted at a breakpoint, the following facilities shall be available and displayed for selection:      Search for variable length text strings in the source code Display values of program variables, that are identified to the debugger by using their source code variable names, in decimal, binary or hexadecimal format Change the values identified as in (b) above Clear breakpoints and optionally set new ones Run the program to the next breakpoint or program termination and return control to the debugger

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 258 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

   

Run the program one source code line at a time Skip over lines of source code and whole subprograms without tracing through them Display the call stack, showing by name the hierarchy of subprogram calls that brought the program to the current instruction Context sensitive help

Machine Code Debugging Machine code debugging facilities shall be able to set, remove and locate breakpoints in the machine code produced from any of the language translators provided. While the program is halted at a breakpoint, the following facilities shall be available and displayed for selection:               19.7 Search for variable length binary or hexadecimal strings in the object code Display the values of nominated memory locations in binary, fixed point decimal, floating point decimal or hexadecimal format Change the contents of a nominated memory location by entering a new value in binary, decimal or hexadecimal format Clear breakpoints and optionally set new ones Run the program to the next breakpoint or program termination and return control to the debugger Display the contents of all registers and flags whenever a set breakpoint operates or the program is halted Run the program one machine code instruction at a time Display the call stack, showing the hierarchy of subprogram calls which brought the user to the current instruction Display and optionally change the contents of CPU registers Assemble instructions entered as assembler mnemonics at a specified location in memory Disassemble machine code at specified locations in memory Jump to a specified memory location and execute the code there, and run to the next breakpoint or program termination Convert numbers between binary, fixed point decimal, floating point decimal and hexadecimal formats Context sensitive help PATENT AND COPYRIGHT

19.7.1 Patent Rights The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against all claims of infringement of any patent, registered design, copyright, trade mark or trade name or other intellectual property right provided that all of the following conditions are satisfied: The claim or proceedings arise out of the design, construction, manufacture or use of the Works or any Plant supplied by the Contractor The right was protected at the date of award of the Contract in the Contractor's country or the country in which the Plant is to be manufactured or erected The infringement or allegation of infringement was not caused by any use of the Works otherwise than for the purpose indicated by or reasonably to be inferred from the Specification The infringement or allegation of infringement was not caused by the use of any Plant in association or combination with any plant not supplied by the Contractor, unless such association or combination was disclosed to the Contractor prior to the date of the Bid

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 259 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

19.7.2 Claims in Respect of Patent Rights The Contractor shall be promptly notified of any claim under this Clause 19.7 made against the Employer. The Contractor may, at their own cost, conduct negotiations for the settlement of such claim and any litigation that may arise from that claim. The Employer shall not make any admission that might be prejudicial to the Contractor unless the Contractor has failed to take over the conduct of the negotiations or litigation within a reasonable time after having been so requested. The Contractor may not, however, conduct such negotiations or litigation before they have given the Employer such reasonable security as the Employer may require. The security shall be for an amount that is an assessment of the compensation, damages, expenses and costs for which the Employer may become liable and are the subject of the indemnity under Clause 19.7.1. The Employer shall, at the request of the Contractor, provide all available assistance for the purpose of contesting any such claim or action and shall be repaid all reasonable costs incurred in so doing. 19.7.3 Backup Copies of Software The Contractor shall ensure that the Employer shall have the right to make backup copies of all software and firmware supplied under the Contract for their own use without in any way relieving the Contractor of his obligations. 19.7.4 Right To Modify The Contractor shall ensure that the Employer shall have the right to modify any of the software supplied under the Contract without in any way relieving the Contractor of their obligations. 19.8 LICENCES

The bidder shall provide full details of the licence requirements for each item of software included in the system. The details shall include any restrictions in number of users or platforms on which the software is installed. In general licences are required for all users of the system when fully expanded and these shall be valid indefinitely. Users shall include all those with access via equipment provided under this contract including the office PCs.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 260 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification

20. CIVIL WORKS 20.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

20.1.1 Civil Engineering, Building works and Services Standards and Codes of Practice The works shall be executed in accordance with the latest version of the following standards and codes of practices commonly used in Sri Lanka. However, the Contractor may use equivalent standards and codes of practice subject to the approval of the Employer. : BS 308 BS 5950 BS 1192 BS 5628 BS 5720 BS 5588 BS 8300 & Part M NBS BS 5930 BS 5964 BS 6031 BS 6399 CP 3 CP 102 BS 5400 Part 5 BS 5390, 5618 part 3 CP 143 BS 8004 BS 8110 SLS 522 BS 1474 BS 476 Part 8 ISO 898-1 ISO 630 BS/DIN EN 10027-1 BS 4449 BS 4483 BS 4466 Engineering drawing practice The use of structural steel in building Construction drawing practice Code of Practice of the structural use of masonry Code or Practice for mechanical ventilation and air conditioning in buildings Code of Practice for fire precautions in the design of buildings Disabled access Code of practice for Site Investigations Methods for setting out and measurement of buildings: permissible measuring deviations Code of Practice of Earthworks Code of Practice for dead and imposed loads Code of basic data for the design of buildings Waterproofing of buildings. Composite construction in structural steel and Concrete Walling Sheet roof and wall coverings Foundations The structural use of concrete Water for Concreting Aluminium Sections Fire Resisting Doors Bolts & Nuts Hot rolled structural steel sections Designation system for steels Characterization of waste Specification for steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete Steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete. Specification

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Procurement of Plant

Page 6B- 261 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

the Contractor must make his own site surveys to collect all the information to prepare layout drawings. Methods of testing hardened concrete for other than strength Testing of resin and polymer/cement compositions for use in construction.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification BS 1881 BS 6319 Testing concrete. including highest recorded flood level (from local knowledge).262 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . bridges and access roads to and over the site. The Contractor shall keep duplicate copies of all his field books and survey calculations written in the English language for inspection by the Employer. The Contractor shall be responsible for all setting-out. (1) (2) (3) Location of datum of setting out and levelling. Method for preparation of test specimens BS 5481 BS 6651 BS 4660 BS EN 752 BS EN 124 BS 6297 BS 1722 BS 4102 BS 6399 ICTAD Publication No. irrespective of any checking by the Employer. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.1 Site Survey After the award of the contract. Design requirements.2 Specification for unplasticized PVC pipe and fittings for gravity sewers Code of practice for protection of structures against lightning Specification for unplasticized PVC underground drain pipe and fittings Drain and sewer systems outside buildings. Code of practice for dead and imposed loads Specification for BUILDING WORKS (Volume I) 3rd Revision – July 2004 Specification for BUILDING WORKS – Volume 2. SCA/3/2 Revised Edition 20. quality control Code of practice for design and installation of small sewage treatment works and cesspools Specification for fences Specification for steel wire for fences Loading for buildings. The Contractor shall survey the site to obtain the following.Section 6 . Position and condition of any approaches. The Employer may at his discretion alter or specify new tolerances as necessary.October 2001 Specification for WATER SUPPLY. SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER DRAINAGE WORK PRELIMINARY WORKS 20.2. type testing. SCA/4 – (Volume II) ICTAD Publication No. SCA/4 – (Volume I) ICTAD Publication No. The tolerances shall be ruled BS 5606 and BS 5964. The Contractor shall inform the Employer within 24 hours whenever a new setting-out peg is established or an existing one destroyed. and shall regularly furnish the Employer with layout plans showing all current setting-out and survey stations. marking. Establishment of site boundaries and reduced site datum level. Generalities and definitions Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian areas.

Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (4) (5) Existing site levels on a 5 meters grid. e. handling.3.2. dismantling.3 Site Clearance 20. debris. But shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent damages to the other structures. Appropriate laboratory tests shall be carried out on all soil and ground water samples to an extent approved by the Employer.Section 6 .2. which are to be removed shall remove carefully and handed over to the Kotugoda stores. buildings and other facilities in the area which do not need to be demolished. After completion of the work contractor should do a complete detail survey of the including all the parts completed to the date of handing over.4 Site formation and up keeping 20.3. The plan shall be sent to the Employer for his approval. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. and resultant contours at a meter vertical interval. Holes left by uprooting shall be promptly filled with suitable material and compacted. The Contractor shall clear all areas required for the work.2. 20. 20. trees and hedges which are not specifically noted on the drawings or in the contract for preservation shall be uprooted and burnt or otherwise disposed of. Special attention shall be paid to the Ground water table and chemical composition of the ground water and soil in the area.1 Cutting and removing trees & shrubs The Contractor shall clear all areas required for the work. All unwanted materials. etc.1 Cutting and filling earth Excavation 20. All tests shall be in accordance with an approved standard. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to verify correctness by making his own site surveys prior to preparing layout drawings.263 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . transporting and handing over shall be done by the contractor as instructed by the Employer Any damages or losses shall be rectify by the contractor at his own cost. shall be removed from the employer‘s premises. 20. Drainage pattern of the area The Contractor shall survey the site of the Control Centre location to obtain details of the above items and shall prepare a site survey plan at a scale of 1: 500 showing the survey results and the proposed layout of the new works. The Employer will issue a copy of a survey recently carried out to the Bidder for information. No unlicensed or indiscriminate digging will be permitted.2.1 The whole of the excavations shall be carried out to the widths. Removing. 20.2 Soil Investigations A sub soil Investigation has been arranged by the Employer and a copy of the investigation report will be made available to the Bidder The safe bearing capacity of the sub-strata may be modified at his final design stage when the full site survey and investigation have been completed and the final layout.4. 20. If top layer of soil is not suitable for the construction it shall be removed or stabilised as recommended by the investigator.2. agreed.2. undergrowth.g. But shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent damage to existing road construction and to existing surfaces.4. Bushes. lengths and depths shown on the approved drawings and in accordance with BS CP-8004 and BS 6031. No variation in contract price will be made due to any variation in the bearing capacity leading to modification of foundation design at the final design stage. shall be removed from the employer‘s premises. structural details etc.3 Demolishing & removing of existing masonry/concrete structures Un wanted foundations shall be demolished or up-rooted.2. Employer should provide 3 hard copies and a soft copy.2 Removing existing equipment.3.2. etc. debris. dismantling steel structures Equipments and support steel structures. British Standard 1377. All unwanted materials.1.

be used by the Contractor in the construction Works. Concrete shall not be deposited thereon until the bottom has been inspected and approved by the Employer. rubbish and offensive matter. Adequate precautions must be taken against washing out of cement and concrete or to prevent the work being disturbed in any way. de-watering or other methods of dealing with the water during and after excavation. Arrangements made for dealing with water in excavations shall be approved by the Employer.5mm 10mm 5mm 600 µm 75 µm Note The material shall have a PI < 6 100 85. if approved by the Employer.4. Other excavated material shall be back filled where required or deposited where directed anywhere on site. In foundation bottom 150mm layer of excavation in thickness shall be left undisturbed and subsequently removed only when the concrete is about to be placed in order that softening or deterioration of the surfaces of the bottom of the excavated area by exposure may be avoided as far as possible.10 µ % PASSING Filling for trenches. brickwork or other materials shall be placed or built until the surfaces are properly drained.Section 6 . 20. excavations and levelling of the site shall be deposited in layers not exceeding 250 mm un compacted thickness.264 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .1. No concrete. in order that work is not affected or interfered with by water entering the excavations.3 Filling and Reinstatement If it is required to fill the land to level the formation level contractor shall get approved the filling material and method of construction before the commencement of the work. levelled and well rammed. and shall allow for the use of types of plant most suited for excavation in any location and at any time. so as not to inconvenience users of adjacent properties or sites. which could be affected by water in excavations. which may be encountered.2. 20.4.100 40-70 25-45 8 . The Contractor is to provide all strutting and shoring necessary for the safe execution of the Works. They must ensure that the de-watering of excavations can continue during the placing of concrete or the execution of any other works. Surplus materials shall be removed from the site by the Contractor.22 0 . The Contractor shall allow for risk meeting while excavating through any sort of soil. SIEVE SIZE 75mm 37.1. The Contractor shall at all times keep the site free from all surplus materials. Materials from the excavation may. including rock. masonry.2. The bottom of all excavated areas shall be trimmed. Material to be used as fill or backfill shall be well graded granular material and shall have a following grading curve.2 De-watering All excavation works are to be kept dry and clean. Water from pumping or other dewatering methods shall be properly drained away from the site or disposed of by tankers. subject to the Employer‘s approval.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The Contractor may excavate by any method considered suitable. The Bidder is to allow in his Bid for the costs of pumping. each layer watered when necessary and well rammed or otherwise Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

5 g per litter when tested in accordance with BS 1377. by adherence to proper safety distances and by the use of heavy blasting mats where necessary.Section 6 . The tendered price is deemed to include for this.265 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .4. The Contractor is to allow for embankments and cutting slopes to be well forked. The Contractor shall make good all settlement of filling that may occur up to the end of the period of defects liability at his own expense. and with such materials as approved by the Employer. Explosives shall be handled only by currently licensed shot fires.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification compacted to within 95% of the maximum dry density obtained by the use of a Proctor Standard Compaction Test. directed or permitted. Filling shall be imported only from approved areas. are made to a greater depth than detailed. The soil stability of such slops etc. peat. imported filling shall consist of pervious naturally occurring material.4. shall be ensured. in the opinion of the Employer is not sufficiently strong to carry the loads which will be imposed on it.1. to divert and protect the site in both the short and long-term form flash floods. The Contractor shall construct where necessary open ditches. free from mud. on which the fill material will be placed. at the Contractor‘s expense.British Standard Code of Practice BS 6031. (2) The Contractor shall store explosives in a licensed store or magazine provided with a separate compartment for detonators. clay. banks or filling during the execution of the Works or during the period of maintenance form any cause whatsoever. (3) Explosives shall be used in the quantities and manner recommended by the manufacturers. The written approval of the Employer shall be obtained for each location or series of locations where the Contractor wishes to use more than 5 kg of explosives in one blast. their use shall comply with the following: (1) All local by-laws and regulations. etc. Such approval shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his liabilities under the Conditions of Contract.. the intervening space shall be brought up to the proper level in plain concrete at the Contractor‘s expense. Where excavations whether in rock or other material. 20. All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Employer.2.2 Explosives Explosives may only be used when specified or approved by the Employer.4 Stability of Fill and Embankment The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of embankments. which formed either by cutting or filling. All equipment for determination of the density of filled areas shall be supplied by the Contractor. and precautions taken to protect the earthworks from deterioration under adverse weather conditions. Any fill material used within 500 mm of concrete structures cement bound materials shall have a soluble sulphate content not exceeding 2. All top surfaces of earthwork shall be finished off level and regular and the sides of cuttings and embankments shall be properly trimmed to the detailed slopes. Wherever applicable the recommendations contained in the following codes of practice shall be followed in calculations. culverts. If approved. Unless otherwise described. Embankments shall not be formed over inclined ground surfaces without previously forming the founding surface. shall be excavated to an adequate load bearing stratum and replaced with mass concrete. Any formation encountered in the excavations which. special precautions shall be taken to protect the concrete or cement bound materials to the approval of the Employer. detailing and performance of the earthworks and drainage: Earthworks . The Contractor shall ensure that there is no unauthorised issue or improper use of explosives brought on the Site. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. If any slips occur in the excavations. to a benched profile. to prevent the dispersal or material. silt. 20. bunds. vegetable or injurious matter and water soluble salts harmful to copper and other metals.2. (4) When blasting is carried out the Contractor shall ensure. raked and stabilised as protection from erosion to the approval of the Employer. the Contractor shall execute the necessary remedial work in such manner.

Concrete cable trenches shall be adequately sloped and adequate capacity of drainage system shall be provided to soak water.2. buildings. Cable pits may be constructed of bricks.2.5 Cable Trenches & Ducts 20.. floors and foundations shall be of lean concrete and of 150mm minimum thickness. 20. concrete blocks. Conduits provided shall be sized to suite the cables provided.4. animals or property on or off the Site.2.2.5. Cable pits shall be sized according to their depth. and treated with an approved total weed killer. 8 gauge galvanised iron-fishing wire drawn in after the rod. debris and other obstructions during and after laying. Cable entries into buildings shall be through ducts or in concrete cable trenches.2 Concrete Beds and Casings Concrete beds and casings to cable ducts and under roads.Section 6 .5.4. In each case.2. 20. All ducts shall be kept clear from earth.3 Cable Pits Cable pits shall be provided at interval not exceeding 100 meters and also at the bends of all cable ducts.3 Earth retaining structures Retaining structures or turfing to be done to side slopes as specified in BS 6031. 20. 20. Elsewhere the ducts shall be laid on and surrounded with approved granular material of 150mm minimum bed thickness and 300 mm minimum cover.4. Cable ducts may be pitch fibber. etc. as directed. using suitable materials. All other main cable trenches shall have additional capacity of 30% future use.4. hard standing areas or where they would otherwise be at risk shall be laid in ducts. Power cable which pass under roads.5 Land escaping & tree planting Suitable trees shall be planted in available vacant areas where necessary grassing to be done to protect erosion.5. Main cable trenches shall be rack types with sufficient working space. Stone chipping shall be laid and lightly compacted to a minimum finished thickness of 100 mm. 20.6 Surface chipping Stone chipping used for surfacing are to be clean hard crushed stone graded from 16 . the material shall be in accordance with the relevant sections of this Specification. plastic or other material approved by the Employer and obtained from an approved manufacturer.266 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification that no damage is caused to persons.2.2. Special care shall be taken when blasting in wet ground to ensure that individual explosions are reduced to such a size as to preclude damage to any buildings or structures. car parking areas. Cable entry to the control building shall be provided for future requirements.2. The formation in areas where stone chipping are to be used shall be well compacted to the approval of the Employer. 20.4 Anti Termite soil treatment Anti termite treatment with more than 10 years guaranty shall be done for the control building area including 3m to either side of the building 20. a cleaning rod shall be drawn through each duct and a No. dust. A 100% additional capacity shall be installed for future use and the whole surrounded in a minimum of 150 mm C15 concrete.40 mm. Expansion joints shall be provided in suitable lengths. Cable entries into buildings shall be sealed to prevent the entry of any water. vermin. After the cable ducts have been completed. PVC. The ends of the ducts shall be plugged with a wooden plug and the fishing-wires left in the ducts. Trench covers outside buildings shall be of reinforced concrete designed for he maximum likely imposed loads appropriate to their location. used in accordance with the manufacturer‘s instructions. in-situ concrete or precast concrete chamber rings and cover slabs.1 Control and power cable trenches & ducts The Contractor is responsible for all civil works required for cable runs between switchgear and building in concrete cable trenches. All cable ducts shall be laid in straight lines and regular gradients between cable pits. to provide sufficient working space Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.

The trial design mix proportions shall be approved if the average strength of a set of 9 cubes tested at 2 28 days exceeded the specified characteristic compressive strength by current margin less 3.1 Concrete Work Concrete Trial Mixes: 20.6. Pre-cast concrete cable protection covers & PVC marker tape shall be provided over the full width and length of cables in sand filled trenches.6 Concrete Work. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. they shall be rendered internally with sand/cement mortar finished with smooth vertical surfaces.2. Full details of the proposed site quality control. and then the Contractor shall comply with the paragraph on preliminary test cubes and the two following paragraphs. Foundations & Piling Work 20. A clean dry mixer shall be used to make the trial mixes and the first batch shall be discarded. transported and tested in compression in accordance with BS 1881. Power cables shall be laid on and surrounded with sand fill in unlined trenches. The cubes shall be made. Full details of the proposed laboratory for testing. The current margin for each particular type of concrete mix should be determined. When constructed of block work. The ratio by weight of all the constituents of the concrete. Pre-cast concrete marker posts shall be provided along cable runs at 5 meters centres and changes in direction. If it is proposed to use an admixture in the mix then for each grade of concrete a batch shall be made with a double dose of the additive.5 N/mm . it may be taken as having the smaller of the values given by (1) or (2). The test shall be carried out in a laboratory shall be approved by the Employer. the Concreting plant and the means of transport to be employed in the Works shall be used to make the trial mixes and to transport them a representative distance. Three from each set of six shall be tested at an age of seven days and three at an age of 28 days. Rates shall include for all necessary crossings shifting existing any obstructions etc.2. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Grade of concrete Title of particular trial mix.Section 6 .Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification and access for maintenance. The expected compacting factor and slump.2. Rates shall include for all necessary crossings shifting existing any obstructions etc.1. They shall not be used to satisfy the 28 days preliminary test cube strength requirements. If the proposals not be approved by the Employer. Galvanised malleable iron steps are to be provided in all cable pits over one meter deep and built in as work proceeds. At least four weeks before commencing any Concreting in the Works. The grading of the aggregates. Preliminary test cubes shall be taken from the proposed mixes as follows: For each grade a set of 6 cubes shall be made from each of 3 consecutive batches. For each of these batches 3 cubes shall be made and one tested at 7 days and 2 at 28 days to determine the likely effect of error in dispensing.267 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The results of the seven-day cube tests shall be used to given an indication for future use of the strengths likely to be achieved at 28 days. the Contractor shall make trial mixes using samples of aggregates and cements typical of those to be used. Where precast concrete rings are used they shall be surrounded with concrete 150 mm thick. The Contractor shall also confirm his proposed testing regime and acceptance criteria for the Preliminary Trial Mixes.1 The Contractor shall submit not less than 3 weeks before the commencement of manufacture of preliminary trial design mixes the following information to the Employer in respect of each grade of concrete. cured.6. If possible. 20. stored.

268 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .5 N/mm for concrete of grade 20 or above. a smaller 2 margin but not less than 7. water shall be added under supervision. However. may be used only after the Employer‘s explicit written approval to replace the type V cement. The proportioning of mixes for durability will be primarily controlled through the specified limits on free Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Portland cement. the margin for the initial mix design should 2 be taken as two-thirds of the characteristic strength for concrete of grade 7.1 The type of cement to be used shall depend on the constructional circumstances and on the prevailing local conditions. 20 or 15.2. 10 or 15. whereas Portland cement. When truck-mixed concrete is used. This margin should be used as the current margin only until sufficient data are available to satisfy (1) or (2) above. The Employer shall if he so desires be present at all preliminary tests. but not less than 1/6 of the characteristic strength for 2 concrete of grade 7. Total cement contents in the mix shall be limited to avoid excessive risk of thermal and shrinkage 3 cracking.6. or truck mixers.64 times the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 100 separate batches of concrete of nominally similar proportions of similar materials and produced over a period not exceeding 12 months by the same plant under similar supervision. The concrete shall be compacted and in its final position within 2 hours of the introduction of cement to the aggregates. may be used at places not exposed to chemical aggressiveness. type 2. 20.2. but not less than 1/3 of the 2 characteristic strength for concrete of grade 7. The concrete shall be carried in purpose made agitators operating continuously. Cement shall be of recent manufacture and shall be used within a period of 3 months from production.75 N/mm for concrete of grade 20 or above. of trial mix procedures set out herein. 10 or 15. which must be based on the satisfactory results of these preliminary tests. shall in general be used for all concrete work in foundations and plinths and in concrete structures covered by soil.5 N/mm may have to be permitted for the initial mix design. or 3. unless a longer time is agreed by the Employer. Before commencing the Works the Contractor shall submit to the Employer for his approval full details of the mixes he proposes to use. Unless otherwise agreed by the Employer. The time of such introduction shall be recorded on the delivery note together with the weight of the constituents of each mix.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (1) 1. (2) 1.2 Materials Cements 20. truck mixer units and their mixing and discharge performance shall comply with the requirements of BS 5328 part 3.2. Neither the mix proportions nor the source of supply of materials shall be altered without the prior approval of the Employer except that the Contractor shall adjust the proportions of the mix as required to take account of permitted variations in the materials. It shall always be in the range of 350 .64 time the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 40 separate batches of concrete of nominally similar proportions of similar materials and produced over a period exceeding 5 days but not exceeding 6 months by the same plant under similar supervision.2 Ready-Mixed Concrete Ready-mixed concrete as defined in BS 5328. Moderate sulphate resistant cement as per ASTM C 150. or 7.400 kg/m unless otherwise approved by the Employer. either at the Site or at the central batching plant. when the required characteristic strength approaches the maximum possible strength of concrete made with a particular aggregate.2. 20. Type I. Type V. as agreed by the Employer but in no circumstances shall water be added in transit.1. Such approval shall be subject to the execution.6. or 15 N/mm for concrete of grade 20 or above.6. may be used only with the agreement of the Employer and comply with all requirements of the Contract. At each test no cube strength shall fall below the appropriate minimum specified in the Contractor‘s designs. The Contractor shall inform the Employer of his intention to carry out such tests and the time and place of the tests at least 24 hours before they take place. Where there are insufficient data to satisfy (1) or (2) above.Section 6 . with their anticipated average strength. which batched off the Site. to the Employer‘s satisfaction.

manufacture and source of the cement which he proposes to use in the Works and the method of delivery.2.4 Aggregates Before the Employer can approve any aggregate source. from the cement stored on. The Bidder shall indicate on the schedule C the brand name. for items thicker than 1. or delivered to the site. The Contractor may use cement delivered in bulk. The above restriction shall be waived if the proposed aggregate is proved without doubt to be nonreactive. ground granulated blast furnace slag as per BS 6699 or EN 197 or micro-silica may be incorporated in the mix.3 Test Certificates and Samples All cement shall be certified by the manufacturer as complying with the requirements of the appropriate specification.Section 6 . Appropriate use shall be made of approved admixtures to simultaneously meet the requirements for W/C ratio and workability. obtain for him the manufacturer‘s test certificate for any consignment as soon as possible after delivery. Before supplying cement to Site or receiving ready-mixed concrete. The Contractor shall not use cement varying from that used in the preparation of trial mixes until any further trial mixes required by the Employer have been made and tested and shown to comply with the specification. the Contractor shall furnish the following data. 20.36-0. For every 50 tones of cement delivered to site and whenever required by the Employer the Contractor shall take samples. All cement shall be obtained form the same source for any particular part of a structure. when required by the Employer.2. the Bidder/Contractor shall submit to CEB. under supervision.269 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Proportions of slag shall normally not exceed 60%. BS EN 196-6. Each consignment of cement shall be brought to the site in sufficient time to allow any tests to be carried out before the cement is used. The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements for deliveries to be made sufficiently frequently to ensure freshness and in sufficient quantities to ensure that there is no suspension or interruption of the concreting work at any time. The Contractor shall. The Contractor shall not place the order for cement before the Employer‘s approval is obtained. (1) Petrological group of rock Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The approximate weight of the cement shall be legibly marked on each bag. BS 4450 and ASTMC 186.2m these proportions shall not exceed 10%.6. bearing the name of the brand and manufacturer and the number of the consignment. The cement shall be delivered to site packed in sealed bags or proper containers. of which there shall be 20 to the ton. The floor of the building shall be at least 150 mm off the ground and an air space shall be left between the floor and bottom layer of bags. the manufacturer's statement of Specification and test certificate together with date of manufacture of any cement to be used. Cement in bags shall be unloaded under cover and stored in a well-ventilated and weatherproof building used exclusively for this purpose. 20. those of micro-silica shall not exceed 8%. In mix designs with an emphasis on durability. Each consignment shall be stacked separately so as to permit easy access for inspection and a record shall be kept so that each consignment may be identified.6% of the weigh of cement. If delivered in bulk an approved type of cement silo shall be used.45. delivery arrangements shall be to the Employer‘s approval and each delivery must be accompanied by a manufacturer‘s test certificate. The W/C ratio shall always lie in the range of 0.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification W/C ratio. the Employer reserves the right to take samples and order any additional / retests in accordance with BS EN 196-7 : 1992. The cement shall be tested to determine the total alkali content in accordance with ASTM C114-69 (Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement) or BS 4550: Part 2 The equivalent weight of sodium oxide shall be calculated from the formula given in BS 5328 part 4 The equivalent weight of sodium oxide shall not exceed 0.6. The Contractor shall test such samples as specified in this document. Storage shall be arranged so that the cement is used in order to delivery.

32% by weight of cement in the mix. shall not be less than 2.Section 6 . Fine aggregate shall contain no more than 0. This may affect the surface for well over a meter depth and result in salt concentrations near the surface. from which the loss over 5 cycles shall not exceed 10% for fine aggregates or 12% for coarse aggregates. especially limestone of the Dolomite type. Absorption of fine and coarse aggregate shall not exceed 5% as measured in accordance with BS 812 or similar standard. Physical Requirements for aggregates shall be as follows: (1) (2) (3) (4) The weight of voided shells in fine aggregate shall not exceed 5%. The soundness of all aggregates shall be proved by a sodium sulphate test in accordance with ASTM C88-73.5% by weight of acid soluble sulphates (as S03). The sources for all aggregates shall be approved by the Employer. Heaps of fine aggregate shall be capable of draining freely. such as in BS 812.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) Rock type within the group Shape Surface texture Silt content Grading curves Specific gravity Impact value Water absorption Soundness Salt content Alkali reactivity The fine and coarse aggregates shall comply with BS 882. the rock shall be checked for surface alteration to hardpan. it has drained sufficiently to ensure proper control of the water/cement ratio. Such rocks are also prone to other undesirable characteristics including pockets of clay. and shall be tested in accordance with BS 812. The aggregates shall be stored at mixer positions in such a manner that intermingling of different sizes and types of aggregates is prevented. Wet fine aggregate shall not be used until. The Chemical Requirements for aggregates shall be: (1) (2) (3) Fine and coarse aggregates shall not be potentially reactive with alkalis. 200) shall not exceed 5% by weight of coarse aggregates or 10% by weight for fine aggregates. salt. The weight of the clay and fine silt fraction (smaller than ASTM sieve No. chalk or other friable material. irrespective of the origin of the chloride.1% by weight of chlorides (as NaCl) and coarse aggregate more than 0. Rigorous initial physical inspection is essential.270 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .5. in the opinion of the Employer. The stockpiles are to be protected from rubbish or windblown dust. The apparent specific gravity of aggregates as determined by an approved test. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.03%. (5) (6) Where quarries with aggregate from bedrock. Fine and coarse aggregates shall not contain more than 0. Los angles abrasion shall not exceed 37%. Should these figures be exceeded the aggregate may still be considered acceptable in this respect provided the total sodium chloride concentration is not greater than 0.

The machines shall have a large water storage tank with a gauge or that a predetermined quantity of water can be injected direct into the mixer drum. and permissible deviation proposed for each grade of concrete to be used.6. For routine sampling and testing from an approved source the rate shall be sample per 50 cubic meter of aggregate to be used or sample per month whichever is greater. vegetable or organic matter or any other dexterous substance in suspension or solution. The strength requirements for each grade of concrete proposed in the design shall be proven by means of preliminary trial tests as specified in BS 5328 and BS 1881. Before the use of any admixture can be approved the Contractor must prove by trial mix procedures that the concrete will in no way be adversely affected even when twice the recommended dose is batched. 20. For each new source of aggregate and for each class of aggregate to be used sampling and testing shall be done at the rate of six samples and set of test for each new source and each new class. The performance of the plant and its disposition shall be to the satisfaction of the Employer.2.271 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . The Contractor‘s designs and drawings shall show clearly the characteristic strengths.2.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20.1 Sampling and testing The Employer shall have the right to request the Contractor. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.5 Water The water used for making concrete.2. The dry concrete ingredients shall be mixed until a uniform colour is obtained after the addition of the water the concrete shall be mixed for a further 4 minutes or until a uniform colour is achieved. The minimum cement content and the maximum free water-cement ratio shall be in accordance with BS 8110 and BS 5328. fresh and free from injurious amounts of soil. In computing the quantity of water to be added. at any time. No concrete construction may be commenced until this data is approved by the Employer. 20. 20. All sampling and testing shall be in accordance with BS 812 or to American standards when no appropriate BS exist. Testing is to be carried out at an independent laboratory approved by the Employer or else on the site in the presence of the Employer‘s where approved by the.2. The mix water shall be continually monitored for salt content and the concrete mix designed accordingly to limit total salt content.6.6.4. 20. due account must be taken of the water contained in the aggregates.2. The total water in the mix shall not exceed the amount used in the trial mix. The Contractor shall allow for the whole range of tests to be carried out. Such testing shall include those tests form BS 812 as are considered useful by the Employer for comparison with the results of the initial set of tests but the Contractor shall allow for the full range to carried out. good workability and high strength. The amount of water shall be sufficient to ensure through hydration.6. At least 7 weeks before concrete construction is programmed to commence the Contractor shall submit for approval all the details of concrete mix designs for each proposed grade of concrete.6. The plant shall be maintained regularly and stand by plant shall be available to avoid any delay in the progress of the works.2. The water should comply with the requirements of SLS 522. mortar and grout shall be clean. The Contractor shall carry out frequent tests to the satisfaction of the Employer to check the relationship of the strength of concrete cured under site conditions to that cured under laboratory conditions.8 Concrete Strength Requirements All concrete mixes shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS 5328 and BS 8110 as designated on drawings approved by the Employer.6.6 Admixtures Admixtures shall not be used without the approval of the Employer.Section 6 . to draw samples of aggregates from stockpiles on the Site or any other location to be indicated by the Employer. 20.9 Mixing All concrete except where specifically permitted by the Employer in writing shall be mixed in weigh batch mixing machines.7 Plant The concreting plant shall be suitably in type. capacity and design for its purpose.

free from honeycombing. The capacity of this trial section of formwork shall be at least half a batch of concrete but in any case not less than 1/4 cubic meter. and ensure that the concrete is of the required workability at the point and time of placing. the Contractor shall carry out a series of workability tests on the preliminary trial mixes required elsewhere in this Section. are inferior to the standards laid down in later clauses in this section. Upon arrival at the place of deposition the concrete truck driver must present to the Employer a chit from the concrete batcher stating (a) the grade of concrete. Concreting shall then proceed continuously over the area between construction joints. 20. Concrete shall not be allowed to fall freely more than 1. the cleanliness. concrete shall not be placed unless the Employer is present or he has previously examined and approved the positioning. caused by impact.6.11 Transportation The concrete shall be discharged from the mixer and transported to the Works by means that shall be approved by the Employer and which shall prevent adulteration. which is uniform. other embedded items and formwork. or less as directed by the Employer Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The mould shall be filled in the presence of the Employer with concrete of the same mix and batch from which the preliminary test cubes are made and shall be compacted in the same manner with the same equipment as are proposed for the Works.2. segregation or loss of ingredients.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification The contractor shall take all precautions to the satisfaction of the Employer to protect the concrete from the injurious effects of the elements. Except where otherwise directed.10 Workability The concrete shall be of such consistency that it can be readily worked into the corners and angles of the framework and around reinforcement without segregation of the materials or bleeding of free water at the surface. Where chutes are used to convey the concrete. The Employer shall be given 24 hours notice in order that he may check the work. If concreting is not started within 24 hours of approval being given. or such other procedure as approved by the Employer.5 meters except with the approval of the Employer. alignment and suitability of the containing surfaces. 20. These tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1881. In addition the Contractor shall supply for each of the grades of concrete a section of framework complete with reinforcement fixed in position and generally representative of the sections commonly to be employed in the Works. fixing and condition of the reinforcement and of any other items to be embedded. In order to satisfy the Employer that adequate for the requirements of the Specification. This procedure shall. When in-situ concrete has been in place for 4 hours. When specific workability is called for a check it shall be maintained by measuring slump at the rate of one test for each 10 cubic meters of concrete or three tests for each day of concreting.2. All small concrete pours shall normally be carried out in the late afternoon unless otherwise permitted by Employer. after which it shall be used as the standard for that grade. On striking the framework it shall present a face. if necessary. Where pneumatic placers are used the velocity of discharge shall be regulated by suitable baffles or hoppers where necessary. within one hour of mixing. be repeated with modified mixes until the appearance of the concrete after striking the mould is acceptable to the Employer. All formwork and reinforcement contained in it shall be clean and free from standing water. and the adequacy and condition of plant.272 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 . The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in its final position and in such a manner as to avoid segregation displacement of the reinforcement. (b) the workability (c) the aggregate size (d) type of cement and (e) time of batching of the concrete. The formwork shall comply with the requirements of this Specification for formwork. in the Specification or as directed by the Employer. and which shall not. in the opinion of the Employer. surface crazing or excessive dusting. to prevent segregation damage and distortion of the reinforcement. The samples to be tested shall be obtained from the batches used for the preliminary test cubes. The concrete shall be placed in the positions and sequences indicated on approved drawings. immediately before the placing of concrete. formwork or other embedded items. approval shall again be obtained from the Employer. their slopes shall not be such as to cause segregation and suitable spouts or baffles should be provided to obviate segregation during discharge.6. Placing shall be continuous between specified or approved construction joints.

2. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 20. type of cement and weather conditions. contact with reinforcement and all inserts shall be avoided. so far as is practicable. Walls Vertical joints away from corners.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification depending upon the mix. Over-vibration. It shall be cleaned of all loose and foreign matter and laitance and washed with Water immediately before placing the fresh concrete. The joints shall in every way satisfy the requirement of the Employer. Vibrators shall penetrate the fully depth of the layer and where concrete is placed over previously placed concrete not more than 4 hours old the vibrators shall enter and revibrate that layer to ensure that successive layers are well knitted together. Concrete shall not be subjected to vibration between 1 and 10 hours after compaction. Vibration shall not be applied by way of the reinforcement. Concrete. this discontinuity shall form a construction joint. surface laitance or leakage through formwork. shall have a temperature of not less than 5 C and not more than 32 C. which has set. When trucking or chutes are used they shall be kept clean and used in such a way as to avoid segregation. approved power driven vibrators of the immersion type shall be used. the position and arrangement of which shall be indicated on the drawings and approved by the Employer. It shall be compacted in its final position within 30 minutes of discharge from the mixer when the time shall be within 2 hours of the introduction of cement to the mix and within 20 minutes of discharge from the agitator. Except where otherwise agreed by the Employer. Unless otherwise directed by the Employer. When work is resumed adjacent to a surface. When not indicated on the drawings the following generally rule shall apply: Joints in columns are to be made at the underside of floor members and at floor levels.13 Construction Joints Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to construction joints.000 cycles per minute and external vibrators not less than 3. They shall be inserted at such distances apart or applied in such a manner as will ensure that the concrete being placed. concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers to a compact depth not exceeding 450 mm where internal vibrators are used or 300 mm in all other cases.000 cycles per minute. Internal vibrators shall be capable of producing not less than 10. Whenever the placing of the concrete is discontinued other than at the exposed faces. shall be avoided. against the joint. no further concrete shall be placed against it for a further 20 hours. Vibrators shall not keep damage to formwork or other parts of the structure. All concrete shall be compacted to produce a dense homogeneous mass. or displace the reinforcement or other embedded items. Successive layers of the same lift shall be thoroughly worked together.Section 6 . 20. without displacing them. and be fully detailed on drawings prior to submission for approval. Sufficient vibrators in serviceable conditions shall be on site so that spare equipment is always available in the event of breakdowns. Floors joints in the floor system are to be located at or near the quarter points of the span in slabs and beams. it shall be compacted with the assistance of vibrators.6. the whole surface shall be thoroughly roughened. Immersion vibrators shall be withdrawn slowly to prevent the formation of voids. except where otherwise instructed. Horizontal joints above sprays or openings. Care shall be taken to prevent offsetting of the joint and to ensure water-tightness. Construction joints are to be made only along a horizontal or vertical plane except that in the case of inclined or curved members they shall be at right angles to the principal axis. Where vibrators of the immersion type are used. which shall be well compacted. It shall be thoroughly worked against the formwork and around reinforcement and other embedded items. Haunches and column capital are to be considered as part of and continuous with the floor or roof. causing segregation.2.273 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . when deposited. Unless otherwise agreed by the Employer.12 Compaction 0 0 The concrete shall be fully compacted throughout the full extent of the layer.6.

compressible material.Section 6 . Immediately before new concrete is poured. upon the sequence of placing concrete and the positions of vertical and horizontal joints. shrinkage gaps of up to 0. As an alternative to alternate bay construction.6. 20. The infilling will be permitted to use as permanent formwork only for second casting. slabs in excess of 6 meters in length and/or width and wall exceeding 6 meters in length shall not be poured in one operation and subsequent adjacent bays shall not be concreted within 7 days.14 Construction Bays The Contractor shall agree with the Employer. Where the fibber board is exposed it shall be cutback for a depth of at least 2 cm from the chambered edge.2. All dimensions must be shown on Drawings prior to submission for approval. Expansion joints shall be filled with bitumen impregnated fibber board to full depth and width. prior to the commencement of Concreting. rain or running water. New reinforcement shall be securely wired to the existing. The 2 maximum area of any pour shall be 100 m . cleaned and bent to its correct shape. Expansion joints shall be fully detailed on construction drawings before submission for approval. Plastic caps used in expansion joints shall be rigid and securely fixed to the dowel to prevent the ingress of concrete during casting of the slab.2. The protection shall be applied as soon as practicable after completion of placing by a method to be approved by the Employer. before any Concreting work commences. Where dowel bars are indicated on the Drawings forming part of a joint.6. 20. Where necessary the reinforcement in existing concrete shall be exposed.15 Joining New Concrete Work to Existing Existing concrete shall be broken out as described or directed and scrabbled to form a suitable key for the new concrete.2. the curing membrane shall be applied immediately after removing the formwork. a cement wash shall be applied to the existing concrete faces. 20.1 meter in width may be left at 6 meters intervals. drying winds.6. They shall be straight and coated with approved bond breaking compound. the shrinkage gaps shall not be concreted until concrete on all sides is at least 7 days old. In the light of experience the Employer may consider the above pour size limits to be excessive and will have the authority to reduce them. Dowel bars shall be plain mild steel bars conforming to BS 4449. On vertical surfaces.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20.17 Additional Requirements in Hot Weather In hot weather the Contractor shall present for the Employer‘s approval his proposals for dealing with the following problems: (1) (2) (3) (4) Reduced workability Excessive Plastic shrinkage Rapid strength gain but possible low final strength Rapid drying-out of concrete Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. they shall be held securely horizontal and perpendicular to the joint during Concreting. The temperature of curing water shall 0 be same as the concrete + 5 C. The packing used within the cap shall be an inert. which shall consist essentially of 66% of 200 penetrating bitumen blended hot with 14% light creosote oil and. when cold. brought to the consistency of paint by the addition of 20% solvent naphtha.6. or other approved compound.274 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . cold. The Contractor shall put forward his proposals for curing concrete to the Employer for approval. filled and pointed with a resilient liquid polysulphide polymer sealant to the manufacturers instructions. In general.2. whether shown or not on the drawings. General concrete shall be wet-cured for at least 7 days with a further 4 days of dry protection. No concrete shall be allowed to become alternately wet and dry.16 Curing Concrete shall be protected during the first stages of hardening from the harmful effects of sunshine.

2 Placing Placing shall not commence until sufficient standby pumps and vibrators are on site to cope with breakdowns. including reinforcement. Air temperature shall be measured every two hours.Section 6 . Where necessary the surfaces. the Contractor shall comply with the next two paragraphs below.17. The Contractor shall have the right to sample.2. and surface finishing.6. shall be shielded from the rays of the absorption by the surfaces of water from the fresh concrete. Concrete batched off-site shall be transported to site by truck mixer. The Employer shall have the right to order that any materials which.6. In hot weather concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers to a compacted depth not exceeding 300 mm and internal mechanical vibrators shall be used. the materials which rejected by the Employer shall be immediately removed from the Site by the Contractor. If after this. etc. Half of them shall be cured under site conditions in order to ascertain the relationship between site-cured samples and lab-cured samples.17. With the approval of the Employer admixtures may be employed to retard setting time or enhance workability. 20. If the proposals are not approved by the Employer. or where there is a lapse of two weeks or more between successive pours of the same grade of concrete.3 Curing All concrete shall be covered for at least 14 days after placing and kept continuously wet for the initial 7 0 days.6.275 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .2.17. against which the concrete is to be placed. The Contractor shall provide the Employer with facilities for materials testing on Site. For the first 10 days that a particular grade of concrete is produced. the aggregates and 80% of the required water may be batched off-site with the cement and remaining water being added on site not more than 15 minutes before the pour commences.17. and whenever deemed necessary by the Employer.5 Works Test Cubes Before commencing any Concreting work the Contractor shall submit for approval his proposed testing regime for the Works concrete. 20. the Contractor shall double the number of test cubes made. Concrete transporters shall be kept as cool as practicable. Testing methods are to be in accordance with the relevant BS or ASTM standard except as approved or requested by the Employer.1 Mixing Aggregate stockpiles shall be shielded from the direct rays of the sun or cooled by spraying with water. The facilities may be those normally used by the Contractor.2.17. The area of each concrete pour frontage shall be kept to a minimum and suitable means shall be provided to avid premature stiffening of concrete placed in contact with hot dry surfaces.2. three samples shall be taken Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. or induce early bleeding etc. The temperature of curing water shall be within 5 C of that of the concrete.6. No concrete shall be batched until formwork is ready and all reinforcement fixed in place approved by the Employer. and the temperature of every batch of concrete shall be recorded as it is deposited at the work place. 20.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. shall follow closely behind final tamping. Alternatively. test and give his opinion on such materials. The mixer rotating only after it arrives on site. and water tanks and pipes shall be insulated to ensure that the temperature of concrete when deposited 0 shall not exceed 32 C. Due to rapid stiffening in hot weather all clean-up operations such as application of resin cure membranes and dust reducers. All testing facilities on site shall be calibrated at regular intervals in the presence of the Employer. 20.2.4 Testing Initially. Air shall not be permitted to circulate between concrete and curing materials.6. do not meet with his approval shall not be used in the work. The number of slump tests shall initially be twice that normally required.

6. (2) The strength determined from any test result is not less than the specified characteristic strength minus. Up-to-date records shall be kept by the Contractor at the Works of positions in the Works of all batches of concrete. and after 28 days for the second two cubes of the set. from which at 28 days 3 Nos.6 Compliance of Works Test Cubes with Specification When submitting proposed testing regimes the Contractor shall also detail his proposed acceptance criteria for the Employer‘s approval. The laboratory must provide evidence that its equipment and procedures comply with BS EN 10002 and BS 1881. stored and tested in compression in accordance with BS 1881.) characteristic strength = 20 N/mm ). for rapid chloride permeability testing (to AASHTO T-277) /curing of samples shall be as close to the current Site practice as possible. Three cubes shall be made from each sample. and – if requested . Cores. of their grade and of all tests cubes. shall be taken for water absorption testing (to BS 1881) 3 Nos. provided concreting is proceeding.may be carried out through the concrete supplier: Rapid test for chlorides Rapid test for sulphates A Trial panel. one being tested at 7 days and the remaining two at 28 days. 75mm diameter and 75 mm long. cores and other specimens taken from them. Bimonthly or for every 750 m of concrete cast. Reports of all tests made shall be supplied direct from the laboratory to the Employer within 24 hours of the cubes being tested.The calibration test reports of testing machines and details of the qualifications of all laboratory staff shall be submit for approval if requested by the Employer. Concrete temperature is to be recorded at the arrival of concrete at Site.    Slump tests are to be executed for every truck load supplied during concreting and as per the Employer's instructions.the last two cubes of each set may be tested in case of failure of a cube. with the provision that at least one sample shall be taken on each day that concrete of that grade is used.276 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . When this is not forthcoming the Contractor shall comply with the next two paragraphs below. Two shall be tested at 7 days and the other at 28 days.Section 6 .e. The rules of compliance for Works cubes are different to those for Trial Mixes. 20. 3 N/mm for concrete of grade C20 and above 2 2 2 2 2 Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. cured. 2 N/mm for concrete of grade C15 and below (i. After the initial 10 days.2. The tests shall be carried out in a testing laboratory approved by the Employer.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification on each day and three cubes shall be made from each sample. Compliance with the characteristic strength shall be assumed if the conditions given in both (1) and (2) are met: (1) The average strength determined from any group of four consecutive test results exceeds the specified characteristic strength by 3 N/mm for concrete of grade C20 and above (i.) characteristic strength = 15 N/mm ). Testing of concrete delivered to or mixed at site shall include:  One set of at least six (6) test cubes for every 20 m or every daily pour of concrete or as directed by the Employer. The Employer on site shall have the authority to stop all further concrete work until acceptable test results are forthcoming. 150 mm. 200x200x120mm thick. samples of designed mixed shall be taken at the reduced rate given in Table bellow.17. blocks. 3 3 - The cubes shall be made. cubes. which .after approval of the Employer . for water penetration testing (to DIN 1048) 4 Nos. the Bidder/Contractor shall prepare the following for durability testing. Copies of these records shall be supplied to the Employer at weekly intervals or upon request by the Employer. The compression strength tests shall be carried out after seven (7) days for the first two cubes of each set.e.

The forms shall conform accurately to the required shape. All formwork for pits. The use of mould oil or other material to facilitate this shall be subject to the approval of the Employer. etc. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Testing of the core shall be in accordance with approved standards. Such action is subject to the Employer‘s satisfaction and approval. If the specified requirements have not been met the Contractor shall propose such remedial action as may be required. All forms shall be removed without damage to the concrete. materials used for curing. If the strength of the specimen is less than the appropriate specified minimum crushing strength or if.277 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .2. only the particular batch from which the sample was taken shall be at risk. The top of the shuttering shall be suitably covered to prevent entry of excess grout. Any holes left after the removal of ties shall be filled unless otherwise directed by the Employer with concrete or mortar of approved composition. 20. If no satisfactory remedial measures are proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Employer then the Employer shall order the removal of all work not complying with the Specification at the Contractor‘s expense.18 Formwork Forms shall be so designed and constructed that the concrete can be properly placed and thoroughly compacted. The Employer may request the Contractor to provide sample panels of formwork for approval. cylindrical core specimens shall be cut from the hardened concrete in the Works for the purpose of examination and testing. The Employer also makes recourse to such non-destructive means of testing as ultrasonic pulsing and Schmidt rebound hammers. special care shall be taken to maintain the stability of the formwork and the tightness of the joints during vibrating operations. 2 The quantity of concrete represented by any group of four consecutive test results shall include the batches from which the first and last samples were taken together with all intervening batches. the cement content shall not be less than 90% of the specified minimum or more than 110% of the specified maximum. The Contractor‘s proposed method for the construction and fixing of the formwork for bolthole pockets shall be submitted to the Employer for approval before construction. Where compliance of cement content is assessed from the results of analysis tests on fresh concrete. the concrete in that part of the Works of which. Where a minimum or maximum cement content of a designed mix is specified and compliance is assessed by observation of the bathing or from auto graphic record. Prior to the preparation for testing.Section 6 . the concrete fails to meet the specified requirements in other respects. at the Contractor‘s expense. The Employer shall approve the cutting equipment and the method of doing the work. As and where directed by the Employer. the specimens shall be made available for examination of the Employer. position and level. ducts and holding down boltholes must be so constructed that it can be easily collapsed to facilitate withdrawal after the initial set of the concrete. The materials and position of any ties passing through the concrete shall be approved by the Employer. subject to the tolerance specified and to the standards of finish of hardened concrete as specified later this Section. Before proceeding with similar work the Contractor shall submit to the Employer for his approval details of action proposed to ensure future concrete to be placed in the Works would comply with the Specification. Compliance criteria remain the same irrespective of varying rates of sampling of the same grade concrete in different structures.6. it is a sample will be considered not to comply with the specified requirements. The whole or part of the ties shall be capable of being removed so that no part remaining embedded in the concrete shall be nearer the surface of the concrete than the specified thickness of cover to the reinforcement. in the opinion of the Employer. When concrete is to be vibrated. the cement content shall not be less than 95% of the specified minimum or more than 105% of the specified maximum.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 2 N/mm for concrete of grade C15 and below. When a test result fails to comply with [2).

the formwork shall be face with plywood or equivalent material in large sheets. (2) Type F. window heads or drainage in direction of the surface.6 of BS 8110.3 finish. which will prevent the loss of grout when the concrete is vibrated. The sheets shall be arranged in an approved uniform pattern. which shall be free of board marks.6.3 except that internal metal ties are permitted. Unfaced wrought boarding or standard steel panels will not be permitted for Type F. polystyrene or other method approved by the Employer. To achieve this finish. Permanent forms shall be constructed of slabs or blocks of precast concrete. The use of internal metal ties shall not be allowed. Whenever possible joints between sheets shall be arranged to coincide with architectural feature. The time at which the formwork is struck shall be Contractor‘s responsibility. sheet metal or any other suitable material.18. Such slabs or blocks shall have an exposed surface of the quality shown on the Drawing sand as specified. natural stone. Joints between the board and panels shall be horizontal and vertical unless otherwise directed. plywood or metal panels may be used if they are free from defects likely to detract from the general appearance of the finished surface. expanded metal. The Employer may at his discretion order the defects to be cut out and made good.2 This finish is for surfaces. Forms to provide a Type F. brickwork or other approved material as directed. (4) Type F. Any defective concrete finish will be rejected.1 Formed Finishes for Concrete This finish is for surfaces against which backfill or further concrete will be placed. All joints between panels shall be vertical and horizontal unless otherwise directed. but fines. The Contractor shall state precisely on his plans which of the type of finished described hereunder he intends to use in the various locations. Formwork shall consist of sawn boards. 20. Suitable joints shall be provided between sheets to maintain accurate alignment in the plane of the sheets.278 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .Section 6 . using the proposed bolthole former.3 This finish is for surfaces prominently exposed to view where good appearance and alignment are of special importance. surface discoloration and other minor defects shall be remedied by methods approved by the Employer. who may require the Contractor to carry out a test pour. The formwork may be struck when the concrete has in the opinion of the Employer attained a compressive strength of not less 2 than 10 N/mm or twice the stress to which it will then be subjected whichever is the greater.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Solid timber must not be used for forming holding down boltholes. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The Employer shall be informed in advance when the Contractor intends to strike any formwork. sills. This treatment shall be made immediately after removing the formwork. They shall be fixed to the structure by approved means and the joints between them shall be made tight with mortar or other means of preventing leakage.1 (1) Type F. In the absence of cube test results the minimum periods before striking form work for concrete made with ordinary Portland cement shall be according to the table 6. Plastering of defective concrete. except that in the case of minor porosity in the surface the Employer may approve a surface treatment by rubbing down with cement and sand mortar of the same richness as in the concrete. (3) Type F. which are permanently exposed to view but where the highest standard of finish is not required. Bolthole former may be made of plywood.2. Alternatively. This finish shall be such as to require no general filling of surface pitting. Formwork shall be constructed so that the side forms of members can be removed without disturbing the soffit forms and if props are to be left in place when the soffit forms are removed these props shall not be disturbed during the striking.4 This finish is identical to Type F. The joints shall be arranged and fitted so that no blemish or mark is imparted to the finished surface.2 finish shall be faced with wrought and thickened board with square edges arranged in a uniform pattern. as a means of making good will not be permitted.

2 and U. surplus concrete being struck off by straight edge immediately after compaction.18. slabs and structural members to be covered by backfill.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. Troweling shall not commence until the moisture film has disappeared and the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent excess laitance from being worked to the surface. The finishing operations shall consist of levelling and screeding the concrete to produce a uniform plane or ridged surface. copings and other members exposed to weathering. Mild steel and high tensile steel are to be stored separately. The Contractor shall arrange for bending equipment suitable for bending both mild steel and intermediate grade bars. or approved by the Employer. The Contractor shall supply the Employer with a certificate for each consignment from the steel manufacturers showing that the steel meets the requirements of the Specification. subsequent stages of construction.2 (1) Type U. beds. loose rust. The Contractor shall provide adequate scaffold boards to ensure that the reinforcement is not displaced by being walked upon during the placing of the concrete or other operation.6. grease. or which may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete. surface bed and slabs to receive thin flexible sheet and tile paving bedded in adhesive and seatings for bearing plates and the like where the metal is in direct contact with the concrete. mortar earth.2. (3) Type U.18.2 This is a floated finish for surfaces of beds and slabs to received mastic paving or block or tile paving where a hard smooth steel-trowel led surface is not required. Reinforcement shall be stored clear of the ground on sufficient supports to prevent distortion of 0the bars. exposed surfaces of engine and plant foundations and in the vicinity of holding down bolt chases. Steel reinforcing bars shall be kept clean and shall be free from pitting. 20. or alternatively off the site.19 Reinforcement Steel reinforcement shall be one of the following: (1) (2) (3) (4) High Yield steel bars complying with BS 4449 (or 4482) or Hot rolled or cold deformed bars complying with BS 4449. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.2.3. One tension test and one bond test shall be made for each lot of 50 tones of less supplied for the permanent Works. Care shall be taken that the concrete is worked no more than is necessary to produce a uniform surface free from screed marks.6.Section 6 . topes of walls. oil. Reinforcement may be bent on site. by an approved method. It is also the first stage for finished Type U. mill scale.1 Uniformed Finishes to Concrete This is a screeded finish for surfaces of roads or of foundations. 0 0 Mild steel shall be bent at temperatures in the range 5 C to 100 C. The surface shall be troweled under firm pressure and left free from trowel marks.3 Surface Treatments Where concrete is to be treated with sodium silicate or a similar dust preventive coating this must be carried out within 14 days of the Concreting of the foundation and be applied in accordance with the manufacturer‘s instructions. 20. Floating shall be done by hand or machine. The Contractor shall provide any chairs or other subsidiary reinforcement necessary to keep the reinforcement in its correct position. (2) Type U.3 This is a hard smooth steel-trowel led finish for surfaces of concrete paving.6. topping or cement mortar beds to receive paving and on exposed surfaces or paving where superior finish is not required.2. The concrete cover over such subsidiary reinforcement shall not be less than that over the reinforcement generally. bonded concrete. The shapes of the bends and lengths must comply as specified on the Drawings and Bending Schedules as approved by the Employer. paint or any material which may impair the bond between the concrete and the reinforcement. Welded steel mesh reinforcement complying with BS 4483 or similar approved. High tensile steel shall only be heated or welded when the manufacturer given written guarantees as to its subsequent performance.279 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Bars greater than 32 mm diameter will not generally be used.

and that no special resin additives or similar are necessary. 20. Adjoining sheets of mesh shall overlap by at least 300 mm. which shall be either cementitious or epoxy grouts. Concrete cover to all reinforcement (including stirrups) shall be as specified in BS 8110 and BS 8004. Immediately prior to Concreting all reinforcement shall be wire brushed to remove all wind-blown contaminates such as salt. otherwise all bars shall be truly straight. Steel templates shall be used to position the anchor bolts. Loose small pieces of fabric shall only be used where they are essential for fitting into small confined parts of the Works. Grouts deriving their non-shrink properties from metal oxidising (i. inert and capable of supporting the reinforcement in its correct position with the required cover without deforming. Fabric reinforcement shall be delivered to site only in flat sheets.2. cranks and other shapes of reinforcement shall be to the dimensions specified. If such conditions are evident.6.e. may be used.23 Grout under Base Plates Only non-shrink. Reinforcing bars shall be tied together at every intersection using 16 SWG soft pliable annealed steel wires. Before plant grouting commences the Contractor shall check that the proposed methods and materials are acceptable.2. The Contractor shall provide fully dimensioned bending Schedules giving the location and bending of every bar shown on the drawings. They shall be rigid. which will have a deleterious effect on reinforced concrete.21 Prevention of Corrosion below Ground The Contractor is to ascertain whether or not the sub-strata contain any corrosive qualities. Drawing showing the foundation bolt arrangement shall be approved by the Employer and sent to site with the foundation bolt assemblies and template in good time for being built into the foundations. 20. They shall not impair the finish on the concrete no cause the formwork to deform locally.280 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . only an additive approved by the Employer is to be incorporated in the concrete mix in the proportions according to the manufacturer‘s recommendations.2.2. the cover should never be less than the diameter of the main bar or nominal maximum size of the aggregate. 20. Areas of fabric reinforcement shall be net with no allowance included for laps or waste. Cover blocks used for the correct positioning of reinforcement shall be of a type approved by the Employer. Bends. an increase in volume due to oxidation) shall not be allowed. Bending of reinforcement shall be carried out round a former having a diameter of at least four times the diameter of the bar. At least 12 weeks before and grouting is due to commence.g. Minimum compressive and flexural strengths of the non-shrink grouts shall be as follows: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. 20. British Standard 4466. flats.6. The bending dimensions shall comply with BS 4466 unless otherwise specified on the bending schedules.Section 6 . non-gaseous grouts. double nuts etc.20 Foundation Bolts The foundations bolts shall be mild steel or High strength steel of an approved manufacture and shall be fitted with tubes.6. washer plates.6. In addition.22 Grouting of structural steel works and plant No grouting shall commence without the written approval of the Employer.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Mesh reinforcement shall be fixed flat in the works over the whole of the areas indicated on the approved drawings. The Employer shall have the right to select at any time samples of steel reinforcement for testing in accordance with the relevant approved standard. the Contractor shall submit full details to the Employer for his approval. anchor angle. Unless otherwise stated on the Bending Schedules all bars shown will be dimensioned in accordance with the national or international standard to be approved by the Employer. e.

DIN EN 196. Cement to be used for concrete piles shall be selected according to the recommendations of the soil investigations report. and the flexural strength shall be tested in accordance with BS 4551.2. Wijerama Mawatha. The formwork shall to be struck without the approval of the Employer. Colombo-07. ASTM C150. Piles shall be designed for the required design loading (uplift. Part 116 and BS 6319.) This Article applies to the foundation design/static analysis in view of necessary piling works. Grout or concrete shall not be placed when the air temperature or the 0 temperature of the concrete is lower than 5 C.2. On receiving confirmation from the Employer that the final alignment check has been completed. Any grouting that in the opinion of the Employer is defective shall be cut out and replaced at the Contractor‘s expense.Section 6 . Part 3 (epoxies). and normally this will to be given within 24 hours of grouting. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.281 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . the Contractor shall complete the grouting under the steelwork and/or plant base plates. On the site from which the grout is to be poured forms shall be at least 150 mm high in order to provide a head to placing.ICTAD/DEV/16 ). Design work shall be certified by a qualified person(s) and information and calculations relevant shall be submitted for the approval of the Employer Earthwork as well as all concrete and reinforced concrete work shall be as specified under the relevant items. 'Moderately Sulphate Resistant Cement' (MSRC-type II to ASTM-C150) based on the recommendations of the Geotechnical authority and approved by the Employer.2 Materials All materials to be used for the piling works shall meet the requirements as specified below. The clearance space between the formwork and the base plate shall normally be 75 mm but exact clearance shall be decided on the site for each operation. 1054. ( This publication can be purchased at the Institute located at ―Sawsiripaya‖.6. BS or the American Standards ACI.24. Piling works shall be based on the findings of the soil investigations and/or information given in writing by the Employer. BS 8110 and other applicable DIN or British Standard. Exposed surfaces of grout and concrete beneath items of plant shall be prepared and given two coats of oil and alkali resistant coating.1 General Items not covered in this specification shall be referred to― Specifications for Bored and Cast in Situ Reinforced Concrete Piles ―.24. published by the Institution of Construction Training and Development (ICTAD) Sri Lanka. The exposed edge of the grout or concrete shall be chamfered or bull nosed with a steel trowel where so indicated on the drawings.first Edition April 1977 ( ICTAD Publication No.6. 1055. or BS 8004.2. 20.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Type of grout Consistency Compressive strength N/mm 7 days 28 days 65 >80 2 Flexural strength N/mm 7 days 8 25 2 28 days 10 >25 Cementitious Epoxy Flowable High flow 45 80 Compressive strength shall be in accordance with BS 1881. the cubes size shall be 100 mm. The hessian shall be wetted at least twice in each 24 hours.24 Foundations and Piling Work 20. compression and horizontal loads) in line with the approved foundation design. 4014 and 4026. ensuring that the grout completely fills the space and that it is thoroughly compacted and free from air pockets. Sulphate resistant Type Cement (SRC). Grout or concrete shall be cured by covering with moist hessian for a period of five days. 20. All cements are to be in accordance with either DIN 1164. DIN 1045. or under certain conditions. shall be used. Edge formwork shall be fixed around each base plate generally to the level of the top of the plate unless specified to the contrary by the Employer. 123. The static analysis/pile design shall normally be in accordance with DIN EN 1536.6.

pile shall not deviate more than 75mm in any direction at piling platform level. materials and procedures that will be used for the piling work. etc. Pouring concrete into the pile shall be carried out using the tremie pipe method as well as the concrete pump.2. DIN 1054. Daily records of each pile shall be produced by the Bidder/Contractor. and the concrete in the head of the pile shall be carefully broken away from the reinforcement which shall then be cleaned Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. In plan. Immediately after the drilling. where casing removal by vibrator will affect the existing services/buildings. Casing pipes shall not be deepened by means of jetting. loading capacities. The description shall include equipment specifications. penetration into bearing strata. The records shall give detailed information on the type. additional water has to be filled up during the drilling. DIN 4014.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. protective devices. Concreting is to be done through tremie-pipes or equivalent devices to prevent segregation. a detailed description of the equipment. piling platform level related to zero level. date of casting volume of concrete consumed. Immediately after drilling. the reinforcement has to be placed. Piles shall be installed accurately in their required locations. and the pile has to be cast. and test apparatus. In vertical direction. Temporary casing shall be removed by vibration method. ensuring a minimum concrete cover of 75 mm. top concrete level. cut off level. Permanently installed shells shall be cut off at the pile cut-off level. Each cast-in-situ pile shall be filled with quality concrete up to at least 60 cm above the cut-off level of the pile to allow for complete removal of slush and other foreign matters etc. depth from piling plat form level to toe. including catalogue data manufacturer's published specifications. diameter.0 m above the ground water table when filled boring tools are extracted. length.2.24. Other materials shall only be used upon explicit approval of the Employer. Records shall be submitted in duplicate to the Employer every following working day by 09 00 HRS. In such cases. the reinforcement has to be placed. from the main pile and thus obtain sound and uniform concrete.5 Drilling Operation Where required.6. Concreting of each pile shall be a continuous operation and no (cold) joints shall be permitted. Installation procedures shall be such that adjacent piles shall not heave or move laterally.6. The continuous flow of concrete shall be ensured by using pumps or other suitable means to be approved by the Employer. The heads of concrete piles shall be incorporated with in-situ concrete pile caps.4 Execution of Work Generally.6. The Bidder/Contractor shall submit to the Employer before start of piling works. except in some cases/piles. Other methods of casing removal shall not be permitted. and the pile has to be cast. as well as references concerning previously completed piling work. length of permanent casing and details of any obstructions encountered. likewise during drilling above the ground-water table.3 Reinforcement Only deformed high tensile steel shall be applied. Casing shall extend to a sufficient depth below the stiff/solid strata to adequately seal off the unstable soil material. 20. cast-in-situ (bored) piles with temporary casing method as per DIN EN 1536. temporary casing pipes shall penetrate ahead of the removal of soil. Spacers to be used shall be of the concrete type only. The hydrostatic head pressure shall be at least 1. providing a concrete cover of 75 mm. location.24. detailed installation procedures test procedures. All installation procedures shall be subject to the Employer 's approval. In the vicinity of underground water.2. length of temporary casing. or as directed by the Employer. the Employer may approve the rotation method for casing removal. Pouring concrete into pile shall only be stopped once complete removal of slush and other foreign matter has been ensured. piles shall not vary more than one (1) percent from the perpendicular. Each pile shall be installed to the correct lengths as shown on the drawings or when the pile reaches the socket in the recommended bearing strata. date driven.24. BS 2004 and BS 8004 will be permitted for execution.Section 6 .282 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . 20.

0 m below finished ground surface. Type tests (preliminary pile tests) are to be loaded to either 250% of the anticipated design load. the first reaching from 0% to 100%.6. casing will be extended to become 3.7 Basics for Test Piles The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out successful foundation load tests in order to prove the suitability of the pile foundation selected.2. with a minimum of 2 tests for each pile type. permanent casings shall be provided.2. Other (working) piles shall not be installed until the load tests have been conducted and the results evaluated. 20.6 Permanent Casings For soils in areas classified as category 5 according to BRE Digest 363. Load steps shall normally not exceed 25% of the design load. The permanent casing length shall be 2. The pile shall be cut off at the specified level and the concrete surface must be horizontal. static loading. which he intends to use for execution of all the piles.24. polythene sheet wrapping or equivalent means to prevent damages to the epoxy coating of the reinforcement when trimming the pile heads.0 m below ground surface.Section 6 .1 Loading Details for Pile Tests The Bidder/Contractor shall execute the test piles using the same equipment. Type test piles shall not be utilised within the works and shall be treated in such a way that they do not obstruct the further works.2.6. Part 1.to 250% of the design load.5 m below the lowest water level anticipated. the first reaching from 0% to 100% and the second . 20.283 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . This procedure shall be applicable for areas not affected by tidal effects.24. The piles shall be considered as acceptable in case the obtained load-settlement/heave. 20.6. For routine tests (working pile tests) a loading to 150% of the design load is required. b) Piling Foundation Routine Test (Working Pile Test) The Bidder/Contractor shall perform routine tests on at least 2% of the working piles. DIN 4014 and DIN 4026 as well as ISSMFE recommendation on "Axial pile loading tests".8 20. Should the ground water table be at 2.24. At least two load cycles have to be made during type testing.after off-loading to 150% of the design load. Loads shall be applied in the direction of the resultant force acting on the pile. plane and free from all loose aggregate. At least two load cycles have to be carried out. Load steps shall be worked out in line with the latest guide lines of the ICTAD. casings shall project 0.5 m below ground level.diagrams do not indicate movements beyond permissible limits as per Bidding Documents or the relevant Standards. The results of the tests shall be submitted in a format for approval by the Employer. The following types of tests are to be considered: a) Piling Type Tests (Preliminary Pile Test) Prior to piling commencement the Bidder/Contractor shall install two test piles of each type of pile proposed.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification and straighten as shown on the Drawings or as directed. The test piles should be of the same length and same type as the piles proposed for the project. or to the ultimate bearing load. For areas affected by tidal effects.2.24. The top portion of the pile reinforcement shall be protected with PVC pipes.6.after off-loading .8. and the second . whereby following load steps/cycles shall normally be applied: Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The loading tests of piles shall be in accordance with the procedure outlined in DIN 1054.

25 S ≤ 0.25 S ≤ 0. 2'. before the application of the new load increment. the following information:       Layout of test equipment and description Pile identification.Section 6 . whichever occurs first.25 S ≤ 0. 4'.25 S ≤ 0.25 S ≤ 0. diameter and length Sketch of soil conditions and ground water location Complete records of level. On every increment. 15'.2 Test Reports Reports on pile testing shall be submitted to the Employer and shall contain. 20. settlements shall be recorded after 30".25 S ≤ 0.25 S ≤ 0.25 OFF LOADING OFF LOADING S ≤ 0.25 OFF LOADING OFF LOADING OFF LOADING OFF LOADING TIME SETTLEMENT CONDITION Vertical movements have to be measured by means of at least three dial gauges. 1h.284 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .25 S ≤ 0.24. among others.25 mm within that hour. with a precision of 1/100 mm. horizontal movements have to be measured by two dial gauges only. 8'.25 S ≤ 0. preferably in tabulation Graphs of load and settlement/heave versus time Graphs of settlement/heave versus load Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification Table of Test Conditions OAD (%) 0 25 50 75 100 50 0 0 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 200 150 100 50 0 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 15 min 15 min 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 24 hr 15 min 15 min 15 min 15 min 1 hr S ≤ 0.6.25 S ≤ 0. or until 2 hours have elapsed.8. Movement of the pile head shall be less than 0. load cell and dial gauge readings against date and time throughout the test. 30'.2.

A record of the driving of all piles shall be kept by the Bidder/Contractor. The settlement of Working Pile shall satisfy the following two conditions: • • Total settlement shall not exceed 12mm. and the main reinforcement bent to form an anchorage into the concrete of the pile cap. and Residual settlement shall not exceed 6mm after final test load had been applied. Driving of each pile shall be continuous without intermission until the pile has been driven to refusal or to total penetration for the last ten blows not exceeding the design penetration unless otherwise approved by the Employer. which will hold the pile firmly in position and in axial alignment with the hammer. the pile shows higher settlement. penetration for driving stages and the results of any tests. length. two more piles shall be selected and tested near the failed location. Pile driving will not be allowed before the Employer receives from the Bidder/Contractor the following reports and calculations for approval: • • • Calculation of refusal Proposal for the minimum penetrated depth of the piles through the ground Complete information about the driving and the hammers to be used. damaged or imperfect in any way shall be removed and discarded. pile layout of the concerned area/ building shall be revised.6. If any driven pile shall have been raised by the subsequent driving of any adjacent pile or by any cause. In case. the Bidder/Contractor must investigate the matter and accordingly. Any piles that are split. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. pile must be redesigned. Care must be taken in breaking out concrete that no damage is done to the lower section Driven Cast-In-Situ Piles Driven Cast-In -Situ Piles are created by driving a temporary tubular steel casing. the Bidder/Contractor must revise the pile layout at that location and in addition. safe design load shall be scaled down and accordingly. In case. the additional tests also do not show satisfactory results. closed by a removable steel shoe at its bottom end. and the pile layout shall be revised with the modified pile capacity. the pile shows higher settlement.9.6. the raised pile shall be re-driven to its original penetration and resistance. Driving shall be done with fixed leads. Piles shall not be driven until the excavation has been completed to the grade required for footings or pile caps. th Evaluation/Conclusion The settlement of preliminary piles shall not exceed 1/10 of the pile diameter after final test load is applied. 20. location. After driving. the binders removed. Debris from pile cut-offs and damaged piles shall not be buried in required fill under slabs at grade or in required embankments. and a signed copy submitted to the Employer daily. The Bidder/Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of location of each pile and the grade of the off-cut. Driving tolerances shall not be more than one per cent out of plump and not more than 5 cm out of place.24. warped. Alternatively. The records shall show the pile type. Piles shall be driven in the exact locations shown on the drawings to be submitted by the Bidder/Contractor and approved by the Employer or as may be directed by the Employer. to the required depth into the ground. Reinforcing and concreting for the pile shall be done in line with the guidelines for cast in situ bored piles and the casing shall eventually be withdrawn. but shall be disposed by the Bidder/Contractor off the Site of the work.Section 6 . the concrete heads of the piles are to be stripped off.9 20.1 Driving of Piles Pre-Cast Driven Piles Driven piles shall be executed as per DIN 4026. the Bidder/Contractor may scale down the safe design load. The soil is thus both displaced and compacted and the void for the pile created.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification   Remarks concerning any unusual occurrences during the loading of the pile Test reports on integrity testing of piles shall include clear sample diagrams of acceptable signals for comparison purpose.2. The refusal shall be with HILEY formula or any other dynamic formula subject to the approval of the Employer. to the elevation required. In case. as well as sample graphs indicating defects or doubts on the integrity of the pile. buckled.285 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .2.24.

20. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The permissible uplift of any pile due to the driving of other piles shall be limited to 3 mm. the reinforcement cage shall be installed. etc.6 Extraction of casing Temporary casings shall be extracted while the concrete within them remains sufficiently workable to ensure that the concrete is not lifted.6.9. Dynamic evaluation and analysis shall be provided where requested by the Employer.4 Set Set limits shall be defined based on the working load. After unavoidable interruptions during driving. When the casing is being extracted.24.9.9.5 Driving sequence and risen piles The sequence of pile driving shall minimise any possible detrimental effect on other piles in the vicinity.2. Sufficient information shall be provided on the efficiency and energy of the driving equipment. i.6.24.9. Concreting shall be facilitated by pump. Reinforcement details shall be as for bored cast in situ piles.2. Concrete shall be topped up as necessary while the casing is extracted until the required head of concrete to complete the pile in a sound and proper manner has been provided. The shoe shall provide a watertight joint with the casing during driving. which have recently been cast and thus still contain un-set concrete. If any pile has been displaced or indicates a higher than permissible uplift.24. No concrete is to be placed once the bottom of the casing has been lifted above the top of the concrete. Driving of each casing shall be a continuous.9. exposed parts of the casing shall not be damaged or deformed and the dolly.6. 20.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. flexible hose. If the design capacity cannot be reached. the achieved penetration during driving and the temporary compression after completion of driving shall be measured and recorded for each pile.286 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . as well as the "Set".2 Material Details Casings shall be free from distortion and shall be strong enough to be driven without damage.Section 6 .e. Once the casing has been driven to the design depth. Vibrating casing extractors must only be used if their application has been accepted in the method statement. tremie-pipe or by bucket. shall be in good condition. Shoes to be used (and later remaining in the ground) shall be made from sufficiently strong and durable material.2.24.6. a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained within the casing to ensure that pressure from external water or soil is exceeded and that the pile is neither reduced in section nor contaminated. not interrupted operation.2. Weight and fall of the hammer/ram and the number of blows for each 25 mm of penetration shall be recorded. factor of safety soil condition and driving equipment. 20. The set shall be recorded either as the number of blows resulting in a penetration of 25 mm or the penetration in millimetres achieved by imposing 10 blows.. it has to be ensured that the casing is finally driven to the specified design depth and driving resistance. the Bidder/Contractor shall propose remedial actions or design adjustments accordingly.3 Driving of Casings Casings shall be driven at adequate spacing to prevent damages to piles. During measurement of the "set". 20. Hammer blows shall only be applied along the line of the pile axis and the impact surface shall be perpendicular to the pile axis.24. Set. Any change in pile lengths shall immediately be brought to the Employer attention. helmet.2. Concrete quality and consistency shall be provided in line with guidelines for cast in situ piles. The length of driven piles shall be at least as per the design schedule. load tests have to prove the design capacity of such piles. as per the approved method statement. Regular measurements (at least in weekly intervals) shall ensure that no adjacent piles have been effected detrimentally during piling work.6.

For every building. 20. vent pipes railings. The layout of the earth wires shall be such that generally.1 Copper Copper and copper alloys shall comply with the British Standards and approved standard relevant to the form and use for which the material is intended.287 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .1 Lightning Protection for Buildings A complete lightning protection system for the buildings shall be constructed in compliance with BS 6651. gutters.2mm thick as protection Tinned copper weld or stainless steel 3000x30mm diameter Potential equalizing bars: tinned copper 500x50x5mm All support and connections shall be made of best suitable materials.24. shall be provided to protect the equipment from direct lightning strikes. screwed or welded) to suit the local climatic conditions. Each down conductor shall. 20.9.3.3. flying stays and additional masts to ensure clearance of not less than 9144 mm (30 ft. Air terminations: Earth terminations: against corrosion Ground rods: Tinned copper 8mm diameter Copper 8mm diameter with lead coating minimum 1. equipment‘s to be protected lie within areas 0 bounded by lines drawn from the earth wire at 30 to the vertical in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the earth wire. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.3. Copper components shall be placed so that neither in no case shall they come in direct contact with aluminium nor shall it be possible for water or consideration to pass off copper on to aluminium. Connections shall be provided for the terminations of the earth wires of the overhead lines including bimetal connectors where necessary.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. The screens shall be of stranded hard drawn copper wires of not less than 35sq. Down conductors shall be distributed around the outside walls of the building with a maximum distance of 20m and all main metal parts near the down conductors shall be connected there to. or stranded galvanised steel wires of not less than 7/3. fittings and anchors shall be provided under this Contract including. No part of the roofs shall be further away than 10m from the nearest horizontal protective conductor. one ring of ground conductors shall be installed and interconnected. All connections and joints shall be installed mechanically and electrically effective (clamped.) over roadways for breaker or transformer removal. and after installation of the working piles.mm total cross section. at least.7 Basics for Pile Testing after Driving The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out successful foundation load tests in order to prove the suitability of the pile foundation selected as detailed for bored piles above.6. the integrity of all driven piles (100%) is to be checked successfully by means of sonic pile testing equipment. Salient points of the structure such as air conditioning installations.2. shall be connected to the network.Section 6 . if required.2. The necessary stays. The results of the tests shall be submitted for approval by the Employer. In addition. pin type joints between clamps and supports. and steel constructions etc. Earth wires shall be held in clamps with free.3 LIGHTNING PROTECTION Approved earthed screens.5mm cross section and connected to provide low impedance paths to earth. An air termination network shall be installed on the surfaces of the roofs. Connections shall be made of copper strip of 30mm x 5mm cross-section between the overhead earthed screen wire and the main earthling system at each support. 20. be provided with test joints in such positions that periodic testing is easily possible. 20.2 Materials.

4. Fittings shall be securely fixed in an approved manner. heavy-duty quality. Items not covered in this specification shall be referred to the relevant ICTAD specification. or equivalent standard.4. materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with approved standards and Codes of Practice.4. Each basin and sink is to be provided with water. Elsewhere the pipes and ducts shall be laid on and surrounded with approved granular material.4. shall be plugged and screwed to the walls. similar PVC fittings..3 Sanitary Fittings Wash hand basins shall be supported on cantilever brackets cut and pinned to the walls or screwed to 30mm timber chambered backboards.288 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . Taps and all visible metal fittings shall be chromium plated. space and ladder shall be provided for maintenance of overhead tank. Overflow pipes shall be taken from the tops of cisterns and set to discharge in a prominent position. All fittings shall be individually isolated with a stopcock in the water supply pipe.0 cubic meters. They shall be provided with 35mm bottle traps with brass cleaning eye and lining soldered on.1 Water supply system The Contractor will be responsible for the provision and installation of a water supply serving the buildings.4 Waste Water Sewerage System 20. in which a pressure equal to 150 mm of water is to be applied for a period of five minutes without dropping below 125mm head.4. Overflow pipes from WC cisterns shall be 20 mm bore. basin etc. On completion of the works. They shall be secured to the structure. sink. Drinking fountain outlets shall be clearly labelled. all sanitary fittings shall be left in a clean and proper condition. Plastic piping and fittings shall be permitted where adequately protected or where risk of impact is small. 20.4 WATER SUPPLY & DRAINAGE SYSTEM 20. Concrete beds and casings to drain pipes under roads shall be of week concrete and of 150mm minimum thickness. Pipes to wash hand basins and WC cisterns shall be 15 mm bore and supply pipes to header tanks 25 mm bore. 20.2 Water Pipes PVC pipes shall generally be used throughout of an approved type. which shall be plugged and screwed to the walls.1 Drain Pipes 3 Drainpipes shall be PVC pipes and fittings of approved manufacture and shall be jointed with sleeves or sockets.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. which. Any defects revealed shall be made good at the Contractor‘s expense. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. A. Cistern supporting brackets shall be screwed to 30mm timber chambered backboards.4. Every cistern. PVC pipes provided should be black unplasticised PVC complying with BS 4660 or 5481. Glazed ware shall be of best quality type and manufacturer shall be approved by the Employer. An overhead tank with a capacity of 2. or alternatively. shall be provided with a stopcock in the supply pipe adjacent to the fittings. All drainage design. shaded from direct sunlight shall be provided. Water Supply and drainage system and the distribution network shall be designed by a qualified person and relevant drawings shall be submitted to the approval of the Employer The Contractor shall provide public water service An underground tank (2 m ) with proper insect tight venting & automatically controlled pump main stopcock shall be constructed to raise the water to a shaded roof tank Every tank or cistern shall be provided with a stopcock in the supply pipe adjacent to the fitting. 20. drains shall be subjected to an air test. Pipe to header tank shall not be less than 25 mm bore and pipes to wash basins and WCs shall be not less than 15 more bore.Section 6 . After completion.

4.4 20. The effluent from the tank shall discharge.2 Manholes Manholes shall be generally in accordance with BS EN 752. where a soak away will not function efficiently.4. (v) (vi) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. to a soak away pit or either through evapour-transpiration beds or up flow filter. Galvanised malleable cast iron step irons are to be provided and built in as work proceeds. maintenance cost and volume of sludge produced by the plant should be as low as possible. The noise levels are required to be maintained as follows during the construction stage and operational stage.4. 20. depending on the type of subsoil. inspection covers. a soak away pit shall be covered by a concrete slab. The design shall be to recognised standards such as BS 6297 and approved by the Employer. debris. etc.4. 20.4. to ensure that every length can be rodded effectively in the event of a blockage.1 Sewerage Treatment Plant General It is required to treat the Black & Grey water from toilets and waste water from NSCC building to CEA Standards. (i) Design. area with non-vehicular access to be medium duty. maximum BOD & COD.289 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . (a) At boundary of the land during the construction stage – at or below 60 dB(A) during the day (between 0600hrs to 1800hrs) and at or below 50dB(A) during night (between 1800hrs to 0600hrs). Effluent from the treatment plant shall be discharged to the nearby Ela with the limits to comply with accepted standards. All drains shall be kept clear from earth. shall be constructed in an agreed position.3 Septic Tank & soakage pit The septic tank. for effluent disposal from the tank. with access through a manhole cover.4. superfluous cement and other obstructions during and after lying and shall be provided with eyes. A grease trap will be provided (by others) for the kitchen waste before discharging in to the collection system. either evapour-transpiration beds or uniflow filters shall be provided. The tank shall have separate fresh air inlet and outlet pipes and be provided with access openings. (ii) (iii) (iv) Running cost.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20.Section 6 . Treatment Plant shall be designed to suit the average. In impermeable type soil. Maximum limits of standard of effluent discharge shall be complied with the standards specified by the ―National Environmental Protection Act of 1985 as amended by Act of 1988‖. The system should be such that the number of electrical pumps and other electrical equipment used should be a minimum to reduce power cost. Manhole covers shall comply with BS EN 124 and in roadways or heavily loaded areas shall be heavy duty. Supply and Install a suitable compact treatment plant for the treatment of the above Influent. Great care shall be exercised in setting out and determining the level of the drains.4.4. The proposed system should be able to operate on both automatic & manual modes. where main drainage is not available. The system shall be properly ventilated by continuing the soil pipe above the highest branch upwards above roof level. All drains shall be laid in straight lines and regular gradients as described.4.

Sizing of pumps with their characteristic curves indicating how the pumps were selected. for each tank. The details of previous experience of similar nature and testimonials from the respective Employers regarding their current performances. The application for such Licence shall required to be submitted to the relevant Authority one month prior to commencement of the operation of the industry. Attached relevant catalogues. labour cost of removal and disposal of sludge outside the premises at suitable location and any other incidental expenses. velocity etc.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification (b) At boundary of the Premises during the operational stage – at or below 55 dB(A) during the day (between 0600hrs to 1800hrs) and at or below 45dB(A) during night (between 1800hrs to 0600hrs). The Employer shall bear the cost of electricity. 47 of 1980 and its amendments. (vii) An Environmental Protection Licence shall require to be obtained for the proposed system to carry out operation in accordance with section 23(A) of the National Environmental Act No. The yearly cost shall include the cost of chemicals. Give length. Attach relevant catalogues. repairs and spare parts. breadth and height. If aerators are used. the oxygenation capacity of the aerators and how they were selected should be indicated. The Bidder shall indicate the modes of failure which are likely to take place under the environment in which the proposed works will perform including the performance under extreme events and how they have been taken into consideration in the design. The bidder shall furnish the yearly cost of operation and maintenance of the plant and monitoring of plant performance for a period of 05 years after the free operation and maintenance period of one year. and water and provide accommodation to the Contractor‘s operator. The bidder shall also furnish with the bid any other terms and condition applicable for the operation and maintenance of the plant for 5 years which shall be compatible with the requirement given above. (b) (c) (d) (e) (g) (h) Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B.Section 6 . (f) Method of Sludge disposal and this process shall require to be looked after by the people who will undertake the maintenance & operation. (viii) The following details should be submitted along with the proposal (a) Design Assumptions and sufficient hydraulic calculations to demonstrate how the tank sizing was done.290 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope . detention time. Annual estimated running cost including the breakdown of such cost. In order to overcome an accidental failures additional equipment necessary for the continuously operation of the treatment plant should be kept as spare.

Open ditch for storm water 1/200 Other drainage systems 1/400 The minimum velocity shall exceed 0. The details and grading of the aggregate and the binder contents shall be submitted to the Employer for approval. In detailing the layout of the roads and parking areas. 20. 20. spares and other materials and equipment. rubbish.4. normally provided for this nature of work.2 The bidder shall give due consideration in pricing that the Client may at his discretion delete the scope of work for 5 years operation and maintenance work before or after the award of the Contract.1 Surface water drainage system General Embankments and cuttings shall have drainage facilities at their top or bottom.4. and surfaced with Macadam or concrete to ensure that the finished road is suitable for the maximum foreseeable imposed loads expected from vehicles transporting the various items of plant and electrical equipment. properly compacted with appropriate rollers.5 20. The formation level shall be formed with uniform cross-falls of about 1 in 300 in the same direction as the natural drainage path of the surrounding Area Provision shall be made for the disposal of surface water from roads.291 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope .4. It is to be ensured by the contractor that the surface water discharge does not cause any damage to the properties through which such water is discharge up to natural water courses as approved.4.4.4. special attention must be given to the travelling of vehicles delivering plant. vegetable or other injurious matter. Broken stones and aggregates shall consist of hard crushed natural stone or gravel of approved sizes.1 General The Contractor shall ensure that the roads are levelled graded.4.4. The system may be discharged to natural watercourses or to soak ways as approved.5 CONSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE OF ROADS 20. 20.4.3 Guarantee A minimum five years guarantee period for the equipment and maintenance of effluent quality from the plant to the required standard (after commissioning of the plant) is required. Manholes shall be provided at each place where changes in direction take place and at not greater than 80 m canters. stores. It shall be free from dust.2 Gradient Drains shall have the following minimum gradient. Surface water from roofs of buildings shall be drained to down pipes connected with the site drainage system.75 m/sec. Bituminous Wearing courses shall be suitable for the extreme soil condition in the area and shall comply with an authoritative and approved standard appropriate to the locality of the work.2. 20.Section 6 .4. 20. Sealing grit will be applied as required.5.4.5.5. wood. The number of runs and out falls and pipe sizing must be sufficient to cope with the severest precipitation. with a factor of safety of 1. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. The sectional shapes have to be determined by the water carrying requirements and must have the most favourable hydraulic qualities so as to remove the drain water in a proper manner without settlements. A surface water drainage system covering the switchyard shall be installed.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20. Material for the hard-core shall consist of natural stone broken to pass a 100-mm ring.4.4 Tests on Completion The selected Contractor shall carryout all the required tests as directed by the Employer to obtain the approval of the relevant authorities before handing over of the plant to the client.

5.5.2 Sub-Base After the formation has been properly made. All the cable trenches crossings canal crossings road side constructions shall be considered. to define the limits for vehicular access. Trench covers shall comply with the relevant standard as approved. for installation and subsequent maintenance.5 to 1. these shall be designed for the heavy wheel loads expected on them and shall be reinforced with mesh fabric or mild steel bars as necessary.3 Approach road The contractor shall construct or upgrade the approach to site that is the road from the main road to the gate of the site to allow heavy vehicles to site.2. 20. compacted and surfaced.5. sewers. bridges retaining walls) shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the guide lines of the road development authority. 20.2 Access road and structures Access roads are the roads within the switchyard area.5. Rolling shall be carried out with a 4 to 7 ton power driven roller unless otherwise ordered or permitted by the Employer. rolled and approved by the Employer.5.3.1 Structures for approach roads.Section 6 . Trench covers shall be a minimum of 50 mm thick and provided with handles or holes for lifting purposes. 20. cable ducts and other necessary work below road formation level shall be completed. They shall be reinforced to the approval of the Employer. which shall be parallel to the finished surface of the road or path. Concrete paving slabs shall comply with a relevant approved standard. Access roads shall be either concrete or bituminous wearing surface roads.5.2.5.5 lit/m liquid bitumen shall be sprayed on in accordance with the best practice fitting to the locality of the work. The Contractor‘s proposed site layouts shall allow for 5 m wide vehicular access to the control building and electrical equipment.2. Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Procurement of Plant Page 6B. Where concrete covers are required for trenches crossing roads.Employer‘s Requirements Technical Specification 20.4 Bituminous Surface Two layer of bituminous surfacing of 75 mm overall thickness shall be laid in accordance with the approved standard. The formation shall be rolled to an even and uniform surface. gravel or rock or mixtures thereof shall be laid in accordance with standards to give